You are on page 1of 378

# CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

1 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering ( WebCampus/Blackboard )

Instructor: Jeffery J. Jensen, PE - jefferyjjensen@gmail.com
Summer Term 2011: MoTuThFr 6:30pm-8:30pm, July 11 - Aug 13, 2011

Class
Number

Topics

Lecture
Homework

Virtural Campus

GIS Tutorial
Workbook

Course Syllabus

HW01

Google Earth - create and import shapefiles points, polygons, lines and image overlays
PLSS Initial Points and Meridians

HW02

## ESRI ArcGIS - ArcMap Introduction

ArcMap Tools Toolbar: Navigation Buttons, Selection Buttons, Query Buttons - Identify and Find Tool, Go
To XY, Measure Tool, Hyperlink Tool, HTML Pop-up Tool, Create Viewer Tool

HW03

Learning ArcGIS
Desktop Module 1
Topics

GTW01

## ArcMap Window Menu: Command Line

Spatial Bookmarks, Map Tips, Exploring ArcMap, Relative Path Names, Exploring ArcCatalog, Create
Vicinity Map, ArcMap Layers/Themes and Layer Files Labeling Features and Annotation

HW04

Learning ArcGIS
Desktop Module 2
Topics

GTW02

## Symbolizing Features and Thematic Maps Layer Files, Visible Scale,

Templates, Guidelines, Layout Map Elements, Reports, Graphs, ArcMap Plotting, Templates, PDF, Reports

HW05

Learning ArcGIS
Desktop Module 3
Topics

GTW03

Microsoft Office Live - Create a web page Building a Web Page - using Google Sites

HW06

Learning ArcGIS
Desktop Module 4
Topics

GTW04

## ArcMap Outputs: Export to PDF, Image, GeoTIFF

Raster Images, Raster Catalogs

HW07

Learning ArcGIS
Desktop Module 5
Topics

GTW05

## Online Geographic Information: ArcGIS Online, WMS Servers, ArcIMS Servers

Bing Maps: export GeoTIFF images
Projecting data in ArcMap and Raster Projections
Autodesk Civil 3D - import GIS data

HW08

Learning ArcGIS
Desktop Module 6
Topics

GTW06

Selection/Query Data - Select Features by Attribute, Select Features by Location, Select Features by
Graphics
Joins and Relates
Spatial Joins

HW09

10

## Geodatabases, 3D Points from comma-delimited files .csv

Google Earth 3D KML and XY Event Files
Annotation Layers, Metadata, Attribute Data Databases, Reports, ArcCatalog CAD files, WMS Servers,
Census Data, Vector Data Formats, Annotation Layers, Creating Points from XY Event Files CAD Files,
Projections, Metadata ArcMap Editing, Creating Features and Digitizing Spatial Data Processing
Querying Data
Geoprocessing in ArcGIS
Clip Features, Dissolve Features, Append Layers, Union Layers, Buffer

HW10

Learning ArcGIS
Desktop Module 7
Topics

GTW08

11

HW11

Learning ArcGIS
Desktop Module 8
Topics

GTW09

12

## Geoprocessing and Application - Rainfall

Introduction Precipitation Analysis - Home

HW12

Map Projections
Module 1 Topics

GTW10

13

ModelBuilder

HW13

Map Projections
Module 2 Topics

GTW11

GTW07

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

2 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

14

## Network Analyst Extension

Network Analyst Extension - Online
NAVTEQ MapTP
Routing Services Vehicles to Smith's Stores Smith's Food and Drug Store Locations

HW14

Map Projections
Module 3 Topics

15

Network Analyst
Using Network Dataset in ArcMap to find the Shortest Path
Network Analyst Extension
Network Analyst Extension - Online
Network Analyst and Closest Facility
Find Optimal Order of Stops in a Route
Smith's Food and Drug Store Locations (shapefiles SmithsLocSPCS.zip)

HW15

Map Projections
Module 4 Topics

16

## ArcGIS Spatial Analyst Extension

Elevation Contours
Mount Charleston elevation is 11,916 feet (3632 meters)

HW16

Map Projections
Module 5 Topics

17

HW17

Map Projections
Module 6 Topics

18

## ArcGIS 3D Analyst Extension

ned10m36114g6.tif
ned10m36114g6.rrd
ned10m36114g6.aux
Review

19

N
U

## Calendar of Lecture Topics, Guest Speakers and Assignments

Week 1
Class 1
Lecture Topics:
Introduction of Course Syllabus:
Instructor Biography, Mission Statement and Program Outcomes, Learning Objectives, Software, Textbook, Class Roster and Email, Computer Lab,
Tutoring, Grading, Networking and Contacts, Lecture Homework, ESRI Virtual Campus, ArcGIS Desktop Tutorials, Student Portfolio Term Project, Term
Project Titles, Term Project Topics, Extra Credit, Final Exam, GIS Tutorial Workbook, Quizes, Conferences Networking, Guest Speakers, Downloadable GIS
data, and Topic List
Create a Simple Web Page
Using UNLV account
Assignments
Lecture Homework #1, ESRI Virtual Campus Homework: none, GIS Tutorial Workbook Homework: none
Week 1
Class 2
Lecture Topics:
Install - Google Earth Pro Software Version 5
Search Panel - Fly To, Find Businesses and Directions Tabs
Status Bar
Layers Panel
Places Panel
Import Shapefiles
Import GeoTIFF images
Overview Map
WMS Server
Create points, polygons and lines
Export image
ArcMap - ArcToolbox: Export to KML
GISMO's street centerline
(C:\gisdata\crscl\shapefil\sclmajor_l.shp) sclmajor_l.zip
(C:\gisdata\crscl\shapefil\sclcity_p.shp) sclcity_p.zip
(C:\gisdata\crimage\s08-5\d162\s0816222.tif and .tfw) s0816222.zip (Note Google Earth cannot project images from Stateplane Coordinates using NAD83 to
WGS84, so you can view the image in Google Earth, just won't be referenced correctly with the map)
CCDS
(C:\gisdata\crds\shapefil\offsites_x.shp) offstdy.zip
Assignments
Lecture Homework #2, ESRI Virtual Campus Homework: none, GIS Tutorial Workbook Homework: none
Week 3
Class 3
Lecture Topics:

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

3 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## ArcMap Tools Toolbar

Selection Buttons
Query Buttons - Identify and Find Tool
Go To XY
Measure Tool
HTML Pop-up Tool
Create Viewer Tool
Command Line
ArcMap Attribute Table
Spatial Bookmarks
ArcMap Map Tips
Exploring ArcMap
Relative Path Names
Exploring ArcCatalog
Create Vicinity Map
ArcMap Layers/Themes and Layer Files
Review transfering data files from UNLV to home/work
Township-Range-Section layer (clarktrs_p feature class) c:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\Source\IndexGrids.mdb
Assessor Parcel Coverage - C:\gisdata\libpcl\source\d162\d16222\parcel
Assessor Geodatabase - c:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\Source\Parcel.mdb
Street Centerline Geodatabase - c:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\Source\StreetCenterline.mdb using sclmajor_l and sclcity_p feature classes (download from UNLV or Clark
County)
Assignments
Lecture Homework #3, ESRI Virtual Campus Homework: Module 1 Topics, GIS Tutorial Workbook Homework 1
Week 4
Class 4
Lecture Topics:
ESRI ArcMap
ArcMap Map Documents.mxd
Layout Templates (.mxt)
Layout Guidelines
Layout Map Elements
ArcMap Graphics
Exporting Maps to PDF - watch the ESRI video
ArcMap Layouts
Logos and Pictures
Layout Graphs
Edit features in ArcMap using the editor toolbar - Create polygon of UNLV TBE
Convert Graphics to Shapefile
GIS Tutorial Workbook - Tutorial 4 Topics
Definition Query
Joining and relating tables
Add Fields to an existing table
Primary Key
Database Relationships
Relate Tables
Join Tables
Spatial Joins
Example Spatial Join: Assign closest bus stop to each parcel
Reports
UNLV Images - UNLV Logo ( gif with transparent background)
District Library -> Master Plans -> Las Vegas Valley -> 2008 -> Regional Flood Control Master Plan for the Las Vegas Valley 2008 (download from UNLV
LasVegasValley2008MasterPlanUpdate-VolumeI.pdf and LasVegasValley2008MasterPlanUpdate-VolumeII.pdf)
RTC Bus Stops (C:\gisdata\crrtc\shapefil\stops.shp)
Assessor Parcels (C:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\source\parcel.mdb - parcel_p polygon feature class)
Assessor AOEXTRACT table (C:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\source\parcel.mdb - aoextract table)
Assignments:
Lecture Homework #7, ESRI Virtual Campus Homework: Module 4 Topics, GIS Tutorial Workbook Homework 4
Week 5
Class 5
Lecture Topics:
GIS Tutorial Workbook - Tutorial 2
Symbolizing Features

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

4 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## ArcMap Layer Files (.lyr)

ArcMap - Visible Scale
ArcMap - Map Tips
ArcMap Tools Toolbar - Hyperlink tool
Exporting Data
Export to KML
streetcenterline.mdb geodatabase
Clark County Water Reclamation District sewer lines (C:\gisdata\crsand\shapefil\swsys_l.shp)
Clark County Comprehensive Planning
Spring Valley Planned Land Use pdf map and metadata
Clark County OpenWeb Info Mapper - View Type Selector: CC Planned Landuse
Spring Valley Layer File (C:\gisdata\crcomp\carto\PLU-Spring-Valley.lyr)
Spring Valley Shapefile (C:\gisdata\crcomp\shapefil\spvplu_p.shp)
Assignments
Lecture Homework #5, ESRI Virtual Campus Homework: Module 2 Topics, GIS Tutorial Workbook Homework 2
Week 6
Class 6
Lecture Topics:
GIS Tutorial Workbook for ArcView 9, 3rd Edition - Tutorial 4: Geodatabases
Geodatabases and Tables
ArcCatalog
ArcGIS supported spatial files
Create random x,y,z file using Excel
Create x,y,z features in ArcCatalog
lower left min Lat(Y)/Long(X): 36d12'00" 115d12'00"
upper right max Lat(Y)/Long(X): 36d16'00" 115d07'00"
lower left UTM: zone 11, s 660000m e 4000000m
upper right UTM: zone 11, s 670000m e 4016000m
Notes to convert DD into DMS. DD = Degrees + (minutes/60) + (seconds/3600)
GIS Servers - ArcIMS Server
View ArcIMS Server in ArcMap
ArcIMS Websites: Clark County Regional Flood Control District - flowstone.ccrfcd.org for their FloodView Advance Program http://breccia.ccrfcd.org
City of Las Vegas - http://major.lasvegasnevada.gov
City of Henderson - http://citymaps.cityofhenderson.com
WMS Server
Creating Points
Benchmarks: City of North Las Vegas, Boulder City - Survey, Clark County - Survey, City of Las Vegas - Survey, City of Henderson - Survey, City of
Mesquite - Survey
Measure Tool - Ruler
Export, Save and Merge Imported Shapefiles to KML/KMZ
Tables Window
Grids and Graticules
Google Web Elements - Maps Element
Create a Simple Web Page - Using Google Sites
How do I embed Google Earth in my Web Page
How do I view borders, terrain, 3d buildings and roads in Google Earth API
Aerial Photo of UNLV campus (C:\gisdata\crimage\s08-5\d162\s0816222.tif)
ClarkTRS layer (C:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\Source\IndexGrids.mdb - clarktrs polygon feature class)
Assignments
Lecture Homework #6, ESRI Virtual Campus Homework: Module 3 Topics, GIS Tutorial Workbook Homework 3
Week 7
Class 7
Week 8
Class 8
Lecture Topics:
ArcMap Editing
Snapping Environment
Snap Tips
Attribute Domains
Deleting Features
Move Features
Copy sketchs from one feature to another
ArcGIS Desktop Tutorials
Editing GIS Features Video

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

5 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Keyboard Shortcuts
ArcMap Editing Topologies
Map Topologies (Shapefiles and non-topology geodatabases)
Geodatabase Topologies (Geodatabase)
Creating Point Layer from x,y values in a table using ArcCatalog
Add x,y coordinate data to ArcMap
Create list of random X,Y,Z points in Excel
City of North Las Vegas benchmark spreadsheet - NVBenchmarks.xls
Assignments
Lecture Homework #8, ESRI Virtual Campus Homework: Module 5 Topics, GIS Tutorial Workbook Homework: none
Week 3
Class 9
Lecture Topics:
FEMA Floodzone data (FEMA_NFHL_v2.3.kmz and Stay_Dry_v2.0.kmz)
Assignments
Lecture Homework - Extra Credit, ESRI Virtual Campus Homework: Module 6 Topics, GIS Tutorial Workbook Homework 5
Week 3
Class 10
Lecture Topics:
ArcMap Georeference Raster Image using a World File
Google Earth - Import GeoTIFF Images
Raster Projection/Transformation
AeroTech - Jean Prison Topo, Control Points and Aerial Photo (JeanPrison.zip). Note the drawing Dtm008-014.dwg also includes a world file
(Dtm008-014.wld) to transform the drawing from local coordinates to stateplane coordinate system. It also includes the Jean aerial photo for Book 217,
Section 13 (S0721713.TIF and tfw).
Assignments
Lecture Homework: none, ESRI Virtual Campus Homework: Module 7 Topics, GIS Tutorial Workbook Homework: none
Week 3
Class 11
Lecture Topics:
Assignments
Lecture Homework: none, ESRI Virtual Campus Homework: Module 8 Topics, GIS Tutorial Workbook Homework 6
Week 3
Class 12
Lecture Topics:
Spatial Analyst
Create a surface from points
National Geodetic Survey (NGS) Datasheets
Earth Gravitational Model (EGM) GIS Data
OUTPUT.DAT
ESRI ASCII raster format
24.000000000000 230.00000000000 0.1666666666667E-01 0.1666666666667E-01 1081 1141 1
Assignments
Lecture Homework #12, ESRI Virtual Campus Homework: any module from any course, GIS Tutorial Workbook Homework: none
Week 4
Class 13
Lecture Topics:
How to create a parcel hyperlink to the recorded Plat or Parcel Map
BLM Land Description Diagrams
landsecdiagr.pdf
Mt. Diablo Baseline and Meridian (M.D.B. & M.)
Background on COGO
Legal Descriptions
Traverse Tool (ArcEditor and ArcInfo only)
Traverse - Closure Report
Adding and Populating COGO Fields in a Feature Class
How to split features in COGO Lines
Label/Annotate COGO Lines
continue discussion on COGO
COGO using Legal Descriptions
Reverse Curves
Cusp of a Curve
Legal Descriptions
Traverse Tool (ArcEditor and ArcInfo only)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

6 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Traverse - Closure Report
Adding and Populating COGO Fields in a Feature Class
How to split features in COGO Lines
Label/Annotate COGO Lines
Clark County Assessor
Parcel Layer (C:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\source\Parcel.mdb)
Clark County Water Reclamation District
legal description Easement20001218-01031.pdf
ClarkTRS layer (C:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\Source\IndexGrids.mdb - clarktrs polygon feature class)
Assessor Subdivisions: (C:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\Source\pclsubdpgdb - pclsubd polygon feature class)
Assessor Map pdf for 140-05-3 and 140-05-4
Assessor Parcel Subdivision Personal Geodatabase: (L:\Jeffery Jensen\GISdata\CrGeoDb\Source\PclSubd.mdb use the UNLV NetStorage to download
remotely)
ClarkTRS layer (C:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\Source\IndexGrids.mdb - clarktrs polygon feature class)
Sewer Easement
Assessor Map pdf for 140-05-3 and 140-05-4
legal description for Easement19961203-00726.pdf
EAS_4.txt
Clark County Water Reclamation District
legal description Easement20001218-01031.pdf
Download legal description of Alexander Villas Easement19950802-00982.pdf interest in Easement No. 1 only. Example of an easement without an
exhibit.
Assignments
Lecture Homework: none, ESRI Virtual Campus Homework: any module from any course, GIS Tutorial Workbook Homework 7
Week 4
Class 14
Lecture Topics:
Create points interactively by typing in the xy coordinates
Query Data using SQL
Select By Attribute
Select By Location...
Select By Graphics
Dissolving Features
Create Subdivision Map using ArcToolbox Dissolve
Lecture Topics:
Geoprocessing in ArcGIS
Attribute Table - Summary
Assignments
Lecture Homework #14, ESRI Virtual Campus Homework: any module from any course, GIS Tutorial Workbook Homework 14
Week 4
Class 15
Lecture Topics:
Network Analyst Extension
Build Network Dataset in a Geodatabase Feature Dataset
Using Network Dataset in ArcMap to find Shortest Path
Network Analyst and Closest Facility
Network Analyst and NAVTEQ Datasets
How to Trace Vehicle Route Using GPS Data Based on Shortest Path
Street Centerline Geodatabase - c:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\Source\StreetCenterline.mdb using streets_l and sclmajor_l feature classes
Emergency Response Geodatabase - C:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\Source\EmergencyResponse.mdb using the points location of the fire stations
Assignments
Lecture Homework #11, ESRI Virtual Campus Homework: none, GIS Tutorial Workbook: none
Week 4
Class 16
Lecture Topics:
ArcMap Geocoding
Geocoding Concept
Using an Address Location in ArcMap with Find Tool
Interactive Geocoding
Geocoding Applications
Geocoding Service
Batch Geocoding - Shapefile (dbf)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

7 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

ZIP codes
Free Online Geocoding
Reverse Geocoding
Geocoding the Clark County Elections Data
Google Earth - Import .csv files
Geocoding
Excel Spreadsheet of Engineering Companies (CompaniesEngineersDevelopersBonding.xls) and Surveyors (CompaniesSurveyor.xls)
Database of ZIP codes in Clark County, C:\gisdata\crscl\carto (not the carto folder), must use ArcMap to add
Street Centerline Shapefile, C:\gisdata\crscl\shapefil\sclmajor.shp
Assignments
Lecture Homework #12, ESRI Virtual Campus Homework: any module from any course, GIS Tutorial Workbook: none
Week 5
Class 17
Lecture Topics:
3D Analyst Extension
ArcScene basics
Creating a TIN from contours
Changing symbology of files in ArcScene
Draping feature to TIN
Extruding features
Creating a fly through scene and exporting to a video
ArcScene and 3D Analyst Extension
USGS Digital Elevation Model (DEM)
USGS National Elevation Dataset
Options To Clip Raster Images
Raster Projection - NAD83 datum to WGS84
Raster Image Processor (RIP)
USGS DEMs 10 meter, mosaicked for entire Clark County NV utmentire.zip Projection - UTM Zone 11, Units Meters, NAD83 Datum
USGS NED 10 meter DEMs for Clark County NV, downloaded from USDS NRCS data gateway elevation_NED10M_678794_01.zip
USGS Digital Raster Graphic (DRG) USGS-DRG-SEAMLESS-CC.zip
Jeff Jensen Color Ramp ( jjensen.style)
elevation_NED10M_678794_01.zip
C:\Program Files\ArcGIS\Reference Systems\usgs24q.shp (usgs24q.zip)
Assignments
Lecture Homework #13, ESRI Virtual Campus Homework: any module from any course, GIS Tutorial Workbook Homework 9
Week 5
Class 18
Lecture Topics:
Definition Queries
Buffers
Analyzing Spatial Data
Buffer - find all septic tanks within 400 ft of a public sewer
Geoprocessing in ArcGIS
Surfaces using ArcGIS 3D Analyst Extension
Transparency
Symbolizing features and rasters
How to Clip a Surface
Creating a surface from USGS DEMs
How to mosaic surfaces using ArcToolbox
Contours
Background on Elevation Contours
Creating Contours
Symbolize Contours
Sun Angle (altitude) is 45 degrees
Azimuth Angle is 225 degrees
3D Buildings and Building Footprints
USGS National Elevation Dataset (NED) - Digitial Elevation Model (DEM)
USGS Digital Raster Graphic (DRG)
USGS DEM for Clark County: L:\Jeffery Jensen\GISdata\USGS\DEM\ccdemspcszft.zip
Assessor Parcels: c:\gisdata\crgeodb\source\parcel.mdb - parcel_p polygon feature class
Septic Tanks
Southern Nevada Health District - septic tank layer (TBE-B367 and A311 Labs, c:\gisdata\crgen\shapefil\septic_l.shp)
Clark County Water Reclamation District - sewer line layer (TBE-B367 and A311 Labs, C:\GISdata\crsand\shapefil\swsys_l.shp)
GC Wallace project with Clark County Air Quality on Septic Tank Conversion (ISDSWorkingReport-v3-GCWallace.pdf

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

8 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Assignments
Lecture Homework #14, ESRI Virtual Campus Homework: any module from any course, GIS Tutorial Workbook Homework 10
Week 5
Class 19
Lecture Topics:
Digital Elevation Models (DEMs)
USGS National Map Seamless Server
USDS NRCS data gateway
Mosaic Images
How to Clip a Surface
L:\Jeffery Jensen\GISdata\USGS\NED\elevation
36115b2, 36115b1
36115a2, 36115a1
USGS NED 10m for Clark County- L:\Jeffery Jensen\GISdata\USGS\NED\elevation_NED10M_678794_01.zip (all individual DEMs, about 1 GB for clark county,
obtained from NRCS Data Gateway)
Assignments
Lecture Homework: none, ESRI Virtual Campus Homework: none, GIS Tutorial Workbook Homework 11
Week 5
Class 20
Assignments
Final Exam

Section 1: Syllabus
Instructor Biography
Jeffery J. Jensen, PE
Homepage: http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen
email: jefferyjjensen@gmail.com
CEE 121 Teaching Assistant
Steven Youngberg, PLS, (Spring 2010, Summer 2010) email: slyoungberg@cox.net
Scott Hill, PLS, (Spring 2010) email: shill@trcsolutions.com, work: 702-248-6415
Dr. Mohammad Shahidul Islam, (Summer 2010) email: shahidul92@hotmail.com, voice: 702-406-0418
Sang In Choi, (Spring 2010, Summer 2010) email: choi_sangin@yahoo.com, voice: 702-556-1721
Humberto "Bert" Franco (Fall 2010, Summer 2011, Fall 2011, Spring 2012), email: Franco.Humberto@hotmail.com, mobile: 702-340-8177
Steven Preston (Spring 2012) email: prestons@unlv.nevada.edu
Blake Naccarato, (Fall 2010) email: blake.naccarato@gmail.com
CEE 301 Teaching Assistant
Humberto "Bert" Franco (Fall 2011), email: Franco.Humberto@hotmail.com, mobile: 702-340-8177
Ernie Mejia (Spring 2011), ernie_m@hotmail.com, mobile: 702-683-9854
Terri Bray (Fall 2010), bbterri728@hotmail.com, voice: 702-481-4206
Nesley Orochena (Fall 2010), email: orochena_nesley@yahoo.com, voice: 702-401-0022
Former Assistants
Sang In Choi, email: choi_sangin@yahoo.com, voice: 702-556-1721
Avinash Kaiparambil (CSN - Spring 2010) email: kv_avinash@yahoo.com, mobile: 702-882-8679
Brian Kalina, email: bkalina1@gmail.com or kalinab@unlv.nevada.edu, with Southwest Gas. Voice: 702-408-4917
Ferrin Affleck with Affleck Engineering, email: fpa@affleckengineering.com, voice: 702-431-4827
CEE 468/668 Teaching Assistant
Eneliko Mulokozi, email: mulokozi@unlv.nevada.edu, voice: 702-343-4758
Dr. Mohammed Shahid Islam, email: shahidul92@hotmail.com, voice: 702-406-0418
1. Creating a web page: Document how to create a website on Microsoft Office Live
2. Bing Maps and Aerial Photos
3. Internet Mapping
4. KML, Geodatabase, shapefile
5. Projections
Sang In Choi, email: choi_sangin@yahoo.com, voice: 702-556-1721

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

9 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Geocoding and Reverse Geocoding

Network Analyst
ArcGlobe
3D Analyst
Dennis Brown, email: dendrite@cox.net, voice: 702-513-9274
Geoprocessing
Programming
ArcCatalog
Spatial Analyst
Drainage Study Term Project
Terri Bray, email: bbterri728@hotmail.com, voice: 702-481-4206
ArcMap Layout
Export to PDF
COGO, Editing Features
Selections and Query
Joins, Spatial Joins
Buffers
Dissolve
Former Assistants
Lab Assistant - Sumit Puri, email: er.sumitpuri@gmail.com
Gang Xie - email: xieg@rtcsnv.com (old UNLV email: xieg@unlv.nevada.edu)
Yanjie Chen - email: lydia.chen.unlv@gmail.com (old UNLV email: cheny17@unlv.nevada.edu)
Mukund Dangeti - email: mukund@trc.unlv.edu
Ching Wang - email: ccwang@co.clark.nv.us

Mission Statements
Civil and Environmental Engineering Mission Statement
It is the mission of the department to produce quality civil engineering graduates with technical and management skills that meet or exceed the expectations of industry,

## CEE 468/668 Mission Statement

To make great civil engineers! To provide the knowledge and tools necessary to help aid them in civilizing the wilderness. To help the Civil Engineer to Create, to Achieve, to
have Success.

CEE 468 Course Relationship with UNLV College of Engineering Program Outcomes
Outcome 2
The graduates acquire problem solving experiences through independent study
CEE 468 Method:
The graduates acquire problem solving experiences through group study
Participate in a strong design experience throughout the curriculum
Construct problem statements
CEE 468 Method:
Document problem statements
CEE 468 Method:
Offer and evaluate alternative solutions to open-ended problems incorporating mult-disciplinary knowledge
Outcome 4
The graduates have the ability to effectively communicate in written form
CEE 468 Method:
The graduates can provide professional presentations appropriate to the situation and audience
CEE 468 Method:
Outcome 6
The graduates have the ability to use modern analysis and design tools in engineering practice
CEE 468 Method:
Outcome 11
The graduates recognize the need for life-long learning in the practice of the civil engineering profession
CEE 468 Method:
The graduates are aware of the need for further training to remain current in the field
CEE 468 Method:

Learning Objectives
CEE468 Course Learning Objectives
What the student wants
1. Obtain a civil engineering degree from an ABET accredited school and use this course to satisfy one of the necessary requirements

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

10 of 378

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Obtain skills in using ArcGIS, add to resume, satisfy job application requirements
How to use Google Earth for presentations
How to present GIS data on the Internet using Google Maps
How to create GIS maps (hardcopy and pdf)
How to build a web page
Become familiar with existing GIS data with various agencies, such as Clark County, State of Nevada and USA
How to query and join GIS data and tabular data
How to use aerial photos
How to use Bing Maps as a data layer in ArcMap
How to edit and create GIS data
How to create spatial point layer from excel spreadsheet with address data
How to determine optimal routing using Network Analyst
How to create TINs, contours and shaded reliefs using Spatial Analyst

Upon successfully completing this course, the student will be able to perform the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

## Students knowledge they apply the GIS tool to solve problems

Students can create plots in ArcMap. Know how to add layers, label & symbolize features
Students can generate reports from a tabular database
Students can query & join tables in a tabular database
Students can perform spatial analysis/buffers/overlays/spatial joins within ArcMap
Students can create a tabular & spatial databases (i.e. geodatabase)
Students can create accurate features (i.e. points, polygons, & lines) using coordinate geometry (COGO) editing tools
Students can create point features from a database using geocoding and the Add X/Y method
Students know what metadata is and how to use it
Students know the various agencies they can obtain GIS related data from
Students can use raster data such as aerial photos
Students can create surfaces/digital terrain models (DTM) and contours

## Instructor's Expectations from Students

Assignments Submitted on Due Date
Start of each class 1) open ArcMap, 2) open this course agenda, 3) download necessary GIS datasets for the days lecture
Send one email with multiple attachments of the courses assignments
Primary reason why past students didn't get an A in the course.
Avoid Procrastination
Get Started - trick yourself into saying you will quick in 5 minutes. Will notice once you begun, its not that bad.
Divide and Conqure - break things down into smaller pieces.
"Swiss Cheese" Method - start anywhere in the project, doesn't have to be done sequentially.
Focus on the end results, not on the path getting there
Reward yourself when you reach a milepost
"Do Nothing" Method - sit quitely and do nothing. After sometime will realize working on the project is more enjoyable.
Belief you know databases and GIS
"Whether you believe you can do a thing or not, you are right" (Quote by Henry Ford)
Desire to learn the software (not surf on the internet during class)
Will have multiple opportunites to learn (what more can I do?)
Listen to Lecture
Lecture Notes
In Class Assignment
Homework Assignments
Class Project
GIS Tutorial Workbook
ESRI Virtual Campus Computer Assignments
Final Exam
Freedom to collaborate with other students
Come to class prepared
Communication
"...ye have not, because ye ask not" (James 4:2)
Student's Expectations from Instructor
Ability to effectively teach GIS concepts to each student
Provide clear instructions on the assignments
Stimulate the mind with new concepts
Demonstrate real world applications
Sincerely address the concerns of each student

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

11 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## UNLV Civil Engineering Program - Educational Objectives

The objectives of the Civil Engineering undergraduate degree program are to prepare graduates who can perform at the entry level in civil
engineering practice so that, some years after graduation, they can become licensed professionals having responsibility for the planning, design,
implementation, operation and continuous improvement of civil engineering structures and infrastructure. They will be provided with skills and
tools for life-long learning, continuing professional development, and to pursue advanced degrees.

## UNLV Measurable Program Outcomes

Civil Engineering Graduates will have attained the following outcomes
01. an ability to apply knowledge of mathematics through differential equations, calculus-based physics, chemistry, and at least one additional area of science, and
engineering;
02. an ability to design and conduct civil engineering experiments, as well as to analyze and interpret the resulting data;
03. an ability to design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic constraints such as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical,
health and safety, manufacturability, and sustainability;
04. an ability to function on multidisciplinary teams;
05. an ability to identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems;
06. an understanding of professional and ethical responsibility;
07. an ability to communicate effectively;
08. the broad education necessary to understand the impact of engineering solutions in a global, economic, environmental, and societal context;
09. a recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in life-long learning;
10. a knowledge of contemporary issues;
11. an ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for engineering practice;
12. an ability to apply knowledge of four technical areas appropriate to civil engineering;
13. an ability to design a system, component, or process in more than one civil engineering context;
14. an ability to explain basic concepts in management, business, public policy, and leadership; and an ability to explain the importance of professional licensure.

CEE 121 Course Relationship with UNLV College of Engineering Measurable Program Outcomes
Outcome 4 (Introduction) - The ability to function on multidisciplinary teams
Students work on a traverse and level loop/circuit as a team of 3-5 people
Multidisciplinary - student's speciality area will range from 1) Water Resources and Environmental, 2) Structural, 3) Transportation, or 4) Geotechnical. Students
might also have a Construction Management speciality.
Outcome 11 (Introduction) - The ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for engineering practice
Students are taught how to use modern surveying equipment (GPS and Total Stations) along with traditional survey equipment (automatic levels, theodolites, steel
tape/chain measurement, tripod setup, rotational levels)
Students are taught how to take their field measurements and import into Civil 3D, create a design, and finally stake out the design in the field.
Big Picture
Civil Design is based on 1) identify the existing conditions, 2) proposing a solution/design, 3) construction layout of the design, and 4) as-built the constructed
project for maintenance. Even the best designs can fail if the existing conditions are not properly captured or the construction layout isn't accurate. So, it is crucial
the Civil Engineer understands the whole process.
Future Employeer Expectations
Students know how to use modern survey equipment
Problem is existing UNLV survey equipment is dated. By having some Total Stations and GPS Units, UNLV students will be familiar with modern surveying
equipment.
The employeer doesn't expect the Civil Engineer to do the job of the Land Surveyor (e.g. identify boundary/property lines) but he does expect the engineer to
know how to do some basic field measurements. This might include how to fill in any gaps with the survey. For example, the Engineer has been given a topo
from the Surveyor but the elevation of a nearby building is missing or the invert elevation of culvert. Do you get in a discussion with the surveyor on what
the deliverables are, a discussion with the client you need additional funds or do you just easily go out and measure this using modern survey equipment like
a GPS unit.
Outcome 5 - identify, formulate and solve engineering problems
How can you formulate and solve an engineering problem if you don't have access to the existing condition data?
To get the existing condition data, in the case of land development, you need access to modern surveying equipment or a budget to hire a land surveyor.
Outcome 11 - Multidisciplinary Teams
Access to modern survey equipment creates a learning base for the students. Thus they can expand their knowledge into Senior Design where they work on a
design with a team.
When UNLV students do their senior design, they typically won't have a budget to send out a survey crew to collect a topo. So they either have to use some existing
data from another project or collect it themselves. By having access to modern surveying equipment the UNLV student now has more choices, that is freedom on
project selection.
Outcome 13 - design a system in more than one civil engineering context.
If the Civil Engineer has access to modern surveying tools, then they can expand their design into the surveying context, that is either the measurement of existing
conditions or the layout of a proposed design. In any case, this makes for a better design now that the civil engineering is thinking in another context, that is how
this design will fit with the exist topology.

CEE 301 Course Relationship with UNLV College of Engineering Measurable Program Outcomes
Outcome 3 (Application) - The ability to design a system...within realistic constraints
Students will design a real-world 9 lot residential subdivision
Outcome 11 (Introduction and Application) - The ability to use modern engineering tools necessary for engineering practice
Students obtain the skills necessary to design based on Standard Drawings from the local agencies.

CEE 468 Course Relationship with UNLV College of Engineering Measurable Program Outcomes

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

12 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Outcome 1 (Application) - ability to apply knowledge of mathematics through...an area of science and engineering
Outcome 3 (Application, Synthesis) - ability to design a system...or process...within realistic constraints
Students design a GIS process to determine the rainfall runoff for a design storm
Outcome 5 (Application) - ability to identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems
Outcome 7 (Application) - ability to communicate effectively
Students use maps and webpages to show the results of their analysis
Students use products like Google Earth, Google Maps and ArcGIS Online to display their spatial content to the world
Outcome 11 (Introduction, Application) - ability to use...modern engineering tools necessary for engineering practice
Outcome 12 (Application) - ability to apply knowledge of four technical areas appropriate to civil engineering
Water Resources and Environmental - create watershed boundaries, using NOAA rainfall surfaces, USGS DEM, potable water and sewer line inventory, flood
control facilities and conveyance
Structural - inventory of building permits
Transportation - 1) vehicle routing - shortest path, quickest path, optimal service routes, 2) street inventory, 3) public transportation - bus route and stops inventory,
4) topographic maps and surveying
Geotechnical - create a geodatabase of the hydrologic soil groups from the Natural Resource Conservation Service (NRCS) SSURGO datasets.
ABET Syllabus
ABET-CEE121-Syllabus.docx
ABET-CEE301-Syllabus.docx
ABET-CEE468-Syllabus.docx

Learning Objectives
CEE 121 Course Learning Objectives
1. Constraints/Restrictions
Only have about 45 hours of lecture and 45 hours of lab to cover the materials in a single semester, 3 credit class
Jeff, can you give me a thumbnail overview of 1. The big picture of what we would like to have and why 2. What we have purchased to date and what has the total cost
been? 3. Where do the items in these quotes fit into the bigger picture and what do we lose if we do not have them? What I need to do is figure out what per cent of the
lab fee account is going to surveying equipment and I need to know what per cent of the expenditures for the needs of the course we have met to date.
2. Goals
What is the big picture and what is needed to accomplish it?
Big Picture - womb to tomb approach. A civil engineer wants to civilize raw land, survey the existing ground, do a civil design, stake out the project design
for construction and finally create AS-BUILTS/Record Drawings of the final project to hand over to maintenance.
Problems - it is very expensive for a civil engineering firm to have its own surveying crew
Problems - civil engineer is working on a design and sees he needs a few points to make the topo complete. Does he pay the surveyor to do this or go out and
measure it himself?
Problems - AeroTech created a topo of UNLV campus. Problem is areas of dense trees, unable to obtain topo.
Problems - GPS has trouble with urban canyons and dense trees.
Problems - Senior Design team wants to do a design to solve some local drainage issues but needs some accurate topo.
Problems - UNLV Facilities Management wants to get an accurate inventory, that is building square footage.
Problems - UNLV would like to advertise it's campus to the world by creating 3D models of each building and uploading to Google Earth.
Students exposed to the profession of a land surveyor
Students have the knowledge to pass the surveying portion of the FE and California PE exams
3. Topics (ranked in order of importance)
4. Equipment Wishlist

## CEE 301 Course Learning Objectives

Upon successfully completing this course, the student will be able to perform the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Identify a problem and develop a design to solve it using modern tools (Autodesk Civil 3D). Provide a presentation with figures on the proposed solution.
Understand the basics of AutoCAD and Civil 3D - what it can and can't do
Read and interpret civil engineering plans
Calculate line work for a subdivision
Build a 3D surface of the existing ground
Build a 3D surface of the proposed finished grade
Make a Plan and Profile plot of the existing ground
Make a Plan and Profile plot of the proposed finished grade
Run earthwork volumes and +/- grid tics

Mission Statements
Civil and Environmental Engineering Mission Statement
It is the mission of the department to produce quality civil engineering graduates with technical and management skills that meet or exceed the
expectations of industry, government and graduate programs.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

13 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Instructor's Mission Statement

To make great civil engineers! To provide the knowledge, skills and tools necessary to civilize the world.

Software
Software-Required
GIS - ArcInfo 10 by ESRI
Step 1. Activate your authorization number at http://www.esri.com/educationedition
Need to activate the unique authorization number that is printed inside the DVD case. For example EVA962035263
Step 2. Install the ArcGIS Desktop 10 Education Edition DVD
Step 3. Register software using the activated authorization number
Request ArcEditor DVDs for students
ArcGIS Ideas
support KML elevation units, submitted on 16 July 2010
Dec 2009, Tory Whitlock is the Nevada Education Customer Service Representative, email: twhitlock@esri.com, voice: 888-377-4575x2235
Jan 2006, ESRI started a new program for Site License schools such as UNLV. ESRI will ship 1 Year Time out software to instructors at universities with ESRI Site
License free of charge for distribution to students. For more info see Jeff Jensen. Beth Manion, ESRI Customer Service 888-377-4575x1887, Fax 909-307-3083,
email: BManion@esri.com, see ESRI Software Promotion for GIS Students at Institutions with a Campus-Wide Site License
Request ArcGIS ArcEditor 60 day evaluation DVD
ESRI Tech Support - voice: 888-377-4575, UNLV Customer ID 917. Currently Matt Buk is registered.
Request ESRI software to be installed on UNLV computers
Darrell Lutey with OIT request page. Email: Darrell.Lutey@unlv.edu
ArcGIS 9.2 is NOT compatible with Microsoft Vista, see ESRI Article ID 31074 Does ArcGIS 9 support Microsoft's Windows Vista? and ESRI Article ID 34020
ESRI's ArcView 9 (180-day trial CD-ROM comes with book). If you don't have the book, can order a free 60-day evaluation copy of ArcView GIS 9 on CD-ROM
by filling out this form. Note, ArcView 9 will not run on Windows 98 or ME editions. For software support, recommend using the ESRI Online Support Center
Discussion Forums
Student version of ArcView 9 Single User is available \$250 from Hema Morar (hmorar@esri.com), Telebusiness at ESRI. 800-447-9778x1194 or Cambria Happ
(chapp@esri.com) 800-447-9778x1588. This student version doesn't require hardware keys. Also it doesn't come with maintenance (free upgrades or tech support).
The software does come with manuals. Will have to use the online Discussion Forums and Knowledge Base for any questions regarding ArcView. Student must
pay full retail price for ArcEditor (\$7,000) or ArcInfo (\$14,000). The ArcGIS extensions can also be purchased separately for \$250 each (note when ArcGIS
upgrades, so do the extensions, so I recommend waiting on this). For example the ArcGIS 3D Analyst 9 normally sells for \$2,500 but as a student, can get if for
\$250. This applies to ArcPress, Spatial Analyst, and Geostatistical Analyst. StreetMap is only \$95. Students are able to purchase ArcGIS as long as they meet the
following criteria: for Grad and PhD students) must be enrolled in a class, for Undergrad students, must be enrolled in more than 6 units or taking a GIS class at the
time of purchase, for Universities) must provide a current course schedule. If you don't want to supply this info to ESRI, I can fax Cambria (Fax: 909-307-3049)
with your name on UNLV cover letter as proof of you being a student. Once Cambria has the list, you can call her directly and purchase the software with a credit
card.
TeleBusiness - contact when you want to upgrade a student license to a commercial license. If you paid \$250 for the student version, then it can be applied as a
credit for the commercial license. This includes 1 year of technical support and maintenance.
ESRI User's Conference
User ID: UC39234 and Last Name: Jensen
2010 Registration ID: 13888
Questions call 909-793-2853 ext 1-1363
If Google Earth Pro license is not working in TBE-B367, then need to uninstall it and reinstalled it using below license key.
Database - Microsoft Access
Will be using Access 2002 in the lab
Can purchase educational version from Microsoft
ESRI ArcLogistics
Richard Pearlman, Business Development Manager, Logistics. Email: rpearlman@esri.com, voice: 909-793-2853 x4366, mobile: 909-362-3168. He is familiar with the
NAVTEQ data.
ESRI Development Centers (EDC) for Universites
Program details
Program Contact: Ann Johnson, email: ajohnson@esri.com, Higher Education Program Manager, ESRI, PO Box 189, 312 Hill Street, Beatty NV 89003. Voice:
775-553-9914, Fax: 909-793-2853 x1-1793, mobile: 909-583-3806, email: gisajohnson@delmark.edu
Ann Marie Masangcay, Education Team, email: amasangcay@esri.com, voice: 909-793-2853 x1-1901
Press Release
Invited Tom, Haroon, Sajjad, and Joe to participate, waiting for response by 11 April 2008
Software-Recommened
www.bentley.com/studentserver
Microsoft Office
Microsoft Home Use Program. Home Use Program Support: 877-237-3165 and Technical Support: 800-642-7676 and Microsoft Customer Service: 800-936-4900
Program Code: 92A1385A7A
Cost is \$10 (order# CNL301652416). For additional \$12 you can get the Office Enterprise 2007 DVD (order# 6438636414)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

14 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Microsoft Office Professional Plus 2010 Product Key: PXV88-B624C-92BM2-D24FX-62QVK

Microsoft Office 2007, see www.microsoft.com/techg
UNLV OIT - Microsoft Office Home Use document
FileZilla - ability to transfer files between a server on the internet
WinRAR - decompress gzip and zip files. Can also untar files.
Text Editor
UNIX Utilities on Windows
UnxUtils from SourceForge.net - includes gawk.exe, sed.exe, wc.exe and cat.exe, don't have to install, just unzip the files and place the directory in the PATH
variable of windows to use these utilities from the command line (Windows Control Panel -> System Properties -> Advanced tab -> Environment Variables button
Windows PowerShell
Sample PowerShell Scripts
GNU Awk (gawk) windows compiled version gawk 3.1.5
ER Mapper 6.4
ArcView 8.x ECW plugin.
ArcPress for ArcGIS
SnagIt by Techsmith - PHCC5-2CVHD-CPUCD-CD5FD-L6M2B
Freeware PDF and PostScript viewer GSview4.6 and free PDF creator Ghostscript 8.13
SSH 3.2 to write to the http://www.ce.unlv.edu/Courses/CEG_468/ directory, /homes/cewww/Courses/CEG_468. SSH allows direct telnet and ftp to student.egr.unlv.edu.
Login name: jensenf (instructor), navigate to /homes/cewww/Courses/CEG_468.Microsoft has a Knowledge Base ID on Using FTP Batch Script (Q96269) which is
Webpages and HTML
HTML
Creating_Web_Pages_8th_Ed_For_Dummies_5th_Ed.pdf
HTML_4_for_Dummies_5th_Ed.pdf
JavaScript
JavaScript_Quick_Reference_For_Dummies.pdf
Ajax_For_Dummies.pdf
MapGuide
MapGuide Product Marketing Manager - Nathalie Mainland (email: nathalie.mainland@autodesk.com). Mike Schramm is in-charge of the Geospatial component of
Education.
Dave Wooldridge, MapGuide Administrator, Voice: 775-684-2858, Email: dwool@water.nv.gov
Matt Dillon, GIS Administrator, Voice: 775-684-2856, Email: mdillon@water.nv.gov
Christy James, State Floodplain Manager, Voice: 775-684-2860, Email: cajames@water.nv.gov
MapGuide Viewer for Internet Explorer, other Browsers running Java
ActiveX Control MGControl6.5SP1.exe
Hydrology Software
William "Bill" Scharffenberg, HEC-HMS Lead Developer, U.S. Army Corps of Engineering, Institute for Water Resources, Hydrologic Engineering Center CEIWRHEC-HH, 609 Second St, Davis CA 95616. Voice: 530-756-1104, email: William.A.Scharffenberg@hec01.usace.army.mil
HEC and ESRI Sign Cooperative Research and Development Agreement

Support Homepage
Web Help
Acrobat Pro Extended help
Create PDF from TIFF
Create multiple PDFs from multiple files
Create PDF from TIFF using VeryPDF.com
email: Xue Heng with Services Support Team support@verypdf.com

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

15 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Acrobat and OCR

Recognize text in scanned documents
Batch OCR using Adobe Acrobat Professional by Rick Borstein with Adobe Systems, Inc.
Step 0. Open Acrobat Professional 8 or later
Step 1. Advanced -> Document Processing -> Batch Processing... then click on the New Sequence... button, finally give the batch sequence a name, such as
OCRPDF1
Step 2. click the Select Commands... button on the Edit Batch Sequence window and in the new window, click the Recognize Text Using OCR. This should move
the command to the right window. Just double click it in the right window to adjust the settings, namely the PDF Output Style.
PDF Output Style
Recognize Text - Settings Dialog Box
Searchable Image - Ensures that text is searchable and selectable. This option keeps the original image, deskews it as needed, and places an invisible
text layer over it. The selection for Downsample Images in this same dialog box determines whether the image is downsampled and to what extent.
Searchable Image (Exact) - Ensures that text is searchable and selectable. This option keeps the original image and places an invisible text layer over it.
Recommended for cases requiring maximum fidelity to the original image.
ClearScan - Synthesizes a new Type 3 font that closely approximates the original, and preserves the page background using a low-resolution copy.
click OK
Step 3. click the run commands on drop down box on the Edit Batch Sequence window
Recognize text in scanned documents
Use the source as a folder and uncheck all the other image formats. At this time, only interested in the PDF files.
Step 4. click the select output location on the Edit Batch Sequence window
Step 5. run the batch sequence (pdfocr1) then wait several hours as Adobe runs a OCR on each and every PDF file.
OCR a PDF
Recognize Text - Settings

## Image and Metadata Tag Editors

Installation Instructions
stand-alone version exiftool(-k).exe should be renamed to exiftool.exe to allow it to be run by typing exiftool at the command line.
Tag Names Explained
Tag Names or handles are referenced by a leading dash "-"
exiftool -filename input.tif # will display the value of the filename tag in the input.tif metadata
Tag Name may be prefixed by a group name from family 0 or 1 separated by a colon
exiftool -g input.tif # will display all the groups (e.g. EXIF, ExifTool, File, PDF, XMP, ...)
exiftool -g1 input.tif # will display all tags in group 1

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

16 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

exiftool -pdf:pdfversion input.pdf # works, appears exiftool doesn't want to see space in a tag name
exiftool -exif:compression input.tif # this will return what compression was done on the image
A list of tag groups with their predefined tag names
How to write data to an image. Just specify the tag group and tag name then use the equal operator, e.g.
exiftool -exif:usercomment="Oh, this is how you do it" input.tif # this will overwrite the existing value in the usercomment tag in the EXIF tag family
How do you create a new tag name (user-defined) in a tag group?
First, need to define the new tag before you can write values to it.
GPS Tags
exiftool -g -n android.jpg # GPS Lat/Long in decimal degrees (DD)
exiftool -g android.jpg # GPS Lat/Long in Degrees Minutes Seconds (DMS)
ExifTool command line examples
Tag Groups
IPTC - International Press Telecommunications Council, develops standards for the interchange of news data. IPTC Metadata for XMP
EXIF - Exchangeable Image File Format
all XMP information is stored as character strings
Learn How to use the IPTC Core CS panels video tutorials by David Riecks and the Stock Artist Alliance
Discuss IPTC Core schema for XMP support at Yahoo! Groups
XMP files
exiftool.exe -v1 -tagsfromfile inputfile.xmp writetothisimage.tif
email: phil@owl.phy.queensu.ca
XMP Tags - Extensible Metadata Platform. Metadata format which can be embedded in JPEG, TIFF and PDF images/files.
Adobe Bridge 8 will not search the OCR text created by Acrobat OCR engine. Note this OCR text is an invisible layer in the PDF which allows one to
search (apparently only in Acrobat) and copy/paste this OCR text into other applications.
will show keywords saved in a PDF (stored under tag group - IPTC Core). I don't see an option to display XMP or PDF metadata.
Adobe XMP for Creative Professionals Whitepaper
JPEG images, Bridge will show IPTC Core keywords metadata in XMP tag group under Subject tag. Example exiftool -g -xmp:subject test1.jpg
Shared Properties - when tag values show up under multiple tag groups
Adobe Acrobat (user to user forums)
Tiff to PDF batch conversion by AdultPDF.com, Inc.
Acrobat Custom Properties, name and value. When viewing a PDF with this using Adobe Bridge, File Info..., Advanced section, the name and value is
stored under http://ns.adobe.com/pdfx/1.3 (pdfx:CustomNameCreatedInAcrobat: 88888) where 88888 is the test value and
CustomNameCreatedInAcrobat is the name. exiftool -g -pdf:CustomNameCreatedInAcrobat test.pdf will return the value 88888. If I attempt to
overwrite this value to 99999, get an error that the tag doesn't exist, exiftool -g -pdf:CustomNameCreatedInAcrobat=99999 test.pdf
Adobe Developer Knowledgebase, How To: Write an XML packet that conforms to XMP into a PDF file without using Acrobat or PDF Library APIs basically Adobe can only support use of PDF Library and the Acrobat SDK plug-in for adding new XMP packets into PDF. "The Acrobat SDK is
meant for the plug-in environment, and allows you to control and interact with the Acrobat user interface. The PDF Library SDK is intended for
interaction between PDF and other applications, such as high volume batch processing and PDF generation applications." (see p. 12 Acrobat SDK
Overview). Acrobat and PDF Library API Reference
metadata created in Acrobat 8 is stored under the PDF and XMP tag groups. Metadata stored under the Custom Properties (Acrobat: File -> Properties,
Custom tab) is stored under the PDF tag group. Keywords are both stored in the PDF and XMP tag groups. I think ExifTool uses xmp-pdf tag group
exiftool -xmp-pdf:keywords test.pdf
Acrobat Custom Properties, can create Name and Value. Recommend not having spaces in the Name, I'm unable to query it out using the following:
exiftool "-xmp-pdf:Rec map type 2" test.pdf

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

17 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

When creating a PDF from an image which already has metadata, Acrobat does NOT include any of these keywords in the Document Properties. So
will have to use ExifTool to copy the metadata data from the image into the PDF.
Parameters for Opening PDF Files
Windows Desktop Search (renamed to Windows Search with version 4)
Useful Links for Windows Desktop Search
What is included in the index
Windows Search 4 Troubleshooting Guide
IFilter - Add-in that enables WDS indexer to open, read and index the contents of new file types. Many software programs on the PC have IFilters
installed with their applications. For example, Microsoft Office Visio automatically installs the Visio IFilter add-ins on the PC. Windows Search
recognizes these IFilter add-ins and includes the contents of these file types when the index is built on the PC. (see Windows Search FAQ)
Foxit PDF IFilter
Foxit PDF IFilter forum
Foxit PDF IFilter User Manual
Desktop Search IFilters
Windows Desktop Search Development Forum
Windows Desktop Search Help Forum
Indexing Files and Programs: File types
GDS Plug-ins
IFilterShop - PDF+ IFilter and XMP IFilter
Google Base is a free service that allows you to publish your information for inclusion in Google search results. see What's the difference between
Where will my Google Base items appear?
What types of files can I attach to my items: includes TIF and Adobe PDF
Can link Google search results directly to my own website and How to send users to my site...
Can use private attributes - which only the item's creator can view and edit.
How to improve product rankings include metadata information such as title and description in the standard data feed attributes.
Example data feed item types. County Recorder documents, Civil Engineering Plans, Records of Survey, etc. closest popular item type is reference
articles or create a custom item type.
How to create a data feed - Tab-delimited, RSS 1.0, RSS 2.0, Atom 0.3 or Atom 1.0

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

18 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

GeoTiff Tags
Unclear the best location to store Metadata and getting that data back out. For example, can store information such as the document:instrument#, plat book, map
file page, surveyor, and so on in the XMP-dc:subject ( Dublin Core schema tags), but the question is how I can then extract this information into various database
fields. I think I'll need to both create custom tags which will solve the problem of exporting the metadata into a database and then duplicate these tags in the
keywords to some what solve the problem of querying or search the metadata. I can see Adobe Bridge crashing trying to keep track of all these keywords.
Exiv2 - fast read and write access to Exif, IPTC, and XML metadata of an image via a C++ and command line utility.
Image Galleries available with Bluehost Web Hosting
4Images Gallery
showing IPTC and EXIF data of images
4Images Gallery Forum Support
Coppermine Photo Gallery
appears it can read some of the EXIF data and IPTC data. Namely File Title and File Description. It appears you need custom code to read the EXIF description and
Comment.
Gallery
EXIF Modules in Gallery2
Metadata - view, edit and create
Software

View

Yes Yes

No

Notes

## Yes - see Title, Author, Subject, Keywords.

Unclear how to edit XMP data values
No - custom properties named values

IrfanView
ExifTool

Yes
exiftool -v input.pdf

## Searches and Indexes of PDF file

Offer Search Tools a Helping Hand by Donna L. Baker
IfranView - graphics viewer
Supports multipage TIFF images
Can be run from the command line
Provides batch conversion of TIFF images to PDF
needs the ImPDF by ComSquare plugin to convert to PDF
Batch image conversion tips and tricks
Image Compression
Methods of Compression (see Adobe Acrobat 6.0 Professional - Classroom in a Book, p. 152-152)
Distiller applies the following compression based on the image
Text and Line Art - ZIP compression
Color and Grayscale Images - ZIP or JPEG compression
Monochrome Images - Zip, CCITT Group 3 or 4, or Run Length compression
ZIP Compression
ZIP works well on images with large areas of single colors or repeating patterns, such as screen shots and simple images created with paint programs, and for
black-and-white images that contain repeating patterns. Acrobat provides 4-bit and 8-bit ZIP compression options. If you use 4-bit ZIP compression with 4-bit
images, or 8-bit ZIP with 4-bit or 8-bit images, the ZIP method is lossless, which means it does not remove data to reduce file size and so does not affect an image's
quality. However, using 4-bit ZIP compression with 8-bit data can affect the quality, since data is lost.
Note: The Adobe implementation of the ZIP filter is derived from the zlib package of Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler, whose generous assistance we gratefully
acknowledge.
JPEG Compression
JPEG = Joint Photographic Experts Group
Is suitable for grayscale or color images, such as continuous-tone photographs that contain more detail than can be reproduced on-screen or in print. JPEG is lossy,
which means that it removes image data and may reduce image quality, but it attempts to reduce file size with the minimum loss of information. Because JPEG
eliminates data, it can achieve much smaller files sizes than ZIP compression.
Acrobat provides six JPEG options, ranging from Maximum quality (the least compression and the smallest loss of data) to Minimum quality (the most
compression and the greatest loss of data). The loss of detail that results from the Maximum and High quality settings are so slight that most people cannot tell an
image has been compressed. At Minimum and Low, however, the image may become blocky and acquire a mosaic look. The Medium quality setting usually strikes
the best balance in creating a compact file while still maintaining enough information to produce high-quality images.
CCITT Compression
CCITT = International Coordinating Committee for Telephone and Telegraphy
Appropriate for black-and-white images made by paint programs and any images scanned with an image depth of 1 bit.
CCITT is a lossless method
Acrobat provides the CCITT Group 3 and Group 4 compression options. CCITT Group 4 is a general-purpose method that produces good compression for most
types of monochrome images. CCITT Group 3, used by most fax machines, compresses monochrome images one row at a time.
Run Length Compression
A lossless compression option that produces the best results for images that contain large areas of solid white or black.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

19 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Screen Sharing Applications

Citrix GoToAssist
GoToAssist Express
used for remote support
record meeting - audio and data with free archiving
Cost is \$69 a month or annual prepay of \$660.
is the affordable, easy-to-use remote-support tool that enables you to provide instant and secure live support to your clients online. You can resolve your client
problems in real time even if they are away from their computers.
Screen sharing and remote control
PC and Mac support
File transfer
GoToMeeting Personal/Online Edition
monthly cost is \$49
Free VOIP and Conference Call Bridge
Website Integration with "Meet Now" button
one host/organizer and up to 15 attendees
PROMO CODE is 123Spencer2
Free 24/7 Technical Support - 800-263-6317
GoToMeeting - 1 to 25 attendees
GoToWebinar - 1 to 1000 attendees
You can monitor attentiveness
8 Polls & 8 Surveys
Free 1 GB of hosting/archiving recorded Webinars
Engage Webinar audiences with ad-hoc polling, hand raising and speaking privileges
GoToAssist Corporate Professional Edition
Judy Spencer, 480-467-2712, judy.spencer@citrix.com
Citrix Online Division
Citrix Systems, Inc.
2825 S Park Plaza Drive
Tempe AZ 85282

Acrobat Connect
Acrobat Connect for Individuals vs. Acrobat Connect Professional
Acrobat Connect for Individuals - \$39 a month
doesn't include VoIP, meeting recordings
recommend screen sharing resolution of 1024x768 or smaller
Acrobat ConnectNow
Free web conferencing solution
Email the following steps for a client to use Adobe ConnectNow Screen Sharing
Please take the following steps before entering a meeting with GIS Engineering staff
Step 0: have an up to date web browser: (Internet Explorer 7 or later) or (Firefox 3 or later)
Step 2: visit the GIS Engineering ConnectNow meeting: https://connectnow.acrobat.com/gisengineering
Step 3: enter the meeting as a guest or with your Adobe ID
it appears you can only host a meeting with the Adobe ID
requires a ConnectNew plug-in to be installed
customized URL that stays the same so it's easy for everyone to remember
only 3 people can attend
Meeting room URL: https://connectnow.acrobat.com/gisengineering alternative is https://na2.connectnow.acrobat.com/gisengineering
Test if Adobe ConnectNow is available and working, visit http://health.acrobat.com/
Deployed using a Flash Player
Provide Desktop Sharing
Host/Participant Control Sharing
VOIP
Quiz/Polling
Synched Recording

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

20 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Michelle MacMahon, Direct: 303-244-0014, Mobile: 720-299-5773, email: mmacmahon@meetingone.com

www.graphon.com

Misc Software
Slickrun - free floating command line utility for Windows
Magnifixer - screen magnifier utility
Daemon Tools
used to mount .iso images to a hard drive
http://www.digital-digest.com/articles/mount_watch_iso_files_page1.html
Email
Email Forward
Can forward email to as many email addresses you can fit in 254 characters with email addresses seperated by commas.
Godaddy Email Troubleshooting - Why does my email account show that it is pending setup: validating MX records?
Godaddy Email Troubleshooting - Why does my email account show that it is pending setup: MX Error?
Godaddy Help - Creating A Records

Textbooks
CEE468/668 Required Textbooks
GIS Tutorial Basic Workbook 1, Fourth Edition by Wilpen L. Gorr and Kristen S. Kurland. Publisher ESRI Press. ISBN: 978-1-58948-259-3
Chapter 3: Geodesy, Datums, Map Projections, and Coordinate Systems
CEE468 Recommended Textbooks
UNLV Bookstore/Barnes and Noble
Amie Mellinger, Textbook Supervisor, UNLV Bookstore, Barnes & Noble #774 Tel. 702-895-4169, Fax. 702-895-1017, bookstore@unlv.edu
Evaluation/Exam/Desk Copies
CreateSpace
Book/Video/Music publisher on demand (print on demand)
It appears CreateSpace does NOT provide a professional editor to review the manuscript and this will have to be done author end.
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Higher Education, Sybex and Microsoft Press
Wiley Sales Representative - Mary Kay Yearin (myearin@wiley.com)
Jim Harper (jharper@wiley.com, voice: 201-748-6864) Wiley Editor for Paul Holley's Surveying & Layout DVD
www.wherefacultyconnect.com 866-432-2858 Amanda Miller, Vice President and Publisher
Danielle Giordano, dgiordano@wiley.com
Kathryn Bourgoine, Editor - Graphic Standards series
Why write a book? enhance academic or professional statue
Neil Edde with Sybex, nedde@wiley.com or Valerie
very careful in what is published, listen to Margaret
Criteria
potential audience (professional and academic) for the book
competitive landscape, look at Amazon
fit with our existing publishing program
marketability of the book's concepts, including author platform
peer reviews
Author as marketer - conferences and presentations, online presence, connections for support
Elements of book proposal (5-10 pages)
Rationale/Executive Summary (statistics to make a case for the book)
Outline/Extend TOC
Market Information (audience, what is the competition doing, where would we shelf the book at a bookstore, how does it fit in with Wiley offerings)
Author Writing Samples (CV and Author Platform)
Publishing Process
Proposal
Proposal review
proposal revision based on reviews
publisher internal review
publishing agreement
manuscript development
final manuscript development
copyediting
design and page layout

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

21 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## publication in print and e-book formats

on
Landscape Architectural Graphic Standards, 1.0 CD-ROM
Architectural Graphic Standards 4.0 CD-ROM
Introducing Geographic Information Systems with ArcGIS: A Workbook Approach to Learning GIS by Michael Kennedy. ISBN-13: 978-0470398173. Requested
May 2009.
Introduction to 3D Data: Modeling with ArcGIS 3D Analyst and Google Earth by Heather Kennedy. ISBN-13: 978-0-470-38124-3. Request May 2009
Beginning CSS: Cascading Style Sheets for Web Design, 2nd Edition by Richard York. ISBN-13: 978-0-470-09697-0. Request May 2009
Wiley Pathways Introduction to Google Sketchup by Aidan Chopra, ISBN-13: 978-0-470-17565-1. Requested May 2009.
Introducing Geographic Information Systems with ArcGIS by Michael Kennedy, ISBN: 978-0-471-79229-1. Copyright 2006, 624 pages. Published by John Wiley
& Sons, Inc. Instructor Companion Site for Kennedy: Introducing Geographic Information Systems with ArcGIS
(requested Exam Copy 14 April 2007) Review copy order number is 27339458 Username: JENSENF@EGR.UNLV.EDU Password: NORMAL, all upper case
Wiley technical support
WEB Intro Geographic Information ArcGIS
Urban Hydrology, Hydraulics, and Stormwater Quality: Engineering Applications and Computer Modeling by A. Osman Akan, ISBN: 978-0-471-43158-9
Stormwater Management for Land Development: Methods and Calculations for Quantity Control by Thomas A. Seybert, ISBN: 978-0-471-72177-2
Evidence and Procedures for Boundary Location, 5th Edition by Walter G. Robillard ISBN: 978-0-471-69447-2 (requested Feb 2007)
Interpreting Land Records by Donald A. Wilson, ISBN: 978-0-471-71543-6 (requested Feb 2007)
Surveying and Layout Fundamentals for Construction (DVD) by Paul Holley ISBN: 978-0-471-78389-3 (requested Feb 2007)
Brown's Boundary Control and Legal Principles, 5th Edition by Walter G. Robillard ISBN: 978-0-471-21598-1 (own 4th Edition)
A Guide to Understanding Land Surveys, 2nd Edition by Stephen V. Estopinal ISBN: 978-0-471-57717-1 (own)
Fedora 5 and Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 Bible by Christopher Negus ISBN: 978-0471754916 (requested Feb 2007)
Introducing Geographic Information Systems with by Michael Kennedy with the University of Kentucky. ISBN: 978-0-471-79229-1
Wendy Tucker (voice: 702-925-8575, email wtucker@wiley.com) is the UNLV Wiley Sales Rep as of 22 March 2008
Wiley Sales Representative is Heather Matzdorff (email: hmatzdor@wiley.com)
Wiley Sales Representative is Karen Tinley (email: ktinley@wiley.com)
Wiley Representative is Wendy Tucker (email: wtucker@wiley.com)
Sybex
Mastering AutoCAD Civil 3D 2008 ISBN: 978-0-470-16740-3 (requested 1 Dec 2007, order# 29602984)
Microsoft Press
To request an evaluation copy visit Wiley MOAC Web site
To request an evaluation copy of any Microsoft Press trade titles (Non-MOAC or ALS), please send an email to deskcopy@hbgusa.com with Title, ISBN,
Microsoft Windows PowerShell(TM) Step By Step, by Ed Wilson, ISBN-10: 0735623958 (requested 22 March 2008)
Windows PowerShell(TM) Scripting Guide, by Ed Wilson, ISBN-10: 0735622795 (requested 22 March 2008
CRC Press Online
Request Examination Copy
Academic Sales Representative: Tim McFall, timothy.mcfall@taylorandfrancis.com, Tel: 800-272-7737 ext 2404
GPS for Land Surveyors by Jan Van Sickle
The Global Positioning System and ArcGIS, 3rd Edition by Michael Kennedy
Jones and Bartlett Publishers
Sales Representative - Stephanie Leighs, sleighs@jbpub.com, 800-832-0034x8239
Introduction to Game Programming by Chandler (requested April 2012)
Computing with C# and the .NET Framework, 2nd Edition by Gittleman (requested April 2012)
AutoCAD 2010 in Practice by Kogent Inc., ISBN-13: 978-1-9340-1539-1 (requested April 2009)
Web Development with JavaScript and Ajax Illuminated by Richard Allen, ISBN-13: 978-0-7637-5489-1 (requested April 2009)
Python Programming in Context by Bradley N. Miller, ISBN-13: 978-0-7637-4602-5
Prentice Hall and Pearson Higher Education
Account
Pearson Higher Education
Contacts
Jody McCavitt, Pearson Publisher Rep (Las Vegas/Reno) for Ally & Bacon, Addison-Wesley, Merrill and Prentice Hall. Mobile 702-469-4587, email:
Jody.McCavitt@pearson.com
select option 15
Peachpit Press Titles are represented by Pearson Education sales force
SQL for MySQL Developers: A Comprehensive Tutorial and Reference by Rick F. van der Lans. ISBN-13: 978-0-13-149735-9 (own).
Prentice Hall - Algebra 1, Geometry, Algebra 2 (http://www.pearsonschool.com/index.cfm)
SQL Fundamentals 3rd Edition by John J. Patrick. ISBN-13:978-0-13-712602-6 (own). Companion Web Site, http://groups.google.com/group/sqlfun and email:
sqlfun@gmail.com
Elementary Surveying: An Introduction to Geomatics, 11th Edition by Paul R. Wolf ISBN: 978-0-131-48189-3
Surveying, 10th Edition by Francis H. Moffitt ISBN: 978-0-673-99752-4 (available 9/2007)
Surveying with Construction Applications, 6th Edition by Barry F. Kavanagh ISBN: 978-0-131-70932-4 (own)
Geomatics by Barry F. Kavanagh ISBN: 978-0-130-32289-0 (own)
Graphic Communications in Construction by Dennis Fukai ISBN: 978-0-130-60552-8 (own 2 copies)
Autodesk Civil 3D: Procedures and Applications by Harry O. Ward, ISBN: 978-0-131-71350-5 (own)
Civil Drafting Technology, 6th Edition by David A. Madsen ISBN: 978-0-131-71199-0 (own)
A Practical Guide to Red Hat Linux: Fedora Core and Red Hat Enterprise Linux, 3rd Edition by Mark G. Sobell ISBN: 978-0132280273 (own)
Microsoft Expression Web by Nolan Hester (requested April 2007) ISBN: 978-0-321-49223-4
Sales Rep: Matt Christopherson (voice: 702-203-6503, email: Matt_Christopherson@prenhall.com)
Sales Rep: Katie Fitch (voice: 702-403-0583, email: Katie_Fitch@prenhall.com)
Core Python Programming, 2nd Edition by Wesley J. Chun ISBN-13: 9780132269933 (requested 4 April 2008)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

22 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Core PHP Programming, 3rd Edition by Atkinson and Suraski ISBN-13: 9780130463463 (requested 4 April 2008)
Access 2007 Guidebook by Maggie Trigg and Phyllis Dobson
Styling Web Pages with CSS: Visual QuickProject Guide by Tom Negrino and Dori Smith. ISBN-13: 978-0-321-55557-1 (obtained 22 May 2009)
Mastering Web Content: Structure and Presentation with XHTML and CSS, Online Video by Stephanie Sullivan. ISBN-13: 978-0-321-61782-8
CSS Artistry: A Web Design Master Class by Andy Clarke ISBN-13: 9780321584847 (obtained 22 May 2009)
McGraw Hill Higher Education
Sale Rep - Danny Leist, email: daniel_leist@mcgraw-hill.com, voice: 951-367-7156
McGraw Hill Higher Education Log in: jefferyjjensen@gmail.com and password is Normal1. For support see www.mhhe.com/support or call 1-800-338-3987 x3
M-F 8-6:30pm EST.
Land Development Handbook, 2nd Edition by The Dewberry Companies, Sidney Dewberry and Philip Champagne. 2002. ISBN-13 9780071375252. Requested
exam copy on 7/11/2007
Mastering ArcGIS with Video Clips CD-ROM by Maribeth H. Price. Publisher McGraw-Hill Science/Engineering/Math, 3rd Edition Jan 22, 2007. ISBN
0073312800 / 9780073312804. Requested exam copy on 7/11/2007
Introduction to Geographic Information Systems with Data Files CD-ROM by Kang-tsung (Karl) Chang with the University of Idaho. ISBN-13 9780073312798.
Requested exam copy on 7/11/2007
Urban Stormwater Management Tools by Larry W. Mays, ISBN 0-07-142837-2 (own)
Handbook of Hydrology by David R. Maidment, ISBN 0-07-039732-5 (own)
Handbook of Hydraulics by Brater and King
Fluid Mechanics with Engineering Applications, 10th Edition by E. John Finnemore, ISBN-13: 9780072432022
Land Development Handbook, 2nd Edition by The Dewberry Companies ISBN-13: 9780071375252
Windows Server 2003 Pocket Administrator, 1st Edition by Nelson Ruest and Danielle Ruest. ISBN-13: 9780072229776 (requested 4 April 2008)
Android A Programmer's Guide by Jerome DiMarzio, 1st Edition, July 30, 2008, ISBN-13: 978-0071599887, Publisher: McGraw-Hill Osborne Media,
Goodheart-Willcox Publisher
AutoCAD and Its Applications: Comprehensive 2007 by Terence M. Shumaker, David A. Madsen, David P. Madsen, and Craig P. Black. ISBN 1-59070-760-5
is looking for Civil 3D Authors. Need to contact Paul B. Schreiner, Managing Editor of Technical/Trades/Technology, Voice: 800-323-0440 x1208 (or
708-687-5000), Fax: 708-687-5068, Address: 18604 West Creek Dr, Tinley Park IL 60477.
Thomson Engineering
Sales Rep: Voice: 866-349-2431x3316 Email: Joanne.Woods@thomson.com
John Fedor, Acquisition Editor with www.cengage.com
Thomson Delmar Learning Author's Guide
Cengage Learning
Customer Support Center 800-423-0563
http://cengage.com/support phone: 800-354-9706 option 5
Status of Exam Copy Requests
New Perspectives on Blended HTML, XHTML and CSS by Bojack, ISBN-13: 9780538746335 (requested on Oct 2010)
Professional Web Design: Techniques and Templates by Eccher ISBN-13: 9781435457157 (requested Oct 2010)
HTML, XHTML, and CSS: Comprehensive by Shelly/Woods/Dorin ISBN-13: 9781435457157 (requested Oct 2010)
Exploring Web Technologies for Designers by Bennett ISBN-13:9781418041847 (obtained Oct 2009)
Advanced Professional Web Design Techniques and Templates (CSS & XHTML) by Eccher ISBN-13: 9781-58450-494-8 (obtained Oct 2009)
ESRI Press
ESRI Press Desk Copy Request Form
Can request 3 books every 4 months. Contact Emily Tamanaha with ESRI Customer Service, email: etamanaha@esri.com, voice: 888-377-4575x5853 Deanna
Meelker with ESRI Customer Service, email: dmeelker@esri.com, voice: 888-377-4575x4978, fax: 909-307-3083
ArcGIS Survey Analyst Tutorial by Tim Hodson and Kristin Clark
Smart Land-Use Analysis, The LUCIS Model by Paul Zwick and Margaret Carr. ISBN 978-1-58948-174-9. Requested exam copy on 7/11/07
GIS Tutorial for Marketing (with teacher resource CD). By Dr. Fred L. Miller. ISBN: 978-158948-079-7. Requested exam copy on 7/11/07

## GIS Tutorial, 2nd Edition: Workbook for ArcView 9

by Wilpen L. Gorr and Kristen S. Kurland
ISBN 978-1-58948-178-7
.
GIS Concepts and ArcGIS Methods, 2nd Edition for v9 by David Theobald. Publisher Conservation Planning Technologies. ISBN: 0-9679208-3-3
Professional Publications, Inc. - The Power to Pass
1001 Solved Surveying Fundamentals Problems (LSSP2), 2nd Edition by Jan Van Sickle, PLS, 1997, 728pp. ISBN 1-888577-12-6 (requested 16 March 2007)
Surveyor Reference Manual, 4th Edition, by Andrew Harbin, PE and George Cole, PE, PLS. 2006, 576pp. ISBN 978-1-59126-044-8 (requested 16 March 2007)
Sales Rep, Joan voice: 800-426-1178 x115
Evaluation and Desk Copy Request Form
Autodesk Press
Harnessing AutoCAD 2008 by Thomas Stellman and G.V. Krishnan. ISBN: 1428311564 (requested 27 April 2007)
Harnessing AutoCAD 2008 Exercise Manual ISBN: 1428311572 (requested 27 April 2007)
Harnessing AutoCAD 2008 E-Resouce ISBN 1428324275 (requested 27 April 2007)
The Illustrated AutoCAD 2008 Quick Reference
Packt Publishing
Free Review Copies - send email to reviewrequest@packtpub.com
Moodle E-Learning Course Development by William Rice (requested 12 May 2007)
Infinity Science Press

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

23 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Apress, Inc
Obtain companion eBook for only \$10, visit www.apress.com/promo/tendollars/
2855 Telegraph Avenue, #600. Berkeley CA 94705.
Sales Rep - Lawrence Tam, voice: 510-549-5930x120, fax: 510-549-5939, email: lawrence.tam@apress.com
Pro Windows PowerShell, by Hristo Deshev, ISBN-10: 1590599403
Pro Web 2.0 Mashups Remixing Data and Web Services by Raymond Yee, ISBN10: 1-59059-858-X
Beginning Ajax with PHP by Lee Babin, ISBN10: 1-59059-667-6
Beginning Google Maps Applications with PHP and AJAX by Michael Purvis, ISBN10: 1-59059-807-9 (requested 31 May 2008 for CEE498X - Using Google
Maps and Earth in Civil Engineering)
Android Essentials by Chris Haseman, ISBN13: 978-1-4302-1064-1 (obtained 22 May 2009)
Pro Android: Developing Mobile Applications for G1 and Other Google Phones, by Sayed Y. Hashimi, ISBN13: 978-1-4302-1596-7 (requested 29 April 2009)
Beginning Joomla!, Second Edition by Dan Rahmel, ISBN13: 978-1-4302-1642-1 (requested 29 April 2009)
Beginning Spatial with SQL Server 2008 by Alastair Aitchison. January 2009. ISBN: 978-1-4302-1829-6
Ten Speed Press
Request Desk Copies by submitting requests on UNLV letterhead and mailing or faxing to Ten Speed Press
What Color is Your Parachute? 2009 - A Practical Manual for Job-Hunters and Career- Changers by Richard Nelson Bolles, ISBN 1580089313
What Color is Your Parachute? For Teens - Discovering Yourself, Defining Your Future by Richard Nelson Bolles and Carol Christen. ISBN 1580087132
HTML Utopia: Designing without Tables using CSS by Rachel Andrew and Dan Shafer ISBN: 978-0-975-24027-4. Requestd 5/31/2009
Sample Chapters: HTMLUtopiaUsingCSS2-sample.pdf or visit sitepoint directly
Android Application Development: Rough Cuts Version by Rick Rogers and John Lombardo. Requested 4/28/2009
Hello, Android by Ed Burnette. Requested 4/28/2009
Practical PostgreSQL by John C. Worsley and Joshua D. Drake. Requested 4/28/2009
Examination/Desk Copy Request Form or call 800-998-9938 or send email to adoption@oreilly.com
http://members.oreilly.com
Windows PowerShell Cookbook by Lee Holmes, 1st Edition October 2007
Desktop GIS by Gary E. Sherman, 1st Edition May 2008.
Google Maps Hacks by Rich Gibson and Schuyler Erle, 1st Edition January 2006.
CommonsWare
wares@commonsware.com if questions.
The Busy Coder's Guide to Android Development
The Busy Coder's Guide to Advanced Android Development
Android Programming Tutorials
The Pragmatic Bookshelf
GIS for Web Developers: Adding Where to Your Web Applications by Scott Davis with davisworld.org. ISBN-13: 978-0-9745-1409-3.
Hello, Android: Introducing Google's Mobile Development Platform by Ed Burnette. ISBN-13: 978-1-93435-617-3 Received May 2009.
Elsevier
Matlab: A Practical Introduction to Programming and Problem Solving
Essential Matlab for Engineers and Scientists
Springer
Sales Representative - John.Woolsey@springer.com and jtwoolsey@gmail.com
request 60-day review of textbooks - orders-ny@springer.com
Global Positioning System - Theory and Practice, 5th Edition, 2001 by Hofmann-Wellenhof, B., Lichtenegger, H., and Collins, J.
Points Verlag
Working with Projections and Datum Transformations in ArcGIS by Dr. Werner Flacke and Birgit Kraus. ISBN: 3-9808463-5-0. Amazon listing.
SDC Publications
service@sdcpublications.com, 913-262-2664
Lisa Schulteis is the sales rep
Self Publishing
BookBaby
How To Shoot, Edit, and Embed Video On Your Website or Ebook by Brian Felsen, President of CD Baby | BookBaby | HostBaby
Createspace
CreateSpace account number 802510
Set up your own personalized store front at Createspace for free to sell your books online. They will take a 20% commission on each sale.
Cannot package a DVD with the CreateSpace book
Create space has different shipping costs from Amazon
Book Shipping Rates

## Amazon Customer Service 866-216-1072

Free shipping with Amazon Advantage program

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

24 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Amazon Author Central

Amazon Advantage charges 55% in addition to the fixed costs of the book which is charged by CreateSpace
Non-Profit (501c3) organizations may also apply for the Advantage Professional rate Advantage - Frequently asked Questions. Appears the per-unit retail
price of each must be at least \$35.
Pro Plan costs \$39 per title and \$5 annual fee per title. So if I have 4 titles, cost is 4 x \$39 = \$156 and annual fee is 4 x \$5 = \$20
Save \$0.65 on fixed charges for black and white books with 110-828 pages.
Save \$0.008 on Per page charge for black and white books with 110-828 pages.
Fixed Costs

Cover Design

## Shelley Hitz, email: shelley@self-publishing-coach.com Self Publishing Coach

Recommendations
Sell on Amazon Advantage using CreateSpace Pro Plan
\$25 book
Pros - no inventory, Amazon handles everything
Cons - \$17.05 goes to Amazon and CreateSpace, leaves \$2.475 for Sheo and \$2.475 for Jeff
Need to search how to sell videos on youtube

Class Roster
2010 Summer Semester - Instructor Jeff Jensen
Student Name

Group Name

Preferred Email

Picture
.jpg

Affleck, Lynn

CEE668

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

25 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Balizan, Efraim

CEE468

Bowman, Ross

CEE468

Damian, Tomasita

CEE468

tdamian@lvcva.com
tomasitaleyba@hotmail.com

Dizon, Robert

CEE468

rdizon25@gmail.com

.jpg

.jpg
Glaser, Danney

CEE668

Glembin, Christine

CEE468

christine.glembin@gmail.com

## Guerrero, Dieremi "Jeremy" CEE468

Johnson, Dustin

CEE468

prospector85@juno.com

Mitchell, James

CEE668

CEE468

Osborne, Bryan

CEE668

bosborne@cleanwaterteam.com

.jpg
Turkson, Richard

CEE468

## 2010 Spring Semester - Instructor Jeff Jensen

Student Name

Group Name

Preferred Email

Picture
.jpg

Agbleze, Godwin

CEE468

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

26 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

.jpg
Cobb, Christine

CEE468

.jpg
Dennis, Regina

CEE668

.jpg
Espinoza-Levy, Stephanie CEE468

.jpg
Hollis, Dominique

CEE468

.jpg
Palmore, Shalonda

CEE468

.jpg

CEE668

.jpg
Venkatesan, Arjun Krishna CEE668

.jpg

CEE468

.jpg
Zografos, Laken

CEE468

Student Name

Group Name

Preferred Email

## Abu Afifeh, Omar

CEE668

omarafifeh@gmail.com or

CEE668

Baca, Aaron O.

CEE468

Bray, Theresa

CEE468

bbterri728@hotmail.com or

Picture

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

27 of 378

Castell, Michelle

CEE668

michellecastell@gmail.com

Garcia, Carlos

CEE468

car04g@yahoo.com or

Gwerder, Joe

CEE468

jgwerder@hotmail.com

Jarquin, Tania

CEE468

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Khan, Farhan and UNLV Portfolio CEE668

Koscien, Monika

CEE468

koscien@yahoo.com

Linn, Yan

CEE468

Mack, Clarisse

CEE468

clarisse.mack@gmail.com or

Newell, Timothy

CEE468

Phillips, Richard

CEE468

Robinson, Sean

CEE468

## Torres, Maria "Gaby"

CEE468

gaby_t60@hotmail.com or

## Tun, Okkar Wynn

CEE468

okwynntun@gmail.com

## Tuni, Haro Godana

CEE468

tuni762002@gmail.com

Zeleke, Haileab B

CEE668

haileabbelayzeleke@yahoo.com

## 2009 Spring Semester - Instructor Jeff Jensen

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

28 of 378

Student Name

Group Name

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Preferred Email

CEE468

ALHWAYEK JOHNNY

CEE468

BERTA BIRUKTAIT

CEE468

biruktaitk@hotmail.com

COTTE DANIELLE

CEE468

ELKOUZ MARK

CEE468

markelkouz542@yahoo.com

FINO RICARDO

CEE468

CEE468

fordy357@gmail.com

FULLER JAMES

CEE468

fullerjames2@gmail.com

GATTI JOSEPHINE

CEE668

josie.gatti@gmail.com

GREEN MICHAEL

CEE668

HE JING

CEE668

JAMES MAJROOH

CEE668

## KRIZMANIC CHRISTOPHER CEE468

cjk25_99@hotmail.com

MELAKU GETACHEW

gmelaku@gmail.com

CEE468

Picture

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

29 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

PEARCE JAMIE

CEE468

PERESSINI SOPHIA

CEE468

RONG RONG

CEE668

rongrongxmu@gmail.com

SHRESTHA ELEEJA

CEE668

SUERDIECK DANA

CEE468

dsuerdieck85@yahoo.com

TENNER BRANDI

CEE468

TSO TIN

CEE668

tinctso@gmail.com

WILLIAMS DONN

CEE468

## 2008 Spring Semester - Instructor Jeff Jensen

class email: cee468spring08@gmail.com
Student Name

Group Name

Preferred Email

## CASEY UNDERWOOD CEE468

ERIN NELSON

CEE468

JAIME REDDIC

CEE468

KEVIN BROSS

CEE468

NATHANIEL GEE

CEE468

Picture

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

30 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## PAVEL KONTCHAKOV CEE468

SANGIN CHOI

CEE468

choi_sangin@yahoo.com

SUMIT PURI

CEE468

## 2007 Summer Semester - Instructor Jeff Jensen

Student Name

Group Name

Preferred Email

ALEMU ZELALEM

CEE468

AMATO JOHN

CEE468

BARENG SARAH

CEE468

BOLTON CHRISTOPHER

CEE468

## CHUNG BACH SAN

CEE668

COBB CHRIS

CEE468

COLE SARAH

CEE468

FEICA DIANNA

CEE468

FREY GLENN

CEE468

GLORIANI ARLENE

CEE468

Picture

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

31 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

GONZALEZ EDUARDO

CEE468

GORDON NICHOLAS

CEE468

HARRIS DEREK

CEE468

KALSI NITIN

CEE668

LIAO ELYSON

CEE668

MANGAOANG FRANCIS

CEE468

MEJIA ERNESTO

CEE468

MORGAN RYAN

CEE468

MORRIS ALVIN

CEE468

CEE468

NORCOTT HESTON

CEE468

OLDS ROBERT

CEE468

PETRIE JOHN

CEE468

PIPARO, TIMOTHY

CEE468

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

32 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

RAJABDEEN, MOHAMED

CEE468

ROSS, TREVOR

CEE468

SEHDEV VIKAS

CEE468

THUNG MICHELLE

CEE468

THURMAN EDWARD

CEE468

VERON WARREN

CEE468

## 2007 Spring Semester - Jeff Jensen

Name

Class

Email

BARAJAS IVANA

BARBER KAYLI

BOULTON SHAUN

CETRULO JOSEPH-PETER

CIRRINICIONE THOMAS

CROFT DUSTIN

CUNNINGHAM MICHAEL

GLENN BRYAN

GRAVES KEVIN

HANSEN ROBERT

KALAWE ALEXANDER

KOBAYASHI LYNDEN

LOWE KIMBERLY

MAXFIELD DONALD

NELSON TY

PARKER CHRISTOPHER

PIPARO TIMOTHY

ROBINSON RICHARD

SUAREZ LUIS

PARKER CHRISTOPHER

WATSON CASSANDRA

WILSON KELLY

WOODS SUNSHINE

ZENHARI TAHMINEH

FRAME JAMES

HOLUR-VENKATESH NANDA

Picture

## ISUKAPALLI BALA GEETHA VAN CEE668 ISUKAPAL@UNLV.NEVADA.EDU

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

33 of 378

KAIPARAMBIL ANCILA

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

KAIPARAMBIL AVINASH

KUMARESAN VIDHYA

LI XIN

PAN FENG

PULI ANIL

RESCOBER JOHN

VIRUPAKSHA VINAY

XU

## 2006 Spring Semester - Jeff Jensen

Name
AFFLECK FERRIN

Class

Email

Picture

ALEMAYEHU BISRAT

ASTARITA CHRISTIANA

CHEUNG PAK HO

FERGUSON SCOTT

GARDNER TODD

HALL NATHAN

KALINA BRIAN

LETUS KEITH

MCAVOY JOHN

MCNAUGHT HOLLY

NUESCA JENNIFER

PARKE JARAH

## PENNINGTON LINDYBEN CEE 468 PENNING2@UNLV.NEVADA.EDU

REMYNSE KEVIE

RICE JACELYN

SEELEY JONATHAN

TERRILL DOUGLAS

VALDEZ RAUL

WASSERMAN BRIAN

ZENHARI TAHMINEH

CHEN YANJIE

GROTH DARREN

JIN XIAOHUI

NYAGAH PERIS

SUTTANURUK JAKKRIT

TECLE MEDHANIE

VISHNAN GOPALAN

XIE GANG

Name

Class

Email

BACKLUND OLIVIA

## CALIMLIM MARIA CAMILLE

COSTELLO JENNER

CREEL JULIA

CREW JEREMY

DAVIES ROBERT

FENTON JUSTIN

HILLS ZACHARY

LUONG KELLIN

Picture

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

34 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## MANZO-MICOLETTI ZACHARY CEE 468 MANZOMIC@NEVADA.EDU

PATCHETT JESSE

PENDERGRAFT DEREK

VEST LARI

WELCH CHARITI

BETLEY DAVID

CRUZ RAUL

KWIGIZILE VALERIAN

LIANG XIAOJUN

MCBRIDE JEFFERY

RODRIGUES GEISA

SU QIUHONG

VANAPALLI VINAY

XI PING

YOUNG RAYMOND

Name

## Class Email Picture

GEISENDORFER, CODY A

CEG468

KAGIMOTO, MICAH K

CEG468

MALOY, VERNAL E

CEG468

ROTH, MAGDALEN

CEG468

SCELSA, NICOLE M

CEG468

YAZZIE, ERICA J

CEG468

DONG, WEIQUAN

CEG668

HANSEN, SCOTT P

CEG668

LU, QINGGUANG

CEG668

MUDIGONDA, ANIL P

CEG668

PARIMI, VENU

CEG668

RANDALL, MARC H

CEG668

RAWHOUSER, HANS N

CEG668

WIESNER, DANIEL A

CEG668

## WONGCHAVALIDKUL, NATACHAI CEG668

2001 Spring Semester - Jeff Jensen
Name

CEG468

BURY, PHILLIP T

CEG468

## COSKEY, CHRISTOPHER D CEG468

GAISSER, THERESA M

CEG468

LIAO, LIH-NAN

CEG468

MENDENHALL, RYAN M

CEG468

PULGARIN, JOHAN M

CEG468

RYAN, PETER A

CEG468

## SIMPSON, CHRISTOPHER R CEG468

TAYLOR,TARA L

CEG468

BITTLE,DONALD C

CEG668

DANGETI,MUKUNDA R

CEG668

DUNNING, MICHAEL R

CEG668

EDWARDS,SHERRIE L

CEG668

GARCIA, MARIA-ELENA

CEG668

KHATER, MAJED A

CEG668

RYAN,ROSLYN

CEG668

VASUDEVAN,VINOD

CEG668

ZAGUSTIN, ELENA

CEG668

Name

## Class Email Picture

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

35 of 378

DINEEN, JASON B

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

CEG468

## KARANIKOLAS, DEMETRIUS K CEG468

KWON, OH-SANG

CEG468

LI, ZHENG

CEG468

LUDWIG, MICHAEL J

CEG468

VIZCARRA, CARMEN G

CEG468

WALKER, PHILIP M

CEG468

WEAVER, ANDREW C

CEG468

BURKA, SEIFEDIN M

CEG668

LUK, SIMON Y

CEG668

PHOMNINH, KONGKEO D

CEG668

WOYTON, JEAN-PAUL

CEG668

Name
ALLISON, TERI L

## Class Email Picture

CEG468

BRICE, TRAYCE L

CEG468

CHO,CHRIS H

CEG468

CROTCHETT, TREASEA

CEG468

FALCON, RAYMOND A

CEG668

HUDSON, REDGE R

CEG668

LICON, ANA L

CEG668

MASON, QUINCY A

CEG668

NYTKO, BILLY J

CEG668

## STRINGHAM, KATHERINE L CEG668

TUNE, ERIC J

CEG668

BECKER, JON R

CEG668

LONG, ANNEMARIE K

CEG668

TUNE, ERIC J

CEG668

Name
COOPER,JAMES B

CEG468

## GONZALES, AMANDA L CEG468

PAPPA, DARRIN J

CEG468

PATRY, MICHAEL J

CEG468

DARQUEA, CHRIS J

CEG668

HOOSHMAND, RAY F

CEG668

1998 Fall Semester - Instructor Robert Puterski
Name

## Class Email Picture

BORREGO, ABEL

CEG468

CORTEZ, ROSA A

CEG468

DEASON, JEFFREY D

CEG468

DEASON, SARA

CEG468

NARDONI,RALPH F JR

CEG468

OAKLEY,JESSE III

CEG468

PRESCIA,EMILEE B D

CEG468

WALLACE, GEORGE I

CEG468

ORENDAIN, LEO E

CEG668

PECKHAM, DAVID B

CEG668

ROE,JOHN K

CEG668

ROWE, CURTIS D

CEG668

1998 Spring Semester - Instructor ROBERT PUTERSKI
Name

## Class Email Picture

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

36 of 378

BAKHSHI, ASSIA

CEG468

CARR, MARY A

CEG468

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## FREDERICKSEN, RAYMOND F CEG468

HAYES, ALISON

CEG468

KAJKOWSKI, JOANNA

CEG468

KOLBER, MITCHELL S

CEG468

MILLER, THOMAS D

CEG468

NEYRINCK, KIM F

CEG468

STRUBE, GREGORY M

CEG468

WHITTAKER, ANDREW E

CEG468

CUI, ZHENZHONG

CEG668

DUNFORD, LORRAINE L

CEG668

MARKEL, RALPH W

CEG668

MENON, RANJIT

CEG668

## PARK, CHANG HWAN

CEG668

PARK, MONTE L

CEG668

VIGGATO, JASON C

CEG668

WALKER, JODY A

CEG668

Grades are always due on the Tuesday following the last final exam by 4:00pm. Please check with your units, as they may have set an earlier due date than the Registrar's
Office
L-Number/PIDN: L000577789
any problems, contact Ruth.Garay@unlv.edu, voice 702-895-3372 or Jim, voice 702-895-0892
College of Engineering Email: http://mail.egr.unlv.edu
UNLV Email: http://rebelmail.unlv.edu
Web Campus Support
Call the OIT Help Desk at 702-895-0777 and use option 2 for Web Campus
Courses should automatically be the first day of class but can request them to be added sooner, send an email to ithelp@unlv.edu and use a subject "adding a course onto
web campus account"
How do I add a teaching assistant to the web campus account?
How do I use a login besides my L# (L000577789) and normal-web?
C#: C000136261
Employee ID: 000074476
CSN Webmail: webmail.csn.edu
CSN email: jeffery.jensen@csn.edu and voice: 702-651-4947 (Bob Diaz)
FERPA Online Training completed on 12/15/2011
Autodesk Training Videos
CSN VPN Account
https://access.csn.edu
H:\ Drive, need to map a network drive to \\otscyfs01.csn.edu\users\jeffery.jensen
J:\ Drive, need to map a network drive to \\otscyfs01.csn.edu\users\departments

## UNLV Computer Resources and TBE Computer Labs

Surveying Equipment Office
CEB Room 184 - administered by Coloniel Allen Henderson, allen.henderson@unlv.edu, voice: 895-5314.
UNLV College of Engineering Room TBE-B367
Computers: 32 for students & 1 for instructor
TBE-B367 Lab Setup: 9 computers on north wall, 7 computers on south wall, and 2 rows of 8 computers in middle of lab.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

37 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## TBE-A311 lab monitors, Tel 702-895-4236

Matthew Buk - Computer Facilities Supervisor, matthew.buk@unlv.edu, Voice: 702-895-2459, mobile: 702-525-7306. Contact if issues with TBE-B367 lab computers.
Office TBE-B126
UNLV NetStorage
Need a Rebel Card from the Student Union before a Novell Account (OIT Student Computer Account)
PTI can obtain a rebel card no sooner than two weeks after the start of the semester, visit RebelCard Services at SU 118 with a photo ID.
If not registered for classes, then account will be deactived. This is checked in the Fall and Spring, a few weeks after the beginning of the semester
After 2 years of the student no longer enrolled at UNLV, then the account is deleted
UNLV Web Email
Chinam.Seto@unlv.edu voice: 895-0783
incoming mail server: domino7.unlv.edu
outgoing: based on your internet service provider
Cyndi Backstrom - cyndi.backstrom@unlv.edu, Voice: 702-895-0435. Contact if issues with Campus Computing Services Support login username and password,
NetStorage, and network drive (H: and L:)
To transfer files to H: drive - ftp complabs.nevada.edu (home directory is /VOL1/USERS/FACULTY/Jeff Jensen) username: Jeff Jensen, password: Normal
To transfer files which can be downloaded from the internet, use Netstorage
Maxine Franks, Campus Computing Services, 895-0777, maxine.franks@unlv.edu. Contact if issues with Faculty homepage. Supervisor to Cyndi Backstrom
College of Engineering Computers
Dawid Zydek, Ph.D. Systems Administrator with the College of Engineering. Dawid.Zydek@unlv.edu, phone: 702-895-5897 for ftp faculty.egr.unlv.edu or
Problems with www.ce.unlv.edu, contact Trevor Wilcox, wilcox@me.unlv.edu or wilcox@nrcc.unlv.edu Steve Frazer, Senior Systems Administrator, College of
Engineering, TBE B-378C, Voice: 702-895-1563 (staff@egr.unlv.edu)
Online Account Application
To transfer files to ftp student.egr.unlv.edu /homes/cewww/Courses/
General questions for Campus Computing Services: ithelp@unlv.edu
UNLV OIT Student Help Desk - 702-895-0761, email: studenthelp@unlv.edu
Cannot link a webpage to any files store on the L: drive, must authenticate using NetStorage
Kody Kearns provides support on faculty webspace accounts, email: Kody.Kearns@unlv.edu voice: 702-895-5882, Contact if issues with Faculty homepage. Has a
Solaris 10 Sun Server with about 160 GB available. As of July 2007, working on a better backup system so still need to keep a local copy.
Printers and Plotters
College of Engineering Plotter is stored in Dr. Piechota's student lab TBE-B107
CBC B131 has an 11x17 printer
Computer Science Printer (TBE-B361)
get 100 copies/prints free per semester. To add more see John Kowalski (email: johnmk@cs.unlv.edu voice: 702-895-1407 building TBE office B378E)
Manual duplex printing, paper side you want to print on (e.g. blank side) is placed in the tray faced down with the top of the page towards the front of the
printer.
All lab computers have Deep Freeze by Faronics installed. "No matter what changes a user makes to a workstation, simply restart to eradicate all changes and reset the
computer to its original state...Placing no restrictions on a user's ability to access all system resources..." You can install any software, as long as it doesn't require a reboot
to run. Once done with the software, just restart the computer and the software is automatically removed.
ESRI Site License managed by Susan Bunyan with SCS (email: susan_bunyan@nshe.nevada.edu, voice: 702-895-4582)
Request ESRI software to be installed at UNLV ESRI Customer Service - Beth Manion 888-377-4575x1887 to obtain license codes Tutorial on Licensing Server Based
ESRI Products Peter Dunkley is the UNLV contact to borrow the ESRI media.
UNLV Representative for ESRI Software and Virtual Campus Code Requests - Jaye Rodriguez. Email: jaye.rodriguez@unlv.edu, Tel 702-895-0736, Fax 702-895-0797
Title - Agency Program Information Specialist II with Campus Computing Services. Darrell Lutey. Email: darrell.lutey@ccmail.nevada.edu, Tel 702-895-0763, Office
CBC-B130 with Campus Computing Services
UNLV College of Civil Engineering Administration
Levia Lanier, Office Assistant. Voice: 702-895-3701. Secretary for Dr. Neumann
Neal J. Griffith, Administrative Assistant II. Email: neal@ce.unlv.edu, Voice: 702-895-3701, Fax: 702-895-3936. Contact for textbook orders
UNLV Official Colors
UNLV Surplus Warehouse
Dennis
get used computers for \$60
surplus warehouse open 2:00-4:00pm every 2nd and 4th Tuesday to UNLV employees. Need an IDR form to obtain equipment.
surplus warehouse open 1:30-4:00pm every 2nd and 4th Thursday to the public.
email: property@unlv.edu
contact: 702-895-5384
TBE B367 lab schedule - contact scheduling@unlv.edu
Ken English - Academic Scheduling Coordinator, Office of the Registrar, voice: 702-895-4044, fax: 702-895-4987
Raelynn Lee, Assistant Registrar of Curriculum and Scheduling, (702) 895-2980 (702) 895-1118, email: raelynn.lee@unlv.edu
UNLV Register - Weekly Room Grid for Building: TBE and Room: B367

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

38 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

instructor in the previous class.
Software Install Requests to Matt Buk
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

## DVD and CD burning software (Sept 2010)

Google SketchUp 7 (requested 30 Aug 2010)
Fix problem of Adobe Acrobat license, even when Photoshop is opened first (Aug 2010)
ArcGIS Server DVD (requested 24 June 2010)
Microsoft Live Update 1.5 (email request to Matt on 9 July 2010)
\TBC_v2_30_Installation_Files.zip)
7. DVD Player in the lab - Matt installed VLC Media Player (listed as VideoLAN in the start menu)
Completed Software Installs
1. 2010 Aug 30: Google Earth Pro 5.2 (verbal request to Matt on 7 July 2010)
2. 2010 Aug 30: Civil 3D 2011 in TBE-B367 and A311
3. 2010 Aug 30: Visual Studio 2010 in TBE-B367 and A311
4. 2010 Aug 30: Upgrade Safe Software to version 2010
UNLV WebCampus\Blackboard
UNLV WebCampus Support: webctadmin@unlv.edu, phone 702-895-0777
WebCampus Support Center (available 24/7) phone 866-846-7088
IT WebCampus Open Labs at UNLV - Fridays 9-11am at CBC C307 stop by to receive one on one support from UNLV's IT Staff (Kody Kearns or Yvette
WebCampus training sessions
WebCampus Online Assistance
WebCampus Questions
1. How do I post the homework solutions so my teaching assistant can easily grade the assignments but not have the students see the answers?
2. I have my students upload an image showing their work. How can I have Blackboard automatically display the image instead of having to download it and then use
photoshop to view it?
3. How do I make groups in my grade book? For example, I have a final exam of 10 questions, do I have to make an entry of each question in the grade book to
record how they did?
UNLV TV
Contacts
Jennifer Ream, Senior Producer, voice: 702-895-1542, email: jennifer.ream@unlv.edu (emailed on 28 May 2010)
CSN
James McCoy, email: james.mccoy@csn.edu, voice: 702-651-5058, Department of Communication, Chairperson. Ask about using the Media Studio (emailed from
jeffery.jensen@csn.edu on 28 May 2010)
Rick Marks, email: rick.marks@csn.edu, voice: 702-651-7556, Department of Communication - Journalism & Media Studies (emailed on 28 May 2010)
Distance Education
Contacts
Valerie Nehmer (email: valerie.nehmer@unlv.edu), Administrative Assistant 702-895-0708.
Mark Fink, Acting Director of Distance Education (mark.fink@unlv.edu or 702-895-0334)
FAQ
1. Is Distance Education (DE) a live video broadcast or a web video? It is streaming video which is done by DE and available anytime to the students
2. DE pays the instructor \$1500 to develop the course and it comes from the Distance Education budget or Provost budget. FTEs go to the Engineering department.
Updates to the course are done on a 2 year basis. Pay is negotiable with DE. DE courses cost an extra \$25 per credit hour to the student. All other fees go to their
regular account.
3. Every one to two years my software (ArcGIS, AutoCAD, etc.) gets updated. Can I plan to upgrade a class each summer for \$1500?
4. When the Distance Education course is complete, do I (part time instructor) still get paid to teach the class through the regular College of Engineering account or
does Distance Education pay my PTI salary?

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

39 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## 5. Distance Education Instructional Salary and Incentives Policy

Practice II - DE pay faculty member \$1500 to develop a new course
Practice IV - DE pay faculty member an additional \$350 per credit to teach off-load class. Paid only the first time the course is offered.
Practice V - on-load then the department should receive \$650 per credit hour only the first time the course is offered.
Official DE Policies
Section 3. Significant Use
Section 7. Distribution of Income - Author shall receive 60% of net income from copyrightable work. Author's department shall receive 25% of the net income.
Remaining 15% goes to the UNLV Intellectual Property Officer. Is my department College of Engineering or Distance Education?
Distance Education Instructional Designer assigned to the College of Engineering is - Kevin.Wilcoxon@unlv.edu voice: 702-895-2445
Distance Education Video Studio manager - James.Choe@unlv.edu voice: 702-895-0530
Selling Textbooks and Videos
How to Get UPC Barcodes for Your Products from The Wall Street Journal
GS1 US pay an initial fee of \$750 and then an annual maintenance fee of at least \$150
BuyABarCode.com will resell UPC codes for less than \$100
Standard UNLV Class Schedule Times
UNLVStandardSchedulingTimes.pdf
UNLV Wireless
Connect to UNLV not the UNLV-Secure

## Windows Live Mesh

http://explore.live.com/windows-live-mesh
Not available for Windows XP, need to use Windows Live Essentials for Windows XP instead
GIS, CAD and Surveying Lab in RAJ271A
Equipment
Dell OptiPlex GX270 Computers (C2L2131, 61DHM31)
1 GB Memory
P4 2.60GHz Processors
40GB IDE Hard drives (motherboard has 2 SATA ports)
Data Ports: D-45 and D-46 are inside the room, D-118 is outside
Voice Ports: V-20 is inside, V086 is outside
Server - Windows Server 2008 R2
domain: UNLVGIS
Local Network
Netgear wireless router: FVS318
Primary DNS: 131.216.22.15
Secondary DNS: 131.216.22.17

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

40 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Tutoring
UNLV Tutoring
Free to students
Tutoring@unlv.edu or call 702-774-4623
Tutor earns \$10-\$13 an hour depending upon experience. As of Spring 2010 all tutors only earn \$10 an hour.
I only give a recommendation for 1) those students which have previously taken my course and earned an A, 2) those students which volunteer as a teaching lab
assistant, and 3) those students demonstrating a willing to serve others
Rimi Marwah, Tutoring Director, email: rimi.marwah@unlv.edu, voice: 702-895-3177, Office: Academic Success Center (SSC-103)
Does the Tutoring lab have access to computers? If yes, can software be installed?
Nesley Orochena (mobile 702-401-0022, direct work: 702-652-3035 main work: 702-652-1110) Tutoring Hours
Sunday 4:00-8:00pm 2nd floor of the Library
Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday 6:00-8:00pm also on the 2nd floor of the Library
no computer lab in the Dining Commons, need to bring your own laptop or Nesley will use his own.
Subjects: AutoCAD and Civil3D (CEE301 and CEE110L), GIS (CEE468), Surveying (CEE121) and Waste Water (CEE450)
Sang In Choi Tutoring Hours
still to be determined
Some Tips for Effective Reading by Dr. Chad Berry with Berea College
Identify any questions you have about the reading (make notes in the textbook with a pencil)
Identify key terms and concepts
Seek to identify the author's main points. Answer the question, "So what is the author trying to say?"
Evaluate. Did it work?
Divide up large chunks of reading and set daily goals to cover the material
Pay attention to introductions and conclusions
Constantly ask yourself questions? "What does this have to do with me?" "What was the main point of that section?"
One on One Tutoring with GIS Engineering
Acrobat Connect is no longer available as of 15 June 2010
http://connectnow.acrobat.com/jefferyjjensen password: normal, free with 2 participants

Work Study
Student Interns
1. Bert Franco (franco.humberto@hotmail.com) Fall 2011/Spring 2012 for CEE121 and 301
2. Robert Kazarin (robert_kazarin@yahoo.com) Fall 2011
3. Travis Horlacher (tshorlacher@gmail.com) Fall 2012 for CEE301
4. Matt Godinho (GODINHOM@UNLV.NEVADA.EDU) Fall 2012 for CEE121
5. John Gonzales (johnmogonzales@gmail.com)
Procedure
1. Fill out FAFSA Financial Aid application as soon as possible. Work Study funds are limited and run out, not like Pell Grants. Also the FAFSA is need based, so if
your income is at the poverty level, then likely will qualify for work study.
Need to apply for the PIN, take 2-3 days in the mail
Forbes - The Financial Aid Game
2. Graduate - Be admitted in Graduate Program. Must be degree seeking student to qualify. Also have a minimum GPA, think 3.0 to be admitted in Graduate college.
3. College of Engineering, not the individual departments like Civil Engineering has to approve the work study since 25% of the work study payroll is done by the
College.
4. Kathryn "Kathy" Levasseur administers the Work Study for the Civil Engineering Department.
Brandon Hernandez, Work Study Program. UNLV Financial Aid and Scholarships. voice: 702-895-3939, fax: 702-895-1353, email: brandon.hernandez@unlv.edu
Fall 9/1/2011 to 12/31/2011 Earnings code FW1
Spring 1/1/2012 to 5/30/2012 Earnings code FW2
Summer 6/1/2012 to 8/31/2011 Earnings code FW3 (need to apply separately for this)
UNLV Off Campus Work Study Contract
Earn anywhere from \$8.25 per hour to \$12.75 per hour, see UNLV Financial Aid and Scholarships - Regular Student Employment
Off Campus Work Study Program
August 2011. "At this time our institution is not accepting applications for Off Campus employers. To date the administration has not set a definitive date when we
will begin accepting Off Campus applications again." (email from Brandon Hernandez on 19 Aug 2011)
UNLV Career Services - Find an intern. Paul Carpino, Employer Outreach and Internship Coordinator, email: paul.carpino@unlv.edu, voice: 702-895-0612
Info for potential off-campus employers
Agency must be a public nonprofit organization, or
local, state, or federal agency
Need to check into nonprofit organizations, didn't know they can be public or private.
Earn anywhere from \$13 per hour to \$15 per hour - the federal government pays 100 percent of your salary
College of Engineering Work Study
Dean's Office: Maura S. Erickson, Administrative Assistant IV, voice: 702-895-3699, FAX: 702-895-4059, email: maura.erickson@unlv.edu. She said the

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

41 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Department's pay the taxes and 25% of hourly wage for the work study student.
Kathryn "Kathy" Levasseur, email: kathryn.levasseur@unlv.edu, voice: 702-895-1461 is the replacement for Levia.
OIT Work Study
Apply for OIT Student Jobs
Students are paid minimum wage (\$8.25/hr) then if students did an outstanding job, will get \$0.25/hr raise the following semester
Contact Matt Buk (email: matthew.buk@unlv.edu)
UNLV Library Work Study Opportunities
Federal Work Study is required to be hired by the library
Students are paid minimum wage (\$8.25/hr)
UNLV Payroll
Carrie.Martin@unlv.edu is the payroll supervisor. I emailed her the following questions:
Employer does not pay any Federal Income Tax (FIT), this is only paid by the employee.
Work study students are exempt from FICA (6.2% social security, 1.45% medicare)
If non-work study student (rare case) the the employer has to pay the FICA
UNLV has an exempt status from FUTA (Federal Unemployment Tax)
non-work study students, employer has to pay 0.80% State Unemployment Tax (SUTA) rate
Workers' Compensation Insurance rate is 1.5% for all student workers

## Payroll Deduction Information

Federal Income Tax
Social Security (FICA)
FICA Exemption Policy for students enrolled in 6 credit hours, are exempt from Social Security (FICA) payroll tax.
Medicare
Federal Work Study Program
Wikipedia - Work Study
Temple University Work Study
Health Insurance
"...work-study student employees are not given health benefits. They may sign up for it on their own through the Health and Wellness center but they are
responsible for the entire cost." (email from Brandon Hernandez, 19 Aug 2011)
CSN Learn and Earn Program
Emily Rafael, voice: 702-651-4785, email: emily.rafael@csn.edu (out of the office until Tuesday, October 18, 2011)
TRiO Student Support Services, 702-651-4441
Dr. Art Byrd, Vice President of Student Affairs knows about the Learn and Earn Program. voice: 702-651-7374
CSN Grants
Learn and Earn Hourly Contract Information
Former student: Juan Saucedo, juansaucedo39@gmail.com
Gear Up Program
Angel Poe, UNLV Financial Aid and Scholarships, voice: 895-5195, email: angel.poe@unlv.edu
Susan Lee, Valley High School, email: voice: 702-686-7026
Valley High School Team Action Program
Students get release time to work every Tuesday
Las Vegas High School - PAL (Partnership at Las Vegas) Program
Students get release time to work every Wednesday
Student Handbook - PAL Program
Nathan Williams, nbw251@interact.ccsd.net, 702-799-0180 x4010
Lisa Peltz, PAL Program Director, email: peltzli@interact.ccsd.net, class phone: 702-799-0180 x4024
CSN Tech Prep
Leticia Llamas, CSN Tech Prep Coordinator, 702-651-4167, email: leticia.llamas@csn.edu
Architecture - Civil Drafting
Construction Technology - Land Surveyor

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

42 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## How to create a simple web page

Notes on creating a personal webpage at UNLV
create a directory public_html on the H: drive using Windows Explorer. Should end up looking like this, H:\public_html
then create a text file called index.html under this directory. Using a text editor such as NotePad, NotePad++, UltraEdit, etc. type in the following HTML code.

UNLV Student Website Publishing is managed by the Office of Information Technology (OIT)
As of Feb 2009, PHP and MySQL is NOT supported on the student web server. Only support basic HTML pages. Contact Craig Southwick with OIT for more details,
email: craig.southwick@unlv.edu, voice: 702-895-0769, fax: 702-895-5398
To remotely transfer files to the H:\ drive, use NetStorage
Step 1: copy a jpg, gif, or png image into your H:\public_html directory. If doing this from home, will need to use NetStorage to upload the file. Might get a 'This
Connection is Untrusted', just click the 'I Understand the Risks' link and the 'Add Exception...' button. Should then be prompted to enter your Novell User Name and
Try using the UNLV Logos if you don't have an image handy
Step 2: using a text editor such as notepad++ to open your H:\public_html\index.htm file
Step 3: add the following within the body section of the HTML document, <img src="somefilename.jpg" alt="my picture or something" />
Can identify the height and width of the image by opening the image in Microsoft Paint then Image -> Attributes
References
HTML <img> Tag
Using Adobe Dreamweaver to create a simple web page at UNLV
Step 1: Access the folder
Create a folder public_html in your My Documents (H: drive)
Create a file index.html in the folder
Edit the file in notepad and create tags Hello World
Step 2: Launch Dreamweaver
Open the file index.html
Familiarize yourself with 3 View modes: Code, Split and Design.
Write your name in Title box.
Notice the changes in the View modes.
NOTE: Unsaved files opened in Dreamweaver are designated by a star after the filename
Step 3: Building a Template header
Select from menus-> Insert- Table. Rows=3 and Columns=2
Highlight the first row and give a red background color
Highlight 2nd and 3rd row to give a black background color
Highlight the text to give a white color
Create another table Columns=2 and Rows =1
Give a grey color to left column
Create 4 links for Home, In Class, Virtual Campus and GIS Tutorial
Save the file as template.html
Open the file template.html and save as index.html
Insert a table 2 cols 1 row in the content area
In the LHS of inserted column Insert->Image (your picture)
Use Split to break the RHS into multiple rows and write your information
Step 5: Creating page for Inclass homework
Open template.html and save it as inclass.html
In the content area write Day-1, Day-2, Day-3, etc.
Step 6: Creating page for Virtual Campus and GIS Tutorial
Open template.html and save it as vcampus.html
In the content area write Module-1, Module-2, etc.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

43 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Similarly repeat for GIS Tutorial

Highlight In Class and click the folder next to Link in the Properties toolbar
Select the file inclass.html. Click Ok
Step 8: Building Portfolio and submitting homeworks
Create a separate folder for Inclass, Virtaul Campus and GIS Tutorials
Put all the pdf files in their relevant locations
Create a link for files in a similar manner as created for pages

Free and easy way to create and share webpages
Intro: How can you promote yourself to an employer and stand out from the crowd? One way is to show your work on a website of your own! Not only is it easier to
show others, but utlizing the internet is almost a must in todays world! There are many ways this can be done.
A webhost is needed to host a website
graduation, it will no longer be accessible and everything will need to be transfered to another webhost.
Google sites also has a free webhosting service and it does not get removed unless it is removed by the user. This will be used in class and how to create one will be
explained further on.
If you don't like free stuff, then you can always pay for a webhost and webdomain per month. The advantage to that is that there are less restrictions and it will
seem more professional. There are also other free webhosting services out there, but they may require that an advertisement be placed on the page.
How to create a google sites account and what to do with it
1. First, if you do not have a google account, you will need to make one (https://www.google.com/accounts/NewAccount) and verify it by email.

4. Put a site name-something similar to your account name, or a combination of your first and last name so that it is unique but also easily remembered.
5. Type in the verification code and hist "create site" once more.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

44 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

6. If all went well, then you will have a website to host and show your work to others.
7. If you hit edit page near the top right corner, you can edit the page to put some html code.

## 8. visit (http://sites.google.com/site/gisexample2/) for an example of a "portfolio" that would be shown to others.

9. Tips:
Any email domain will work for step 1 (gmail, yahoo, hotmail, etc...). However, if you want to make a gmail account as well, then use this link

## Microsoft Office Live

Microsoft Office Live Meeting
Office Live Meeting Professional - microsoft-hosted web conferencing solution that extends per meeting capacity to a maximum of 1250 participants and features
unlimited storage of shared meeting recordings for 360 days.
Office Live Meeting Standard - microsoft-hosted web conferencing solution with a meeting capacity of 15 participants
Cost is \$5 per user per month with a minimum purchase of 5 users
Office Live is free and aimed at small businesses. This service offers a website, web hosting and web design tools, site traffic reports, a contact management system, and
Live Mesh and Live Desktop
Live Mesh offers 5GB of free storage for files on your Live Desktop (online location in which your Live Mesh folders are stored, so you can access them from the web).
Microsoft Office Live Web Page - Help
Solutions for Office Live
Microsoft Forums: Office Live Small Business - Web Site
Microsoft Office Live Workspace

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

45 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Help

## Classroom format, grading, homework, exams

Classroom format
7:00pm Email Homework Assignments from previous week to the class email
7:05pm Quiz
7:15pm Answer Student Questions (Workbook, homework, lecture)
7:20pm Lecture
7:30pm ArcGIS Creationism
9:00pm Homework Assignments (students free to leave after this)
9:10pm Hands on help until all questions are answered
Description

40%

20

20

20%

20

10

400
200

## GIS Tutorial Workbook Exercises 22%

11

20

220

Final Exam

18%

180

Total

100%

180
1000

A

100%-93%

930

A-

92%-89%

890

B+

88%-86%

860

85%-82%

820

B-

81%-79%

790

C+

78-74%

740

73%-69%

690

C-

68%-65%

650

64%-60%

600

59%-0%

<600

Lecture Homework
Email Rules when submitting answers to homework assignments
Email subject Line must contain class number, type of homework (HW05, VC02, or GTW01) and your name. Example Class 05, HW05, John Doe
Typically must attach a JPEG image or PDF of the homework assignment. Each email must include all the .jpg images for assignments of that week. For example if your
Week 3 home is to do a lecture assignment, virtual campus course and GIS Workbook, then I want one email with 3 attachments instead of 3 emails with one attachment
each.
Homework Attachments
Virtual Campus Certificate - Typically save a jpeg image
GIS Tutorial Workbook - must attach a PDF
Lecture Home - typcially create a pdf for this homework assignment
Always use the same email account when submitting homework. Don't send email assignment from UNLV email account one week, next from a work email account, and
then another time using a personal email account. Use one account only when corresponding with the Instructor.
UNLV College of Engineering Mail Server blocks various attachments. For example Microsoft Word Documents cannot be accepted. Workaround, zip the .doc or convert
to PDF.
Item to email will identified below with the heading Email
Assignments
Lecture Homework 01 for Class #1
Obtain student version of ArcGIS DVD from the instructor

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

46 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Enroll in all the provided virtual campus courses
Recommend to start working on virtual campus course - Learning ArcGIS Desktop
Know how to Transfer files between home/work and UNLV. Recommend using NetStorage, USB Thumbdrive, email or burning a CD
Obtain Required Textbook
Login to webcampus.unlv.edu and make your email and thumbnail picture of yourself public under My WebCampus My Settings, then check the boxes under Public.
Submit the following in Webcampus
What is your user name for the ESRI My Virtual Campus Training
Ensure your email and picture are available to the public in webcampus.unlv.edu
Lecture Homework 02 for Class #2
Webcampus upload a low-resolution, 3D .jpg image from Google Earth showing the following layers:
Create a 3D Thematic Map using the PLSS Meridians shapefile and a text file of the PLSS Initial Points. Should look similar to this
Using Google Earth Pro, import the following ESRI shapefile (.shp)
Text file of PLSS Initial Points (PLSSInitialPoints.csv)
Meridians and Base Lines (zip of shapefile files .shp) from www.geocommunicator.gov, might also try the PLSS (MapServer) and view in ArcMap
ArcIMS server - MeridiansBaseLines.zip

## Lecture Homework 03 for Class #3

WebCampus/Blackboard upload an ArcMap image of the following:
Meridians and Base Lines (zip of shapefile files .shp) from www.geocommunicator.gov ArcIMS server - MeridiansBaseLines.zip
use the GEOCOMM_1 as the data label
use 50% transparency

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

47 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Add Text file of PLSS Initial Points (PLSSInitialPoints.csv)

Lecture Homework 04 for Class #4
ArcMap Layout - PDF map of UNLV (10 pts)
GIS Layers
C:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\Source\StreetCenterline.mdb - Street Centerline Geodatabase, Streets Feature Class
C:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\Source\IndexGrids.mdb - Index Grids Geodatabase, clarktrs_p Feature Class
C:\gisdata\crimage\s08-5\d162\s0816222.tif - Spring 2008 aerial photo of Assessor Book 162 Section 22
Create a graphic around UNLV TBE Engineering Complex
Add a callout label graphic with the value of "UNLV TBE"
Add aerial photo image of UNLV
Create a layout, 8.5x11, landscape orientation using the LandscapeModernInsert.mxt map template
Add marginalia (neatlines, north arrow, legend, title, name)
Label the township, range and section using the clarktrs_p feature class. Use the following expression "T-" & [TOWNSHIP] & "S R-" & [RANGE] & "E Sect
" & [SECTNO]
Use the following Layout Template Traditional Layouts LandscapeModernInset.mxd
Lecture Homework 05 for Class #5
Create a Google Earth .kmz file of the Spring Valley Planned Landuse.
1. Add the Spring Valley Planned Landuse (C:\gisdata\crcomp\carto\PLU-Spring-Valley.lyr) using the symbology from the layer file (.lyr) to ArcMap. The .lyr file
contains Rural Neighborhood Preservation (RNP) Boundary (C:\gisdata\crcomp\shapefil\rnpi_p.shp) and Spring Valley PLU (C:\gisdata\crcomp\shapefil
\spvplu_p.shp)
RNP Boundary use C:\gisdata\crcomp\shapefil\rnpi_p.shp to repair the broken data source instead of C:\gisdata\crcomp\source\rnpi\polygon
ArcINFO coverage
Spring Valley PLU use C:\gisdata\crcomp\shapefil\spvplu_p.shp
2. Use ArcToolbox KML to Layer (Conversion) to convert the .lyr file to .kmz. Open this .kmz file in Google Earth Pro
Create a Google Earth .kmz file of the Clark County Water Reclamation District sewer lines with a pipe diameter of 25 inches or greater.
1. Using the Clark County Water Reclamation District sewer lines (ArcInfo Coverage - C:\gisdata\crsand\source\swsys) create a graduated symbol map based on the
diameter of the sewer line. The larger the line, the larger the symbol.
2. Use Select By Attributes to select all sewer lines with a diameter of 25" or greater. SQL statement will look like this
SELECT * FROM arc WHERE: "DIAMETER" >= 25
3. Create a new shapefile from this selection set. Use ArcToolbox KML to Layer (Conversion) to convert the .lyr file to .kmz. Open this .kmz file in Google Earth Pro
4. NOTE, the projection file is missing from the swsys coverage. Recommend adding the sclmajor feature class from the streetcenterline.mdb geodatabase to a blank
data frame. Then ArcMap will set the projection, that is inherit the projection parameters from the sclmajor feature class.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

48 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Lecture Homework 06 for Class #6

Using ArcMap - Layer To KML, convert sclmajor_l and sclcity_p feature classes from the StreetCenterline.mdb geodatabase
Have the sclcity_p feature class 50% transparent and each city with a unique polygon color
Make sure HTML pop-up is enable so when we click on the polygon in Google Earth, will get a balloon descriptor (infowindow) of the data attributes
Email the URL to your Microsoft Office Live Website
Email (submit via WebCampus/Blackboard) your Google My Maps Link (URL) showing the sclcity_p feature class exported from ArcMap into a KML/KMZ file. Then
ll=36.368222,-114.840088&spn=1.461836,2.463684&z=9
You might have noticed that each feature/record in the shapefile/kml is an entry in Google My Maps and Google Earth. In My Maps, not all the features are displayed so
you might have to go to the next page. This is the reason why Boulder City boundary wasn't being shown in My Maps. If you click to the next page, then you will see
Boulder City but will not see City of Las Vegas, Henderson and North Las Vegas. Solution is to DISSOLVE the sclcity layer to create a multipart feature, so each entity
will only have one feature. Similar to the Hawaii Islands, several islands but only one State.

## Lecture Homework 07 for Class #7

Upload the following PDF to WebCampus/Blackboard
Using ArcMap, create an 11x17 layout page
Use the Raster Catalog of the aerial photo images around UNLV
Add the RTC Bus Stops and Routes
Add a north arrow, scalebar, scale text and title
Export the map document to PDF. Should look similar to this:

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

49 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Lecture Homework 08 for Class #8

Upload a screenshot of Autodesk Civil 3D into WebCampus/Blackboard
Using ArcMap, add the street centerline shapefile
Export to GeoTIFF
Open Civil 3D and MAPIMPORT the street centerline shapefile and MAPIINSERT the Bing Maps GeoTIFF image
Should look similar to this

## Lecture Homework 09 for Class #9

Upload a PDF map to WebCampus/Blackboard with the following
Create an 11x17 map Do a screen shot/capture showing the distance from a parcel with a septic tank to the nearest existing sewer line. Map analysis should look
similar to this

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

50 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

See class notes for the procedure: Example Spatial Join: Distance to Nearest Sewer Line
Lecture Homework 10 for Class #10
Upload a PDF map to WebCampus/Blackboard with the following
Create a map showing the major streets in North Las Vegas, the points showing the NLV Elevation Benchmarks, a north arrow, logo (company or custom created with
Microsoft Paint), scale bar and scaled text. Also include a vicinity map (note the extent rectangles appears to have a bug so the red box might be missing).
Elevation Benchmarks should have label features on, show the elevation of each point. Modify the text symbol to show a halo mask effect.
See class notes on Create x,y,z features in ArcCatalog
Upload a screen shot of the North Las Vegas benchmarks in Google Earth. It should look similar to this

## Lecture Homework 11 for Class #15

Upload a screen shot to WebCampus/Blackboard with the following
Create a map showing the location of civil and structural engineers in Nevada (L:\Jeffery Jensen\RosterEngineers\CE_SE_Residents.xlsx).
see class notes on Interactive Geocoding in ArcGIS 10 and Batch Geocoding using an ArcGIS Online Address Locator
Use Google Earth Pro to perform geocoding on a subset of the professional engineers roster (L:\Jeffery Jensen\RosterEngineers\CE_SE_ResidentsSubset.txt). Submit a
screen shot. Should look similar to this.

## Lecture Homework 12 for Class #16

Lecture Homework 13 for Class #13
Create a PDF of the 3D Analyst Assignment given by Mike Green
Lecture Homework 14 for Class #14
Using the Google Maps - Get Directions, find a route between UNLV, India Palace and Kimley-Horn. This is known as trip chaining by transportation engineers
and 'Add Destination' by Google Maps. Print this to PDF or email a screen shot, should look similar to this.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

51 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Lecture Homework 15 for Class #15

Network Analyst
Create a Map and export as PDF of the results for the shortest path between India Palace at 505 E Twain Ave, Las Vegas NV 89101 and UNLV.

## Lecture Homework 16 for Class #16

Spatial Analyst
Create a shaded relief for Clark County. See class notes - Using Spatial Analyst in ArcMap to create an elevation relief
Lecture Homework 17 for Class #17
Spatial Analyst
Using the USGS Seamless DEM data, clip out a portion of the DEM near Boulder City, NV. Draw a line using a graphic and create a profile. It should look similar
to this:

Course Review
1.
2.
3.
4.

ArcMap - adding base maps (e.g. Bing Maps)
Labeling Features and Annotation

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

52 of 378

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Street Centerlines
Aerial Photos
Water lines
Sewer lines
PLSS (Survey data, initial points, Meridians and Base Lines)
Joins and Spatial Joins
Prints and Plotting - Creating Layouts and Export Maps to PDF
Overview/Vicinity Maps
Query Features and Select Attributes
Symbology and Thematic Maps
Projections (StatePlane Coordinates, UTM, Lat/Long)
Create 2D and 3D Features (points, lines and polygons)
GIS File Formats (shapefiles, geodatabases, KML)
Publish GIS layers on Google Maps
Geocoding
Network Analyst
3D Analyst
Spatial Analyst

Spring 2011 Final Exam is ready as of 5:00pm on Monday, 9 May 2011
Due Date and Time: Saturday, 14 May 2011 by 3:00pm
1. Geocode the address 4000 Spencer St, Las Vegas, NV in ArcMap using the Find tool and the U.S. Address Finder Tele Atlas locator. What book and section does the
point within? (A- book=162 section=14, B- book=162 section=13, C- book=162 section=23, D- book=162 section=24)
Topic: Address Matching and Geocoding - Interactive Geocoding
Datasets: c:\gisdata\crgeodb\source\IndexGrids.mdb - clarktrs polygon feature class in TBE-B367 computer lab or using NetStorage (L:\Jeffery Jensen\GISdata
2. Create a point feature class or Add X/Y Event layer from this dBase IV file ( FinalXYpts.dbf). What letter(s) do these points form?
Learning Objective: Students can create point features from a database using geocoding and the Add X/Y method
3. Create elevation contours from the following digital elevation model (DEM) finaldemunlv.img, finaldemunlv.img.xml, finaldemunlv.rrd This DEM has elevation units of
meters. Using either the 3D Analyst or Spatial Analyst extensions, generate elevation contours with an interval of 50 meters, base contour of 500 meters and z factor of 1.
How many 50 meter elevation contours are created?
Learning Objective: Students can create surfaces/digital terrain models (DTM) and contours
4. Determine the number of points selected within a buffer/selecting by location/selecting by attribute/exporting data.
Given this shapefile, which has been zipped/compressed ( FinalExamGISpts.zip) Select the point feature class which ID = 0 (ID is the field name). Should have 2
points selected. Select all points within an 8 mile buffer of these 2 selected points.
Part 1 - How many points are selected?
Part 2 - Export the selected points from Part 1 as a shapefile. Select points with an attribute value, ID = 18. Should have just 1 point selected. Then select all points
within an 8 mile buffer of this single point. How many points are selected?
Learning Objective: Students can perform spatial analysis/buffers/overlays/spatial joins within ArcMap
5. Give the URL of 3 agencies (e.g. Federal, State, or Local Govt) where you can obtain/download GIS data?
Learning Objective: Students know the various agencies where they can obtain GIS related data
6. From the lecture, 7 different methods or ways were discussed to perform queries in ArcMap. For example, one of them is using the Identify Features tool from the Tools
Toolbar. Please list 4 of them?
Learning Objective: Students can query and join tables in a tabular database
7. Marginalia (e.g. north arrow, legend, scale bar, and so on) is added to the Data View (a.k.a. ModelSpace) or the Layout View (a.k.a. PaperSpace)?
Learning Objective: Students can create plots in ArcMap and know how to add layers, label and symbolize features
8. A blank data frame inherits the projection parameters of the first feature added to it? True or False.
9. Using raster data, that is Aerial Photos, add the UNLV aerial photo to ArcMap ( f0316222.zip). Using your mouse determine the x,y coordinate of the north west corner
of the UNLV parking garage near the Thomas Beam Engineering (TBE) Buildings. Note the x,y coordinates must be in Stateplane Coordinates, Nevada East Zone, Units
10. Routing
Using Google Earth Pro, find the route from UNLV (4505 S Maryland Pkwy, Las Vegas, NV) to CSN West Charleston Campus (6375 W Charleston Blvd, Las
Vegas, NV). Upload a screen shot of the route/path. Topics: Google Earth Routing
Using the ArcGIS Network Analyst Extension, determine the shortest path between these two points. Is it the same route created by Google Earth Pro? Upload a
screen shot of the route/path.
Topics: Build Network Dataset from a Geodatabase Feature Dataset
Using Network Dataset in ArcMap to find the Shortest Path
11. Online Geographic Information (Online GIS)
Using the ArcMap Add Data command, connect to any 3 online GIS servers, that is an ArcGIS Online Server, an WMS Server and an ArcIMS Server.
Upload a screen shot of the Arc Data dialog box showing the connections.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

53 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

12. Using Google My Maps, create a map of the Fire Stations in Clark County using the c:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\Source\EmergencyResponse.mdb geodatabase or download
from Clark County GIS. Symbolize the map using the JURIS field. Need to create a KML/KMZ file. Provide the URL to your My Maps page webpage. Your Google My
Map should look similar to this.

## Virtual Campus Related Questions

13. Which of the following is true about large-scale maps? (see Module 1 of Learning ArcGIS Desktop)
a. You can zoom in closer on small-scale maps than you can on large-scale maps
b. They show a larger area of the earth's surface than small-scale maps
c. They show a smaller area of the earth's surface than small-scale maps
d. You can zoom in closer on large-scale maps than you can on small-scale maps
14. To create a zone of a specific distance around a feature, which tool would you use? (see Module 1 of Learning ArcGIS Desktop)
a. Union
b. Measure
c. Identify
d. Buffer
15. Normalization is the process of dividing one numeric attribute value by another and then mapping the resulting values. True or False? (see Module 2 of Learning ArcGIS
Desktop)
16. Suppose you are creating a feature dataset. What is an easy way to define its spatial reference? (see Module 4 of Learning ArcGIS Desktop)
a. Define the spatial reference yourself.
b. Import the spatial reference from one of the feature classes that will be added to the feature dataset.
c. Import the spatial reference from the geodatabase.
d. Select a predefined geographic or projected coordinate system.
17. In order to create point features from a table of x,y coordinates, which of the following must be true about the table? (see Module 5 of Learning ArcGIS Desktop)
a. The table must be saved as a space-delimited text file.
b. The table must contain separate fields for the x and y coordinates.
c. The table must contain fields for the x,y coordinates and fields for latitude and longitude coordinates.
d. The table must be saved as a .csv file.
18. A Lakes layer has a MAX_DEPTH attribute that stores each lake's maximum depth. Which query expression would select lakes with a depth of 50 meters or greater? (see
Module 6 of Learning ArcGIS Desktop)
a. MAX_DEPTH + 50
b. 50 < MAX_DEPTH > 100
c. MAX_DEPTH > 50
d. MAX_DEPTH => 50
19. In ArcGIS, what do you call the virtual page on which you design a map? (see Module 8 of Learning ArcGIS Desktop)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

54 of 378

a.
b.
c.
d.

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Template
Map area
Layout
Data frame

## ESRI Virual Campus

INSTRUCTIONS FOR STARTING A COURSE:
------------------------------------------------Step 0: obtain your 14-character Course Access Code from the instructor
ESRI Virtual Campus
ESRI Virtual Campus Courses available for UNLV students
UNLV Representative for ESRI Software and Virtual Campus Code Requests - Vanessa Nagata, IT Technician V, voice: 702-895-0552, mobile: 702-508-8501,
email: vanessa.nagata@unlv.edu
alternative send email to ithelp@unlv.edu
Jaye Rodriguez, Agency Program Information Specialist II with Campus Computing Services. Email: jaye.rodriguez@unlv.edu, Tel 702-895-0736, Fax
702-895-0797, she retired Dec 2010
Step1: SIGNUP and Login to ESRI Virtual Campus

Complete the form and click Create ESRI My Global Account to become a memeber

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

55 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step2: START A COURSE with your access code.
a. Click Go to My Training.

## b. Click My Virtual Campus Courses.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

56 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## e. The title of the course will appear in your course listing.

Step 3: GO TO CLASS
In your course listing, click on the course title to begin. A list of the course modules is displayed along with other course information.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

57 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step 4: How to print the module ribbon of completion some time after its been completed
Click the icon shown below to display the list of the modules of the course you completed.

Go to the module that you completed and click the "completed" icon next to the module's name.

## Sample Module Completion Ribbon

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

58 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

For the course certificate of completion, go to "My Course Status", click the icon on the top left "Cetificate of Completion" and print the certificate from there.

OR
Go to "My Training History" and then click "Print Certficate" in front of your completed course.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

59 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## ESRI Virtual Campus

Required
Learning ArcGIS 9
Chose any 5 modules from any of the following virtual campus courses
The 15 Minute Map: Creating a Basic Map in ArcMap
ArcGIS Annotation: Tips and Tricks
Basics of the Geodatabase Data Model
Cartographic Design Using ArcGIS 9
Creating and Integrating Data for Natural Resource Applications
Creating and Maintaining Metadata Using ArcGIS Desktop
Creating and Editing Geodatabase Features with ArcGIS 9 (for ArcEditor and ArcInfo)
Creating and Editing Geodatabase Topology with ArcGIS 9 (for ArcEditor and ArcInfo)
Creating and Editing Labels and Annotation
Creating and Editing Linearly Referenced Features with ArcGIS 9
Creating, Editing and Managing Geodatabases for ArcGIS 9
Customizing ArcGIS 9
Customizing ArcIMS
Customizing ArcMap: Easy Ways to Extend the Interface
Editing Spatial Data in ArcMap: Tips and Tricks
Geoprocessing with ArcGIS Desktop
Georeferencing Rasters in ArcGIS
Getting Started with Surface Analysis using ArcGIS Spatial Analyst
Introduction to Visual Basic 6
Introduction to ArcScan for ArcGIS
Introduction to ArcView 3.x
Introduction to GIS Data ReViewer, Part II (for ArcEditor and ArcInfo)
Introduction to Map Production System Atlas
Introduction to Urban and Regional Planning Using ArcGIS 9
Labeling in ArcMap: Tips and Tricks
Learning ArcGIS 9 3D Analyst
Learning ArcGIS 9 Spatial Analyst
Learning ArcIMS
Learning Visual Basic for Applications for New ArcGIS Developers
Linear Referencing with ArcGIS Desktop
Migrating Coverages into the Geodatabase
Spatial Analysis of Geohazards Using ArcGIS 9
Storing Raster Data in an ArcSDE Geodatabase (for ArcEditor and ArcInfo)
Turning Data into Information Using ArcGIS 9
Understanding GIS Queries
Understanding Branching and Looping in VBA
Understanding Map Projections and Coordinate Systems
Using CASE Tools (for ArcEditor and ArcInfo)
Using ArcCatalog: Tips and Tricks
Working with CAD Drawings in ArcGIS
Working with Geodatabase Subtypes and Domains (for ArcEditor and ArcInfo)
Working with Forms in VBA
Working with Map Topology in ArcGIS
Working with Rasters in ArcGIS 9
Working with Survey Data in ArcGIS
Working with Variables and Functions in VBA

## Learning ArcGIS Desktop Modules

Module 1: Getting Started with Arcgis
Exploring a GIS Map.
Exploring ArcGIS Desktop.
Using GIS to solve problems.
Module 2:Creating Map Symbology

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

60 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Working with map symbols and labels.

Symbolozing features based on attributes.
Classifying data.
Mapping density and proportion.
Module 3: Referencing data to real locations.
Understanding coordinate systems.
Working with map projections.
Module4: Organizing Geographic data.
Exploring geographic data.
Organizing data into a geodatabase.
Learning Objectives
Describe two common data models used to represent geographic data.
List different geographic data formats.
Determine the data source of a layer in ArcMap.
Identify data formats in ArcCatalog.
Create a geodatabase.
Add data from different formats to a geodatabase.
Module5: Creating & Editing data.
Editing feature shapes.
Editing feature attributes.
Creating new features & attributes.
Learning Objectives
Describe the steps in the editing process
Move and delete features
Edit the shapes of line and polygon features
Edit the shapes of spatially related features simultaneously
Describe different ways to edit feature attributes
Create new features by digitizing
Create new point features from x,y coordinates
Module6: Getting Started with GIS
The analytical process.
Examining & presenting the results.
Module7: Working with geoprocessing & modelling tools.
Working with geoprocessing tools.
Creating & using models.
Module8: Designing maps with ArcGIS
Working with map layouts.
Creating a presentation map.

## Understanding Map Projections and Coordinate Systems

Module 1: Sizing Up the Earth
Discovering the earth's shape and size
Refining the earth's shape
Establishing location
Module 2: Flattening the Earth
Birth of the map projection
Developable surfaces
Refining the map projection
Module 3: Understanding Aspect and Perspective
Aspect for cylindrical projections
Aspect for planar projections
Aspect for conic projections
Perspective
Classifying projections
Module 4: Understanding and Controlling Distortion
Understanding distortion
Examining tangents and secants
Projection parameters
Choosing a projection
Module 5: Geographic and Planar Coordinate Systems
What is a coordinate system?
Commonly-used coordinate systems
Module 6: Introduction to Datums
Basics of datums
Datum transformations

## Internet Mapping Homework

1. Assignment - Google and Internet Signup
Obtain Maps API Key (also works with Google Earth)
Create Account with NAVTEQ NN4D Developer Site
Signup for NN4D MapTP AJAX API Key

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

61 of 378

2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

7.
8.

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Use UNLV account homepage or
Obtain Google Sites Web Page Hosting account or
some other web hosting account such as cox.net or vegaswifi.net
Assignment - Basics of writing XHTML and CSS web page
Assignment - Basics of Google Maps API
set center of map to automatically zoom to UNLV campus
load a kml file from the web server
Assignment - Basics of Google Earth API
Automatic Zoom to UNLV Campus
Fetch KML file
Assignment - Basics of NAVTEQ MapTP
Assignment - NAVTEQ MapTP AJAX API - Automatic Zoom to UNLV Campus

## ArcGIS Desktop Tutorials

Tutorials Index
Editing GIS Features ( watch tutorial or read tutorial)
Using the Spatial Adjustment Tool watch tutorial
Transferring attributes from features in one feature class to features in another watch tutorial
ArcGIS Desktop Tips and Shortcuts
Selection of Time-Saving Tips and Shortcuts for 9.1, 9.2 and 9.3

Portfolio
Webpage(s) showing a selection of the student's work

Term Project
Class Term Project: Demonstrate knowledge in apply ArcView 9 to solve problems in civil engineering. Deliverables are a 15 minute presentation and handouts (e.g. maps,
background information, slides, notes, etc.). Project can be done as a group or individually.

## Term Project Groups and Final Presentation Times

Rules for Term Project
Purpose of Assignment - work on one project from beginning to end
Work together as a team
Email status of project to cee468Spring08@gmail.com
Email subject Line must contain Family Name (Last name) of each member, Class number, and Chapter number. Example Smith and Doe, Class #9, Chapter 4
Typically must attach a PDF of term project assignment
Alway use the same email account when submitting homework. Don't send email assignment from UNLV email account one week, next from a work email account, and
then another time using a personal email account. Use one account only.
Item to email will identified below with the heading Email

## Schedule for Initial Interview

will be held in B367. Objective is to discuss your interests and develop a theme for the term project. Interviews will be 15 minutes for each group, 10 minutes for each student.
Interview Agenda
Discuss the interests of the student(s): 5 minutes
Brainstorm: 5 minutes to generate the most ideas (min. 3 ideas per person). Will write these down and submitt to instructor.
What civil engineering problems have lists of data/information and a spatial component?
Select a topic: 5 minutes
Criteria - data exists or can easily be created, in your field of expertise, combine efforts with another course, project scope is between 20-40 hrs of work.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

62 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Weekly Report Progress (60 pts)
1. Identify Team Members (3 pts)
2. Number of ideas generated in brainstorming exercise (5 pts)
3. Select project from brainstorming exercise (5 pts)
4. Submitted Project Title (2 pts)
5. Submitted Problem Description Statement - Objective of Report (5 pts)
6. Submitted Brief Description of Project (5 pts)
7. Submitted Data Needs (5 pts)
8. Identify Spatial Data Sources (5 pts)
9. Methodology, process to solve the problem (5 pts)
10. Draft GIS figure(s) (5 pts)
11. Conclusion (5 pts)
12. Draft Report (5 pts)
13. Powerpoint Presentation Slides (5 pts)
Final Presentation (60 pts)
1. Duration of presentation, 15 minutes
2. Quality of Power Point Slides
3. Incorporate GIS graphics from ArcMap into presentation
4. Discussion of GIS analysis
5. Participation of team members - graded individually
Final Report (60 pts)
1. Used Microsoft Template for report, Use the Microsoft Word Term Paper Template (Templates > Education > For Students > Papers, Reports, and Presentation.
2. Introduction
3. Included 2 figures created from ArcMap
4. Conclusion
5. References

## Term Project Topics List

1. Hydrology
FEMA Flood Zones and LOMRs (Kayli, Richard, Cassandra, Shaun)
Reproduce Digital FIRM Panels (Feng Pan, Bryan Glenn, James Frame)
Create Isopluvials (i.e. rain contours) from RFCD rain gauges. Compare to the NOAA Atlas Design Storm. (Vinay Virupaksha and Nanda Venkatesh)
Link RFCD DDMS software to ArcGIS using ModelBuilder (Chris, Tahmineh, Rob - Wright Engineers)
ArcHydro Data Model
2. Surveying
Create GIS layer of Elevation Benchmarks in Boulder City - Survey, Clark County - Survey, City of Las Vegas - Survey, City of Henderson - Survey, City of North
Las Vegas, and City of Mesquite - Survey
Create GIS layer of Horizontal Control Points/Monuments
Create GIS layer of Records of Survey from the County Recorder
Need to perform a spatial join between the ClarkTRS layer and the Syd Rabin Spreadsheet
Purchase from CCDS Imaging and Records Division - Lisa
CCPW
Title Companies
Elevation Certificates
FEMA elevation certificates
Building Division Finish Floor Certificates
Convert Syd Raben Spreadsheet - tabular index of recorded documents to contain hyperlinks and spatial index
Imaging Index - work with Kazem on scanning images and doing OCR to capture attributes
Aerial Photos
Create a spatial index of Aerial Photos for sale from Kenny Aerial Mapping and AeroTech - Leo Torres
Clark County GISMO
Street Names
Convert Assessor Parcels to DWG from GeoDatabase
Index Grids - ClarkTRS
Clients
Surveyors
Get list surveyors from CCDS - Patricia or Erik and Board of Engineers and Surveyors
Recorders Office
Partner with Kazem with UNLV and Syd Rabin
Assessor's Office
County and City Surveying Divisions
Joint Project - publish benchmark books
Expand services offered by AeroTech

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

63 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Regional Flood Control District - manage the Topo, watershed basins, USGS DEMs
Large Property Owners
Developers
Title Companies - expand service of the Title Report, determine all easements on the land
Engineers - create a PDF map similar to Assessor, include a grid symbol which provides a link to the application number for the Land Use Application,
Record of Survey, Off Site Improvement Plan, Drainage Study, and Traffic Study
Streams of Income
3 Variables
1. Quality - improve accuracy and thoroughness of research of survey records
2. Time - improve turn around time to perform the work, currently only large firms will have staff that isn't rusty, we will do the samething every time so
efficient. Also will spend time on the system, make it easier the nex time around
3. Price/Cost - worst case breakeven, best case is lower cost for the Engineering Firm or Developer, where this duty of a staff member can be offloaded
and allow them to focus/ specialize on another task.
Paid to Create GIS layers
Resell GIS layers, package with other products
Paid to Train Clients how to use data
Paid to Consult - provide engineering services - conceptual drainage studies
Deliverables
AutoCAD DWG - Civil 3D Digital Terrain Models (DTM)
Internet Mapping
ESRI geodatabase, Survey Analyst
3. Geotechnical
Conversion of NRCS Soils Data (SSURGO) into ArcGIS Geodatabase
4. ESRI Niche
Get paid several ways doing the same thing: 1) get a project to build a model, 2) incorporate that model into the software and resale, 3) provide training how to use
the model, and 4) use the findings from the project with another entity/agency/company and get paid to do the same thing.
Drainage Niche - 1) get paid doing drainage review for Nye, Lincoln and Clark Counties, 2) do drainage studies for private developers, 3) develop programs such
as DDMS or the Chris Stone method for RFCD or other agencies, 4) provide training how to use the programs/software, 5) build GIS layer of the facilities being
designed in the drainage studies for RFCD or other agencies, 6) provide a call before you dig program, 7) be the permitting process expert for the County - paid by
other consultants to share how to do things faster, and 8) be an expert witness for drainage law.
5. Land Development
Bond Exoneration - relieve the Developer and/or Contractor of the responsibility for improvements in the Public Right of Way.
Unify Land Use codes for Southern Nevada
Convert Bond Estaments into MasterFormat
Call Before You Dig Internet Mapping Application
Identify Vacant Parcels and Future BLM Parcels to be Auctioned. (Scott, Scott, Joe, and Joe)
3D Map UNLV building footprints, Research Surveying Documents of Finish Floor Elevations
Identify Ideal Properties for Investment
Ideal Properties have the following characteristics
Low Purchase Price
Methodolgy
Need to compare with other properties, need a rule of thumb such as price per square foot, need to know the asking/selling price
Query loan amounts, find actual selling price, not the same as recorded by the Assessor.
Low cost to Improve or civilize
Utilities in close proxmity, Conforming Zone Change, In a flood zone or wash?
Any future Public Works projects (build roads, flood control)
High Resale Value, Marketability, Satisfy a Need/Demand
Methodology - query parcel size, also identify all adjacent vacant properties - merge several smaller parcels into one large one thus increasing
the options to develop. Economy of Scale - 1 acre parcel might not pencil out but a 10 acre parcel will, high the quantity lower the unit cost.
Case Study - what worked, what did
what is the competition doing? Does another successful company like KB Homes do the same thing?
Pioneer, new idea?
What is the target? What are the investors looking for? Seems if you focus on the money, that is will buy any property which will be easy to resell for more
money, its like gambling, or putting the cart before the horse, purchase on speculation. Instead, of focusing on the niche or business.
Becker Realty Corp
50 S. Jones Blvd, Suite 101, Las Vegas NV 89107, Fax: 702-870-1228
Barry Becker, Jr. Email: barrybeckerjr@beckerrealty.net, Voice: 702-870-0212 x6552, Mobile: 702-497-9532
Randy Becker, Email: rbecker@beckerrealty.net, Voice: 702-870-0212 x6522, Mobile: 702-497-3040
Kevin McKinley, Email: kevinmckinley@beckerrealty.net, Voice: 702-870-1227 x6539, Mobile: 702-528-4363
Title Companies: LandAmerica Land Title of Nevada and First American Title Company (FATCO) of Nevada- Google Maps or Internet Mapping
Products - 1) Title Insurance, 2) Escrow
Target Customers - 1) Realtors (both Commercial and Residential, note its the Buyers choice on which Title Company, i.e. Escrow agent, to use). 2) Lenders
Focus - greater return for clients
Funding
Directly from individual Title Company (e.g. Land Title, FATCO, Chicago Title, ...)
Clark County Title Services - will benefit all Title Companies
UNLV/TRC joint funding with Kazem and Mukund
Annual or Monthly Subscription to the service
Usage based, pay as you go
Reports
charge fees for service or provide free for preferred clients (generate more sales)
Services to Realtors (Internet Mapping Website, Generate Listing Packets, and Property Profiles)
Quality maps and graphics

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

64 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

HUD and foreclosures
Show School Attendance Zones, Existing and Proposed Schools
Special Improvement Districts (SID)
Assessor Parcels (boundaries, ownership, last sales price, address, lot size, ...)
Subdivision Maps
Crime Statistics
Demographics
BLM parcels to be auctioned
Services to Land Developers, Engineers, Surveyors
Identify Raw/Vacant Parcels (can also be seen from the aerial photos)
Zoning
Existing and Future Land Use (commercial, residential, industrial, ...)
Master Plans
Utilities (sewer, water, storm drains, power, phone, cable)
Traffic Counts (NDOT, RTC, Traffic Studies, ...)
FEMA Flood Zones
RTC Capital Improvement Projects
RFCD 10 year Master Plan
Link to deeds, easements, any incumbents on the land
Permit Process
5 year no-cut streets
Survey Benchmarks and Monuments
Civil Engineering Impact Studies and Plans (i.e. Drainage Studies, Traffic Studies, Offsites, Geotechnical Reports, Land Use Applications, ...)
Competing Services
Zillow.com - Appraisals, Comparables, and estimates on the worth of a property
Zip Reality - free version of MLS
SPSGIS - Single Point Solutions. GIS services tailored for the Real Estate Industry
ClosingPoint - created by Nations Holding Group for exclusive use by United Title Company and Land Title of Nevada. Focus is to help clients leverage
technology to increase revenue, lower operational costs and provide business insight and exceptional service to maximize customer relationships and
generate returns on investment (ROI) (see About ClosingPoint)
6. Utilities
Subsurface Utility Engineering (SUE)
Create a single ArcGIS Geodatabase of any of the following utilities
Map of the Kern River Gas Transmission Company
Map of SNWA or LVVWD water lines showing 3D profile (Kimberly Lowe, Kelly Wilson and Sunshine Woods)
Map of Southwest Gas Lines
Map of Cox Cable lines
Map of Embarq Phone Lines
Create a single ArcGIS Geodatabase of all Southwest Gas line
Implement ArcGIS Schematics Extension for Street Lights and Gas Lines
Unknown if an isometric (3D) view can be created of the Schematic
Using ArcGIS Schematics for Inside Plant Representation
Can you perform analysis on the Schematics? Determine the pressure loss due to pipe friction or bends?
Utility Coordination
Applied Utility Services
7651 Jones Blvd
Las Vegas NV 89131
Voice: 702-368-6500
Fax: 702-515-0800
Owners: Jeffery Neal and Ron Best
Services
Utility coordination
Negotiations for commercial, industrial, residential, major projects and master planned communities
Management responsibility for the review and evaluation of engineering plans and implementation of strategies to direct and guide the design process
to minimize costs and meet time constraints
Review and evaluation of engineering and utility plans
subcontractor for GC Wallace on the McCarran Airport Terminal 3 - Roadways project
7. Water Systems (waste, potable/drinking, and storm)
Create existing and proposed storm drains in Southern Nevada, identify cost of future facilities (Mike Cunningham, Tim Piparo, Lynden Koboyashi, Alex K)
Analyize Septic Tanks connecting to the Public Sewer System
Need sewer lines, septic tanks, rules and regs
Contact Daniel LaRubio with SNHD about the maximum septic tank density per circular square mile. Believe NDEP said 119 septic in Las Vegas
Valley per the UDACS 102 training on March 27, 2007 at LVVWD.
Clark County Nevada Request For Proposal (RFP No. 600591) Clark County Individual Sewage Disposal System Study. Administered by Kathryn 'Kate'
Hoffmann with Clark County Air Quality, email: hoffmann@co.clark.nv.us voice: 702-455-1955. Draft UNLV Proposal
RFP-ISDS-Study.doc
RFP-ISDS-Study-OrgChart.vsd
UNLVProposalPlanBeforeYouDig-20070308.doc
UNLVProposalSewerDesign-20061222.doc
Create a single ArcGIS Geodatabase of all sewer lines in Southern Nevada
Create a single ArcGIS Geodatabase of all water lines in Southern Nevada
Analyze the water table depth in Southern Nevada
Map of all water well locations
8. Transportation

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

65 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Safety Analysis of Bus Stops and Bike Trails

RTC FAST - Paul Judd 702-676-1611, email: juddp@rtcsnv.com
Inventory bus stops
Video Bike Trails/Paths
Immersive Media - provider of interactive spherical video. Data collectors for Street View in Google Map
Myles, CEO
Tom McGovern, Vice President, email: TMcGovern@immersivemedia.com, mobile: 360-609-3419, work: 503-821-6216
Alex Mercer, City Collection Production Manager, email: amercer@immersivemedia.com, mobile: 503-539-8113
Proposed River Mountain Bike Trail - Dennis Stransky, City of Henderson Park Planning Manager, email: Dennis.Stransky@cityofhenderson.com,
work: 702-267-4053
Create a single ArcGIS Geodatabase of all Traffic Signals
Clark County School District Attendence Zones, Busing Zones, and Bus Routes
Map of Interconnect/FAST conduit lines and Existing/Proposed Traffic Signals
Vehicle Routing - determine the shortest path
How to Prevent Tagging/Graffiti/Vandelism on Highways Counter Measures
Identify Crashes within Clark County by Age, Time and Type
9. Software Development
UNLV GIS Data Broker - draft proposal, UNLVGISBrokerProposal.xls
Create ArcSDE Server Application at UNLV
Create a GIS Central Repository at UNLV
Implement Autodesk MapGuide Internet Mapping Application
10. Landscape Plans
Landscape Maintenance Responsibilities - HOA Maps
inventory trees, grass, landscape rock
inventory sprinklers
Create a GIS layer of Trees
Tree Tags
Smithsonian Environmental Research Center (SERC) Forest Ecology Lab
Dr. Geoffrey "Jess" Parker, Senior Scientist email: parkerg@si.edu, voice: 443-482-2210
"Some of the trees here are 300 years old, and each one, each poplar or oak or hickory tree, is tagged with an ID number. Around some of them is a
thin band made from metal. It's called a dendrometer, and it's used to measure the tree's circumference." NPR - All Things Considered - Curiosity Rises
With Trees' Strange Growth Spurt
National Band & Tag Company

## UNLV Landscape, Grounds, and Arboretum

Project Goals
develop landscape management system for UNLV grounds. Identify what features need to be collected and how to use them. What works
for UNLV will also work with other properties
Fund 2-4 work study students to do the work
Facilities Supervisor IV - Robert Lynn, 895-0952, email: robert.lynn@unlv.edu. Requested a meeting to discuss tree inventory on 10 Nov 2011
at 8am.
Grounds Supervisor: Irrigtion - David Hoffman
Grounds Supervisor: Grounds Maintenance - Fred Smith

## Term Project Weekly Homework

1. Class #3
Email members of your team for the class project with the subject of the term project
Email a list of ideas on possible class project. Minimum 3 ideas per person.
2. Class #5
Email results of team interview brainstorming with instructors.
Email Project Title
Email a description of the problem you are solving with GIS. Also know as a Problem Description statement.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

66 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Email Brief description of Project

Email Data Needs. Identify your data needs. Does the data exist or will you need to collect it?
3. Class #9
Email Problem Description statement (Objective of Report)
Email list of the spatial data and data sources. What data is tabular and what is spatial.
You may refer the term project reports from Spring semester, 2007.
4. Class #12
Email Methodology/Process to solve the problem
Email GIS draft figures
Email Conclusion
5. Class #15
Email final report in Adobe PDF format
Email PowerPoint slide presentation in Adobe PDF format

## Quizes on Textbook Reading Assignment

Hands on quiz - classroom demonstration of GIS concept/command
Quiz based on topic in reading assignment
Student will be randomly selected at the beginning of each class
Student will be quized once during the semester
Example Quiz Question - How do you add features/layers to the ArcMap map display? Answer: 1) click the Add Data button or 2) File -> Add Data...
How To Remember What You Just Read
"Before you read it, skim it. Read the headings, look at the graphs or illustrations, get a sense of the material." [Crook 92, p. 111]
"Based on your survey, formulate some questions about the material you are about to read. If there are questions at the end of the chapter, read through them before you
"If appropriate, go back and highlight or underline the important sections." [ibid]
"Review the text." [ibid]
How to use Excel to Randomly select a student to take the quiz
Step 0. Ensure the Analysis ToolPak feature is enabled (Tools -> Add-Ins... -> Analysis ToolPak)
Step 1. Copy the table of student names from this page and paste into Excel at cell B1.
Step 2. Delete all rows without a student name.
Step 3. Assign an id value, 1 to 32 in the A field
Step 4. Type the following formula (shown in bold) in cell G1. =RANDBETWEEN(1,32)
Step 5. Type the following formula (shown in bold) in cell H1. =VLOOKUP(G1,A1:B32,2)
Step 6. Press F9 key to refresh the random generation. Cell H1 should have the random student who will step to the front of the class and demonstrate the solution to the
quiz problem.
Note, could also using a stop watch which shows the hundredth of a second. Multiply this value to the total number of students and round. This value is the randomly
select a student.
Instructors version of Randomly selecting a student for the quiz, RandomStudentsQuiz.xls
Alternative method of randomly selecting student using ArcMap, RandomStudentsQuiz.mdb, RandomStudentsQuiz.mxd
Reference: Standard Practice for Random Sampling of Construction Materials, ASTM D3665-02
Quiz Questions
Labeling Features and Annotation
1. Using dynamic labels in ArcMap, show how to label all the major streets in the streetcenterline.mdb geodatabase, sclmajor_l line feature class, using the strname
field. (Class 4 - Jaime)
2. Using map document annotation in ArcMap, show how to change the default symbol properties on the Draw Toolbar to a text symbol with an interstate shield.
Create a single annotation of I-15 with this text symbol. (Class 4 - Casey)
3. Using dynamic labels in ArcMap, show how to define classes of features and label each class differently. Create a Major, StateHighway and Interstate class. Use
the streetcenterline.mdb geodatabase. (Class 4 - Pavel)
4. Show how to set the data frame reference scale in ArcMap. (Class 5 - Robert)
5. There are three ways to create a geodatabase annotation feature class. Demonstrate one of the ways. Show how to create an annotation feature class in ArcCatalog
OR how to convert dynamic labels to an Annotation Feature class in ArcMap. The third option is importing annotation from other programs (such as AutoCAD or
ArcInfo Workstation). (Class 5 - Choi)
Creating and Editing Features
1. Using the Assessor Parcel geodatabase (parcel162.mdb), show how to add two fields to the aoextract162 table. First Field is called ADTYPEWEB (Type is Text,
Length is 2). Second Field is called PlatURL (Type is Text, Length is 255). (Class 6 - Charles)
2. Using the Field Calculator, calculate ADTYPEWEB and PlatURL. (Class 6 - Brook)
3. Using the Hyperlink tool, show how PlatURL will work. (Class 6 - Puri)
4. Notes for problems 1-3 - How to create a parcel hyperlink to the recorded Plat or Parcel Map
1. Within ArcMap, demonstrate how to add the Jean Prison drawings (.dwg) layer to an existing data frame which has the following layers (sclmajor and aerial photo
of Jean - S0721713.TIF). (Class 7 - Kevin)
2. Show how to transform a CAD drawing in local coordinates to a GIS layer in Stateplane Coordinates. Assumption is you have 2 points that you know both the x,y
coordinates in both the local and grid/Stateplane coordinate system. With the problems experienced in Class 7 with ArcMap crashing, just show the toolbar used to
perform this transformation. (Class 8)
Symbols

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

67 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

1. How do you change marker symbols for a point feature? (see p. 91, 111-114)
2. Using the RTC.mdb geodatabase, PostSpeedLimits line feature class, symbolize the map using all values in the MaxSpeedLimit field, in other words speed limit of
75 mph is assigned one color, speed limit of 65 mph is assigned another color, and so on. Each speed limit should have a unique symbol assigned to it.

## GIS Tutorial Workbook Homework

Assignments:
1. Class #1
none
2. Class #2
none
3. Class #3
none
4. Class #4
Email map of Exercise 1-1 as pdf
Email map of Exercise 1-2 as pdf
Email the data document if there are questions for Exercise 1-1 and Exercise 1-2.
GIS Tutorial 1 Hints
5. Class #5
Email map for Exercise 2-1 as pdf
Email map for Exercise 2-2 showing just the city of Pittsburg zoom extent as pdf
Email the data document if there are questions for Exercise 2-1 and Exercise 2-2.
GIS Tutorial 2 Hints
6. Class #6
Email map for Exercise 3-1 as pdf
Email map for Exercise 3-2 as pdf
Email the data document if there are questions for Exercise 3-1 and Exercise 3-2.
GIS Tutorial 3 Hints
7. Class #7
Email map for Exercise 4-1 as pdf
Email map for Exercise 4-2 as pdf
Email the data document if there are questions for Exercise 4-1 and Exercise 4-2.
GIS Tutorial 4 Hints
8. Class #8
Email map for Exercise 5-1 as pdf
Email map for Exercise 5-2 as pdf
Email the data document if there are questions for Exercise 5-1 and Exercise 5-2.
GIS Tutorial 5 Hints
9. Class #9
Email map for Exercise 6-1 as pdf
Email map for Exercise 6-2 as pdf
Email the data document if there are questions for Exercise 6-1 and Exercise 6-2.
GIS Tutorial 6 Hints
10. Class #10
Email map for Exercise 7-1 as pdf
Email map for Exercise 7-2 as pdf
Email the data document if there are questions for Exercise 7-1 and Exercise 7-2.
GIS Tutorial 7 Hints
11. Class #11
Email map for Exercise 8-1 as pdf
Email map for Exercise 8-2 as pdf
Email the data document if there are questions for Exercise 8-1 and Exercise 8-2.
GIS Tutorial 8 Hints
12. Class #12
13. Class #13
Email map for all Exercise 9 as pdf
GIS Tutorial 9 Hints
14. Class #14
none
15. Class #15
none

## GIS Tutorial Workbook

NOTE: Issues and an example of the solutions map will be provided for the first few assignments. For Exercise 1-1, we have provided the minimum required for
full points. Also for Exercise 1-1, an example of the map is created to showcase what the map can look like after the you become familiar with the software. We
do not expect the map printouts to have all the elements of the example solutions map until later in the semester.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

68 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Tutorial 1 Topics
Map Documents
Magnifier Window
Overview Window
Spatial Bookmarks
Measure Distances
Identify Features
Select Features
Finding Features
Attribute Tables
Label Features
Map Documents and Relative Paths
Tutorial 1 - Introduction
Hints - things to avoid
1. You can export only the selected features to a new dataset to better manipulate the selected features.
2. You can open a *.dbf file with MS Excel.
3. For the data document in Exercise 1-1, round values to the nearest integer.
4. Be sure perform the statistics on only the 5 states with the highest vacant units.
5. Don't forget you can add to a selection or unselect by holding the SHIFT button and clicking the feature or dragging a box to select multiple features.
6. While the address field in Mid911 is messy, you are not required to clean up the Address field for Exercise 1-2, simply copy and paste into the data
document.
Example Solution Map (click image for full size view)

## Tutorial 2 Topics - Map Design

Symbolizing Features
ArcMap Layer Files (.lyr)
ArcMap - Visible Scale
ArcMap - Map Tips
ArcMap Tools Toolbar - Hyperlink tool
Tutorial 2 - Map Design
NOTE: The Pittsburg neighborhoods shapefile on the GIS tutorial CD appears to have no project assigned. You can assignment a projection yourself using
Pittsburg Neighborhoods shapefile with project: Neighborhoods.shp, Neighborhoods.dbf, Neighborhoods.shx, and Neighborhoods.prj

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

69 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Hints and issues

Exercise 2-1
1. You can use insert a dataset twice within the same data frame. From there, you can apply a definition query to each dataset to display only certain features of
the dataset (public schools, private schools, etc)
2. There are different ways to show enrollment of each school. Labeling when there are only a few features or using graduated symbols when there are many
features are just two examples.
3. Creating the hyperlink is not necessary, but you can do it yourself as a simply exercise.
Exercise 2-2
1. You are only required to create a map showing the extents of the city of Pittsburg. Thus, setting the visible scale range and creating two layer groups won't be
necessary, but you can do it as a simply exercise.
2. Use a definition query to display only schools with low enrollment. Alternatively, you can also select those features manually or by the "select by attributes"
tool and export the features as a new data set.
3. Remember you can change the projection and coordinate system if you are having trouble getting datasets to sync up.
Questions:
1. The identify tool can quickly identify which neighborhood each school is in. Remember to set the layer in Identify to the Pittsburg Neighborhood layer.
2. Reasonable answers are accepted. You can base your analysis on population, area, proximity of other schools, etc. Remember you can add the schools dataset
in again without a definition query to see the other school while retaining your definition query of the schools with low enrollment.
Example Solution Map (click image for full size view)

## Tutorial 3 Topics - GIS Outputs

ArcMap Layout Templates
Guidelines
ArcMap Layout Map Elements
ArcMap Reports
Layout Graphs - Excel
Export Tables to Excel
Export Layouts as Files - ArcMap Outputs (appears PDF Export is excluded)
Tutorial 3 - GIS Outputs
Hints and issues
Exercise 3-1
1. You will have three data frames for this exercise. Use your judgement to place them in the map document. For example, because the legends for the data
frames showing the percentage of males and females are basically the same, you can place the data frames next to each other and have them share a common
legend.
2. You are not required to print the maps out in color, however, you should think about the color scheme (to make sure it will be satifactory to display) in black

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

70 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

and white.
Exercise 3-2
1. You are not required to create a layout paper size of 8.5" X 14". The template you created in class would be sufficient. However, you may find that you have
more freedom on a larger map to place elements and data layer or frames.
2. The data frame at the scale of 1:14,000 showing all the historic districts can be made into a vincinity map. However, because the overall historic districts is
also a focus item on the map, you may think about making the mapdata frame bigger in order to display the data prominently.
Example Solution Map (click image for full size view)

Tutorial 4 Topics
Geodatabase
Primary Key
Join Tables
Spatial Joins
Export data
ArcCatalog

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

71 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Tutorial 4 - Geodatabases
Hints and issues
Exercise 4-1
1. You will again have three data frames for this exercise, similar to the Tutorial 3-1 Exercise. Use your judgement to place them in the map document. For
example, if the legends for the data frames are using the same categories of revenue, you might be able to save some space for your design layout by placing
the dataframes next to each other and have them share a common legend.
2. You can also have three legends and three data frames next to each other. There is no requirement for asthetics, but you should start thinking about how you
are able to create better presentation maps.
3. No labels are required, using a color scheme that shows the highest revenue generating municipality would be sufficient.
Exercise 4-2
1. Remember that you are not required to make the geodatabase and importing the exercise files into it because you will not be turning in the geodatabase.
2. For this map, you will be using label and choropleth mapping in order to give the map more information.
3. Be sure to add in the PghTracts dataset so that you will have a complete outline (hollow scheme) of even tracts with no schools. Obviously for those schools,
you will have no labeling for them.
Example Solution Map (click image for full size view)

Tutorial 5 Topics
Sources of Map Data - WMS Servers, Geography Network (retired early 2010)
Census Data

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

72 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Vector Data Formats - Coverages, Shapefiles, .e00

Annotation Layers
XY Event Files
Projections
Attribute Data
Tutorial 5 - Importing Spatial and Attribute Data
Hints and issues
Exercise 5-1
2. To download, the state is Arizona, the County is Maricopa, and the layer is Voting Districts 2000 (tgr04013vot00.shp is found in the vot0004013.zip)
tgr04013blk00.shp is found in the blk0004013.zip file
tgr04013lkA.shp is found in the lkA04013.zip file
3. Look up a State Plane Zone for a county (GIS Tutorial Workbook, 3rd Edition, p. 178). Click find a Zone by County. Answer should be
AZ013(MARICOPA CO.) NAD27 ZONE = 0202 (TRANSVERSE MERCATOR|CENTRAL ZONE)
4. "Projection. The TIGER/Line data is not in a mapping projection even though most of the features were scanned directly from source maps...that were
projections... After the map sheets were scanned, the coordinates were transformed from UTM into projectionless geographic coordinates of latitude and
longitude." (5-2 Redistricting Census 2000 TIGER/Line Files)
5. since the .prj file is missing from these shapefiles, need to define the projection. See the class notes on Define a Shapefile's Projection. Use Geographic
Coordinate System, World (WGS-84). This should create the .prj file. Your files should like these:
tgr04013lkA.zip
tgr04013vot00.zip
tgr04013blk00.zip
6. The schools layer does not need to be shown on the map, it is required to make a count of how many schools are in each district.
7. If the CountySchools.dbf is not on your CD or you are having trouble with it's XY and projections, download the converted files here: CountySchools.zip
Exercise 5-2
1. The census export file for Florida can be directly downloaded HERE
2. You will have four dataframes to show the four time period comparisons. Note that you should be using the same histogram and therefore one legend for all
dataframes showing the Florida County Population. If the histograms are different, it will take longer for an user to compare the two side by side.
3. If you have to create a new field for manipulating existing fields, make sure the new field type matches up with what you are trying to do (text, integer, etc).
Example Solution Map (click image for full size view)

## Tutorial 6 - Digitizing Topics

Creating Polygons, Point and Line Features
ArcMap Editing

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

73 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Digitizing a polygon
Digitize a point layer
Digitize a line layer
Moving Features using ArcMap
Copy and Paste Features
Edit Feature Attribute Data
Snapping Environment
ArcGIS Desktop Tutorials - Using the Spatial Adjustment Tool
Tutorial 6 - Digitizing hints and issues
Exercise 6-1
1. You can manually select the features per the beat guideline for Exercise 6-1. By sorting the "name" field in ascending order will allow you to select each
street section easier.
2. Alternatively, you can select all streets that the police beat encompasses. However, this will select the extra street arcs beyond the contained beat area. You
can then either unselect or reselect the streets by holding down the shift key to get just the police beat area. You should be able to easily distinguish the police
beat area from the intersection of the selected streets.
3. You can then export the selected features to a new dataset in order to create different colors. Using the alternative way, you do not need to create beat1.shp
and beat2.shp before starting the exercise.
Exercise 6-2
1. If you prefer to work in AutoCAD, you can insert the orthographics into AutoCAD via the map menu. From there, you can move and manipulate the building
outlines to match the orthographic.
2. Then export the modified building outlines as a shapefile within AutoCAD and simply bring it into ArcMap for display.
3. This procedure can be done for the parking lot and bustop if you wish to as well. However, make sure you select the correct output type under "mapexport"
(polyline, point, etc).
Example Solution Map (click image for full size view)

## Tutorial 7 - Geocoding Topics

Geocoding data by ZIP codes
Going through sample data of zip code matching
Procedures to review, fix and rematch the unmatched zip codes
Geocoding to streets
Preparing data and street maps
Using an Address Location in ArcMap with the Find Tool

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

74 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Batch Geocoding procedures

Identifying unmatched streets
Tutorial 7 - Geocoding hints and issues
Example Solution Map (click image for full size view)

## Tutorial 8 Topics - Spatial Data Processing

Querying Data
Select By Attributes
Select Features Tool
Select By Location
Clip Features
Dissolve Features
Append Layers
Union Layers
ModelBuilder
Tutorial 8 - Spatial Data Processing
Make Sure you check summary like this for Exercise 8-2:

## Example Solution Map (click image for full size view)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

75 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Tutorial 9 Topics - Spatial Analysis

Proximity Buffers
Calculating Geometry
Visual Basic Scripts
Apportionment
Tutorial 9 - Spatial Analysis
Example Solution Map (click image for full size view)

Tutorial 10 - 3D Analyst
Tutorial 10 Topics

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

76 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

3D avi video
How to load the 3D Analyst Extension
Creating 3D scenes
Introduction to ArcScene program
Creating TIN from contour data
Triangulated irregular networks
Configuring soft edges
Drape features onto the TIN
Creating 3D buildings
Setting observer and target locations
Flying through a scene
Creating animations
Record, play and save the animation
Using 3D symbols
Performing line-of-sight analysis
Explore ArcGlobe
Hints - things to avoid
1.
Example Solution Map (click image for full size view)

Assignment10-1.pdf

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

77 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Assignment10-2.pdf

## Tutorial 11 - Spatial Analyst

Tutorial 11 Topics
1. Examine raster basemap layers
3. Process a raster layer with mask
Converting a TIFF image to a grid
4. Creating a hillshade raster layer
5. Making a kernel density map
6. Extracting raster value points
7. Conduct a site suitability study
8. Building a model for risk index
Creating a new toolbox and model
Running the model
Hints - things to avoid
1. Need to use NAD83 Feet when assigning the Pennsylvania South State Plane 1983 projection.
2. Authors of the GIS Tutorial Workbook didn't save the LandUsePgh.lyr with relative paths, so when you open it in ArcMap, will get a broken data reference. See
class notes on creating a layer file (.lyr) using relative paths - ArcMap Layer Files. Recommend just downloading and using this layer package:
3. Layer Package with relative paths - LandUsePgh.lpk
4. Select By Location

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

78 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Example Solution Map (click image for full size view)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

79 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Conferences
Proposal ideas
GPS with Darcy at Trimble and Monsen Engineering
UNLV GPS control with Scott Hill at TRC
Moving GPS data to AutoCAD Map3D and ESRI ArcMap
Conference on 23-25 June 2010
Conference Theme - "GIS goes platinum in the Silver State - Celebrating 20 Years of Collaboration"
Call for Papers Deadline, 1 May 2010, submit abstracts to tommie.weckesser@cityofhenderson.com
ESRI User Conference
email papers@esri.com
Autodesk University
submit proposals no later than 14 May 2010
Civil Infrastructure Track - Local road and highway design

## Civil Engineering and GIS Networking Contacts

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

80 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Contacts for Civil Engineers working in Las Vegas

To use this Web page interactively, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 Service Pack 2 (SP2) or later and the Microsoft Office
2003 Web Components.

Guest Speakers
Jason Schwartz, Principal GIS Analyst Southern Nevada Water Authority - Engineering, Voice: 702-691-5395, email: jason.schwartz@lvvwd.com
Call Before You Dig by Underground Service Alert (USA North)
Don Heyer, Operations and Public Relations Manager
Address: 4090 Nelson Avenue Suite A, Concord CA 94520-1232.
Voice: 925-798-9504 x4. Mobile: 702-595-7919. Fax: 925-798-1683. Email: dheyer@usan.org
Member of the Common Ground Alliance

## Section 2: ArcGIS Instructor Materials and Topic

Topic List
2. Introduction to the ArcMap
Tools Toolbar
ArcMap Standard Toolbar
ArcGIS online
ArcMap Basemap
ArcMap Map Documents (.mxd)
3. Query Data
Definition Queries
4. Symbolize Features
Clark County ArcMap Layer Files
5. Annotation, Text and Labels
6. Making Maps - Layouts, Vicinity Maps
7. ArcMap Output - PDF (Adobe GIS)
8. Creating Geodatabases and Shapefiles using ArcCatalog
9. Editing Features in ArcMap
12. Database Joins, Relates and Spatial Joins
13. Geoprocessing: Buffer, Clip, Overlay
15. ArcGIS Data Interoperability Extension and Safe Software FME
16. Spatial Databases: SQL Server
17. Model Builder
18. Network Analyst Extension
19. Spatial Analyst Extension - TINs, Contours, DEMs
20. Animation
21. 3D Analyst Extension
22. Data Collection using GPS
Overview of GIS

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

81 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

GIS Concept
The GIS 4 Step Solution Process
GIS Tabular Data
GIS Data Types/Features
ArcGIS Desktop consists of ArcView, ArcEditor, and ArcInfo
Exploring ArcMap
Exploring ArcMap
Tools Toolbar
Map Tips
Data Frames
ArcMap Layers/Themes and Layer Files
ArcMap Layer Files (.lyr)
How do I use my ArcMap Symbology in AutoCAD Map3D, MapGuide and Google Earth KML?
ArcMap Definition Queries
ArcMap Output Options
Animation
Using ArcMap with Relative Path Names
Review transferring data files from UNLV to home/work
Exploring ArcCatalog
ArcCatalog
Need to Know
Nice to Know
Searching for Map Data
Importing files into geodatabase tables using ArcCatalog
Making Maps Quickly
Templates
How to Create an ArcMap Plotter independent map template
Layout Toolbar
Logos and Pictures
Map Legends
Making Maps for Presentation
Basic Map Elements to include on Maps
Scale Bar Map Elements
Comparison of Data Frame/Viewports in layouts between CAD & GIS
Size and Position of Data Frames
Title Map Element
Text Map Element
Reference Systems - Grids and Graticules
Printing
Geodatabases and Tables
Geodatabase
Geodatabase Geometry Types
Geodatabase Field Types
Geodatabase X/Y Domain
Tables
Add Fields to an existing table
Field Calculator
ArcMap Editing using Field Calculator
Calculating Attribute Values
Attribute Indexes
ArcGIS supported spatial files
Coverages
Import ArcInfo Interchange files (.e00)
Shapefiles
Querying Data
7 ways to query features
1. Identifying Features
2. Selecting Features Interactively
3. Selecting Features by Attributes

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

82 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

SQL Comparison
4. Selecting Features by Location
Spatial Relationships
5. Selecting Features by Graphics
6. Finding Features
7. Map Tips
Selectable Layers
How to Query Graphics
How to query Raster Surfaces
How to query TIN Surfaces
Query Layers - How to view Spatial SQL Server
ArcMap Graphics: Points, Lines, Circles, Polygons, Rectangles
Labeling Features and Annotation
ArcGIS Options working with Text
Dynamic Labeling
Dynamic Labeling: Placing Labels
Dynamic Labeling: ArcMap Formatting tags
Dynamic Labeling: Stacked Labels and more
Dynamic Labeling: Label Methods
Dynamic Labeling: Label Priorities
Dynamic Labeling: Draw Toolbar Label Options
Map Document Annotation: Layout View
Map Document Annotation: Data View
Map Document Annotation: Data View - Creating New
GeoDatabase Annotation: Standard Annotation
ArcInfo Coverage Annotation
Reference Scale for Data Frames
Fonts
Symbolizing features and rasters
Symbols and Styles
Creating Marker Symbols
Symbols by Attributes
Creating Line Symbols
Using Interstate Shields
Classifying features and rasters
Classifying features and rasters
Quantitative Scaled Symbology
Classification methods
Symbology Charts
Understanding Classification Histogram
Joining and relating tables
Database Relationships
Relate Tables
Join Tables
Spatial Joins
Example Spatial Join: Assign closest bus stop to each parcel
Overview Data Frame
Create Overview Data Frame (a.k.a. index, vicinity, location, or key map)
How to create an exact copy of an Overview Window in a data frame
Creating Features
Creating Point Features
Using Excel with ArcGIS
How to create random x,y,z coordinates using Excel
Create Random Point Features
Add x,y coordinate data to ArcMap
Creating Point Layer from x,y values in a table using ArcCatalog
Create x,y,z features in ArcCatalog
Event Tables
Excel Notes
Converting Graphics to Features (Shapefile)
Convert Features to Graphics
ArcMap Edit Session

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

83 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

ArcMap Editing
Deleting Features
Moving Features
Improve Speed of Editing
Snapping Environment
Snapping Properties Table
Snap to Midpoint of a Feature
Snap to Intersection of two Features
Offset Feature Lines
Creating Features from other Features
Creating Features using ArcMap
ArcMap Editing Topologies
Map Topologies (Shapefiles and non-topology geodatabases)
Geodatabase Topologies (Geodatabase)
Background on COGO
Legal Descriptions
Glossary of Deed Terms
Definition of Curves
Aliquot Descriptions
Legal Descriptions and Figures
Common COGO Workflows
Create Easement Layer from legal descriptions on a Parcel Layer
Traverse
Traverse Tool (ArcEditor and ArcInfo only)
To Load a traverse from a text file
Traverse - Closure Report
Adding and Populating COGO Fields in a Feature Class
How to split features in COGO Lines
How to Label COGO Line Features
Attribute Domains
Subtypes
Creating Point
Create a Point at the Intersection of two Features
Preparing data for analysis
Dissolving Features
Geoprocessing Wizard
Creating Graphs
Exporting Data
Analyzing Spatial Data
Buffer
Buffer Tools
Buffer Applications
Vignette
Geoprocessing Wizard
Clipping Layers
Overlays
Spatial Analyst
Using Spatial Analyst in ArcMap to create an elevation relief
Transparency
Elevation Contours
Creating Contours
Symbolize Contours
Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN) Surface
TIN Attributes
Create a TIN from sample point feature/mass points/survey shots
Creating TIN surfaces from vector data
Edit a TIN
Cut/Fill Analysis using a TIN
Compare TIN surface to GRID surface
Cut-and-Fill Analysis
Raster Calculator and Map Algebra
Hydrology and Spatial Analyst
3D Analyst Extension
ArcScene and 3D Analyst Extension
USGS Digital Elevation Model (DEM)
USGS National Elevation Dataset
Options To Clip Raster Images

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

84 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Raster Projection - NAD83 datum to WGS84

Raster Image Processor (RIP)
ArcGIS Overlay Analysis
How to create a composite Curve Number (CN) using ArcMap
Projecting data in ArcMap
Missing Spatial Reference
Map Projections
How to Project Geodatabases and Shapefiles
Define a Shapefile's Projection
Define a ArcInfo Coverage's Projection
Define a GeoDatabase feature class Projection
Common Coordinate Systems used in Clark County NV
StatePlane Coordinate System (SPCS)
Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM)
Define Local/Surface Coordinate Projection in ArcMap
Transformation
Indepth Discussion on Projections
Geocoding
Geocoding Concept
Using an Address Location in ArcMap with the Find Tool
Interactive Geocoding
Geocoding Applications
Geocoding Service
Batch Geocoding - Shapefile (dbf)
ZIP codes
Free Online Geocoding
Reverse Geocoding
Network Analyst
Build Network Dataset from Shapefile
Build Network Dataset in a Geodatabase Feature Dataset
How to Trace Vehicle Route Using GPS Data Based on Shortest Path
ESRI ArcGlobe
ModelBuilder, Geoprocessing and Python Scripts
Geoprocessing in ArcGIS
Autodesk MapGuide
ArcGIS Online
GIS Servers - ArcIMS Server
Internet Mapping
Export Geodatabase to AutoCAD drawing file (.dwg)
US Census and TIGER/Line
Overview and Concept
Hierarchical Geographic Entities
TIGER/Line Issues
Census 2000 Redistricting Summary Issues
How to obtain TIGER/Line data
Shapefiles of US Census Blocks
Census 2000 Summary File 1 (SF 1)
Import Census 2000 Redistricting Files
How to join TIGER/Line with Census 2000 Redistricting Files

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

85 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Population Density
Paper Size
Survey
Microsoft Access Database Review
Simple Access Database Queries Using Filters
Access Tables and Fields
Miscellaneous Topics
Creating Point Features from Polygon Centroid Features
Creating Reports
Review - Reports and Joins
Compare Aerial Photo Images
ArcMap Images

Overview of GIS
GIS Concept
Geographic Information Systems (GIS)
"Geographic information system" means a collection of computer hardware, software and data that is used for the collection, management, manipulation, analysis and
display of information that includes a positional component.' (Nevada Administrative Code, NAC 625.795 4a)
Basically just a database linked to a map that allows one to perform spatial queries/analysis. For example, in databases such as Microsoft Access, a form is used to input
and display data. The query connects the form to the database. The data isn't stored in the form. So in ArcGIS, the form would be ArcMap and the database is Microsoft
Access (known as the GeoDataBase, GDB). In Autodesk Land Development, the database is the points file, alignment, etc. and the form is AutoCAD.
"Any geographic information system should be capable of six fundamental operations in order to useful for finding solutions to real-world problems. A GIS should be
able to Capture data, Store data, Query data, Analyze data, Display data, and Output data" (ESRI Virtual Campus-Basics of ArcGIS, Lesson 1: Introducing a GIS, What
can a GIS do?)
The GIS 4 Step Solution Process
Step 1: Identify Problem
Step 2: Create or Acquire Data
Step 3: Perform Analysis
Step 4: Present Results
GIS Tabular Data
1. Flat files
Simple ASCII text files, whether columnar, tab (.tab) or comma delimited (.csv)
2. Relational Database Management Systems (RDMS)
Use of a relate item (known as a primary key) to link separate tables together
Objective is to limit duplicate field entries by using an ID and lookup table (a.k.a. switchboard)
Use the write once principal - data is stored in one record, then linked into other tables.
3. Object Database
Basically any data that is embedded in the file, example is AutoCAD drawings-attributes stored within file.
GIS Data Types/Features
1. Points
Represents a single place on a map, such as a fire hydrant
A single coordinate pair is used to identify the location.
Point features have clear boundaries or distinction between other features
Use point features if your data is countable
2. Lines/Arcs/Polyline
Represents a linear feature, such as a street centerline.
3. Polypolylines/Routes
A single feature that includes two or more polylines, such as a bus route
Just a convenient way to group related polylines into one map feature so that they can be selected or linked to a database as a single entity
Known as Dynamic Segmentation in ArcInfo
4. Polygons
A feature that encloses an area, a boundary, such as the State of Nevada.
3D Polygon Features - stores Z values in a shapefile or geodatabase
5. Polypolygons/Multipart Features
Map feature consisting of two or more polygons that is treated as a single map feature (multiple noncontiguous areas), such as the State of Hawai'i which consists
of several islands. Known as Multipart Features in ArcGIS, Polypolygons in Autodesk MapGuide, MPolygons in AutoCAD Map.
6. Regions
Composite polygons (hybrid of polygons and layers)
Implemented in ArcInfo, similar to polypolygons (supports noncontiguous areas) but more powerful
Allows for overlapping polygons (e.g. spatial index of construction projects or showing the boundary of a country over time)
Nested features are supported, that is polygons within polygons, for example counties within a state.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

86 of 378

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

See ESRI Article Number 23404 How to Create a region or boundary map with no internal boundaries in ArcMap.
See ESRI Article Number 21381 How to Create donut polygons from existing features in ArcMap
Text/Annotation
Labels that appear on maps
Tend not to have any attributes or location associated with it directly
Annotation is typically text but can also be any graphic element that annotates your map (e.g. lines, circles, and polygons).
Dynamic Text/Labels- labels generated from a database. Autodesk LDD and Map and AutoCAD block attributes do this.
Static Text- labels places by hand. Called annotation by ESRI. AutoCAD TEXT command.
Feature-Linked Annotation- have the control of static text, but also if the feature (e.g. fire hydrant) is deleted, label is also deleted (e.g. fire hydrant number). Used
by ESRI
Raster Images
Matrix/Grid of pixels, identify by rows and columns
Opposite of vector drawings
A pixel/cell contains a single value
Example, aerial photos
Use if data varies continuously across an area, not countable. Example temperature, rainfall, elevation.
Map Elements (a.k.a. map objects, map components)
Used in map layouts/paperspace for final presentation, instead of analysis like data view/modelspace.
Title of Map - should be easy to see and reflect the map's purpose
North Arrow - used to orient the map to the world. Size of north arrow should not be so large that it diverts attention from the map body. Known Bug: The north
arrow and other graphic elements shift positions in the layout, see ESRI Article ID 25845
Legend - used to help the reader interpret the map body
Scale bar - used to relate the size of objects on the map to the real world. Typically located on the bottom of the map and can be represented as a verbal scale
(1"=40') or a representative fraction (1:480)
Borders and neatlines - borders are used around the data frame and neatlines highlight the map elements.
Inset Maps - also known as Overview/Index/Vicinity/Key maps and are used to identify the location of the map body (data frame) a larger portion of the world.
Marginalia (mar'gi'na'lia)- any supporting elements on a map that help the reader interpret the map
Paperspace/Layouts vs. Modelspace/Data Views
Modelspace- scale of objects are 1:1, drawn at actually size. Can think of the modelspace like the body of a document. "Data View is the all-purpose viewing
option for exploring, displaying, querying, editing, and analyzing data." [ESRI Virtual Campus - Presenting Data in ArcGIS Lesson 1: Making maps in ArcMap]
Layouts- virtual page upon which you place and arrange data frames/viewports and map elements. The objects are scaled to fit on paper. Engineers typically use
scale of 1"=40'. Can think of the Layout as the header/footer section in a document, watermarks, page numbers, etc. "The Layout View lets you produce
cartographic quality digital and hardcopy maps using the information contained in your data frames, reports, and graphs." [ibid]
ArcPlot is similar to Layouts
ArcEdit is similar to Modelspace
Viewports/Data Frames link the modelspace to the layout
Layouts usually contain graphic and map elements
Coordinates
X-Y coordinates locate a point in 2D space
two types of coordinates systems: geographic (lat/long) and projected (stateplane)
Origin is lower lefthand corner of graph, typically begins with 0,0
False Origin- used to keep coordinates positive, e.g. Mount Diablo Meridian (MDM) (near San Francisco, CA) is the true origin for State Plane Coordinates but the
origin is shifted 8,000,000 meters down (Northing) and 200,000 meters to the right (Easting).
Table Attributes
One or more records (rows) with one or more fields (columns)
stores the tabular information in a GIS
Cell- the intersection of a record/row with a field/column

## ArcGIS Desktop consists of ArcView, ArcEditor, and ArcInfo

ArcView is a subset of ArcEditor which is a subset of ArcInfo. Similar to AutoCAD and AutoCAD Map, where AutoCAD Map can do everything AutoCAD can do.
Only ArcView is available as a stand-alone seat
"ArcView 8 is a powerful GIS data visualization, query, analysis, and map creation solution designed for Microsoft Windows NT/2000. It provides interactive tools for
exploring, selecting, displaying, editing, analyzing, symbolizing, and classifying data as well as for automatically creating, updating, and managing metadata." (ESRI
Virtual Campus-Basics of ArcGIS, Lesson 2)
ArcEditor adds the ability to edit coverages and geodatabases
ArcInfo adds additional geoprocessing tools and a full version of ArcInfo Workstation (comprised of ARC, ArcEdit, ArcPlot, INFO, and ARC Macro Language or AML)
All 3 types of ArcGIS (i.e. ArcView, ArcEditor, ArcInfo) include these 3 Applications
ArcMap Application- used to display and query geographic data on maps and to edit and output data
ArcCatalog Application- used to browse/preview geographic data sources and create and update metadata. Basically a Windows Explorer for spatial data.
ArcToolbox Application- contains powerful tools for performing geographic analysis and data conversion. Used to change map projections.
ArcView Extensions: Network Analyst, 3D Analyst, ArcPress, Geostatistical Analyst, Spatial Analyst, and StreetMap.
ArcGIS System consists of ArcGIS Desktop, ArcIMS, and ArcSDE. Won't be covered in this course.
References: [Vance 00 p. 115] and [MapGuide R5 p. 91]

Exploring ArcMap
ArcMap Standard Toolbar

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

87 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Exploring ArcMap
[Ormsby 00, Chapter 3]
Used to display, analyze, and print maps
What an ArcMap application windows consists of
Main menu toolbar- pulldown menu, in some cases can be used in replace of icons. Cannot be toggled off.
Tools toolbar- pan, zoom icons
Standard toolbar- print, save icons
Draw toolbar- add graphic elements to map
TOC- shows data frame(s) and what layers it contains
Map Display
Status Bar- displays results of measure tool, informs user when ArcMap is busy (globe is spinning), shows a description of buttons and menu items as you mouse
over them.
note: toolbars can float or be docked
Spatial Bookmarks
Zooms to a define location in the map display
3 ways to create a spatial bookmark
From the Main Menu Toolbar click View -> Bookmarks -> Create
From the Identify Results dialog box, right-click on the identified feature and click Set Bookmark in the context menu. Bookmark is named after the feature.
From the Find dialog box, right-click the Value in the Find Results list and click Set Bookmark in the context menu. Bookmark is named after the feature.
To use a spatial bookmark: View -> Bookmarks -> then select name of bookmark
To remove a spatial bookmark: View -> Bookmarks -> Manage: Click a bookmark then click remove.
Can only be defined on spatial data, can't be defined on an area of the layout page in layout view.
Cannot use Spatial Bookmarks on raster layers. See ESRI Article ID 18368
See [Ormsby 00, p. 34-35]

List By Source

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

88 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## List By Drawing Order

List By Visibility
List By Selection
Options
Primarily used to toogle layers on/off
Shows the layers being displayed in ArcMap
Shows how layers are organized into data frames
Order displayed in TOC is order drawn in the ArcMap - Map Display window. Top layer in TOC is the layer last drawn (on top of all the other layers) in the map display.
3 tabs: Display, Source, and Selection
Red exclamation point just before the layer name implies the layer's data source is broken
Ctrl Mouse Click will toogle on layers on/off
To show/hide contents of a layer's legend: click layer's plus or minus sign in TOC
To show/hide contents of a data frame: click data frame's plus or minus sign in TOC
Data Frames within the TOC cannot be reordered. See ESRI Article 17570
Context Menus - right mouse click on a layer [Ormsby 00, p. 21]
References
What's new in ArcMap 10 basics

Drawing Toolbar

Tools Toolbar

Changes the display scale has shown in the Standard Toolbar (ArcMap Menubar: View -> Toolbars -> Standard)
To zoom in click the + magnifier icon in the Tools toolbar. A single click in the map display zooms around a point. Click and drag will create a rectangle to zoom
around an area.
To zoom out click the - magnifier icon in the Tools toolbar.
To zoom to a specific scale in the data frame, type or choose the desired scale on the Standard toolbar.
To zoom to the extent of a layer, choose "Zoom to Layer Extent" from the context menu of the layer in the TOC.
To zoom to the full extent of a data frame, click the Full Extent button (icon of the world) on the Tools toolbar. If option is grayed out, click View -> Data Frame
Properties: Data Frame Tab and check Automatic extent.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

89 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Continous Zoom/Pan (ArcMap): Tools -> Customize: Commands Tab: Pan/Zoom, in Commands Window drag and drop the "Continuous Zoom and Pan" button
onto the Tools toolbar.
Continous Zoom/Pan (ArcCatalog): Tools -> Customize: Commands Tab: Geography Category, in Commands Window drag and drop the "Continuous Zoom and
Pan" button onto the Tools toolbar.
Continous Zoom/Pan: hold right mouse button down and move mouse to zoom in/out
Continous Zoom/Pan: hold left mouse button down and move mouse to pan
Wheel Mouse Scroll - just rotate the wheel mouse to scroll up/down in ArcMap
Wheel Mouse Zoom - hold down Ctrl key while scrolling with mouse to zoom in/out
Wheel Mouse Switch between Data View & Layout View - hold down Shift key while rotating wheel mouse to switch views
"Hold down the following keys to temporarily turn the tool you are currently using into a navigation tool."
Z = Zoom In
X = Zoom Out
C = Pan
B = Continuous Zoom/Pan (drag with mouse button zooms in/out, drag with right mouse button pans)
2. Selection Buttons (9-11)
Select Features
white arrow with a square map in the upper right corner
Used to select feature in a data frame or in Data View
[Ormsby 00, p. 201]
Clear Selected Features - deselects all of the currently selected features in the active data frame
Select Elements
icon that has a black arrow
Used mainly in Layout View to select map elements (e.g. north arrow, legend, and so on)
3. Query Buttons (12 and 16)
Identify Tool
use the mouse to perform a spatial query feature attributes
Another method to query data
Icon found on the Tools toolbar
features in all visible layers under the pointer will be identified. Solves issue of overlapping features.
Displays all fields with it's values/attributes of the identified feature. Not like Map Tips which only display attributes of one field.
Can "flash" the feature in the map display by clicking the name of the feature on the left pane in the Identify Results window.
See [Ormsby 00, p. 26-27, 197-200]
Use the Identify Tool to obtain the location of the cursor in different formats (e.g. Degrees Minutes Seconds)

## Find Tool (16)

Another method to query attribute data
Results of query are displayed like the Identify Results window
[Ormsby 00, p. 207-208]
for more discussion, see the Finding Features
icon that has a yellow lightning bolt on it
Need to define hyperlinks before you can use them
2 ways to define hyperlinks: Field-based and Dynamic
Note if the hyperlink button is grayed out, open the layer properties in the TOC, select Display tab, then check "Support Hyperlinks using field"
Cannot use the Hyperlink tool on raster layers. See ESRI Article ID 18368
See [Ormsby 00, p. 205] or online help [ArcMap Desktop Help -> ArcMap -> Querying maps -> Displaying a Web page or document about a feature]
gives ability to link documents or web pages to a feature
must use the Hyperlink tool in the Tools toolbar
Linked features will be outlined in blue when the Hyperlink tool is active for polygons and drawn in blue for lines and points.
Map tip showing the link will popup when you hover the mouse over the linked feature
Document- when clicked, will open a file using the application that the file type is currently associated with
URL- web page will be launched in the default web brower
Macro- ability to create customized hyperlink behavior
If hyperlink is greyed out, try setting the Layer properties in the TOC, Display tab, check 'Support Hyperlinks using field:'

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

90 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Field-based hyperlinks- in Layer Properties -> Display tab, check the Support Hyperlinks check box. The link is just an attribute value in the table. Of course
the hyperlink field must be defined as a text. Specify fieldname in the box.
Hyperlink Base: File -> Map Properties. "This makes it easier to manage hyperlinks because if the location of the targets changes can simply edit this
one setting instead of having to edit each value of the field providing the hyperlink targets." [ArcMap online help] Basically allows relative web pages.
Doesn't work if field contacts photos/images, i.e. the field is defined as OLE Object/BLOB instead of text, the ArcMap hyperlink will not recognize the
photos/images embedded in the record.
stores the names of the targets with the layer in the map
use Identify tool, then right mouse click on the feature and choose Add Hyperlink. Use same method to edit, manage, or delete links.
Layer must be visible in TOC
Benefits, associate metadata and/or company website with data
ArcMap doesn't recognize hyperlink field type from an Access Database, so the hyperlink tool won't work. In other words, a hyperlink created in ArcMap will not
work in Access and vice versa, a hyperlink created in Access will not work in ArcMap. To check the status of this bug, see Tracking ID CQ00237011
When exporting a map to pdf, the hyperlinks are NOT supported (as of ArcGIS 9.2)
5. HTML Pop-up Button (14)
similar to an Identify query but returns results in HTML format

"HTML pop-ups are often used for map layers published with ArcGIS Server and for preparing map layers for delivery using Web formats such as Keyhole
Markup Language (KML). Because these map layers are served on the Web, users can access HTML content at Web sites by clicking features in the map." ArcGIS
Desktop 9.3 Help - Setting HTML pop-up properties for feature layers
Similar to Google Earth Balloon Descriptor
6. Measure Button (15)
must select Measure Tool icon on Tools toolbar to activiate the command
looks like a ruler with a question mark (?) above it
Results of measure in map display are displayed in the status bar
"ArcMap uses one method to calculate distance in a projected coordinate system (flat surface) and a different method to calculate distance in a geographic
coordinate system (curved surface). However, when your map is in a projected coordinate system, ArcMap allows you to measure distance using either method.
Hold down the Shift key and use the Measure Line tool." (see ESRI Virtual Campus - Learning ArcGIS Desktop - Module 3: Referencing Data to Real Locations)
Similar to Google Earth - Ruler Tool
7. Find Route (17)
8. Go To XY (18)

## Use to navigate to a know point

Pan, Zoom or Flash the x,y location
Decimal Degree Example in Las Vegas NV: Long = -115.14 Lat = 36.11
Degrees Minutes Seconds: Long: -115 7 59 Lat: 36 11 1
ArcMap will automatically convert to Long: 1157'59"W Lat: 3611'1"N
Similar to Google Earth - Search Panel - Fly To Latitude, Longitude
Can specify the units in which to enter coordinates

## 9. Open Time Slider Window (19)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

91 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Example: Clark County Assessor, AOEXTRACT table, using the CONSTYR field which starts at 1901 (many records have 0 or null value for this field)
Using the Time Slider window
Setting the time properties on data
10. Create Viewer Window Button (20)
same command as Viewer Window (ArcMap Menu: Window -> Viewer)

Overview Window
creates a separate window that is linked to the map display
Shows zoom extent of map display on the full zoom extend in the overview window
Used to pan and zoom the map display
Must be in Data View mode in ArcMap, else the Window -> Overview... is grayed/dimmed out
Not able to print the overview window in a layout, see Article #20204 To create an overview window in a layout, see the online help ArcGIS Desktop Help ->
Contents tab -> ArcMap -> Laying out and printing maps -> Adding data frames -> Using on data frame to show the location of another. Will be cover in later
sessions of class.
Similar to DsViewer command in AutoCAD 14 and later.
Similar to Google Earth Overview Map
Magnification Window
handy feature that allows a closer view of a particular area without changing the data frame's scale
From menu toolbar, click Window -> Magnifer...
Only works in View -> Data View mode. Option is dimmed/grayed out when in View -> Layout View mode
Similar to the Windows XP C:\Windows\System32\magnify.exe command (Start -> All Programs -> Accessories -> Accessibility -> Magnifier)
Viewer Window
Independent view onto the map
Use if you want to zoom or pan to a different part of the map but don't want to change the data frame window
Can use to Identify, Select Features, Perform Edits and so on
Only works in View -> Data View mode. Option is dimmed/grayed out when in View -> Layout View mode
Right-click on the window to get useful shortcuts
Handy feature if you have dual monitors
ArcToolbox
Command Line
Built-in Commands
COMMANDS - lists all available commands
USAGE - type usage followed by the name of a command to return the usage for the command. Note, I find it easier to just type the command name and
press enter, then the usage will display in the message section of the command line window.
ENVIRONMENTS - lists all environment settings
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - An overview of the Command Line window

## ArcMap Layers/Themes and Layer Files (.lyr)

ArcMap Layers and Themes
Transparent overlays
Used to organize and group data
AutoCAD's Layer Manager, TOC can show ArcInfo coverages, shapefile, CAD files etc. Think of it as Layer Manager and XRefs linked together.
Order of Display- "top of contents equals top of map"

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

92 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Layers can be any of the following datasets: vectors, raster, tabular and surfaces (Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN)).
"...collections of geographic objects that are alike" [Ormsby 01, p. 2].
ArcMap Layer Files (.lyr)
Layer files (.lyr) "...are not spatial data sets, but rather instructions for displaying spatial data sets with certain colors, symbol markers, line widths, and so on." [Obrmsby
01, p. 46]. Similiar to a map document, a layer stores the path to the source data and other layer properties, including symbology (see the layer properties through the
Layer Properties dialog).
Layer files work for both vector and raster datasets
Layer files can use relative paths to source data
"The layer file that is created will reference its data source using the Data Source Options setting that are specified for the map document. By default, this setting
specifies that data sources will be referenced with their full paths. Set this property before you save your layer." (ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 Using full
paths, relative paths, or UNC paths in the layer's data reference)
Layer files (.lyr) are similar to ER Mapper algorithm files (.alg).
ArcMap 8.1: use the source tab in the Table of Contents of ArcMap to view the data sources for the layers. "When the Display tab is active, you can reorder layers but
you won't see certain objects, such as stand-alone tables. When the Source tab is active, you can't reorder the layers but stand-alone tables are listed." [ESRI Virtual
Campus, Learning ArcGIS II, Module 1, Lesson 1, Displaying Layers]
The layer references source data stored on the computer, it is not the source data itself.
ESRI Article ID 21486 What information is stored in a layer (.lyr) file? Symbology, symbology classification, labeling properties, scale dependency and definition.
ESRI Article ID 31236 Can I use a layer (.lyr) file to create annotation? No, layer (.lyr) cannot be used to create map annotation or feature class annotation.
ESRI Article ID 24261 What are dynamic labels? Text created on-the-fly in ArcMap by a labeling expression that is stored in the layer being labeled. The layer can be
saved as part of the .mxd or separately as a .lyr file.
ESRI Article ID 22484 Error: The import geometry type does not match destination geometry type
Clark County - ArcMap Layer Files
Street Centerline (Street Centerline Group.lyr or Street Centerline GroupUNLV.lyr)
Zipcode Boundaries (GISMO.GISMO.SCLZIP_P Feature Class)
Book Layout (GISMO.GISMO.CLARKBK_P Feature Class) saved in gisdata\crgeodb\source\indexgrids.mdb in the clarkbk_p feature class or gisdata\crgen
\shapefil\clarkbk_p.shp
Section Layout (GISMO.GISMO.CLARKTRS_P Feature Class) saved in gisdata\crgeodb\source\indexgrids.mdb in the clarktrs_p feature class or gisdata\crgen
\shapefil\clarktrs_p.shp
Street Centerline - Major Streets (GISMO.GISMO.SCL_L Feature Class) saved in gisdata\crgeodb\source\streetcenterline.mdb in the streets_l feature class
Street Centerline - All streets (GISMO.GISMO.SCL_L Feature Class) saved in gisdata\crgeodb\source\streetcenterline.mdb in the streets_l feature class
Jurisdictions (GISMO.GISMO.SCLCITY_P Feature Class) saved in gisdata\crgeodb\source\streetcenterline.mdb in the sclcity_p feature class
Spring Valley Planned Landuse
(\\ccgis1\gisdata\crcomp\source\spvplu) saved in gisdata\crgeodb\source\Landuse.mdb in the CC_SPVPLU_p feature class
Parcel
GISMO.GISMO.PLNOTES_A
GISMO.GISMO.PLPCLDIMS_A
GISMO.GISMO.PLSMALLPCL_A
GISMO.GISMO.PLSUBDSEQ_A
GISMO.GISMO.LLHISTDIMS_A
GISMO.GISMO.LLLOTBLK_A
GISMO.GISMO.LLRDVACNUM_A
GISMO.GISMO.LLSUBDNAME_A
GISMO.GISMO.LLTAXCODE_A
GISMO.GISMO.LOTLINE_L
GISMO.GISMO.PARCEL_P
GISMO.GISMO.ASSREASE_L
GISMO.GISMO.CONDO_P
How do I use my ArcMap Symbology in AutoCAD Map3D, MapGuide and Google Earth KML?
Problem: A GIS staff member has spend a great amount of time creating the symbology for a polygon zoning layer. How do I preserve or recreate this coloring
scheme/thematic map into other applications?
ESRI Solution: Well its not really a solution. ArcGIS has the ability to save a layer file (.lyr) which preserves the symbology (not the data, such as a shapefile) but
unforunately this is a binary file that can only be used with ArcMap.
Autodesk Map3D Solution: using the Display Manager from the Map Workspace, can also export your theme/stylization into a .layer file. Nice thing is this .layer file is
XML text document which can be edited outside of Map3D using any text editor (I recommend using a XML text editor like XML Notepad from Microsoft). For more
help on Map3D layer files, see Map3D User' Guide - Saving and Loading Styled Feature Layers
MapGuide Solution: unknown how to load the .layer file from Map3D into MapGuide Studio.

## ArcMap Group Layers

Ability to combine several layers in the TOC into one. Benefits, provides order to layers, can turn off several layers with one click.
The Visible Scale Range set on the Group layer overrides the settings of the individual layers
3 ways to create group layers: 1) select several layers in TOC, then right mouse click and clicking Group. 2) Right-click the data frame you want to create a group layer
in, then click New Group Layer. 3) Use ArcCatalog.
Ways to add layers to a group layer: 1) drag and drop layers in the TOC into the group layer. 2) double-click the group layer in the TOC to open the Group Layer
Properties window. Click Group tab, Add... button, then navigate to data layer you want to add.
Can easily rearrange order of layers in the group by dragging and droping.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

93 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## To remove a layer from the group, just drag out.

see ArcGIS Desktop Help, Contents Tab: ArcMap -> Managing layers -> Grouping layers

## ArcMap Visible Scale

Ability to turn on/off the display of layers based on the scale of the data frame
Set the Zoom In Scale (Maximum Visible Scale)
Set the Zoom Out Scale (Minimum Visible Scale)
Set the visible scale by right clicking on the layer in the ArcMap Table of Contents (TOC) and selecting properties from the context menu

## ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Displaying layers at certain scales

My Places
Basically using the same spatial bookmarks with different map documents
"Adding items to the My Places list makes it easy for you to store your frequently used addresses, gazetteer locations, features, and extents and use them to
navigate around maps and globes." (ESRI ArcGIS 9.2 Desktop Help)
spatial bookmarks are stored in the map document (.mxd) whereas My Places are by default stored in your windows profile (e.g. C:\Documents and
My Places ESRI Video
Data Frames
A group of layers
Can have multiple data frames, but can only work on the active data frame
Can rename a data frame: Method 1: Data Frame Properties, General Tab, name text box. Method 2: click the data frame name once, wait a second, then click again, will
have the option to edit the text.
Used by ArcMap which requires at least one data frame to exist.
ArcMap Definition Queries
Appears you can only perform a definition query based on a tabular query, not a spatial query
Recommend using this on the Clark County StreetCenterline.mdb geodatabase. Namely the streets_l and the sclrouting_l line feature classes.
How do I create a definition query so I only see Interstates and Highways?

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

94 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

[STRCLASS] LIKE 'INTERSTATE' OR [STRCLASS] LIKE 'STATE HIGHWAY' OR [STRCLASS] LIKE 'US HIGHWAY'
ArcGIS Desktop 10 Help - Displaying a subset of features in a layer
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Displaying a subset of features in a layer
ArcMap Problem: Definition queries and definition selection sets are ignored by joins in ArcMap

## Export ArcMap to Adobe PDF

Adobe PDF (Portable Document Format) is a graphics file format that supports vector and raster graphics in a single file. It also supports multiple pages, preserve layers,
embed fonts, feature attributes and map georeference information.
ArcMap File Export Map Save as type: PDF (*.pdf)
General Tab
Resolution "This specifies the output resolution or (dots per inch) in the output image. Higher values usually produce sharper images. However, this can
also substantially increase the file size and processing time. For PDF, the default resolution is 300 dpi." (ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 Help
Exporting to PDF)
Output Image Quality (Resample Ratio) is used to resample the raster data prior to printing/exporting the map. "For maps with raster data or transparent
vector layers, adjusting this value can significantly reduce the amount of data being passed through the output pipeline and will reduce export times and file
sizes." (ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 Help Exporting to PDF)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

95 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Format Tab
Destination Colorspace "RGB is the default and is appropriate for on-screen viewing and printing to inkjet or laser printers. CMYK mode is intended for
commercial print production, when your output will be sent to a print shop." (ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 Help Exporting to PDF)

Pages Tab

Layers and Attributes: None
Layers and Attributes: Export PDF Layers Only
Layers and Attributes: Export Map Georeference Information
"The visibility of fields in the feature's attribute table determines what fields will be exported in the resulting PDF. To turn these fields on and off, go to
the Fields tab of the Layer Properties dialog box. The check boxes determine the visibility of the given field. Check or uncheck the check boxes to
expose more or fewer attributes in the resultant PDF." (ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 Help Exporting to PDF)
People using your PDF can access these attributes in Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader using the Object Data tool (see Tools > Object Data, or enable
the Model Tree view in either of those programs).

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

96 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

To view the Lat/Long values in the exported PDF, check the Export Map Georeference Information checkbox on the ArcMap Export Map dialog box/window.

## ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 Help Exporting to PDF

See ESRI ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Advanced PDF features
How do you query the attribute data ArcMap stores in the PDF? On the Model Tree menu, select Search...
GIS Attributes are stored in a Property Value table

## ArcMap output options - how to share results of ArcMap analysis

ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Advanced PDF Features
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Exporting a map
Plot or Hardcopy map. Mount on foamboard for a presentation. Problems on distribution/sharing
Exporting Maps to PDF ( ESRI video)
Great for printing, but support of transparency by ArcMap isn't available. See ESRI Article ID 22070, FAQ: Why does ArcMap not support transparency in EPS,
PDF, or AI export files?
We could provide a copy of the map document (.mxd) and associated layers (i.e. geodatabase, shapefiles, coverages, and so on). Problem is not everyone has a copy of
ArcMap software.
We could purchase the ArcGIS Publisher extension and convert the map document to a format which can be used by the free ESRI ArcReader program. Problem, the free

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

97 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

ArcReader isn't as widely distributed as the free Adobe Acrobat Reader. Also need to learn another software application just for distribution of ArcMap output.
We could use an Internet Mapping application such as Autodesk MapGuide. This option is mainly used to publish data layers, not maps/plots
We could export the map as a graphic, such as TIFF or JPEG file. This is great if publishing on the internet or adding as a figure in Microsoft Word document. Editing is a
problem since the image is flattened, vectors and fonts are converted to pixels.
Animation
Animating data through time
1.
How do we export a map/plot from ArcMap?
ArcMap to PDF issues
Problem - none of the hyperlinks in the map document are converted into PDF hyperlinks
Problem - ArcMap export to PDF doesn't support layering directly, need to use Adobe Illustrator. Open either the ArcMap exported .ai or .pdf file in Adobe
Illustrator and save as .pdf with the include layer option on. (Resolved in version ArcGIS 9)
ArcMap 9.1 only supports PDF version 1.2 specification. Need PDF version 1.4 specification for support of layers and transparency See ESRI Article ID
22070.
ArcMap 9.1 only supports Adobe Illustrator (.ai) version 6 specification. Need .ai version 9 to support exporting layers to PDF and transparency.
Workaround for transparency. For exported maps, transparency can be re-applied to the desired elements in an external editing application such as Adobe
Illustrator 9 (see ESRI Article ID 17332)
Layers are preserved in the pdf file, cannot be seen in Adobe Acrobat, need to use Adobe Illustrator. All the layers are embedded under Layer 1 layer with the
name <Group> . (Resolved in ArcGIS 9.2)
"AI files are an excellent format for post-processing in Adobe Illustrator as well as an interchange format for publishing. The ArcMap AI format preserves
"Graphics" layer: annotation, labels, and data frame graphic text exported to this layer name within the .ai file
"Extras" layer: map surround elements and graphic text elements are exported to this layer name
"Extras" layer: raster data is exported to another layer called extras
See ArcMap help, Layout out and printing maps, Exporting a map
ArcMap to Windows Enhanced Metafile (EMF)
Issues exporting to EMF with raster images and opening in Adobe Illustrator (AI). To confirm the problem is AI, insert the EMF into a blank ArcMap
document in Layout View (Insert > Picture). See ESRI Article ID 17783
Flash Video - How to use ArcMap Export Map to create a PDF with layers. ExportMap2PDF-flash.html
trash Video - 980x600 trash.html
ArcGIS Desktop 9.1 and 9.2: A Selection of Time-Saving Tips and Shortcuts

## Map Documents (.mxd)

Displayed in ArcMap. Used to store graphic elements, text, and links to the data in the TOC amoung other things.
red exclamation point next to the feature class in the ArcMap TOC indicates that the data is missing. Right mouse click and click Set Data Source to fix. See ESRI Article
Number 16476.
Using the Save command can increase the size of the .mxd, see ESRI Article Number 20872. Recommend doing a Save As.
Use relative path names to help solve issues with moving data. See, Save an ArcMap map document to a CDROM preserving the paths to the data, Article Number
20905.

## Using ArcMap with Relative Path Names

Solves the problem of transferring ArcMap documents (.mxd), layer files (.lyr) and data features (e.g. geodatabase, shapefiles, coverages, etc.) from UNLV Lab to
another computer
Layer files (.lyr) - to ensure no broken links to the data, do the following
Within ArcMap: File -> Map Properties... click Data Source Options... button, then select the "Store relative path names" radio button.
Within ArcMap, Table of Contents Window: right click on the layer and select, Save As Layer File... Highly recommend you save the layer file (.lyr) in the same
directory as the data features (e.g. shapefiles). Then when you copy both the .lyr file and .shp onto a different computer, you can just add the .lyr file to ArcMap and
saved symbology and label expressions will come over correctly, you won't even have to add the .shp to ArcMap.
References:
"The layer file that is created will reference its data source using the Data Source Options setting currently specified for the map on the Document Properties
dialog box (accessed from the ArcMap File menu). By default, this setting specifies that data sources will be referenced with their full path." (see ArcGIS
Desktop 9.3 Help Working with layers)
"Once you've saved the layer file, you can't change the data source options from absolute to relative or vice versa. The layer will always maintain the data
source option that was set for the map document at the time you saved the layer." (ibid) Workaround is to re-save the .lyr file.
Best to save .mxd and data features in the same Windows directory (e.g. c:\ceg468)
Within ArcMap: File -> Map Properties... click Data Source Options... button, then select the "Store relative path names" radio button.
The Source tab in the ArcMap Table of Contents will still show the full path, but internal will recognize relative path names.
Can now copy on to a CDROM/Zip Drive and ArcMap will find the data source link. This avoids the red exclamation point on the layer name in the ArcMap Table of
Contents.
References:
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help About referencing data on maps
How to Save an ArcMap map document to a CD preserving the paths to the data. ESRI Article Number 20905
How to Remove red exclamation point and relocate an ArcMap data source. ESRI Article Number 16476
How to Distribute a client-side geocoding service to other users. ESRI Article Number 19316
Error: The import geometry type does not match destination geometry type. ESRI Article Number 22484
Review transferring data files from UNLV to home/work

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

98 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Store .mxd and spatial data in the same directory

use relative path names paths in the .mxd (within ArcMap: File -> Map Properties -> Data Source Options button -> Store relative path names option
copy the entire directory to storage/transfer device (e.g. USB thumb drive)

Animation
Animation Toolbar
To Open the Animation Toolbar, just right click on an existing ArcMap Toolbar and choose Animation

## Publish Animation on Google Video

Best Possible Resolution on Google Video
MPEG2
When exporting video, have the option to use Audio Video Interleaved (AVI) and Apple QuickTime (QT) but ArcMap will display all codecs which is installed on
the machine. This is codec list is available from the compression dialog boxes for AVI and QT (see ArcGIS 9.2 Desktop Help - Exporting an animation to a video
file)
Resolution 640x480
HTML window size 640x480 including title bar
5000 kbps bitrate
30 frames per second
Screen size 4:3 ratio

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

99 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

De-interlace
ArcGIS Animation References
Videos of Animation in ArcMap Tutorial

Exploring ArcCatalog
ArcCatalog
Need to Know
Similar to Windows Explorer but for spatial data
Catalog Tree- used to browse data sources
view file extensions, Tools -> Options -> General tab, uncheck 'Hide file extensions'.
Different icons for the file types, e.g. square bumpy icon represents an image.
Double-clicking a map document (.mxd) will open in ArcMap.
Illustrates the spatial data hierarchy in which its organized.
File -> Connect to Folder... (add \\ccgis1\gisdata location to ArcCatalog). Then next time ArcCatalog is open, the connection to \\ccgis1\gisdata will already
be done.
Add Database Connection to SDE. Database Connections -> Add Spatial Database Connection. Server: ccgis2, Service: port:5151, Database: gismo, User
Name: public1, and Password: public1 (inital one-time setup)
Contents Tab: items selected in the Catalog Tree will be displayed in the Contents tab. For example, selecting a map document (.mxd) in the Catalog tree will show
a thumbnail in the Contents tab.
Preview Tab: used to view data in two formats, spatial-Geography View (shows spatial extend of feature) or tabular-Table View (shows feature attributes). If
viewing an .mxd file, will see the map layout.
Metadata Tab: documentation about the data. Some of the properties of the data are automatically generated and can be viewed in this tab.
Used to create a new personal geodatabase. File -> New -> Personal Geodatabase. (Note must have a directory selected in the Catalog Tree as well as have write
permissions in that directory).
Drag-n-Drop files from ArcCatalog to ArcMap. Another method to add data to ArcMap.
Creating new Data (i.e. Table) in ArcCatalog
ArcCatalog has the ability to create tables. It doesn't have the ability to edit or input records on these newly created tables (use Microsoft Access or ArcMap)
ArcCatalog can only create tables in a GeoDataBase (GDB), both personal and SDE
Step 1: from the ArcCatalog tree, right-click the GDB and click New -> Table
Step 2: Enter table name
Step 3: Add a field to the table: enter field name and data type. Repeat this for all fields
Step 4: Add data using Microsoft Access or ArcMap
All simple tables in the geodatabase require an ObjectID type field
Can use another table as a template, get everything but the data records
ArcMap doesn't like Access table names that have a dash "-"
Reference: ArcGIS Desktop Help - Contents tab -> Geodatabases -> Creating new items in geodatabases -> Creating tables
How to calculate the values of one field to another field in Desktop ArcInfo 8 Article Number 10014
Nice to Know
Simple query using Identify available in ArcCatalog Preview-Geography Window
To find spatial data use the Search Button (magnifying glass on top of a file cabinet) on the Standard toolbar.
Location toolbar- can type the path to an item in this text box. Note, this path is added to the location list for quick reference.
"When you copy, rename, or delete data sources with ArcCatalog, auxilary files and other data sources that are linked to the datasets are also copied, renamed, or
deleted." (see ArcGIS Desktop Help: ArcCatalog -> Managing the Catalog's contents -> Organizing your data -> About organizing your data with ArcCatalog).
Deleting a database connection or shortcut doesn't delete the database or the target.
View -> Toolbars -> Geography
Only available the Preview tab is selected in the Catalog Display window of ArcCatalog
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Pan, and Full Extent - work the same as ArcMap
Identify
Create Thumbnail - zoom into feature, then click the Create Thumbnail button. Now the contents tab shows a sketch of the feature. A thumbnail for a map
(.mxd) is stored with the map document. A thumbnail for a layer or data source is store within its metadata.
See ArcGIS Desktop Help -> ArcCatalog -> Exploring an item's geography -> Creating thumbnails
See [Hutchinson 04, p. 26] for additional info on ArcCatalog.
View file extension in Windows Explorer. Tools -> Folder Options... View tab, uncheck Hide extensions for known file types. Now when browsing folders, full
filename is displayed, e.g. junk.txt
Universal Naming Convention (UNC), Mapped Network Folders vs. Add Network Places
Windows Command Prompt and UNC. Basically CMD doesn't support UNC path. Workaround, pushd \\ccgis1\gisdata (see Article 26901 by John Savill)
How to add a Network Place in Windows Explorer, see Microsoft Knowledge Base Article 308416
Mapped Network Folders assigns an "... alias-the assigned drive letter-that provides an alternative means of access. In general, drive mapping is obsolete,
having been supplanted by improvements in and greater reliance on My Network Places." (see Microsoft Windows XP Inside Out, ISBN: 0735613826, p.
971)
Issues sharing ArcMap documents (.mxd) if layer data sources use different alias, i.e. mapped network folders. For example, Admin maps \\ccgis1\gisdata to
the O: drive and Design maps it to the M: drive. UNC will solve this problem. Won't solve problem if you just give the .mxd file to another agency.
Catalog Metadata tab- provides information about the data set, such as coordinate system, attribute descriptions, etc. ArcCatalog creates a XML document of the
metadata. XML focus on content, HTML focus on display. XML documents can be searched. Example metadata site in Clark County. ESRI has a whitepaper on
metadata, "ESRI Profile of the Content Standard for Digital Geospatial Metadata". Another reference by the Federal Geographic Data Committee, Content
Can only print Metadata from ArcCatalog, use ArcMap instead to print Preview of data

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

100 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Can perform dual field sort by highlighting fields, right mouse click primary sort field and select Ascending/Descending Sort. Secondary sort is automatically
performed
Don't have to save changes in ArcCatalog like you do in ArcMap [Ormsby 01, p. 57]
Drag and drop feature from ArcCatalog to ArcMap TOC or drop on the Data Frame in the Map display.
Drag and drop layers onto the data frame will order the layers by feature class. See ESRI Article Number 17519.
Remember you can reorder layers in the TOC, just can't reorder data frames.
Can copy and paste layers between data frames
Searching for Map Data
Edit -> Search from Menu toolbar or Magnifying glass and file cabinet button on the standard toolbar
Results of search, right mouse click on feature of interest, select 'Go To Target' to open the spatial dataset in ArcCatalog Catalog Tree.
Can also drap and drop results of search into ArcMap.
Importing files into geodatabase tables using ArcCatalog
How to Create a point feature
Can use a Tab Delimited ASCII files, have extension .tab
Can use a Comma Delimited ASCII files, have extension .csv
ArcCatalog Context Menu, right mouse click on .tab or .csv files, Create Feature Class -> From XY Table...
Import dBase III/IV tables and INFO tables in Geodatabase
Import -> Table to Geodatabase...
Import Access tables into Geodatabase
Need to register the table with the Geodatabase: within ArcCatalog, right mouse click on table and select Register with Geodatabase. This will create an ObjectID
field in the table.

Making Maps
Templates
Provides a standardized layout when creating a series of maps.
Similar to Microsoft Word, where every Word document (.doc) is based on a template. A template determines the basic structure for a document and contains document
settings such as fonts, macros, page layouts, special formatting, and styles.
AutoCAD also uses templates. These store standard settings such has:
unit type and precision
title blocks, borders, and logos
layer names
snap, grid, and orthos settings
drawing (grid) limits
dimension styles
text styles
linetypes
Biggest problem with AutoCAD templates is they are based on the plotter settings. So one cannot create a universal template layout that will work with all
printers/plotters.
ArcMap template features
Custom User interface information is stored in the template, for example whether or not the Table of Contents is docked or free-floating, which toolbars are
displayed, etc. Note user interface changes are stored in the normal template unless you save in another map or template.
Store Data Layers
Create a new template from an old one.
Map documents have extension (.mxd), Map templates use (.mxt) extension.
Stores a predefined layout which can include map elements such as north arrows, scale bars, and logos.
Can store special symbols and styles
Can reference a style or group of styles. Note a style is a suite of symbols and map elements that provide information about the symbol properties, label
specifications, color schemes, legend and scale bar characteristics, and coordinate reference systems.
Store VBA macros/modules
Default location of Normal.mxt (c:\documents and settings\jjensen\Application Data\ESRI\ArcMap\Templates\Normal.mxt)
Default .mxt file location C:\Program Files\ArcGIS\Bin\Templates (if the Normal.mxt template is missing from your Windows Profile, ArcMap will search in this
directory). If a Normal.mxt file is not found in your profiles location or in the C:\Program Files\ArcGIS\Bin\Templates folder, then a new default Normal.mxt file is
How to Create an ArcMap Plotter independent map template
Benefits: create a template once which can be used on all printers/plotters
within ArcMap: File -> Page and Print Setup (uncheck Use Printer Page Settings and uncheck Scale map elements...)
Layout View, create the marginalia and data frames needed for the template
File -> Save As... then change 'Save as type' to ArcMap Templates (*.mxt)
User then adds data/features to the data frames, saves as Map document (*.mxd) and gets ready to print
This is the key: File -> Page and Print Setup (check Use Printer Page Settings)
You now have a universal map template without any shifting
Discussion: if you check the 'Use Printer Paper Settings' option on Page Setup creates a virtual Print Preview. If you uncheck 'Use Printer Paper Settings' then ArcMap
will place the origin (0,0) for the entire map inside the maximum printable area of the printer paper size selected, which causes the marginalia to shift on plot.
See Problem: ArcMap clips map when printed, ESRI Article 17300

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

101 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Layout Toolbar
Only works in Layout View
View -> Toolbars -> Layout to turn on/off the toolbar
Zoom Whole Page- similar to zoom Full Extent in the Data View, but this only applies to Layouts
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Pan
Within ArcMap Edit Session, hit the Z key to start a zoom in process.
Zoom Control 100% drop down box is the same as Zoom to 100% button
When using Layout Toolbar to zoom in/out at different percentages, the actual scale of the map (either inherited from the scale set in Data View or as set in Layout View)
remains the same. [ESRI Virtual Campus, Learning ArcGIS I, Presenting Data in ArcGIS, Lesson 1]
Remember that the data frame zoom tools only work in data frames. To zoom or pan the page layout, use the layout tools (View -> Toolbars -> Layout). AutoCAD uses
one pan/zoom tool, works in both Modelspace and Layouts.
Logos and Pictures
ArcGIS Desktop Help 9.3 - Working with graphic elements, pictures and neatlines
ArcMap does NOT support transparent GIF and PNG images, only supported EMF
see ESRI Article ID 34286 Problem: Transparent GIF and PNG inserted images do not display and/or do not export or print as transparent
Using Adobe Illustrator, converted the UNLV Logo in EPS format to EMF (UNLVredlogo.emf)
see ESRI Article ID 29225 HowTo: convert original logo artwork or a bitmap logo into EMF for inserting into an ArcMap layout
Windows Enhanced Metafile (.emf) is the best format for inserting images as pictures in ArcMap
Have the option to embed graphics in the .mxd, this makes it file size larger but increase the portability. Just right on the graphic and select Properties. Check the box to
save the picture as part of the document.
Use any graphics software package that supports export to Windows bitmaps or Windows enhanced metafiles.
Use products like Adobe Illustrator to create EMF graphics. Use products like Autodesk AutoCAD to create WMF graphics
Can use the Metafile Companion shareware to create and edit WMF/EMF files.
Windows Metafile (.wmf) is a 16-bit metafile used by Microsoft Windows to display a picture. An enhanced metafile (.emf) is a 32-bit metafile that is a superset of the
.wmf. See Windows Metafile FAQ.
Note PostScript images are not support, only JPEG, GIF, TIF, EMF, BMP, and PNG and JPEG 2000 (see ESRI Article Number 17274) even though ArcMap can create a
PostScript plot file.
Note ArcMap markers can be a .bmp (raster format) or .emf (vector format). EMF format has better clarity and scaling abilities. The pictures used in the styles that come
with ArcMap are stored in \bin\styles\pictures folder where ArcGIS is installed. See ArcMap online help, Creating marker symbols.
EMF or BMP image files can be used as a north arrow. See ESRI Article #20538.
Can use Microsoft Paint to create a bmp logo. Use Image -> Attributes to set size of logo, e.g. 1"x1". Then draw anything and do a save as .bmp.
Limitations of Metafile Formats (EMF, WMF) When Printing PostScript, seeEMF and PostScript
browse through your graphics files, and displays a faithful thumbnail view of each file as it's selected. If you've ever wanted a convenient way to quickly peruse clipart,
photos, drawings -- all your graphics files -- download the free WitzImg utility and see how easy it is. Designed to showcase our Witzend Thumbnail Image Viewer (tm)
ActiveX control, the WitzImg utility recognizes all common graphics formats, including JPEG, GIF, TIFF, bitmap (BMP), cursor (CUR), icon (ICO), and metafiles
(WMF and EMF). You can view an image in any of three sizing modes: (1) stretched-to-fit; (2) stretched-to-fit with aspect ratio maintained; and (3) normal size. Under
Windows NT/2000/XP, the WitzImg program can even rotate the selected image."
Map Legends
Provides the meaning of the map symbols used to represent features on the map
Layer symbols can be made transparent from the Data Frame Properties -> General tab or the individual Layer Properties -> Symbology tab -> Advanced button ->
Transparency...
It appears ArcMap 9.3 will NOT lighten the Map Legend symbols when transparency is set from the individual Layer Properties
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Transparency in Legends

## Making Maps for Presentation

Basic Map Elements to include on Maps
Map Body - most important element of a map, central focus.
Map Legend- used to explain symbols. By default includes all layers from the map. ArcMap: Insert -> Legend (only works in Layouts)
Title- provide a description of map
Scale of Map - allows one to measure distances on the map. Very helpful to include a scale bar.
Project Info- for example: StatePlane Coordinates, NAD83, Units Feet, Nevada East Zone (FIPS 4701)
Source Statement- credit to where you obtained spatial data
North Arrow- used to orient the map with the world.
Vicinity Map - also known as inset or index maps. Show the location of the map body in relation to a familiar area such as a City, County, State or Country.
Scale bar- also used to orient the map with the world. ArcMap: Insert -> Scale Bar... Must have data frame projection and units defined (Data Frame Properties:
Coordinate System and General tab). Based on the current map scale show on the Standard Toolbar. If more than one data frame is included with the map, its usually best
to keep the scale bar within the data frame it references. Scale bar broken into Divisions, then subdivisions to the left of 0.
Neatline- border that can be placed around map elements or inside the margins. ArcMap: Insert -> Neatline... Use the Data Frame Properties- Frame tab to place neatlines
around data frames.
Company Logo- identifies group responsible for map. ArcMap: Insert -> Picture.
"ArcMap keeps the same ratio of width to height (the aspect ratio) when you resize graphics, so they won't be distorted when you change their size. If you want to
make a graphic wider or taller without changing its other dimension, right-click the graphic, click Properties, and on the Picture tab uncheck Maintain aspect ratio.
You can then stretch the graphic."
"Check the box to save the picture as part of the document if you want to give the map to someone who may not have the picture file. This increases the size of the
map document (.mxd), but makes the document more portable."
Reference: ArcGIS Desktop Help -> ArcMap -> Working with graphic elements, pictures, and neatlines
Name of map creator

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

102 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Date of publication
Aerial Photos
A graph, table or report based on the data in the map
Additional help, see ESRI Virtual Campus - Learning ArcGIS Desktop - Module 8 - Designing Maps with ArcGIS - Working with map layouts - Elements of a map
ArcMap Layout - Rulers and Guides
Guides
lines used to align map elements (e.g. data frame window, text, north arrow, logo, etc) on a layout page
used for map layout and positioning map elements
To set a guide, must be in Layout View and then click the ruler. A guide (straight line) will then be added at that location on the ruler.
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Using rulers, guides, and grids
Scale Bar Map Elements
Visual indication of the size of features and distances between features on the map
A line or bar divided into parts and labeled with its ground length, usually in multiples of map units
scale is based on the active data frame
can manually resize and move the scale bar
preserves the ratio/scale if the physical map is enlarged or reduced.
ArcMap: Insert -> Scale bar
right mouse click on the scale bar to modify the properties
Scale Bar window has 3 tabs: "Scale and Units", "Numbers and Marks", and "Format"
Must set the data frame units before adding a scale bar.
Bug - cannot rotate a scale bar. Workaround is to convert the scale bar to graphics and then rotate. Problem is if you change the scale of your may, the scale bar will not
dynamically update.
Comparison of Data Frame/Viewports in layouts between CAD & GIS
ArcMap 8.2- Data Frames
Locking a data frame keeps it from accidentally being deleted. See ESRI Article #18060. Data Frame is locked when surrounded by short lines at a 45 degree angle.
Panning/Zooming in Data View changes the map extents in the Data Frame shown in Layout View. This has its drawbacks.
ArcMap has option to use fixed scale and fixed extents which restricts the user from being able to pan/zoom in the data view or the data frame in the layout. Would
prefer if this restriction only applied to the data frame in the layout. See ESRI Article #17376.
Possible workarounds is to create a separate data view that is outside the layout. Will have duplicated layers but will allow one to pan/zoom without changing the
final plot.
Don't confuse with Tools -> Customize... -> Options tab -> Lock Customization... button. This locks the customization done on a document or template using a
Can have several Data Frames per Map Document (.mxd)
Only one layout allowed, see ESRI Article Number 17577. Big disadvantage. Workaround to Change Map template in Layout View, see ESRI Article #17222 this
only works well if changing the layout size. Right mouse select Change Layout... Not a good solution if doing several plots all with the same template (.mxt).
Can create non-rectangular viewports in ArcMap. From the Data Frame Properties: Data Frame tab: Check the Enable Clip to Shape box, click the Specify Shape
button then finally click on Outline of Selected Data Graphics. ArcUser January-March 2003, p. 25 The polygon outline used to create the non-rectangular data
frame must be either a graphic drawn in data view or a polygon feature. See ESRI Article ID: 22887 you previously created
Concept of locking a viewport keeps the user from being able to pan/zoom or delete a viewport.
Applies only to layouts, that is changes in the map extent in modelspace doesn't alter the viewports in the layout(s).
using the PROPERTIES command in AutoCAD, select the viewport and then select Display Locked and toggle to Yes.
Only one Modelspace (MS) per drawing (.dwg). Workaround, insert all spatial data into MS, then use VPLAYER command to freeze/thaw desired layers. Hassle to
work with if data is in different projections. Issues when creating Overview/Index/Vicinity/Key maps.
Can have several layout pages. Advantageous when developing a set of plans for construction.
Size and Position of Data Frames
Editing a Data Frame. In Layout View, right mouse click inside the Data Frame and select Properties. Within the Data Frame Properties, select the Size and Position tab.
For exact control of data frame, uncheck the As Percentage and Preserve Aspect Ratio boxes.
Can use Guides to snap a data frame to an exact location. Turn on/off guides by View -> Guides. To create a guide just click anyware on the ruler. To delete a guide, put
mouse over guide in the ruler section, will get a double black arrow, right mouse click and select "Clear Guide". Options context sensitive menu is same as doing a right
mouse click on the data frame and selecting options.
Cannot use guides to move a data frame, only snap to it.
Cannot nudge a guide. When moving, smallest division unit is set under Data Frame Options, Layout View tab, Rulers section.
Using Guides
Straight lines used in layout view to align map elements
Guides can be used to position any map element or data frame.
Guides don't appear on the printed map
To turn on snap to Guides, right mouse click on the virtual page in Layout View and select Guides -> Snap to Guides.
To change snapping tolerance of guide, right mouse click on page and select Options. Then type in the number of units for snapping tolerance.
"The data frames are stacked on the virtual page according to their order in the table of contents." [Ormsby 01, p. 494]
Title Map Element
Double click or right mouse click Properties to edit text value.
Can be snapped to guides.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

103 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Units of Points, one inch = 72 points.

Can nudge the text box using the arrow keys. Must have the text object selected (dashed rectangle surrounding the text identifies it is selected).
Nudge can be done on any map element. Use to move the element, not resize it.
What is the difference between a Title Map Element and a Text Map Element in ArcMap? When you add a Title Map Element, the default size is larger and centered when
compared to a Text Map Element. Otherwise the two elements are the same. Note the Text Map Element can be added two ways: 1) from the Menu bar, Insert -> Text. 2)
from the Draw Toolbar, Select the Bold A icon, which also gives the option to add splined text which isn't available from the Menu bar.
Text Map Element
View -> Toolbars -> Draw to turn on/off or Insert -s activated when inserting
tend to insert map elements in the data frame associated with. If not, can cause confusion on which one scale bar applies to when there are multiple data frames.

## Reference Systems: Grids and Graticule

Graticules
"Intersecting lines that show location using geographic coordinates (degrees of latitude and longitude)"
"Grids or graticules created through the Data Frame Properties dialog box are drawn on top of a data frame in layout view. They don't appear in data view. If you
are interested in creating grid or graticule features that draw in data view, you might want to look into using grid and graticule layers." (ArcGIS Desktop 10 - A
quick tour of data frame grids and the Grids and Graticules Wizard)
"A graphic representation on a map of the network of parallels and meridians (latitude and longitude) that subdvide the earth's surface" (ESRI Virtual CampusBasics of ArcGIS, Lesson 1: Introducing a GIS)
To add a graticule to an ArcMap layout, see ESRI Article Number 14165
To create a non-rectangular graticule border, see Article Number 22887
From ArcMap: View menu -> Data Frame Properties -> Grids tab - New Grid button
USGS Digital Elevation Models (DEM) data is 1:24,000 scale, every 7.5-minute. Setup a graticule every 0 degrees 7 minutes 30 seconds to assist in referencing
Federal data.
To place a grid or graticule below the data layers in a map, convert it to a graphic. See ESRI Article Number 17370
To change the font style of a graticule, see ESRI Article Number 22097
Must define a coordinate system for the data frame in ArcMap before applying a graticule. See ESRI Article Number 22515
Can change the X and Y origin of the Graticules. From the Data Frame Properties, Grids tab, select the graticule, and click Properties -> Intervals tab. Use this
procedure if having incorrect label values on the graticule. See ESRI Article Number 20370
Measured Grids
"Intersecting lines that show location using projected (x,y) coordinates."
Use a Measured Grid to place UTM grids and State Plane grids.
Can use a different coordinate system for the grid reference system than the data frame projection.
Reference Grid is often used has a map index. Have uniform size for all cells in the grid. In Las Vegas, typically use the Township-Range-Section lines as map
index even though the size of each section isn't uniform. This would be known as a custom overlay reference grid. "Custom overlay reference grids use the
geometry of a polygon data source to define the grid lines and an attribute column in this same layer to specify the labels." (ArcGIS Desktop Help -> ArcMap ->
Laying out and printing maps -> Adding grids and graticules (reference systems))
Reference Grids
"A grid of lines that divides a map into a specified number of rows and columns; the row and column labels often identify locations listed in a map index."
References - ESRI Virtual Campus - Learning ArcGIS Desktop - Module 8: Designing Maps with ArcGIS - Creating a presentation map - Making maps more readable

Printing
Good idea to do a print preview on maps to verify correctness
Before printing, always do a full zoom extent in layout view. There are some issues with scale text elements and doing this fixes the problems. See ESRI Article Number
19076.
ArcMap converts a layout to EMF format which is then used by the printer driver for printing. To debug printing issues, need to identify if problem with conversion to
EMF or problem with the printer. See ESRI Article Number 17783.
Page Setup window can be opened by right mouse clicking the virtual page in layout view and selecting Page Setup... This doesn't work if right mouse click in the data
frame.
Best to set page size before creating a map, but can be done later. If map elements already added, within the Page Setup window, check "Scale map elements
proportionally to changes in page size"
To make plotter independent maps, within the Page Setup window, uncheck "Same as Printer" and specify paper size in the Width and Height boxes.
"Show printer margins on Layout" checkbox is dimmed if creating a plotter independent page. If "Same as Printer" is checked, then this option will be available.
Knowing printer margins helps when placing map element on the virtual page, nothing will print outside these margins.
Page Setup: output image quality of best means no resampling of the output image. Downside is a larger file that the printer might not be able to process. Workaround is
to use ArcPress Extension.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

104 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

"The page setup is important because it affects the size of the features, symbols, labels , and other text, as well as other map elements." (ArcGIS Desktop Help, Setting up
the page)
Virtual page size, by default, is same size as the system printer's default page size.
"Is it possible to create a user-defined printer margin for an ArcMap Layout? No. Unlike the ArcView GIS application, ArcMap will only display printer-defined margins.
This functionality was excluded from ArcMap in an effort to avoid common problems caused by user-defined margins not matching the actual printer margins, which can
cause 'clipping' when printed." See ESRI Article Number 22443
Recommend exporting Map Document to PDF if doing more than one plot over a period of time. Benefit is Adobe Acrobat Reader is free, whereas you must tie up an
ArcMap license if all you want to do is print. ArcMap: File -> Export

## Geodatabases and Tables

Geodatabase

Types of Geodatabases
File geodatabases (.gdb) - recommended data format for ArcGIs, storage capacity is virtually unlimited, requires less disk space than other file formats (see ESRI
Virtual Campus, Learning ArcGIS Desktop, Module 4: Organizing Geographic Data)
File geodatabases and Windows Explorer
Personal geodatabases (.mdb)
Scalable geodatabases
Organize spatial data into feature classes
Similar to Microsoft Access .mdb (one database .mdb - many tables). ESRI's geodatabase (.mdb) can have many feature classes.
A feature class can only store one type. Can have a point feature class. Cannot have a single feature class that stores points and lines.
Feature Dataset- use when two separate feature classes are related (spatially dependent on one another, have a topological association, share the same spatial coincidence
and have a common spatial reference). For example water valves (points) are connected to water lines (arcs). Only store spatial components in a dataset, so no reason to
store a non-spatial table or attribute table.
Feature Dataset can store feature classes with different feature types.
Cannot store a Feature Dataset within another Feature Dataset.
Feature Datasets have only two properties - name and spatial reference. Cannot store any attributes. Attributes are a property of the feature class which is contained in the
feature dataset.
Feature class is a group of points, lines, and/or polygons representing similar geographic objects
Feature classes cannot belong to more than one feature dataset.
What is the difference between a table and a feature class? The feature class will have a shape field.
Shapefile consists of a single feature class. Geodatabases, ArcInfo coverages, and AutoCAD DWGs may contain several feature classes.
Can store point, line, and polygon feature classes in a single geodatabase (Microsoft Access database file, .mdb)
Create geodatabases in ArcCatalog: in the ArcCatalog tree, navigate to folder where you want to store the geodatabase, then right mouse click on the folder and click
New -> Personal Geodatabase.
To add a feature classes to the geodatabase, import them.
Personal Geodatabase Locks - only one person can edit a personal geodatabase at a time. To remove this lock either have the other person exit ArcMap or use Task
Manager to delete the applockmgr.exe process then physically delete the geodatabase lock file (.ldb).
Can batch import shapefiles, coverages, etc. into a geodatabase
In the Geodatabase, Feature Classes store spatial objects
In the Geodatabase, Tables store
"File management operations, including data imports, are applied on execution and thus there is nothing to save" [Ormsby 01, p. 362]
ObjectID- stores a unique ID number for every feature in the class
SHAPE- stores each feature's shape and its location in the coordinate system. The Field will reture a value such as "Polygon" instead of reporting the shape
geometry coordinates (this is physically stored in a hidden geodatabase table within the Geodatabase).
SHAPE_Length- measurement field for line and polygon feature classes. For polygons, it is the perimeter. These fields are automatically calculated.
SHAPE_Area- measurement field for polygon feature classes. Automatically calculated by the Geodatabase.
Table with no spatial component - still requires the OBJECTID field (might need to register the table with the geodatabase using ArcCatalog, this will add the
OBJECTID field)
Point Shape PreDefined GDB Fields
OBJECTID: Data Type is Object ID
SHAPE: Data Type is Geometry
MultiPoint Shape PreDefined GDB Fields
OBJECTID: Data Type is Object ID
SHAPE: Data Type is Geometry
Line Shape PreDefined GDB Fields
OBJECTID: Data Type is Object ID
SHAPE: Data Type is Geometry
SHAPE_Length: Data Type is Double
Multipoint feature consists of more than one point but only references one set of attributes in the database. Similar to a multipart feature.
Polygon Shape PreDefined GDB Fields (default geometry type when creating new feature class)
OBJECTID: Data Type is Object ID

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

105 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## SHAPE: Data Type is Geometry

SHAPE_Length: Data Type is Double
SHAPE_Area: Data Type is Double
Fields store attribute information in a feature class. A field is defined by a name, data type (e.g. integer), and properties (e.g. domain). Domain is a list or range of valid
values for an attribute
Creating a Personal Geodatabase
ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 - Creating a Personal Geodatabase
Spatial References - Resolution is the minimum distance that separates unique coordinate values

ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 - Feature Class Basics
Geodatabase Diagrammer for 10x use Visio to create the database schema and classes. Use to make a data model poster.
Geodatabase Feature Types
Point Feature
Absolute X, Y: allows one to type in the coordinates of the X,Y point. Must be in an ArcMap edit session. Press F6 or right-click anywhere on the map and click
Absolute X, Y.
Ctrl-Z will delete last point entered, handy feature.
Multipoint Feature
Add a multipoint feature to ArcMap then Start an ArcMap edit session
Current Task dropdown arrow -> Create New Feature
Target Layer dropdown arrow -> select the multipoint feature class previously created in ArcCatalog
Tool palette dropdown arrow -> click the Sketch tool
Click on map to create parts of the multipoint feature. When you have created the last point of the multipoint feature, right-click anywhere on the map and click
Finish Sketch (could also double click last point or hit F2).
Now, when you click one part of the multipoint feature to select it, all points are automatically selected because they all belong to one multipoint feature.
See ArcGIS Desktop Help -> ArcMap -> Editing in ArcMap -> Creating new features -> Creating point features and vertices -> Creating a multipoint feature
Polygon Feature
Click the Current Task dropdown arrow and click Create New Feature
Click the Target Layer dropdown arrow and click a line or polygon layer
Click the tool palette dropdown arrow and click the Sketch tool
Click on the map to digitize the feature's vertices
When finished, right-click anywhere on the map and click Finish Sketch. Could also double-click on the last vertex of the feature or press F2.
Line Feature
Same procedure as adding a Polygon Feature
Multipart Line and Multipart Polygon (not a separate feature type)
Create a line or polygon feature class in ArcCatalog
When finished creating first part of the feature, right-click anywhere on the map and click Finish Part. Can also Hold down the Shift key and double-click last
vertex to finish part.
Create the next part of the feature
When you have finished the last part of the feature, right-click anywhere on the map and click Finish Sketch. Can also Double-click the last vertex to finish the
Sketch.
Now, when you click one part of the feature to select it, all parts are automatically selected because they all belong to one multipart feature.
Can copy the shape of a feature from another layer into the current edit session feature. "You can add the shape of a line or polygon feature to the sketch by rightclicking over the feature with the Sketch tool and clicking Replace sketch. The sketch will contain the shape of the feature you clicked over."
See ArcGIS Desktop Help -> ArcMap -> Editing in ArcMap -> Creating new features -> Creating lines and polygons -> Creating a multipart line or a multipart
polygon
A multipart feature can only share vertices, not edges.
Annotation
Dimensions
Multipatches

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

106 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Geodatabase Field Types">

See ESRI Virtual Campus - Learning ArcGIS Desktop - Module 4: Organizing Geographic Data
Geodatabase X/Y Domain
"Since the resolution and coordinate system define an extent for the dataset, there is no longer a need for a user-defined domain extent." (ESRI ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help
- An overview of spatial references
X,Y Resolution/Tolerance
default is 0.00328... feet for Stateplane NV East Zone, Units Foot
min separation between coordinates
1 inch will have a resolution of 0.08333 feet
see ESRI ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - About x,y resolution and domain
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Migrating to high precision
Using ArcCatalog, within a geodatabase right mouse click New -> Feature Class... Specify a Name and Alias (displayed in ArcMap TOC), type point/poly/line, click
Next use Default configuration keyword, click Next and click the SHAPE field name. Under the Field Properties click to the right of Spatial Reference. Coordinate
System tab, use the Import... button to copy profile data from another existing coverage/shapefile/feature class.
Have problems specifying a coordinate system, then entering the X/Y Domain. When adding data will get following error, "The Create Feature task could not be
completed. The coordinates or measures are out of bounds."
GeoDatabase stores coordinates as positive 4-byte integers that have a maximum value of 2,147,483,648. [ESRI GDB Lecture 01, p. 4-7]
The default spatial domain is calculated to provide at least 100 percent more space on any side of the entire feature extent for expansion purposes. This is done by a buffer
range of 100 percent. Basically multiply the extent range (xmax - xmin) by 3. The multiplier is 3 because you want the current range plus that amount of room on either
side. [ESRI GDB Lecture 01, p. 4-19]
The units that the 4-byte integer represents is called storage units. [ESRI GDB Lecture 01, p. 4-7]
Enter the calculated ShiftX and ShiftY for the MinX, MinY and enter the precision setting. [ESRI GDB Lecture 01, p. 4-15]
X/Y Domain values when Imported from an existing coverage. MinX=-262317, MinY=25576995, Precision=976, MaxX=1936706, MaxY=27776018
MinX: -89206749, MinY: -89149212, (having problems with these values) Precision: 100 (100th of a foot), ArcCatalog will calculate MaxX and MaxY
MaxX = MinX + 2147483648/precision = -89206749 + 2147483648/100 = -67731912.55 (calculated by ArcCatalog)
MaxY = MinY + 2147483648/precision = -89149212 + 2147483648/100 = -67674375.55 (calculated by ArcCatalog)
Units for MinX, MinY, MaxX, and MaxY are based on the Projection Units. For example if you setup Stateplane Coordinates, Units Feet then the MinX unit is Feet.
Cannot edit the XY Domain once you finished creating the geodatabase. "The spatial domain for a feature class or feature dataset cannot be changed. If the required x-,
y-, m- or z-value ranges for your database change, the data has to be reloaded into feature classes with a spatial reference that accommodates the new value range." (see
ArcGIS Desktop Help -> Geodatabases -> Creating new items in a geodatabase -> Geodatabase items)
Tip from Margaret Maher (mmaher@esri.com) use the usstpln83.shp as the extent template. Procedure, add to a new dataframe, change the dataframe coordinate system
to Nevada East zone, Stateplane, Nad83, feet. Then select the East zone polygon, and export the data. This will create a permentant projection. Then in the new
geodatabase, import this shapefile, will automatically update the X/Y Domain to the correct values.

Tables
Use Tools -> Add X,Y to view the spatial events in ArcMap.
Can directly create an output shapefile or feature class of this table by using ArcCatalog. Right on the table name -> Create Feature Class -> From XY Table...
Cannot add or delete a field in ArcMap during an edit session. To delete a field, open the table then right mouse click field name and select Delete Field. To add a field,
open the table attributes and select the Options button on the lower right corner of the window and select Add Field... (see ESRI Article Number 17596)
Cannot Rename Field in ArcMap or ArcCatalog (see Setting field properties. Workaround is to add a new field with the name you want, populate the field with the
values, then delete the old field which you could not rename.
ArcUSER January-March 2002 article Working with Tables in ArcMap is a good article showing how to perform common tasks with tables.
Attribute Table
The attribute table is composed of records/rows and fields/columns. Values/attributes are stored in cells
How to Open the Attribute Table: within ArcMap, Right mouse click on the layer name in the TOC to open the context menu, select Open Attribute Table

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

107 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Selecting a record in the table view also selects the map feature is the map display window [Ormsby 01, p. 41]
Selecting a map feature in the map display will also select the record in the table view.
Can rearrange the order of the fields for display purposes by highlighting the column and dragging. Note this doesn't change the order of fields in the database.
To sort the records, right-click on the field name in the attribute table and click Sort Descending or Sort Ascending
Field Statistics: right-click on the field name and click Statistics
Resize display of field widths by moving over the field heading until the two-headed arrow is displayed.
Map features linked to attribute table. Select a record in the table will highlight feature in the map display.
Clear Selection
Sort Records
Statistics of Fields
References
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Overview of tables and attribute information
Attribute Table - Summarize
To summarize data, just open the attribute table of the feature, then right click on the field you want to summarize and select Summarize
ArcMap creates a new table providing summary statistics such as count, average, minimum and maximum
The count field (named with a cnt_prefix) will find the number of values included in statistical calculations. This counts each value except null values. To determine the
number of null values in a field, use the count statistic on the field in question and a count statistic on a different field, which does not contain nulls (for example, the OID
if present), then subtract the two values.(see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - summarizing data in a table)
How to add a field to an existing table

Can add or removes fields only if you have write access to the data, currently the data is not in an edit session and no other applications such as ArcCatalog or ArcMap is
accessing the data
Field Properties for Text
Alias
Allow NULL Values
Default Value
Length
Shapefiles - Range is 1-255 characters
Field Properties for Numbers
Precision and Scale Properties

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

108 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## How to view Field Definitions of an Attribute Table

Click the Fields Tab

## Attribute Indexes - How to Index a field

Used to speed up attribute queries on feature classes and tables
Downside to indexes, they slightly slow down edits to the feature class because ArcGIS needs to update these indexes.
Indexes are created in ArcCatalog. Right click the feature class and choose properties. Then click the Indexes tab

Note, when doing a tabular/attribute join, ArcMap will allow you to create an index at that time, instead of having to use ArcCatalog

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

109 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Primary ArcGIS Supported Spatial Files

ArcView Shapefiles (which consist of 3 separate file types .shp, .shx, & .dbf) only contains one data type. The .shp and .shx store information about the feature
geometery, .dbf is a dBase III file format that stores the shapefile's feature attribute table. A fourth file type is the project file (.prj) which stores the shapefile's coordinate
system. Database (.dbf) field name can be a max of 10 characters.
ArcInfo Coverages (a folder/directory of data) can contain multiple data types, that is a collection of feature classes. When adding an ArcInfo coverage theme, note the
folder behind the envelope. Click this to open a single data type.
AutoCAD .dwg and .dxf files and MicroStation .dgn files
GeoDataBases, GDB (short for geographic database)
next-generation coverage
geographic information is physically stored inside a DBMS (Microsoft Access .mdb) for a personal geodatabase, that is both spatial and attribute data is stored in
one database. Note a single database (.mdb in case of Access) can contain several tables.
provides centralized management
can use GIS across many applications [ArcGIS White Paper, p. 8]
Feature dataset is a group of feature classes that share topology. Use feature datasets when you want to edit different features together. For example, water valves
(nodes) and water lines (arcs). Would not use a feature dataset on dissimilar features, for example rivers and streets. All feature classes in the feature dataset must
have the same coordinate system.
ArcInfo Coverage is similar to a GeoDatabase, can store several data types e.g. polygons, lines, etc.
ArcView Shapefile is similar to a Feature Class in a GeoDatabase, can only have one feature type, e.g. points
See Data Formats supported in ArcGIS and Supported raster dataset file formats
ArcInfo Interchange files (.e00)
Viewing in ArcCatalog
How to View .e00 files (ArcInfo Interchange files) in ArcCatalog
Main Menu toolbar: Tools -> Options... File Types tab, New Type... button
File extension: e00
Description of type: Workstation ArcInfo Interchange Format for Coverages
Change Icon... button, select the tree icon
OK button
How to import .e00 files in ArcCatalog
Tools -> Customize... -> Commands tab: ArcGIS 8x Conversion Tools -> Import from Interchange File... (drag and drop onto existing toolbar in ArcCatalog)
Navigate in ArcCatalog to the .e00 file
select .e00 file in ArcCatalog, then click the newly added Import from Interchange File... button
How to import .e00 files in ArcToolbox
ArcToolbox -> Coverage Tools -> Conversion -> To Coverage -> Import From Interchange File
can also search in ArcToolbox for "e00", then click the Locate button to find the command
Example: input file: c:\temp\co32_d00.e00, output file: c:\temp\co32_d00

Querying Data
7 ways to query features
1. Identifying Features
2. Selecting Features Interactively
3. Selecting Features by Attributes

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

110 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

SQL Comparison
4. Selecting Features by Location
Spatial Relationships
5. Selecting Features by Graphics
6. Finding Features
7. Map Tips
Selectable Layers
How to Query Graphics
How to query Raster Surfaces
How to query TIN Surfaces
Definition Query

1. Identify
use the mouse to query feature attributes
will identify features in non-active data frames
will not identify features on layers that have been turned off
Not useful in comparing multiple features
Icon found on the Tools toolbar
features in all visible layers under the pointer will be identified. Solves issue of overlapping features.
Displays all fields with it's values/attributes of the identified feature. Not like Map Tips which only display attributes of one field.
Identify Results Window
Layers Drop-Down List: lets you pick the layer whose features you are identifying. All layers option results in multiple features identified
Left Box: shows identified layers. Select layer's feature value to flash location in map.
Right Scrolling Box: attribute values of the identified layers
Can "flash" the feature in the map display by clicking the name of the feature on the left pane in the Identify Results window
Use Selection Options to specify pixel tolerance

## 2. Selecting Features Interactively

on Tools toolbar, click the Select Features tool
Use mouse to select features one at a time or by dragging a box around/through them.
Selecting a record in the feature's attribute table will also highlight/select the feature in the map display.
Selection -> Interactive Selection Method
Create New Selection: select features
Add to Current Selection: aselect features (holding down shift key when clicking with mouse replicates this)
Remove from Current Selection: unselect features (holding down shift key when clicking with mouse replicates this)
Select from Current Selection: reselect features
To view attributes of selected features, right mouse click on the layer in the TOC and Open Attribute Table. Note to change color of selected records, click Options button
on lower right corner and click Appearance...

## 3. Selecting Features by Attribute

used to select features that meet specified conditions
Selection -> Select By Attributes...
Queries written in Structured Query Language (SQL) or can use Query Wizard... button in top right corner of Select by Attributes window.
Double click values in the Fields and Samples section to populate SQL window, single SQL operator.
Use SQL Info... button to identify reserved words, if string comparisons are case sensitive, etc.
Verify button will check to see if using proper syntax
SQL expressions
Fields
"AREA" enclose in double quotes if data source is ArcInfo coverage, shapefile, INFO table, or dBASE table
[AREA] enclose in square brackets if data source is a personal geodatabase (Microsoft Access mdb)
AREA don't enclose field if using a shared geodatabase (ArcSDE)
Strings
'Nevada' enclose strings with single quotes or double quotes, just don't mix (e.g. open statement with single quote then attempt to close with a double quote)
strings are case-sensitive for coverages, shapefiles, INFO tables, dBASE tables and shared geodatabases. Note: the LIKE operator is not case-sensitive, so it
Wildcards: '_' and '%' works for everything but personal geodatabases (i.e. coverage, shapefile, INFO table, dBase table, or Entreprise GeoDatabase).
Wildcards: '?' and '*' is used by Jet SQL, namely personal geodatabases (same for Windows command prompt). Note, won't work if using the = operator on
strings.
Wildcards: '#' will match a single digit.
GeoDataBase (GDB): Cannot use wildcards (e.g. %, *) with the = operator (the wildcard character will be considered part of the string)
Return 0 records: SELECT * FROM PavementPolygons WHERE [SECT_NO] = 'BLM*';
Return 392 records: SELECT * FROM PavementPolygons WHERE [SECT_NO] LIKE 'BLM*';
Find a Range of Characters ([Bagui 02, p. 139])
Use the LIKE operator
[STRDIR] LIKE "[E,S]" will find all records that have a street direction of East or South
[GRADE] LIKE "[A-C]" will find all students with an A, B, or C grade
[GRADE] LIKE "[!A-C]" will find all students that DO NOT have an A, B, or C grade
[GRADE] NOT LIKE "[A-C]" will find all students that DO NOT have an A, B, or C grade
[SEGNUM] LIKE "0[1-5]" will find all segment numbers 01, 02, 03, 04, and 05
[SEGNUM] LIKE "0#" will find all segment numbers 01, 02, ..., 08, 09.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

111 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Comparison Operators: <, >, <=, >=, and <>

IN operator is used to search for several strings in a field, e.g. STATE_NAME IN ('NEVADA', 'UTAH', 'IDAHO')
Cannot use wildcards with the IN operator
[SEGNUM] IN ('0#', '10') will only return records with a value of 10, not 01, 02, and so on
to exclude, use NOT operator
to combine, use AND operator
see ArcGIS Desktop Help -> ArcMap -> Querying maps -> Building an SQL expression
Reference
ArcGIS Resource Center Desktop 10 - SQL reference for query expressions used in ArcGIS
ESRI ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help Using Select By Attributes
ESRI ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help About building an SQL expression
ESRI ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help SQL Reference
SQL Comparsion Geodatabase, Shapefile, and Coverage
SQL Comparison of GDB, SHP, Coverage queries
Operator

Field Type

Geodatabase

Shapefile

Coverage

Notes

Field names

all

## enclose in double quotes, " enclose in double quotes, "

field names are enclosed in [] or ""
"
"

LIKE

Text

"STRNAME" LIKE
'MARYLAND'

"STRNAME" LIKE
'MARYLAND'

## case sensitive for shp and

coverage

Equal, =

Text

[STRNAME] = 'maryland'

"STRNAME" =
'MARYLAND'

"STRNAME" =
'MARYLAND'

coverage

Equal, =

Numeric

[SCLQA] = 25

"SCLQA" = 25

"SCLQA" = 25

## case sensitive for shp and

coverage

multiple Wildcard,
Text
* or %

"STRNAME" like
'MARYL%'

"STRNAME" like
'MARYL%'

## will match any group of characters

Single Wildcard, ?
Text
or _

"STRNAME" like
'MARYLAN_'

"STRNAME" like
'MARY_AND'

## will match a single character

Range of values, -

Text

M, N, O, and P

Text

order

Text

"STRNAME" LIKE
'MARYLAND'

"STRNAME" LIKE
'MARYLAND'

Between

Numeric

not available

not available

IN

Text

## [STRNAME] IN ('maryland', 'flamingo',

'swenson', 'tropicana')

not available

not available

operator

NULL

Text and
Numeric

entered

NOT NULL

Text and
Numeric

## field values are entered

Date

Date

[Datefield] = #mm-dd-yyyy#

## dates often stored with time

Select by Location
Used to select features based on their location relative to other features. [See ArcGIS Desktop Help -> ArcMap -> Selecting features according to their location]
Can select point, line, or polygon features in one layer that are near or overlap features in another layer
I want to
Select features from
Add to the currently selected features in
Remove from the currently selected features in
Select from the currently selected features in
that (Selection Methods)
Intersect
selects any features bordered by the reference features. Will select features alongside it.
"...selects any features bordered by the reference features. For example, selecting wilderness areas intersected by roads will select any wilderness area with a
road running within its boundaries or alongside it." (see reference below)
Are within a distance of
selects features near or adjacent to features in the same layer or in a different layer. Use this method for the homework assignment. With the roadcasing
parcel selected, to get info about the adjacent parcels, would select within a zero distance.
"This method selects features near or adjacent to features in the same layer or in a different layer. For example, if you have a layer of clean and polluted
wells, you can find all the clean wells within 500 meters of the polluted ones. Or you could find the reservoirs and farms in other layers that are within 500
meters of the polluted wells. You can also use this option to find features adjacent to other features. For example, you may have already selected land parcels
that your company might purchase, and now you want to get information about adjacent parcels. In this case, you would select the parcels within zero
distance of the ones you've already selected." (ibid)
Completely contain
reverse of the previous.
"You can select polygons in one layer that completely contain the features in another layer. For example, select forested areas that have lakes completely
within them. To select polygons that completely contain features a certain distance within them, specify a buffer distance. For example, you can select

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

112 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

forested areas with lakes at least 500 meters within them." (ibid)
Are completely within
select features in one layer that fall completely inside the polygons of another. Can add a buffer distance to select features that are within another and a
certain distance from the boundary.
"This method selects features in one layer that fall completely inside the polygons of another. For example, you can select lakes completely within a forested
area. To select features that are a distance form the edges of the polygon they fall inside, specify a buffer distance. For example, you can select lakes that are
at least 500 meters within a forested area."
Have their center in
selects the polygon features in one layer that have their centroid in the polygon features of another layer.
"This method selects the polygon features in one layer that have the centroid in the polygon features of another layer." (ibid)
Share a line segment with
selects line and polygon features that share line segments with other features. Cannot be used to select point features.
"this method selects line and polygon features that share line segments with other features. You can't use this method to select point features." (ibid)
Touch the boundary of
selects lines and polygons that share line segments, vertices or end-points with the lines in the layer. Lines and polygons will not be selected if they cross the
lines in the layer.
"If you are selecting features using a lyaer containing lines, this method selects lines and polygons that share line segments, vertices or end-points (nodes)
with the lines in the layer. The lines and polygons will not be selected if they cross the lines in the layer. If you are selecting features using a layer containing
polygons, this method selects lines and polygons that share line segments or vertices with the polygon boundaries. The lines and polygons will not be
selected if they cross the polygon boundaries. You can't use this method to select point features." (ibid)
Are identical to
selects any feature having the same geometry as a feature of another layer
"This method selects any feature having the same geometry as a feature of another layer. The feature types must be the same-for example, you use polygons
to select polygons, lines to select lines, and points to select points." (ibid)
Are crossed by the outline of
selects features that are overlapped by features of another layer.
"This method selects the features that are overlapped by the features of another layer. For example, selecting wilderness areas crossed by the outline of roads
will select any wilderness area with a road inside its boundaries." (ibid)
Contain
similar to Completely contain but allows borders to touch.
"This method selects features in one layer that contain the features of another. This method differs from the Completely contain method in that the boundaries
of the features can touch. For example, with the Contain method, a forest will contain a lake-and thus be selected-even if the border of the lake touches the
border of the forest. The forest would not be selected using Completely contain because the borders touch." (ibid)
contained by
reverse of contain.
"This method selects features in one layer that are contained by the features in another. For example, you can select those cities that are contained by a
county. This method differs from Are completely within in that the edges of the features can touch." (ibid)
From menu toolbar: Selection -> Select by Location
Note, sample pictures for the 'Completely contain' and 'Are Completely within' methods are switched. See Article Number 20037.
Use Selected Features checkbox: allows you to query on a subset of features.
Apply a buffer to the features: combines two steps into one, buffer the feature then perform select by location.
Reference: ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Using Select By Location

Spatial Relationships
Distance
features of one dataset are within a specified distance of the features of another dataset
Containment
centers of features in one dataset fall inside the features of another dataset
features of one dataset fall within the selected features of another dataset
features of one dataset completely contain the selected features of another dataset
Intersection
features of one dataset cross features of another dataset
shared features
features of one dataset share either a point or a line with the selected features of another dataset

## 5. Selecting Features by Graphics

selects features which are contained by or intersected by the graphic
on Menu toolbar, click Selection -> Select By Graphics
Note option will be grayed out if no graphic(s) are selected
Create graphics from the Draw toolbar. Select either New Rectangle, New Polygon, New Circle, or New Ellipse
Will not work on graphics which have been created with the TEXT, Curves, or Freehand tool
Can use the New Marker tool from the Draw toolbar but no matter how large the marker, unable to select any features.
Layout View graphics cannot be used to select features. Must have the data frame selected, create the graphic, then the option to Select by Graphics will be active.
see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Using Select By Graphics

6. Finding Features

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

113 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Another fast way to search

Creates a selection set that can be used to display attributes, statistics, create reports, create graphs, or export to a new feature class.
Use with Identify tool by right mouse clicking on the results of the find and selecting "Identify feature(s)".
Edit -> Find: Features tab
String is NOT case sensitive if you check "Find features that are similar to or contain the search string"
String is case sensitive if DO NOT check "Find features that are similar to or contain the search string"
Don't use any wildcard characters in the Find dialog box
Can search a single feature database field or the entire feature database.
Doesn't work on non-spatial tables
Doesn't work with map document annotation, which is stored in the .mxd. For example, using Insert ->> Text from the Menu toolbar, type your name.
Find Locations Tab

## Find Linear Referencing

see lecture notes on Network Analyst
Finding a route location
See the Find Tool on the Tools Toolbar
References
ESRI ArcGIS Desktop 10 Help - Using the Find tool
ESRI ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Finding features and locations

7. Map Tips
Map Tips
allows one to query a single field in a layer by moving the mouse over the feature in the map display.
To view map tips, right mouse click on layer name in TOC, select Properties, then Display tab and check 'Show MapTips (uses primary display field)'
Set the primary display field from Layer Properties -> Fields tab, then select the display field from the drop down box.
Map Tips option is disable for shapefiles with the spatial index file is missing (.shx) see ESRI Article ID 20898
Some issues on speed when trying to zoom and display map tips at the same time. Basically, ensure your the only one accessing the data.
To change the appearance of the map tips, must edit the Windows 2000/XP Tooltip defaults (Control Panel -> Display -> Appearance tab) See ESRI Article ID for details.
Join Fields will display in Map Tips While Relate Fields will NOT.
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Displaying MapTips

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

114 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Selectable Layers
use Selection -> Set Selectable Layers... to turn on/off layers that can be selected
use Table of Contents, Selection Tab. Benefits can turn on/off layers to select but also provides a count of features selected in the layer
Selection Options (Selection -> Options...)
use to change how objects are manually selected when dragging a box, that is passthru or within. Last option is to select polygons that enclose the box

## How to Query Graphics

Can only select, not able to query and view attributes like one can with features
on Menu toolbar, Edit -> Select All Elements
on Menu toolbar, Edit -> Unselect All Elements
on Tools toolbar, interactively select using the Select Elements tool (black pointer)

## How to query Raster Surfaces

See ESRI Webhelp click ArcGIS Desktop Help, on the left side of the window, select ArcMap -> Working with rasters in ArcMap -> Making selections using the
geodatabase raster catalog
Cannot use Find or Select By Attributes on Surfaces. See ESRI Article ID 18371

## How to query TIN Surfaces

Cannot use Find or Select By Attributes on Surfaces. See ESRI Article ID 18371
Definition Query
see ArcMap Definition Queries
Used to display a subset of features from the layer
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Displaying a subset of features in a layer
Query Layers - How to view Spatial SQL Server
Background
Using FME Server, I uploaded a shapefile into a Spatial SQL Server 2008 R2 database on a Godaddy web hosting account. How do I make a connection to this
database and display the spatial features in ArcMap?
Requested the ability to use Query Layers with Spatial MySQL on the ideas.arcgis.com
Incident# 932448 with Thomas under Matt Buk's account. Will open a webex session to trouble shoot issues with adding a Query Layer in ArcMap
Step 0: use FME to upload a GIS layer to SQL Server Spatial Database
FME Desktop 2011 SP2 (Build 6523) FME Workbench New Generate Workspace Choose button

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

115 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Use FME Viewer to display the features

Use Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio to also display the features
Reference
FME Desktop Spatial Database Pathway Tutorial
Step 1: create ArcMap database connection

Enter the connection string information from your SQL Server. In this example, using a windows shared hosting account on Godaddy.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

116 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10: Connecting to a database

Step 2: create ArcMap query layer

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

117 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Can now using ArcMap tools like Select by attributes and Symbolize features like you would with a local shapefile. Benefit is the GIS feature is stored on a web
server and just accessing it over the Internet.
Reference
ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10: Creating a query layer
ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10: Adding and working with query layers

## ArcMap Graphics: Points, Lines, Circles, Polygons, Rectangles

Data View Graphics
"If you want the graphic to display with your data, add it in data view. For example, suppose you want to draw a circle representing a buffer around a feature.
Instead of drawing the circle over the data frame in layout view, draw it directly over your data in data view. Then, as you pan and zoom your data, the circle pans
and zooms with it." (ArcGIS Desktop Help: ArcMap -> Labeling maps with text and graphics -> Drawing points, lines, and circles -> Adding graphics in layout
view and data view)
If in Layout View, just use the Draw toolbar -> Select Graphics button and double click the data frame. Now when you create graphics within the data frame, they
Layout View Graphics
"Since graphics don't change size as you zoom in or out on data, wait to do this until you're satisfied with the display scale. A graphic box that encloses a feature at
one display scale, for instance, may not enclose it at another." [Ormsby 01, p. 482]
Add a graphic using the Draw toolbar
Can change size of a graphic by using the Select Graphics button (black arrow icon) to click on the graphic, move mouse pointer over one of the blue selection handles,
then click and drag.
Press the Delete key on the keyboard to remove a selected graphic
Graphic Properties: double click the graphic. Can be used to change the fill color.
Can edit the vertices of a graphic. Use the Edit Vertices Icon on the Draw Toolbar (black line polygon showing with black points for the vertices). Right-click over the
line and click Add Vertex or Delete Vertex. Click and drag to move a vertex.
Can convert a layer into graphics for cartographic purposes. Right click the layer in the TOC and click Convert Features to Graphics.
Cannot do the reverse. The ability to convert graphics into map features is not supported in ArcGIS 8.2. Currently logged as an enhancement request with ESRI.
Workaround is to to use ArcMap Sketches within an edit session.
Draw Toolbar -> Default Symbol Properties: once clicked, just click an icon you want to change the default symbol properties on.
Group Graphics: blue handles on the graphic indicates the dominant graphic, that is the one ArcMap uses to align other graphics with. To change the dominant graphic,
hold down the Ctrl key and select the desired graphic. Graphics that are grouped together behave as a single graphic.
UnGroup Graphics: select the graphic using the Select Graphics tool (black arrow icon) then click Drawing on the Draw toolbar and click Ungroup.
Aligning Graphics- moves the graphics
Distributing Graphics- equal spaceWorking with Attributes in ArcGIS
Chapter 12 of [Ormsby 01] discusses the ability to create buffer graphics.

## Labeling Features and Annotation

Dynamic Labels
Placing Labels
ArcMap Formatting Tags
Stacked Labels
VBScript Functions
Label Methods
Label Priorities
Annotation
Annotation Toolbar
Draw Toolbar Label Options

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

118 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Map Document Annotation - Layout View

Map Document Annotation - Data View
Geodatabase Annotation
How to create geodatabase annotation
How to edit geodatabase annotation
Standard Annotation
ArcInfo Coverage Annotation
Reference Scale for Data Frames
Labels with Interstate Shields
Fonts

## ArcGIS Options working with Text

Dynamic Labels
generated on the fly for all the features in a layer at once
can specify label properties such as the font, size, color and position in relation to the feature being labeled (such as top left, bottom center, top right)
represent attribute values in a feature class, also known as Feature Dynamic Labels
Annotation (also known as Interactive labels)
Map Document Annotation (Layout View) - stored in the map document (.mxd). Also known as Page Text or Graphic Text. Text which only appears in ArcMap
layout view (e.g. title of map).
Map Document Annotation (Data View) - stored in dataframes within annotation groups. Also known as Graphic Annotation. Can be turned on/off from the Data
Frame Properties -> Annotation Groups tab.
Geodatabase Annotation - Standard
Pre-ArcGIS Annotation - coverage annotation, CAD files, and so on
Dimension Features
"In technical terms, text added manually to a map is called annotation. Unlike dynamic labels, which get their properties from a layer, each piece of annotation has its
own properties that are stored either in a map document or in a database. Annotation and dynamic labels behave differently in ArcMap. Annotation always stays at the
position where you place it, but you can reposition it as desired. The placement of dynamic labels, on the other hand, is determined by ArcMap and is based on the
current map extent and the number of features being displayed in that extent. As the map is zoomed in and out, the position of dynamic labels will change as ArcMap
determines the best placement for them. Dynamic feature labels may move, appear, or disappear as the available space on the map changes. Both kinds of map text have
advantages. Dynamic labels are an easy way to label many features at once. You can convert dynamic labels to annotation if you need to edit the appearance or
placement of individual labels." (see ESRI Virtual Campus - Learning ArcGIS Desktop, Module 2: Creating Map Symbology -> Working with map symbols and labels ->
Labeling map features)
Reference: Options for storing and working with text in ArcGIS see ESRI Article ID: 24269
Question - Will the created text be used on several maps or just one map?
If just for one map, then use dynamic labels or map document annotation (layout view or data view)
If to be used on several maps, then use geodatabase annotation (standard or feature-linked)
If text exists in an old format, then use Pre-ArcGIS Annotation, that is coverage annotation

Dynamic Labeling
Based on values from a feature class
Pros: quickly label features, can be customized using classes of features
Cons: limited control on label placement, may not label all the features due to overlap, cannot move an individual label (workaround is to convert to geodatabase
annotation)
Labeling- tend to come from values in an attribute table.
"Broadly speaking, a label is any text that names or describes a feature on a map" [Ormsby 01, p. 169]
"In ArcMap, labels specifically represent values in a layer attribute table." [Ormsby 01, p. 169]
Labels describe features
"Cannot be selected or individually modified" [Ormsby 01, p. 168]
ArcMap will adjust the label placement to avoid overlaps.
To edit the text style: in TOC, open the Layer Properties -> Labels tab: Symbol... button
To edit which attribute field will be used by ArcMap to create the dynamic label: in TOC, open the Layer Properties -> Labels tab: Label Field drop down box.
If the attribute value requires additional information, for example a unit of measurement: in TOC, open the Layer Properties -> Labels tab: Expression... button
Can use JavaScript or VBScript Parser
JavaScript: [AREA] + " ft<SUP>2</SUP>"
VBScript: [AREA] & " ft<SUP>2</SUP>"
Can have a single label for multiple features which is helpful for Hawaii islands. Layer Properties -> Labels tab: Label Placement Options..., "Place one label per feature"
Bug in software, labels will not recognize text symbols that are rotated. Currently being worked on by ESRI, reference CQ00096554. Work around for labeling points.
Bug in software, Labels do not rotate when data frame is rotate. See ESRI Article ID 24811 for workaround.
Can set to display at a certain scale in addition to layer setting. Layer Properties -> Labels tab: Scale Range... button
Label a subset of features - using the Layer Properties dialog, can create a class representing a subset of the features, then create a SQL expression to select the features
you want to be in the class. [See ESRI Virtual Campus -> Learning ArcGIS II -> Working with Labels and Annotation -> Lesson 1]
On the Data Frame properties, choose Set Reference Scale to lock the size of labels by assigning fixed dimensions instead of units based on the map scale.
Label Layers
Labels features based on their attributes
Labels dynamically adjust depending on map scale to fit the available space
Turn on/off labels from the Layer properties -> Labels tab: "Label Features in this layer" checkbox or right mouse click on layer in TOC, select "Label Features"
Data Frame Reference Scale
References - see ESRI Article ID 24261 What are dynamic labels also ArcGIS Desktop Help -> ArcMap -> Working with text -> About labeling
Dynamic Labeling: Placing Labels

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

119 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Layer Properties -> Labels tab: Label Placement Options... button

Different Placement Property Options based on:
Polygons
Automatically placed at polygon centroid
Polylines
Can be placed above, centered on line or below line
Can be splined, checkbox "Produce labels that follow the curve of the line" under the placement properties.
Angle: Along the line, Horizontal, or Perpendicular
Bug trying to create a stacked label with spline option.
Points
8 possible positions
Label can be placed at an angle. This is the work around for bug in software (unable to recognize text symbols that are rotated)
Priority: 0=no label, 1=highest, and 3=lowest
Several different Label Locations available (e.g. Top Right Only, Bottom Right Only, etc.)
Dynamic Labeling: ArcMap Formatting tags
ArcMap text formatting tags follow XML syntax rules. Each starting tag must have a corresponding end tag
The & and < are special characters so you might want to use the equivalent character codes &amp; and <lt;
Where in ArcMap can I use the text formatting tags? ESRI Article ID 21192
AutoCAD uses '%%d' to insert a degree symbol. See ESRI Article# 14454 on converting in ArcInfo
ISO Latin-1 Charater Set, can type the Decimal Code in the text window and ArcMap will translate into the appropriate character/symbol
Examples:
- the degree sign is &#176;
- Greek Capital Letter Delta is &#916;
" - double quotes, typically used to represent units of inches or in the case with angles as seconds.
"""" the two double quotes in the middle represent a single double quote when surrounded by double quotation marks
tip from Ken Buja - label expressions
[Musciano 00, p. 627-632]
Latin 1 and Unicode characters in &ampersand; entities
Specify a custom color based on RGB values or hexadecimal color code, see Color Chart
To copy and paste special symbols in Windows XP. Start -> All Programs -> Accessories -> System Tools -> Character Map
once you find the character click it and it will populate the Characters to copy section of the dialog box, then just click the Copy button to place the character in the
clipboard. Lastly, within ArcMap just paste it into your label expression.

## ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Specifying the text of labels

ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Using text formatting tags
ArcGIS 8.3 solved the problem of using formatting tags on splined text. See Resolved Issues for ArcGIS 8.3

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

120 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Dynamic Labels: Stacked Labels and more

Layer Properties -> Labels tab: Expression... button
Concatenate operator for JavaScript is " + " and for VBScript is " & "
New line character for JavaScript is " \n " and for VBScript is " vbNewLine "
Enclose text strings in double quotes
Can easily add a unit using expressions which is better than adding the label to the attribute table. For example [Area] + " sq ft" and assume area = 20 then the label will
display 20 sq ft
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - About building label expressions
Dynamic Labels with VBScript Functions
VBScript Functions
Split Function
How do you format Assessor Parcel Number?
Have a field with 16319301001, want dynamic label to be 163-19-301-001
Left ([Parcel], 3) & "-" & Mid ([Parcel], 4, 2) & "-" & Mid ([Parcel], 6, 3) & "-" & Right ([Parcel], 3)
How do I create a label expression showing the surveyor's delta angle?
Background: I created an easement from a legal description and to quickly annotate the easement with its bearing and distance for straight segments and curve data
for curves. This is similar to what CAD Drafters do using Civil 3D. How can I do the same in ArcMap?
Step 0: add the COGO Line Fields to your line feature class and automatically populate these fields using the COGO toolbar. See Adding and Populating COGO
Fields in a Feature Class on this website. When populating the COGO Fields, make sure you set the correct Direct Type (Quadrant Bearing) and Direction Units
(Degrees Minutes Seconds) in Units tab of the Editor Toolbar, Editor -> Options.
Step 1: within ArcMap bring up the Layer Properties for the line feature class which as the COGO Fields. Click the Labels tab and define a two classes, one for
Curves and the other for Lines.
Step 2: click the SQL Query button... When labeling the COGO Lines, for straight line segments we need the Bearing and Distance label, for curve segments we
need the curve radius, delta angle and arc length
Curves Class: "Radius" Is Not Null

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

121 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Step 3: create a label expression

select the Expression... button
set the Parser to VBScript
enter the following code
Function FindLabel ( [Delta] )
Dim MyArray
MyArray = Split( [Delta], "-", -1, 1)
FindLabel = "=" & MyArray(0) & "" & MyArray(1) & "'" & MyArray(2) & """"
End Function

Split Function will parse the [Delta] field value of 90-0-43 by the dash. So MyArray(0) = 90, MyArray(1) = 0 and MyArray(2) = 43

## See Microsoft Visual Basic Scripting Help

Dynamic Labels: Label Methods
Label all the features the same way
Define classes of features and label each class differently
Add a new class for different styles
Use SQL Query to create subset of labels
Dynamic Labels - Label Priorities
Features in layers and classes with a higher priority will be labeled over those with a lower priority

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

122 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Because label priority setting affects multiple layers, it's a property of the data frame, not an individual layer
Data Frame Properties -> Labels tab

Annotation
Annotation Toolbar
Must be in an edit session (using the Editor Toolbar) to activate the toolbar
Toolbar Buttons and their Functions

## Edit Annotation - edits annotation features

Construct Horizontal Annotation - sets up the editor to construct horizontal annotation
Construct Straight Annotation - sets up the editor to construct straight annotation
Construct Annotation with a Leader Line - sets up the editor to construct annotation with a leader line
Uplaced Annotation Window - shows or hides the unplaced annotation window
Annotation: Draw Toolbar Label Options

New Text
New Splined Text
Label - labels annotation based on the field value. To assign a field to table (Layer Properties -> Labels tab -> Label Field)
Callout
New Polygon Text - formats the text like a paragraph that flows to fill a polygon shape. Properties will show the area of the polygon which is helpful when determining
watersheds.
New Rectangle Text - formats the text like a paragraph that flows to fill a rectangle shape.
New Circle Text - formats the text like a paragraph that flows to fill a circle shape.
Map Document Annotation: Layout View
Text added to the layout view in ArcMap
Not assigned to an annotation group so CANNOT be turned on/off
Layout text so it doesn't move, scale when panning/zooming the data frame
Very limited feature, tends to just be used in Marginalia (e.g. Title of Map)
Also known as Graphic Annotation
Use 'Select Elements' tool to edit/move Map Document Annotation. Can also use Edit -> Select All
Stored on the Layout View in the Map Document (.mxd)
Use the Drawing Toolbar to add Text to the Layout
Text cannot be shared with other maps like geodatabase annotation
Map Document Annotation: Data View
Map Annotation/Annotation Group- set of text graphics that is stored in data frame of the map document (.mxd)
Also known as Map Annotation
Associated to an annotation group so it CAN be turned on/off
Use 'Select Elements' tool to edit/move Map Document Annotation
What is difference between map annotation or graphic annotation? See ESRI Article ID 24262
Annotation Groups - create different containers to store data frame annotation
Two ways to create annotation groups: 1) Data Frame Properties -> Annotation Groups -> New Group... button, or 2) Drawing -> New Annotation Target...
"Text and graphics you draw on top of your data using the tools in the Draw toolbar are collectively known as annotation. This includes text that you draw by typing it
with the Text button, Splined Text, Callout Text, or by clicking a feature with the Label Features tool;" [ArcGIS Desktop Help: ArcMap -> Labeling maps with text and
graphics -> Organizing annotation into groups]
"Annotation refers either to the process of automating text placement, or to the text itself." [ArcGIS Desktop Help: Working with geodatabases -> Managing annotation
Data Frame Properties -> Annotation tab
All annotation is added to the Default Group Name. Can change the Active Annotation Target from the Drawing menu in the Draw Toolbar. Select New Annotation
Target... or Active Annotation Target
Can associate an annotation group with a layer, if the layer is turned off, so is the annotation group
Stored in the map document (.mxd)
Annotation groups that already exist can't be associated with a layer.
Can turn on/off data frame annotation. Will also turn on/off any graphics drawn on that annotation group.
Cannot turn on/off layout annotation
Text associated with a map feature should be added to the data frame.
Map Document Annotation: Data View - Creating New
Use the default annotation group or create a new one (e.g. Drawing -> New Annotation Target...)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

123 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Specify the Annotation Target

Text Element Types
Point Text - horizontal line text (black capital A)
Spline Text - draw a curved line, text is placed along it
Label Text - interactive by pointing/clicking on a feature, label value comes from the feature attribute table
Use the Drawing Toolbar, Label button to selectively add a label
Set the Active Annotation Target using (View -> Toolbars -> Draw) Drawing -> Active Annotation Target
Can copy and paste annotation. Will always paste into the Active Annotation Target. See ESRI Article ID 18038
Can add data frame annotation in layout view if the data frame has been double clicked (as the focus)
Text representing an element on the map layout (e.g. a title) should be added to the layout.
Text- also known as Static Text, tends to be something you type. [Ormsby 01, p. 190]
Cannot turn text elements on/off
ArcMap: Insert -> Text or can be inserted using the Drawing Toolbar
Select text elements using the Select Graphic/Elements (black arrow button). Dashed blue line indicates the text element is selected.
Can now use the drawing toolbar to change the font and size of the selected text.
A single click on the text element, or right mouse click and select properties, will allow you to change the text value
To edit the text value, double click the element with the Select Graphics button then type a new value.
Using the Drawing Toolbar: Drawing > Default Symbol Properties... to change the text style that is used when insert new text (Insert -> Text). Changing the text style on
the Drawing toolbar will not change the default symbol when inserting text. Feel this is a poor software design.
How to Create Geodatabase Annotation
Method 1 - create a new, empty annotation feature class in ArcCatalog

Method 2 - Convert Labels To Annotation to create an annotation feature class from a layer's labels
Note: will not work on shapefiles or coverages, command requires a geodatabase
Will use the current data frame map scale as the text reference scale

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

124 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Method 3 - Import Annotation from other programs, e.g. older coverage annotation or AutoCAD text
How to Edit Geodatabase Annotation
Step 1: start an edit session on the Editor Toolbar (then the Annotation Toolbar will activate)

## Step 2: select the Edit Annotation button to edits annotation features

Step 3: select the annotation on the map display. For additional editing options such as changing the value of the annotation, right-click on the feature and choose one of
the options.
How to Edit Geodatabase Annotation Reference Scale
Step 0: ensure the geodatabase isn't open by ArcMap. If it is, then the change reference scale in ArcCatalog is unavailable
Step 1: within ArcCatalog, navigate to the geodatabase annotation feature class
Step 2: right click annotation feature class to bring up the context menu, choose properties
Step 3: click the Annotation tab on the Feature Class Properties dialog box
Step 4: click the Change... button (remember if this is grayed out, see step 0)
Step 5: type in or choose a predefined reference scale. Will get a warning message dialog box, just click ok.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

125 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Note, cannot update annotation using the ArcToolbox - Update Annotation Feature Class if it has annotation subtypes (i.e. annotation classes)

ESRI Article ID 27844 How to change the size and reference scale for existing annotation
GeoDatabase Annotation: Standard Annotation
Used to store large amounts of text
Ability to share text between maps
Reference scale is independent of data frame reference scale
Reference scale is not editable after an annotation feature class is created
Use ArcMap to edit Geodatabase annotation, Edit Annotation tool from the Advanced Editing toolbar
Stored in a BLOB field (Binary Large OBject)
To create, edit, or delete geodatabase annotation you must first start an edit session
Use Sketch tool (from Editor Toolbar) and Construction dropdown (from the Annotation Toolbar) to create annotation. Also can use the shortcuts on Annotation Toolbar.
Need to upgrade ArcGIS 8 annotation to ArcGIS 9 using ArcToolbox (Update Annotation Feature Class tool)
Nonfeature-linked Annotation: geographically placed text strings that are not associated with features in the geodatabase. For example text on a map for a mountain
range.
Annotation Feature Class- set of text graphics that is stored in a geodatabase
Use the ArcMap editing tools to create GeoDatabase Annotation instead of the Drawing Toolbar which is used to create Map Document Annotation
Geodatabase Annotation is always stored in an annotation feature class
ESRI Article ID 22993 How does ArcMap convert labels to annotation dialog box work when creating geodatabase annotation?
special type of geodatabase annotation
Objective - link the feature to the label, for example using a point feature of cities and a geodatabase annotation layer of city names, feature-linked annotation has the
ability to delete the annotation at the same time the point feature of the city is deleted. Ideally this will easy the maintenance of geodatabase
Cons - more steps required to setup and slower performance than standard geodatabase annotation
To create, edit, or delete geodatabase annotation you must first start an edit session
Feature-linked Annotation: associated with a specific feature in another feature class (origin class) in the geodatabase. The Text (destination) reflects the value of a field
in another feature. So, moving the origin will also move the destination feature-linked annotation.
Use the ArcMap editing tools to create GeoDatabase Annotation instead of the Drawing Toolbar which is used to create Map Document Annotation
Annotation Feature Class- set of text graphics that is stored in a geodatabase

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

126 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

ArcGIS 8 "An annotation feature class stored in a geodatabase is actually a polygon feature class that describes a path for a text string to be displayed along. Annotation
feature classes have attributes that define how the text is to be displayed." [ESRI Virtual Campus -> Learning ArcGIS II -> Lesson 2 -> Storing annotation as a feature
class]
"A fast way to create textual annotation is to convert existing feature labels." [ESRI Virtual Campus -> Learning ArcGIS II -> Lesson 2 -> Summary]
Store annotation in a map if its a one time application (known as Map Document Annotation). If it will be reused, store in a feature class in the geodatabase.
Stacked annotation displays on one line, see ESRI Article# 21770
Version 9 of ArcMap changes the annotation model, will make it more like coverage annotation. Also will give the ability to change text color from the TOC like you do
with other layers. Should be a big improvement.
ESRI Article ID 21409, Can I create feature linked annotation based on attributes in a joined field? Yes to can create them, No they are not linked. Any changes to the
joined table doesn't propagate back to the geodatabase.
ESRI Article ID 23578 How to convert labels to annotation and store overflow labels in a separate annotation feature class.
Requires ArcEditor or ArcInfo license to create
Geodatabase Annotation is always stored in an annotation feature class
How to change the font and size of geodatabase annotation, see ESRI Article Number 15053. This global change has issues if all the text rotation isn't the same, also has
problems with leaders, callouts, and spline text.
1. Select all the annotation you want to change in ArcMap using the Select Elements button (black arrow)
2. Start an ArcMap edit session
3. Select desired size or font from the Draw toolbar
4. save edits
Annotation Toolbar: View -> Toolbars -> Annotation
When editing annotation, the Editor toolbar, Target is ignored. All annotation is added to the target annotation layer specified in the Drawing -> Active Annotation Target.
Converting ArcSDE Annotation to Geodatabase Annotation
Create a File Geodatabase with an Annotation Feature Class. Will need to import the spatial reference
Determine the Reference Scale of the ArcSDE Annotation using ArcCatalog. View the ArcSDE Annotation Properties -> Annotation tab. Set the Reference Scale in the
ArcMap data frame.
Within ArcMap add the ArcSDE Annotation layer, then the new File Geodatabase Annotation Feature Class. Start an edit session in on the File Geodatabase.
Do a select by attributes with OID < 20,000 for the ArcSDE Annotation layer. Copy then paste into the File Geodatabase edit session. According to Margaret at ESRI
Support (specializes in Data Projections and Symbology), there is a bug in ArcGIS 9.2 and cannot copy and paste or use any of the Geoprocessing Tools with more than
40,000-50,000 records. Margaret says 20,000 records will be save for the conversion.
ArcInfo Coverage Annotation
Use the "\" backslash to make stacked text
When converting Coverage Annotation to Feature Class Annotation, ArcMap treats a "\" as a line feed character to stack the text. See ESRI Article# 24235
"The annotation class into which you convert your coverage annotation must exist in the geodatabase before you perform the conversion. You can create a new annotation
class using ArcCatalog." [ArcGIS Desktop Help: Working with geodatabases -> Managing annotation -> Converting cover annotation to geodatabase annotation]
(see ESRI Article #11878 to Import annotation from a coverage into a geodatabase)
Importing coverage or CAD annotation into geodatabase annotation (ArcInfo and ArcEditor only)
Using Interstate Shields
Manually Insert Marker Text
Step 1: Set the Default Text Symbol to an Interstate Shield in the Draw Toolbar

## Step 1b: select the US Interstate Hwy symbol

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

127 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step 2: select the New Text Tool from the Draw Toolbar

Step 3: click in the graphic display area where you want to place the text with interstate shield in the background
Step 4: type in a value for the text, for example 15 to represent I-15
Can either use windows copy and paste to make additional graphic elements or just continue clicking with New Text tool to insert additional text elements.
Dynamic Labels - Text with Interstate Marker
Uses a label symbol instead of a linetype or a marker symbol
Layer Properties > Labels tab, Method: 'Define classes of features and label each class differently'

Add new Class Interstate, SQL Query (e.g. street.name = 'I 15')
Change Text Symbol: Symbol... button -> Properties button -> Advanced Text tab, check Text Background, Properties... button -> Type Marker Text
Background, Symbol... button, then select 'Interstate HWY 1' symbol
Other Options, click the Placement Properties... button, Placement tab, Line Settings Orientation, click Horizontal radio button.
Add new Class USRoute, SQL Query (e.g. street.name = 'US 95')
Change Text Symbol: Symbol... button -> Properties button -> Advanced Text tab, check Text Background, Properties... button -> Type Marker Text
Background, Symbol... button, then select 'U.S. Route 2' symbol
Other Options, click the Placement Properties... button, Placement tab, Line Settings Orientation, click Horizontal radio button.
Class uncheck Label features in this class
Alternative - Use the Label Manager from the Labeling Toolbar

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

128 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

How to label interstate highways with a shield marker containing the highway number, ESRI Article ID 20248
Reference Scale for Data Frames
Data Frame Reference Scale
Unless you explicitly set a reference scale, the current scale is your reference scale
When reference scale = map scale (default) then the text will float, so has you zoom in, text remains constant size
When reference scale is set, then the text is flattened on the image, so has you zoom in, text gets larger
Use to define the scale at which text and symbols will appear at their true size
If you zoom in or out, the text and symbols will change scale along with the display when reference scale is set
Similar to freezing the symbol and text sizes used in your data frame, the way they look at the reference scale is maintained at all scales
Three reference scale commands (Set Reference Scale, Clear Reference Scale, and Zoom To Reference Scale) are available from the Table of Contents, Data Frame
context menu (right mouse click on data frame name)
Map Document Annotation has a reference scale
Default is labels will not scale when you zoom in/out (label font height will stay the same size on the page regardless of map scale). So labels will take up more
geographic space on the map as you zoom in, less geographic space as you zoom out. Setting the data frame reference will make the label size fixed, that is as you
zoom in the label font height appears bigger, zoom out the label font height appears smaller.
2 ways to set a data frame reference scale:
1. right mouse click the data frame name in the ArcMap TOC, select the Set Reference Scale option on the context menu.
2. data frame properties -> General tab -> Reference Scale
Remember the reference scale is unitless, so if you want 1"=40ft you need to enter 1:480
Reference Scale effects 1) all feature symbology, 2) labels, 3) and graphics in the current data frame - will be scaled relative to the reference scale. To disable
scaling for individual layers, double-click the layer name in the Table of Contents, click the Display tab and uncheck Scale symbols when a reference scale is
set.
Data Frame Reference scales does NOT effect Geodatabase annotation. Geodatabase annotation and dimension features have their own reference scale
Default Reference Scale for the labels defaults to the current scale of the map
Set a Reference Scale - ESRI ArcMap Training Video
ArcGIS Desktop Help Release 9.1 - Working with Reference Scales
Civil Engineering Textstyle Standards and Conversions
Textstyle, 1000th of an
inch

Layout Height,
inches

## Layout Height, points

Reference Scale

Data View/Modelspace
Height, feet

unitless

L120

120/1000 = 0.12

1 inch = 40 feet
(1:480)

0.12*40 = 4.8

0.12*480 = 57.6

L100

100/1000 = 0.10

1 inch = 40 feet
(1:480)

0.10*40 = 4

0.10*480 = 48

L80

80/1000 = 0.08

1 inch = 40 feet
(1:480)

0.08*40 = 3.2

0.08*480 = 38.4

L60

60/1000 = 0.06

1 inch = 40 feet
(1:480)

0.06*40 = 2.4

0.06*480 = 28.8

L40

40/1000 = 0.04

1 inch = 40 feet
(1:480)

0.04*40 = 1.6

0.04*480 = 19.2

LX

X/1000 = Xinches

## Xinches*point conversion (1 inch =

72 points)

scale (unitless
scale)

Xinches*scale

Xinches*unitless scale

Fonts
Font Tutorial provides pictures of font height
Fonts are measured in Points. 72 points = 1 inch

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

129 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

If you print the letter A at 72 points, will it be 1 inch tall? No. Point size is the height of the font from its lowest descender to its highest ascender plus a small buffer.

## Symbolizing features and rasters

Symbols and Styles
Used to mimic nature. Conveys information about real world features on the map.
Influenced by scale
Vector symbology: points, polygons, and lines. Raster symbology: change color of cell/pixel.
Suite of symbols is called a style, think of a style as a palette of symbols
Styles are a collection of predefined symbols, colors, and other map elements such as labels, north arrows, scale bars, and borders.
Can be stored in a layer (.lyr) file. Remember data features are not stored in layer, just a reference. Custom symbols are stored in the layer, this is very helpful when
distributing file.
Can export map styles. This allows you to save map elements and symbols from many styles into a single style: Tools -> Styles -> Export Map Styles
Initially a new map document loads two default styles: ESRI and a windows-generated symbolset with the same name as the user's login. [ESRI Virtual Campus,
Learning ArcGIS II, Module 1, Lesson 2, Displaying Layers]
New styles contain a standard set of symbol and map element folder but they are empty, which is indicated by the white folder icon. Yellow folder implies it contains an
element.
Change Symbology
To change color: right mouse click on symbol in TOC
Symbol Selector: double click on symbol in TOC
See ESRI Article Number 18784 if you want to Set ArcMap's legend shade to match transparency
See ESRI Article Number 17494 for a description of ArcMap's advanced symbology option for transparency by field works only on polygons
Creating Marker Symbols
4 marker types
Picture Graphic
Can be either a bitmap raster image (.bmp) or an Enhance Windows Metafile vector format (.emf)
Tools -> Styles -> Style Manager. In Marker Symbol, right mouse click on open space and select New. Layer Properties -> Symbology. Categories - Unique
values, Advanced button - rotation field
Simple - fast drawing set of basic glyph patters with an optional mask
Character - a glyph from a TrueType font
Arrow - a glyph from a TrueType font
Software to create glyphs
Font Lab
Macromedia Fontographer
www.microsoft.com/typography
convert Mac fonts to PC, use CrossFont from Asy
True Type Font Creator Program by high logic. Cannot create open type fonts.
See ArcGIS Desktop Help: ArcMap -> Working with Styles and Symbols -> Creating Marker Symbols
Symbols by Attributes
Categorical/Qualitative/Descriptive Attributes: usually text but may be numbers if the numbers are codes standing for descriptions (e.g. landuse, zoning, etc.)
Quantitative Attributes: measurements or counts of features (e.g. area, population, etc.)
See ESRI Article Number 22897 for discussion on how to Rotate point labels by an attribute field and offset them so that labels are placed on top the points
Creating Line Symbols
Vertex Line Symbol Example - Extending ArcObjects

## Classifying features and rasters

Classifying Features and Rasters
Basically divide attribute values into groups/classes to graphically view on a map.
Map Legends are based on classes
Feature attributes are typically categroical (e.g. text field, such as a State name) or quantitative (e.g. numeric field, such as population of a state)
This chapter focuses on Quantitative attributes.
Quantitative Scaled Symbology
this is a color ramp, applies to polygons, won't work well with points or lines. (See ESRI Article Number 20653 on How to apply a color range to a portion of
symbols in ArcMap.
Most effective on polygon layers because subtle color differences are easier to detect on large features (see Ormsby 04 p. 129)
different marker size, applies to points, lines, & polygons.
Normally used with point layers (see Ormsby 04 p. 129)
Specify number of classess, minimum and maximum symbol size.
Example using 3 classess and min value = 1 and max value = 3, then ArcMap will symbolize the map with 3 symbols, sizes 1, 2, and 3

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

130 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

3. Proportional Symbol
vary in size proportionally to the value symbolized.
Example marker symbol for a city of 10,000 would be ten times larger than a marker symbol for a city of 1,000.
work best when the range of values for an attribute is not too wide (see Ormsby 04 p. 130)
Instructor recommends using Graduate Symbol over Proportional Symbol. Appears Proportional symbol crashes ArcMap, cannot specify a maximum symbol size,
and unclear is units apply to the map or the symbol.
4. Dot Density
applies to polygons only. (see ESRI Article Number 17472 Dot density symbology previews can be incorrect. and Ormsby 04 p. 130)
Classification methods
Allows one to see where attribute values reside in relation to one another
Best way to lie with maps, see [Ormsby 01, p. 137]
To use classification methods, which isn't available in Categories: In TOC, select Layer's Properties, in Symbology tab: Quantities
Six classification methods [Ormsby 01, p. 129]. Max number of classes allowed by ArcGIS is 256.
Natural Breaks (Jenks)- creates classes according to clusters and gaps in the data
Equal Interval- creates classes of equal value ranges. If range of values is 1 to 100 and the number of classes is 4, this method will create classes with the following
values: 1-25, 26-50, 51-75, and 76-100. Scheme divides the range of attribute values into equal-sized subranges.
Defined Interval- creates the number of classes based on the interval you choose. For example, range of values is 1 to 100 and you select 2 intervals, will have
classes from 1-50, and 51-100.
Quantile- creates classes containing equal numbers of features. "The Quantile method places breaks so that each class contains an approximately equal count of
values. (In other words, each class includes about the same number of features.)" [Ormsby 01, p. 137] If you choose 5 classes for a layer with 100 features, this
method will create class breaks so that 20 features fall into each class.
Standard Deviation- creates classes according to a specified number of standard deviations from the mean.
Manual- set whatever class breaks you like.
Symbology Charts
Pie - Layer Properties -> Symbology -> Charts -> Pie. Click the Properties button to alter 3D effects. Click the Size... button to alter the diameter of the pie chart.
Bar/Column - Layer Properties -> Symbology -> Charts -> Bar/Column. Click the Properties button to change from Column to Bar.
Stacked
For additional info, see ArcGIS Desktop Help -> ArcMap -> Symbolizing your data -> Drawing features with charts
Understanding Classification Histogram
ArcMap Layer Properties -> Symbology tab: Show Classified: click the Classify button under Classification, Quantile
X-axis (horizontal) shows the range of values in the field
Y-axis (vertical) gives the count of features (number of records in database)
Vertical blue lines are class breaks. Value on the X-axis is shown on top of blue line.
Value Range = Max Value - Min Value
If you move the blue lines, changes the classification to manual. Click on the histogram to add a new class break. Right mouse click on the blue line to remove the class
break.
Value of one gray histogram column = value range / number of columns
Gray column range: 10-100
Data Exclusion: enter a list of values you don't want included in the map. For example: 1, 3, 5-12
Gray columns represent percentages of the value range. One column implies all the data (100%) lies in the single column (this wouldn't be of any help in determining
relationship of features since they are all the same)
Used to determine population densities.
In past had to create a new attribute field
Create in Layer Properties, under Quantities (Graduate colors, Graduated symbols, or Proportional symbols), add a field to the Normalization drop down box.

## Joining and relating tables

Database Relationships
Cardinality- "describes how many objects of one type are related to an object of another type" [ESRI Virtual Campus- Working with Attributes in ArcGIS Lesson 2]
one-to-one: one parcel can have one parcel id. Use Table joins. Read as destination table-to-source table.
one-to-many: one parcel can have many owners. Use Relate joins. Using a Table join will omit all records after the first match. Example application is building
occupancy, one building such as a shopping center may be occupied by many tenants. Another example is soil types.
many-to-one: many parcels can have one owner. Use Table joins. Another example is lookup tables such as landuse codes.
many-to-many: many parcels can have many different owners. Use Relate joins. Using a Table join will omit all records after the first match.
Relate Tables
to setup: right mouse click on layer name in the TOC and select "Joins and Relates" -> "Relate". Fill in correct table name and Primary Keys (PK).
Unable to query with the related table with "Select By Attributes" from the menu toolbar. To query the table first need to Open the table, then using the Options -> "Select
By Attributes" can perform a query on the related table. Then use Options -> Related Tables to view the map features.
relates have more overhead than joins.
When selecting records, the records in the relate table are not automatically selected. See ESRI Article Number 17714.
Cannot symbolize features based on fields in the relate table. Only works for joins.
Join Tables
Appends the attributes from one onto the other based on a field common to both tables

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

131 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

To make a permanent join, export the data to a new dataset (right-click the layer in the table of contents, point to Data, and click Export data).
Cannot edit joined tables directly, need to edit the source. Changes to the source will be reflected in the joined tables.
To create a join: right-click the layer you want to join in the TOC, point to "Joins and Relates" and click "Join". Helpful if the join table is already in the TOC but can
always click the Browse button to search for it.
Can query the joined fields directly.
More commonly used over relates.
Destination/Primary Table- typically the attribute table for the spatial theme, table to which the fields from the source table will be appended
Source/Secondary Table-typically contains descriptive attributes
Advanced button - 'Keep all records (default)'
How to select rows with no data values in a joined field using ArcMap. See ESRI Article ID 21031
Advanced button - 'Keep only matching records'
Joins with Temporal Data
ArcToolbox: Make Query Table (Data Management)

Reference
ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10: Temporal data in separate tables
Spatial Joins
Similar to a table join, except the relate item (Primary Key) is the distance between features.
A spatial join appends the attributes of one layer to another.
Can select features in one layer based on their location relative to another layer, but a spatial join provides a more permanent association between the two layers.
Creates a new layer containing both sets of attributes. For ArcView, output layer is a shapefile. ArcEditor or ArcInfo output layer is either a shapefile or a feature class.
3 types of spaital joins
Nearest Feature
this is defined as the feature that is geographically closest to another one. Proximity is based on straight line distance between features. In the TOC, right
click the layer you want to join attributes to. In first dropdown arrow click "Join data from another layer based on spatial location." Will create a new dataset.
Spatial join based on distance. [Ormsby 01, p. 268]
Nearest feature is defined as the feature that is geographically closest to another one. Proximity is based on straight line distance between features. (ArcGIS
Desktop Help -> Arcmap -> Querying maps -> Joining the attributes of features by their location)
right mouse click feature in TOC you want to join attributes to. Join -> Join data from another layer based on spatial location: click option to join the
attributes to the features closest to it.
Inside a Polygon

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

132 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

a summary of features within each polygon will be created. In the TOC, right click the layer you want to join attributes to. In first dropdown arrow click "Join
data from another layer based on spatial location". When joining the polygon attributes to a point feature, ArcMap adds a Distance field to the output table
which contains the distance in map units from the point to the polygon.
Spatial join based on containment. [Ormsby 01, p. 267]
right mouse click feature in TOC you want to join attributes to. Join -> Join data from another layer based on spatial location: click option to join the
attributes of the features that fall inside the polygon.
Intersects a feature
a summary of features that intersect each line will be created.
right mouse click feature in TOC you want to join attributes to. Join -> Join data from another layer based on spatial location: click option to join the
attributes of the features that intersect it.
Attribute Summary
Average
Sum
Minimum
Maximum
Standard Deviation
Variance
see ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 - About joining and relating tables
see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 - Joining the attributes of features by location
Example Spatial Join: Assign closest bus stop to each parcel
Spatial Join the Parcel162.mdb to rtc.mdb
Will add all the fields from rtc.mdb
Also add a new Field called DISTANCE
Example Spatial Join: Distance to Nearest Sewer Line
Background - the citizens in Book 163 Section 11 have asked Clark County Public Works to provide full street improvements (curb, gutter, sidewalk, street lights) and
public sewer service to their parcels. This will be funded by a Special Improvement District (SID) that is basically a tax/lien against the property to cover the cost of the
improvements. As the Engineer, you have to determine the distance from the centroid of the parcel to the nearest existing sewer line. This information will be used as a
tax, parcels that are further from an existing sewer line will be charged more than parcels that are closer to the line.
Step 0: obtain sewer lines and septic tanks GIS layers
Clark County Water Reclamation District sewer lines - (C:\gisdata\crsand\shapefil\swsys_l.shp)
Use the Define Projection tool from the ArcToolbox Data Management Tools to assign a coordinate system to the sewer lines.
Southern Nevada Health District septic parcels - (C:\gisdata\crgen\shapefil\septic_l.shp)
Clark County Township Range and Sections - (C:\gisdata\crgen\shapefil\clarktrs_p.shp)
Step 1: Select Book 163 Section 11 in clarktrs_p.shp using the Select By Attributes

## see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Using Select By Attributes

Step 2: Select sewer lines and septic parcels which are within Book 163 Section 11

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

133 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Using Select By Location

Step 3: Create a layer from the selected features

## see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Using selection layers

Step 4: Join the distance to the sewer line from the septic parcel
Use a Spatial Join which is available from by doing a right click on the septic parcel layer and select Join from the context menu.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

134 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step 5: symbolize the map based on the distance field

## Overview Data Frame

Create Overview Data Frame (a.k.a. index, vicinity, location, or key map)
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Using Extent Rectangles
ESRI Article ID 29468 HowTo: Create Extent Rectangles in ArcMap
Chapter 19 of [Ormsby 01] shows an overview data frame, but doesn't tell how to create one.
ArcGIS Desktop Help -> Contents tab -> ArcMap -> Laying out and printing maps -> Adding data frames -> Using on data frame to show the location of another
In a nutshell, from the Vicinity Map Data Frame, right mouse click on the data frame in the table of contents and select Properties, then select the Extent Rectangles tab
required item for Tentative Map submission, "V. A vicinity or key map showing the relation of the subdivision to the area in which it is located" (Title 30 Clark County
Unified Development Code, 30.28.120 Document Submittal Requirements, p. 30.28 - 19)
Requires at least 2 data frames, one being the main map display and the other the overview frame.
Rectangle showing the map extent is dynamic, that is if pan/zoom is peeach feature's shape and its location in the coordinate system." [Ormsby 01, p. 366] Will discuss
further in Chapter 14.
How to create custom reference grid row or column labels ESRI Article ID 17372
This method is not used by the CCRFCD MPU figures, instead a custom grid was created and shaded based on the map extend/scale. This works but isn't automated.
How to create an exact copy of an Overview Window in a data frame
Issue being the polygon shading/hatching is solid, not lines drawn at 45 degree angle. This can be done by creating a new line style. Below is email extract from Thomas
Purk, tpurk@esri.com of ESRI Technical Support.
1. Select Data Frame from the Insert menu.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

135 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## 2. Rename the data frame to 'Overview'

2. Select Properties
3. Switch to the General tab
4. Type the new name in the Name field
5. Click Apply and OK
3. Create an extend rectangle for the Overview data frame
1. Right click on the data frame and select Properties
2. Switch to the Extent Rectangles tab
3. Select a Data Frame from the 'Other data frames' list
4. Click the right arrow button
5. Click Apply and OK
4. Select Tools -> Styles -> Style Manager...
5. Expand the ESRI.Styles folder and select the Background subfolder
6. Right click in the right hand window and select New -> Normal Background
7. Click the Change Symbol button on the Background dialog box
8. Click the Properties button on the Symbol Selector dialog box
9. Select Line Fill Symbol from the Type dropdown list
10. Change the angle field to 45 degrees
11. Select Red from the Color dropdown
12. Click the Outline button
13. Select Red from the Color dropdown and click OK
14. Click Apply and OK on all dialog boxes
15. Rename the new style to 'Overview' and close the Style Manager
16. Right click the Overview data frame and select Properties
17. Switch to the Extent Rectangles tab
18. Click the Frame button
19. Switch the Outline to None and switch the Background to the new Overview background
20. Click Apply and OK on all dialogs. Once you arrange your Layout view you should see something like the following image.

## Using Excel with ArcGIS

How To: Join an Excel spreadsheet, .xls, to a feature class in ArcMap, Article ID: 31793
Working with Microsoft Excel files in ArcGIS
Note must select a worksheet within the Spreadsheet (.xls) file, cannot just add the .xls and expect ArcMap to add all the worksheets like it would with ArcInfo
coverages
Use the Display XY Data... to view the points/events if your excel spreadsheet has coordinate data in the fields/columns.
ArcGIS can only read Microsoft Excel files, not create, delete, or write to them. See About tabular data sources
Excel Notes
VLOOKUP(lookup_value, table_array, col_index_num, range_lookup)
lookup_value is the value to search in the first column of the table_array
table_array is two or more columns of data (e.g. A1:B4). Values in the first column of the table_array are the values searched by lookup_value. In other words the
relate item or primary key is the lookup_value and the first column of table_array.
col_index_num is the column number in the table_array from which the matching value must be returned. A col_index_num of 1 returns the value in the first
column in table_array; a col_index_num of 2 returns the value in the second column in table_array, and so on.
"The values in the first column of table_array must be placed in ascending sort order; otherwise, VLOOKUP may not give the correct value. You can put the
values in ascending order by choosing the Sort command from the Data menu and selecting Ascending." For more information, see Default sort orders. (See
Microsoft Excel Help - VLOOKUP)

## How to create random x,y,z coordinates using Excel

Example - create 1,000 random x,y,z coordinates on the Harry Reid UNLV Research and Technology Park, located between Durango on the west, Cimarron to the east,
Patrick to the north, and Sunset to the south (Assessor Book 163 Section 33, Township 21 South Range 60 East Section 33. Using Stateplane coordinates (Nevada East
zone, units feet, NAD83 datum and NAVD 88 vertical datum). Easting/X values between 745,500 feet and 749,000 feet. Northing/Y values between 26,727,000 feet and
26,730,300 feet. Elevation/Z values between 2500 feet and 2565 feet.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

136 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Excel 2007 Step 0: check to see Formulas -> Math & Trig -> RANDETWEEN function is available
Excel 2003 Step 0: check to see Tools -> Add-ins -> Analysis ToolPak is checked
Excel Step 1: label fields/columns
ID, X, Y, Z
The ID field is just an autonumber of non-repeating values
The X field will contain the easting or longitude values
The Y field will contain the northing or latitude values
The Z field will contain the elevation
Excel Step 2: Populate the ID field
Type number 1 in cell A2, enter on the keyboard, then select cell A2 with the mouse
Edit -> Fill -> Series. Check columns, type = linear, step value = 1, stop value = 1000
Excel Step 3: Populate the x, y, z fields with random numbers
Type the following formula in field B2: =RANDBETWEEN(745500,749000)
This will create a random number between 745500 and 749000 (stateplane coordinate within Las Vegas NV valley)
Select cells B2 to B1001
F5 to goto cell B1001
Shift+End+up arrow to select the column. Use shift down arrow to unselect the X field header name.
Edit -> Fill -> Down (or Ctrl+D). This will copy the formula in B2 cell to cells B3 to B1001
Type the following formula in field C2: =RANDBETWEEN(26727000,26730300)
follow same steps to copy the formula
Type the following formula in field D2: =RANDBETWEEN(2500,2565)
follow same steps to copy the formula
Excel Step 4: Export spreadsheet into text file (.txt or .csv extension) or dBase 4 (.dbf) format
dBase 4 file RandomXYZpointsUNLVresearchpark.dbf)
Aerial Photo of the Research and Technology Park, photos taken Fall 2005, 5 ft pixels, F0516333.TIF f0516333.tfw F0516333.aux
Excel Notes
May need to turn on the Tools -> Add-Ins... check Analysis ToolPak if RANDBETWEEN function is not working
How do you zoom/goto any spreadsheet cell? Use F5 key
How do you zoom/goto cell A1 in the spreadsheet? Ctrl+Home
How do you scroll to the end of a series? Shift+End+down arrow
How do you scroll to the beginning of a series? Shift+End+up arrow
How do you refresh the spreadsheet calculation/analysis? F9

## Create Random Points in ArcToolbox

Geoprocessing tool reference -> Data Management toolbox -> Feature Class toolset -> Tools
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Create Random Points\
"For the polygon option, the number of points in each polygon is identified through a specified value or through a field." (ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - An overview of the
Create Random Points tool
ArcScript - Duplicate_Mover
script is crashing
Find and/or Move Coincident Points
How do you join based on random points? For example, if you have a one to many relationship but you want to create a one to one relationship.
Disperse Markers
Create Random Points using the Field Calculator
Background
When using the geocoding feature in ArcMap, can end up having overlapping points if your database has duplicate addresses. For example, a database with the
various colleges on UNLV will have have the physical address of 4505 S Maryland Pkwy but the only difference is the Box number. In this case, geocoding will
produce overlapping points.
Desire is to move the points slightly so one can visual see the number of points. This also helps if you want to label the points.
VBA Function - Rnd is the Random number generator. Creates a random number between 0 and 1.
Step 0: ensure the point feature has the x,y coordinate fields. For example, POINT_X and POINT_Y fields are created using the ADDXY ArcToolbox tool (ArcToolbox
-> Data Management Tools -> Features -> Add XY Coordinates)
Step 1: add 2 new fields (Double, Precision 19, Scale 4) called xrandom and yrandom
Step 2: using the Field Calculator from the attribute table
Dim xrandom as Double
xrandom = ([POINT_X] - 1000) + (Rnd * 2000)
Dim yrandom as Double
yrandom = ([POINT_Y] - 500) + (Rnd * 1000)

desire is to create a random coordinate in the y direction which is within a Map Page (X is 0.5 miles or 2640 feet and Y is 0.25 miles or 1320 feet). Since the area
and shape of a section varies and not wanting any point coordinates created outside the Map Page, will create a inside buffer of 320 ft in the X direction and 160 ft
in the Y direction.
Step 3: using ArcMap, then just right click on the feature and select Display XY Data to see the random points.
How to Generate Random Points in Aoindex
Step 0: open aoindex polygon feature class. Add a new field called MAPNO, Text, length=6. Using the field calculator in ArcMap
MAPNO = Left( [MAP_NO], 3) & Mid([MAP_NO], 5, 2) & Right([MAP_NO], 1)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

137 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step 1: create a MAPNO field in the Henderson spreadsheet data (CivilPermits_cleaned.xls). Recommend saving the excel spreadsheet as dBase IV file (.dbf). Using the
field calculator in ArcMap
MAPNO = Left([APN], 6)

Step 2: sort the Henderson spreadsheet data (CivilPermits_cleaned.xls) in ascending order by the MAPNO field
Step 3: add a new field to Henderson spreadsheet data (CivilPermits_cleaned.xls) called APNNO, Text, length 5. Calculate this as an autonumber (1,2,3,...)
Step 4: open the spreadsheet in ArcMap and export as CivilPermits_cleaned.dbf
Step 5: add a new field to (CivilPermits_cleaned.dbf) called MAPNOAUTO, Text, length 11. Calculate this to
MAPNOAUTO = MAPNO & APNNO

Step 6: summary of MAPNO field in CivilPermits_cleaned.dbf the Henderson on the permits, create CivilPermits_summary.dbf
Step 7: join Aoindex with civilpermits_summary.dbf, based on the MAPNO field, keep only matching records
Step 8: create random points based on the Count_MAPNO field ArcToolbox: Data Management Tools -> Feature Class -> Create Random Points. Save as
CivilPermits_random.shp, use smallest distance of 50 feet and create number of random points from the Count_MAPNO field.
Step 9: join CivilPermits_random.shp (CID field) with aoindex_p (ObjectID field). This will give us the needed MAPNO.
Step 10: in the properties of civilPermits_random.shp, only display the FID and MAPNO fields. Then export this as civilpermits_random3.dbf
Step 11: in Excel, open civilpermits_random3.dbf
Step 5: export the attribute table of CivilPermits_random.shp, just need the MAPNO field.need a many-to-many join Handling Many-To-Many Relationships in
Microsoft Access

## Add x,y coordinate data to ArcMap

Use tabular data (e.g. delimited text files, dBase .dbf files, etc) to create a point layer
Example is surveyors will provide a points file, this is method to view in ArcView
Table must contain two fields, one for the x-coordinate and another for the y-coordinate. Table can contant other data, but this won't be used in spatial context.
Creates a data layer similar to a graphic layer, that is to make it a permanent feature, need to export the layer as a shapefile (.shp) or personal geodatabase (.mdb) feature.
Cannot interactively move a point on the map (unless it has been converted to shp or mdb), need to change the value in the table.
If using a text file, remember first record will be imported as the field name, enclose strings in double quotes (single quotes will be imported into the database), use either
tab or comma field delimitors.
Field X = Long = Easting
Field Y = Lat = Northing
Can defined the projection at time of import
Text files: comma delimited, strings can optionally be enclosed in double quotes, first record is the field heading names
Problem: XY event themes created from text files are not selectable, ESRI Article #21953
See ESRI Article Number 21473 on Using ArcObjects to get the x and y coordinates of points, polygon centroids, or line midpoints
ArcMap 10

## Creating Point Layer from x,y values in a table using ArcCatalog

Two methods to create a point layer: Event Theme [Ormsby 01, p. 476] or From XY Table
From XY Table
Step 1: from ArcCatalog tree, right-click on XY table, Create Feature Class -> From XY Table
Step 2: select field name that has x-coordinates (e.g. Eastings)
Step 3: select field name that has y-coordinates (e.g. Northings)
Step 4: Spatial Reference of Input Coordinates. Coordinate System tab -> Import... button. Then select a feature which has the coordinate system you want to copy.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

138 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Dataset can be a geodatabase feature class, shapefile, or ArcInfo coverage.

Step 5: accept defaults on remaining
Issues when creating a feature class and its extent is outside the XY domain, see ESRI Article ID 21419
Event Theme
Issues using an Access table that has a blank space in the name. See ESRI Article ID 21390
Reference: ArcGIS Desktop Help: Contents tab - ArcCatalog -> Exploring the values in a table -> Creating new data sources from the values in a table

## Create x,y,z features in ArcCatalog

Step 0: obtain a text file which has x,y,z (Easting,Northing,Elevation) values. Can use City of North Las Vegas benchmark spreadsheet - NVBenchmarks.xls
Option 1: within Excel, export (Save As) the data from the spreadsheet to a .csv file format to be imported by ArcCatalog
Option 2: ArcGIS version 9 has the ability to directly read an Excel spreadsheet and create features from it. Just remember you must specify which worksheet the
data is on in the spreadsheet. Default spreadsheets have 3 worksheet tabs at the bottom of the window. Within ArcCatalog, double click on the .xls file to browse
and select the desired worksheet.
Step 1: using ArcCatalog
navigate to the location of the .xls or .csv file, then right click on it (to open the context sensitive menu) and choose Create Feature Class -> From XY Table

## Step 2: match coordinate fields

X Field = Easting
Y Field = Northing
Z Field = ElevFeet
Step 3: specify horizontal projection
click the Coordinate System of Input Coordinates... button
click the XY Coordinate System tab
click the Select... button

## Step 3: using ArcCatalog, specify vertical projection

Will have to modify the vertical project to change from Meters to Foot_US

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

139 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Note: Google Earth Pro 5.0 will only recognize elevations in units of meters.
Note: ArcToolbox - Layer To KML will NOT do a data conversion on the elevation. So, if your 3D point layer has an elevation of feet, ArcToolbox will just pass
the feet values to the output KML file without any units, then when the KML is opened in Google Earth, the points will appear to float in the air because Google
Earth thinks the points are in units of meters. Solution is to do the vertical adjustment in the spreadsheet
Step 4: specify output file. Options include Shapefile, File or Personal Geodatabase, and SDE Feature.
Notes:
Any ASCII text file can be converted into a point shapefile or a point feature class in a personal or ArcSDE geodatabase.
Text file must contain x and y field. The field name doesn't have to have x,y label. For example can use Easting, Northing field names.
Z field is optional. If used, ArcCatalog will auotmatically create a point feature that has Z values, also know Point Z shape type.
When creating a new 3D point feature class, use Shape Geometry Type Point with the field property-Contains Z values- as Yes.
Within an ArcMap edit session, can create new 3D point features, problem is how to specify the elevation, z value, seems you can only use the Sketch tool to create
a 2D point.
Would be handy to create a 3D point by clicking on an elevation surface, that is the elevation at the location clicked on the TIN surface would be copied into the 3D
point geometry feature.
ArcGIS 9.0 and older software doesn't allow you to specify the Vertical Datum of the Z elevation points. Datum most often used is the North American Vertical
Datum of 1988 (NAVD88). So you must keep track what your elevations are based on.
See ArcGIS Desktop Help -> ArcCatalog -> Exploring the values in a table -> Creating new data sources from the values in a table

Event Tables
Layers created from tables containing location information in ArcMap.
Two fields that contain raw coordinates or raw measures that can be compared with existing feature classes.
Create event layer using the Add XY Data tool in ArcMap. Note an event layer behaves just like any other feature layer, can symbolize it, turn on/off, etc.

## Editing and Creating Features

Convert Graphics to Features (Shapefile)
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Converting between graphics and features
Graphics (points, lines, polygons, text) are created with the Drawing toolbar and stored in the Map Document
Features (points, lines, polygons, text) are created with the Editor toolbar and stored in databases (geodatabase, shapefile, coverage, ...)
Can convert graphics into features and vice versa (features into graphics) using ArcMap
Convert Features to Graphics
When converting features to graphic elements, all attributes of the feature are lost. Similar to rounding a number, no way to go back.
Step 2: convert features to graphics
Option A: right click on the data frame in the Table of Contents and choose Convert Features to Graphics...
Option B: right click on the layer in the Table of Contents and choose Convert Features to Graphics...
Reference: see Converting features into graphics from ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

140 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## ArcMap Edit Session

Method to create or edit point, polygon, or line features
Use the Editor Toolbar "Start Editing" and "Stop Editing" to begin and end an editing session
Create an Edit Sketch, upon saving becomes a normal feature (e.g. point, polygon, arc)
To create a line or polygon, you must first create a sketch
Saving the Map Document (.mxd) does NOT save the edits in the Edit Session. To save edits, using the Editor Toolbar -> Editor menus, choose Save Edits.
"For every feature on the map, there is an alternate form, a sketch. In the same way that you must create a sketch to create a feature, to modify a feature you must modify
its sketch." [Shaner 00, p.57]
Three Steps to edit/create features in ArcMap
1. Tool - used to draw edit sketches
Create New Feature (also known as the Sketch Tool). Double click the mouse to create the last vertex and finish the sketch. Context sensitive menu exists for
the Sketch Tool, just right mouse and will get options on placing vertices/segments specifically where you want them using x,y coordinates, length, and
angle.
Arc - used to draw true curves as opposed to curves that are a collection of very short line segments. [Ormsby 01, p. 381]
Distance-Distance - place a point at either of the two locations made by the intersection of two circles. "Suppose you want to create a pole feature. If you
don't have the exact coordinate location but know that it is at the intersection of 50 map units from the corner of one building and 70 map units from the
corner of another, you can use this tool to place the pointl" [ArcGIS Desktop Help -> Editing in ArcMap -> Creating new features -> Creating point features
and vertices]
Intersection - places a point at the location where two lines would cross if they extended far enough.
Trace - create features that follow the contours of selected lines or polygons

## see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Sketch Construction Tools

2. Task - what is the purpose of the edit sketch, is it to "Create New Feature", "Extend/Trim Features", "Reshape Feature", etc.
3. Target - what layer will the edit sketch apply to, in other words the target layer determines in which layer a new feature will belong.
Have the ability to undo mistakes using the Undo button on the Standard toolbar
Additional info, see ESRI Virtual Campus - Learning ArcGIS 9 module 5 of 8
Workflow for Creating Features in ArcMap
1. Start ArcMap, open a map document and add the geodatabase/shapefile you want to edit, add any reference data layers such as aerial photos.
2. Start an edit session (start editing) by right clicking layer in the Table of Contents and selecting Edit. Can then edit both spatial and tabular data. Can only edit in a single
data frame.
3. Choose a feature template and construction tool from the Create Features window. Feature templates define the information required to create features. Feature templates
are saved as part of the map document (.mxd). This information includes:
Layer where a feature will be stored
Symbology that will be used to represent the feature
Default attributes that will be assigned to a newly created feature
Default tool used to create the feature
4. Set up additional editing properties or options, such as snapping.
Topology toolbar - use to 1) create/build map topology for lines and polygons and 2) Topology Edit tool to move shared edges between features.
5. Create the new feature (such as by interactively digitizing it on the map)
6. Add or edit attributes of the feature.
7. Save edits and stop editing.

ArcMap Editing
ESRI ArcGIS 10 - Editing Tutorial
ESRI - Be More Productive with ArcGIS: Editing in ArcMap
Deleting Features in ArcMap
Must be in an ArcMap edit session
Deleting a feature is independent of the task that is set. For example, if the task is "Create New Features", a selected feature can still be deleted
Use either the "Edit Tool" on the Editor toolbar or the "Select Features" Tool on the Tools toolbar to select features interactively.
To delete a selected feature, click the "Delete" button on the Standard toolbar or press the Delete key on the keyboard.
Moving Feature using ArcMap

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

141 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Option 1: Dragging
Use the Edit tool to select the feature, then when the pointer turns into a four directional arrow, then can move the feature.
Hold down the ctrl key to move the selection anchor. This is only a temporary move, once you unselect the feature, the selection anchor will go back to the
default location.
Option 2: Specifying delta/change in x,y coordinates
Editor Toolbar -> Editor drop down menu -> Move (one or more feature(s) must be selected else the option will be dimmed/greyed out). Type in the X,Y
coordinates you want the feature shifted.
Coordinates are measured in map units.
Positive coordinates moves the feature north and east direction
Negative coordinates moves the feature south and west direction
Feature will snap to the selection anchor
Option 3: Rotating
Editor Toolbar -> Rotate Tool (circular arrow with a point in the center)
Rotates around the selection anchor (small blue x in the center of the selected feature) [Ormsby 00, p. 406]
Can move the selection anchor, just place the mouse over the anchor, then mouse icon will change into four small arrows surrounding a circle.
Hit "S" on the keyboard to add an Auxiliary/Second anchor point. Use to snap the rotating feature.
Hit "A" on the keyboard to specify an exact rotation in degrees. Positive number rotates the feature to the right, a negative number rotates the feature to the
left.
Can rotate annotation - use the "Edit Annotation" tool on the Advanced Editing toolbar. Once the feature is selected, use the rotate handles on the bottom
corners of the annotation.
"The snapping environment can also be used to move a feature to a precise location in relation to another feature. For example, you can move a parcel and have one
of its corners jump, or snap, precisely to a corner of another parcel. Simply move the parcel's selection anchor to its corner vertex after setting the appropriate
snapping properties. Then move the parcel toward its new location until the selection anchor snaps to the corner vertex of the other parcel." (see ArcGIS Desktop
9.3 Help - Using the snapping environment)
Copy and Paste Features
Use the copy and paste buttons from the Standard toolbar. (shortcut keys Ctrl-c and ctrl-v work, note feature might be copied on top of the other feature)
All features will be pasted into the Target Layer
The copy feature must be same type as in the target/paste layer. For example copy points to point, lines to lines, and polygons to polygons. Exception, can copy
polygon features into a line layer.
Attributes of the feature are not copied over, unless you are copying and pasting in the same layer.
Workaround is using the Attribute Transfer in the Spatial Adjustment Toolbar. See ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Transferring Attributes Between Features
Modify a Feature

Just like you need to create a sketch to create a feature, to modify a feature you must modify its sketch [Shaner 00, p. 21]
To view the sketch of a feature, click the "Edit Tool" then double click the feature. Alternate way, is to change the Task to "Modify Feature" then using the "Edit
Tool", select the feature.
Sketch is composed of vertices (where the sketch changes direction) and segments (lines that connect the vertices) [Shaner 00, p. 20].
Vertices are marked in green, with the last vertex added marked in red [Shaner 00, 21]
View Vertices
Currently ArcGIS doesn't have a feature to view vertices of all line segments. So you can snap to a vertice of an existing feature, just cannot see the vertice.
Can only see the vertices of the sketch you are editing.
Enhancement Request CQ00118609: Request option to display vertices of non-selected features
Right mouse on the sketch to bring up the Sketch Context Menu.
Insert a vertex
Delete a vertex
Move (relative, origin is the coordinate of the vertex)
Move To (absolute, origin is 0,0)
Sketch Properties - modify the coordinate values of a vertex. Open box symbol on the vertex implies it is selected in the sketch properties. Use to delete
several vertices at once. Can also alter the m- and z-values of the vertices [Shaner 00, p. 234]. When inserting vertices, added at the midpoint of the segment.
Hit the "F" key on the keyboard to enter a scale factor.
Scale - need to add the scale tool (Tools -> Customize -> Commands tab, Editor category, then drag the Scale command onto the Editor Toolbar. Feature is scaled
based on selection anchor (small black x near the selected feature).
Fillet
Part of the ArcMap Advanced Editing Tools: Editor -> More Editing Tools -> Advanced Editing: then click the Fillet Tool button on this tool bar.
To use the tool: 1) click one line, then 2) click the other line, 3) drag the mouse to change the size of the fillet radius and click to finalize.
Press the R key to set the fillet options. For example Trim existing segments, specify a fixed radius.
Use the Data Frame coordinate system units for the fillet radius. If want to use another unit, just add the abbreviation, for example 1 ft or 1 mi
km=Kilometer, m=meter, mm=millimeter, ft=international foot, ftUS=Survey foot, mi=mile, nm=nautical mile, ch=chain, yd=yard, rd=rod, lk=link, in=inch,
miUS=Survey mile, chUS=Survey chain, rdUS=Survey rod, lkUS=Survey link, ydUS=Survey yard
Not as robust as AutoCAD fillet: 1) cannot create a 0 "zero" radius fillet. 2) cannot create a fillet with a fixed radius on lines that don't intersect, 3) problems trying
to create fillet all four corners of a square.
See [ESRI Edit ArcMap 02, p. 84] or ArcGIS Desktop Help -> Editing in ArcMap -> Editing existing features -> Changing the properties of a sketch
Tangent Tool: available in version 8.3 or later. Can only use if you have a sketch selected. Will create a tangent arc based on the sketch selected. Found on the sketch tool
palette. Creates circular or true curves. Can right mouse click while creating a line to select the Tangent Tool option on the context sensitive menu.
Midpoint Tool: available in version 8.3 or later. Finds the midpoint between two existing features. Often used to create a centerline between a road casing (ROW). Found

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

142 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## on the sketch tool palette.

Endpoint Arc Tool: click two endpoints, then hit R to specify a radius or use the mouse to adjust the radius manually. Available in version 8.3 or later.
Extend Tool: Within an ArcMap edit session, select the feature you want your line to be extended to, click the Extend tool button on the Advanced editing options, then
click the feature you want extend. Available in version 8.3 or later.
Improve Speed of Editing
When working with large amounts of data, create an edit cache
ArcView can only edit personal geodatabases. If Edit Cache toolbar is dimmed out, problem might be your attempting to edit a non-geodatabase feature.
Creates a spatial bookmark automatically called Edit Cache
Zoom into area you want to edit, click the Build Edit Cache button on the Edit Cache toolbar. Features visible in current extent are held in memory locally.

Snapping Environment
Help establish exact locations in relation to other features
Editor Toolbar -> Editor menu -> Snapping
Snapping Tolerance- distance within which the pointer or a feature is snapped to another location
Snapping Properties- choose part of the feature, vertex, edge, or endpoint to which you want your new feature to snap to
Snapping Priority- snapping occurs first in the layer at the top of the list and then in each consecutive layer down the list
Snapping Rules- "lower portion of the dialog sets snapping rules that an edit sketch uses on itself. For example, to make sure that you completely close new polygons you
digitize, you would check the Edit sketch vertices check box." [Ormsby 01, p. 384]
From the ArcMap Editor toolbar: Editor -> Options -> General tab: check Show snap tips. Once done, ArcMap will display the layer name or target in a tooltip that it is
being snapped to.
To see the current snapping tolerance area, hold down the T key while using the Sketch Tool. A Green circle the size of your snapping tolerance will appear around your
mouse cursor. Helpful to hold down the T key and move your mouse around features you plan to snap to. See [ESRI Edit ArcMap 02, p. 107]
See ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Using the snapping environment
Snapping Properties Table

## How to Snap to the Midpoint of a Feature

Background: I'm trying to find the center section of a section of land (1 square mile). Using the sketch tool, how do I draw a line between the midpoint of the northerly
line to the midpoint of the southernly line?
Problem: midpoint is half the distance between two vertices. It is not the midpoint between two end points, which is what I expect end users want.
Step 0: start an edit session. Set the snapping environment for the feature you want to snap to. Turn on Show snap tips from the Editor Toolbar -> General tab.
Step 1: using the sketch tool from the Editor Toolbar, move your mouse over feature you want to snap to.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

143 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step 2: right click on the feature and select Snap To Feature -> Midpoint

Step 3: do the samething on the next feature by right clicking on the feature and choose Snap To Feature -> Midpoint

Step 4: click F2 on the keyboard or right click and choose Finish Sketch

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

144 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

ArcMap - need to right-click on the feature you want to snap to then choose Snap to Feature
AutoCAD OSNAP - object snapping is reverse from ArcMap, in AutoCAD you first select the OSNAP (e.g. Midpoint, Center, Intersection, ...) then select the
feature/object. ArcMap requires you select the feature first then select the snapping (e.g. Endpoint, Vertex, Midpoint, or Edge).
Notes - ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help Snapping to a specific feature. "Right-click the feature you want to snap to, point to Snap to Feature, and click either Endpoint, Vertex,
Midpoint, or Edge. This will place a vertex at the nearest location that matches your choice. If nothing happened, move the mouse pointer closer to the element you want
to snap to and try again."
How to Snap to the Intersection of two Features
Unforunately this cannot be done using ArcMap
AutoCAD has an Intersection Object Snap (OSNAP) setting which allows one snap to the intersection of two features/objects. ArcMap does NOT have such a setting, it
can snap to endpoint points and midpoints but not intersection to two features
Workaround - split the two features at the point of intersection
Step 0: start an edit session
Step 1: using the Advanced Editing Toolbar, click the Line Intersection tool
Step 2: click one feature line, then click the second feature line, finally press Enter on the keyboard to accept the edit
Step 3: use the Edit Tool button on the Editor Toolbar to select the intersecting lines, instead of 2 lines, you should have 4 seperate lines

reference: ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Splitting line features - then search for the heading - Splitting lines at intersections
also see Create a Point at the Intersection of two Features
How to Create an Offset of existing Feature Lines
Background - if you a legal description using aliquot parts instead of Bearning and Distances in a traverse, then the Offset command is handy to use.
Alternative is to use the Trace Tool with an Offset value, see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Trace Tool. Tip, use a negative distance value to offset the opposite side of the
selected line.
Step 0: Start an edit session
Step 1: Set the Target to a line layer
Step 2: Create a line on the line that is being offset offset

Step 3: Select the Offset line Tool from the COGO Toolbar

## Step 4: It will need two points to draw the offset.

For the first point, set "distance along" to 0 and "offset" to desired offset.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

145 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

For the second point, set "distance along" to the length of the line being offset (or any number, but extend/trim as needed later using the Extend/Trim Features Task on
the Editor Toolbar). Set "offset" to the same desired offset from the first point.

Tips
check the "reverse the selection direction" box to change the offset direction quickly
Use the Identify tool to obtain the length of the line.
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 help link: Creating lines with the Offset Line window
Creating Features from other Features
Copy Parallel Line Features
Creating Buffers
Mirroring Features
Merging Features from the same layer- only applies to lines or polygons. Merging nonadjacent features creates a multipart feature
Combining Features from different layers- features must be the same type. The new feature created in the current layer will have no attribute values.
Intersecting Features- creates a new feature from the area where features overlap. Layers must be the same type.
See ArcGIS Desktop Help -> Editing in ArcMap -> Creating features from other features
Creating Features using ArcMap
Make sure the Editor toolbar is on (View -> Toolbars -> Editor)
Traverse (open or closed). Assumptions - the ground is flat so all boundary measurements don't have an elevation.
Editor -> Options -> Units tab: Direction Type- Quadrant Bearing; Direction Units- Degrees Minutes Seconds
Editor -> More Editing Tools -> Advanced Editing then click the Traverse button
Start- either enter a coordinate for a starting point or select the point interactively on the map
Use Direction-Distance
Valid direction input formats for Bearing and degrees/minutes/seconds: 1) N dd-mm-ss.ss E, 2) N dd.mmssss E, or 3) N dd^mm'ss.ss" E
See Editing in ArcMap p. 91, 113 for diagram of Quadrant Bearing system and valid input formats for degrees/minutes/seconds
Undo - Ctrl Z to remove the last part of the sketch (not the entire sketch). To delete the sketch and start over, right mouse click for the Context Menu, select Delete
Sketch.

## ArcMap Editing Topologies

Topology Background
Features share geometry
Topology edges are line segments or polygon boundaries
Topology nodes are the points at the ends of the line segment
Example Applications of Topology
Polygon Topology
School Attendance Zones
Voting Districts
Watershed Basins
Line Topology
Street Centerline
Reference: ESRI ArcMap Editing Tutorial

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

146 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Map Topologies (shapefiles and non-topology geodatabases)

Can use ArcView, ArcEditor and ArcInfo to edit map topologies stored in a shapefile.
To Create Map Topology
Step 1: open the Topology Toolbar by right clicking on an existing toolbar and selecting Topology
Step 2: click the Map Topology button to open the Map Topology window. Select the shapefiles and/or feature classes that do not participate in a topology
geodatabase
Step 3: click the Topology Edit button. Now in the map display, select a feature (should change color)
Map Topologies - How to move a shared node
Step 0: setup
must be in an ArcMap edit session
Topology Toolbar must be visibile
Map Topology must be created
Step 1: select node
click the Topology Edit Tool button from the Topology Toolbar
Press and hold down the N key to limit the selectable topology elements to nodes only
click and drag a box around the map topology node you want to adjust
Step 2: move node

Geodatabase Topologies
Requires ArcEditor or ArcInfo license to edit geodatabase topologies

COGO
Legal Descriptions
Glossary of Deed Terms
Definition of Curves
Aliquot Descriptions
Legal Descriptions and Figures
Common COGO Workflows
Create Easement Layer from legal descriptions on a Parcel Layer
Traverse
Traverse Tool (ArcEditor and ArcInfo only)
To Load a traverse from a text file
Traverse - Closure Report
Adding and Populating COGO Fields in a Feature Class
How to split features in COGO Lines
How to Label COGO Line Features
Legal Descriptions
"The boundaries of metes descriptions are created by starting at a 'point of commencement' that may or may not be on the parcel that is being described, and then
proceeding by a single course or courses (bearing and distance) to a 'point of beginning' (POB) or 'true point of beginning' (TPOB), a point on the parcel that is being
described. It proceeds in either a clockwise or counterclockwise direction by courses, in a systematic manner encompassing a closed figure, always calling for a corner
point (monumented or unmonumented) at the termination of each course, and returning to the point of beginning." (Brown's Boundary Control and Legal Principles, 4th
Edition by Curtis M. Brown, Walter G. Robillard and Donald A. Wilson, page 99)
Point of Commencement vs. True Point of Beginning
According to Tomas Armijo with Clark County Development Services - Civil, Survey & Mapping, the use to true point of beginning is discouraged. Some legal
descriptions will call the point of commencement (POC) as the POB and then the POB as the TPOB.
"when the true point of beginning of the subject property is not yet established, it must depend upon a remote point of beginning which is already recognized. The
transition between the two is accomplished through several different combinations of words. The first part (from the recognized point) usually starts with just
'Beginning at' and after going through the necessary courses and distances, arrives at the 'True Point of Beginning,' after which the subject property is described and
the closing course must then return 'to the True Point of Beginning.' Some scriveners prefer to start the first part with 'Commencing at' and go to the Point of
Beginning' and return to the 'Point of Beginning.' There is no rule concerning this and the combination of words is immaterial so long as the distinction between the
two types of points is made clear." (Writing Legal Descriptions by Gurdon H. Wattles, p. 11.10)
"The basis of the bearings should be indicated. The basis can be a magnetic bearing, a true bearing derived from a Polaris observation or a solar observation, reference to
a geodetic triangulation station, a previous bearing from an adjacent tract, from a previous survey, assumed, astronomic, geodetic, or grid. But the basis of the bearings
must and should be indicated in the description." (Brown's Boundary Control and Legal Principles, 4th Edition by Curtis M. Brown, Walter G. Robillard and Donald A.
Wilson, page 99)
"Two mathematical elements of a curve are all that are needed, although three are usually quoted. Radius, central angle (delta), and curve length are more often used than
are chord, middle ordinate, tangent, degree of curvature, or external distance." (Evidence and Procedures for Boundary Location, 5th Edition by Walter G. Robillard,
Donald A. Wilson and Curtis M. Brown, page 447)
"To define a curve in a description, at least two elements of the curve must be stated, and in addition (1) the relationship of the curve to the previous line, (2) the direction
of the curve, and (3) the direction of travel of the curve must also be stated." (Brown's Boundary Control and Legal Principles, 4th Edition by Curtis M. Brown, Walter G.
Robillard and Donald A. Wilson, page 110)
"In description work, at least five elements are necessary to determine a curve:
1 and 2. The elements of dimension (R & L; etc.)
3. The direction of curvature (concave to SE; convex to W - convex rarely used).
4. The direction of extension (travel) along the curve (Ely; Sly).

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

147 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

5. The relation of the curve to the next preceding course (or curve) (tangent, compound, or radial bearing or beginning of curve, etc.).
Optional additions to the five elements may include one or more dimension elements (central angle or angle of arc, tangent, chord bearing and/or length, etc.); relation of
the curve to the next succeeding course or curve; any other data for clarity or interpretation. It is evident that the additions must be precisely consistent with the necessary
elements given.
In reciting such additions, name them in the order of intended superiority so that any inconsistency may be properly analyzed; for example: if length is recited prior to
central angle even though calculated therefrom, it will probably prevail over the angle, while if the angle is first stated, the weight of probability tends toward the angle."
(see Land Survey Descriptions by Wm. C. Wattles, 1956 p. 16)
"a radial bearing to or from the 'center of said curve' is a bearing of the radial line passing through the midpoint of the arc." (see Land Survey Descriptions by Wm. C.
Wattles, 1956 p. 16)
Problem, which of the two circles is being used with the radial bearing line and distance, see Definition of Radial Line
"Although the bearing of a radial line on a map may be shown in either direction (N 10 E, S 10 W), the description should always recite the proper direction
conformable with the context; the extension of a radial line is correctly from the center of the circle to the circumference." (see Land Survey Descriptions by Wm. C.
Wattles, 1956 p. 18)
"The bearings of radials (unless otherwise definitely stated) are expressed in a direction from the center of the circle to its circumference. The radial line stops at the
circumference of its circle. If you wish to follow a radial line beyond that, you must use the expression, 'along the prolongation of said radial line...'" (Writing Legal
Descriptions in Conjunction with Survey Boundary Control by Gurdon H. Wattles, page 4.26)
Glossary of Deed Terms
Concave - the inside of a curve; toward the center of the circle
"The concavity direction of a curve is that of the direction of the center of the circle of said curve from the mid-point of the arc described; a described segment of a
record curve may be concave to the Ease, while the whole of the record curve may be concave to the North. Fig. 5." (see Land Survey Descriptions by Wm. C.
Wattles, 1956 p. 17)
"...direction of the concavity of a curve which is based on the bearing of a line passing through the midpoint of the arc toward the center of that circle. If it is near
the bearing between two 'ly directions (e.g. norhterly, northeasterly, etc.) either one can be used or both can be expressed." (Writing Legal Descriptions in
Conjunction with Survey Boundary Control by Gurdon H. Wattles, page 4.11)
Radial or Radial Bearing - a radial line is any straight line extending from the center of a defined circle to the circle's circumference. A radial bearing is the direction of
a given radial line. On plats the word radial next to a bearing indicates that that line is radial from the center of the given circle.
The radial bearing line and distance will give you two circles which can intersect the point. Problem is most legal descriptions, unknown if the surveyor is
describing the arc by going from the center of circle to the circle's circumference or vise-versea from the circle's circumference to the center of the circle. Need
another piece of information about the arc which is the concave direction. With the concave direction, you can easily identify which of the two circles are being
used to define the arc in the legal description.
Radially or in other words at right angle to. "...distance is measured at right angles, or radially..." (Writing Legal Descriptions in Conjunction with Survey Boundary
Control by Gurdon H. Wattles, page 4.12)
ArcMap COGO Toolbar -> Curve -> Radial direction wants the radial bearings from the curve/circumference of the circle to center of the circle. So you might need
to enter the opposite bearing direction. For example, my legal description gives a bearing of N45-15-7E from the center of the circle/curve to the circumference of
the curve. When I enter this curve into ArcMap, I want to use bearing S45-15-7W.
Thence - from that place; the following course is continuous from the one before it.
Brown's Boundary Control and Legal Principles, 4th Edition by Curtis M. Brown, Walter G. Robillard and Donald A. Wilson, - Glossary of Deed Terms pages 374-400)
Definition of Curves

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

148 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

CHORD - also known as the Long Chord, LC. "is that segment of a straight line which is intersected by two points on a curve, or, in other words, the straight line distance
between the two ends of a segment of arc." (Writing Legal Descriptions in Conjunction with Survey Boundary Control by Gurdon H. Wattles, page 4.21)
Aliquot Descriptions
"...an aliquot description is a perfect description. According to federal law the least aliquot description available (or legal) is a quarter-quarter or one-sixteeth or 40 acres,
according to the GLO survey. Yet many individuals may describe a section as small as a 1/64 or 1/256 or even smaller. It must be remembered that these boundaries are
invisible and set by law as being a direct proportion, without a remainder." (see Brown's Boundary Control and Legal Principles, 4th Edition by Curtis M. Brown, Walter
G. Robillard and Donald A. Wilson, page 102)
Legal Description and Figure
"Thence from a tangent line bearing N 38 13' E, northeasterly 60.00 feet along a curve concave to the southeast having a radius of 100.00 feet to the beginning of a
reverse curve concave to the northwest having a radius of 60.00 feet; thence northeasterly 40.00 feet along said curve." (Writing Legal Descriptions in Conjunction with
Survey Boundary Control by Gurdon H. Wattles, p. 4.25)

WritingLegalDesc-Fig32a.dwg
"If the line previous to the curve had already been cited, it would be unnecessary to repeat the bearing because it would be properly assumed that the curve was tangent
unless otherwise stated."

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

149 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

"Thence from a tangent line bearing N 29 40' E, easterly 60.00 feet along a curve concave to the south having a radius of 60.00 feet to the cusp of a curve concave to the
southeast having a radius of 50.00 feet, to which point of cusp a radial of the last mentioned curve bears N 23 15' W; thence southwesterly 40.00 feet along said curve."
(Writing Legal Descriptions in Conjunction with Survey Boundary Control by Gurdon H. Wattles, p. 4.25)

WritingLegalDesc-Fig32b.dwg
Writing Legal Descriptions
"Your slogan should be, 'Concise Clarity Without Ambiguity.' Do not use time or space for superfluous words, but, on the other hand, do not omit words or phrases that
are necessary. Ask yourself the question 'Will the omission of these words change the meaning?' or 'Will the use of these additional words add to or subtract from the
actual meaning of the whole phrase?'" (Writing Legal Descriptions in Conjunction with Survey Boundary Control by Gurdon H. Wattles, p. 11.2-3)
Description of land by metes and bounds in a deed should always contain the following information in addition to the recital:
1. Point of commencement (POC). This is an established reference point such as a corner of the PLSS or National Spatial Reference System (NSRS) monument to
which the property description is tied or referenced. It serves as the starting point for the description.
2. Point of beginning (POB)
3. Definite Corners - provide a description of the point, for example a 1 inch iron pipe
Such corners are clearly defined points with coordinates if possible.
"The importance of permanent monuments to mark property is evident. In fact, some states require pipes, iron pins, and/or concrete markers set deep enough
to reach below the frost line at all property corners before surveys will be accepted for recording. Actually, almost any suitable marker could be called for as
a monument. A map attached to the description will contain a legend, which identifies all monuments." (Elementary Surveying, 13th Ediion by Ghilani and
Wolf, p. 636)
4. Lengths and directions of the property sides
5. Names of adjoining property owners
6. Areas
(Elementary Surveying, 12th Edition by Ghilani and Wolf, p. 625 or Elementary Surveying, 13th Edition by Ghilani and Wolf, p. 637)
Example Legal Description

## Reference the initial point meridian

"Being a portion of section 16, Township 22 South, Range 60 East, M.D.M, Clark County, Nevada, more particularly described as follows:"
Point of Commencement
"Starting at the point of commencement, which is a 1 inch iron pipe at the southwest corner said section, township and range;"
Point of Beginning
"thence north 8752'37" East, along the south line of said section, a distance of 387.62 feet to a 1 inch iron pipe at the point of beginning of this description;"
Lengths and directions of the property sides
"Thence continuing north 8452'4" east, a distance of 460.45 feet to an 1 inch iron pipe;

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

150 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

"thence north 544'38" west, a distance of 213.77 feet to an 1 inch iron pipe;
which is the beginning of a curve, concave southwesterly having a radius of 150.00 feet; thence northwesterly, 211.30 feet along said curve through a central angle
of 80.7123 to an 1 inch iron pipe;
thence north 86 27' 23" west, a distance of 302.16' to an 1 inch iron pipe;
thence south 0 36' 43" east, a distance of 407.29 feet to an 1 inch iron pipe which is the point of beginning."
Areas
said parcel containing 3.67 acres, more or less
side note, remember 1 acre = 43,560 ft2
Boundary Survey Examples by Vern Little with VTN
metes and bounds description for Golden 180 Access in Mohave County Arizona
metes and bounds description for Hawk Springs Road in Las Vegas Nevada
block and lot description for Northern Terrace at Providence - Unit 4 in Las Vegas NV
coordinate values description for Military Operations Area (MOA) Desert NV in Nevada
aliquot parts for Township 18 South and Range 64 East
Experts at Writing Legal Descriptions
Kay Adams, retired, former County Surveyor for Clark County. Contact Calvin Black (voice: 804-2020, email: cblack@gcwallace.com)
Common COGO Workflows
Creating the external boundaries of the parcels
Problem when attempting to use a polygon as the external boundary. Reason, the traverse typically beings at a known point which is not part of the boundary, so
when entering the COGO values in the traverse, will have a line which is just a measurement as part of the boundary. If you delete the dashed green commencement
line (also known as Dependent lines), the entire sketch will just move to the yellow point. See below image

"If you only want parcel polygons and aren't interested in the lines, you can use a construction line feature class and temporarily create your boundary lines. Then,
create your parcel polygons from those lines and subsequently delete the lines when you are done." (see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Common COGO Workflows)
To create a polygon feature from a traversed line feature, use the Topology Toolbar, click the Construct Features button. See ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Making
new features with topology tools (ArcInfo and ArcEditor only))
"An example of a custom build method would be to build an overlapping easement parcel from a single construction line drawn across an existing parcel."
(Generating parcels from construction lines)
References: ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Common COGO Workflows
Create Easement Layer from legal descriptions on a Parcel Layer
Occam's Razor - "All other things being equal, the simplest solution is the best"
Step 0: Layers Needed
Assessor Parcels
Assessor Subdivision Layer with hyperlink to PDF
Street Centerline - streets layer for street names
CCWRD - file geodatabase easement layer - polygon
CCWRD - file geodatabase easement layer - line
Step 1: ArcMap - create a subdivision parcel map layer. Have hyperlinks to the plat pdf. Then add this layer.
Step 2: Select Attributes - query based on Book Number and Page Number from the subdivision parcel layer.
Step 3: open the plat pdf and find the Commencing point. Then find this same point on the Assessor Parcels polygon layer.
Step 4: setup Snapping to the parcel layer
Step 5: start an edit session for the CCWRD easement line layer
Step 6: Using ArcMap COGO Toolbar (only available with ArcEditor or ArcInfo), enter the traverse.
Select the point commencement point using the mouse
Enter traverse bearing and distance
Save the traverse file
Finish the sketch
Step 7: using the Topology Toolbar, Construct Features button, create a polygon feature (CCWRD easement polygon layer) from the traversed line features (CCWRD

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

151 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## easement line layer)

Step 8: edit the CCWRD easement polygon layer, delete any commencing lines so your just left with the easement polygon
Step 9: move the easement polygon so it snaps to the parcel layer

Traverse

## Valid input formats

[NS] dd.dddd [EW] where the first letter is North or South (indicating meridian of origin), dd.dddd is the direction/angle (e.g. Quadrant Bearing), last letter is East
or West indicating the direction of the angle.
dd.dddd-[1234] where quadrants are number 1-NE, 2-SE, 3-SW, 4-NW
Additional help, see Setting direction measuring systems and units
To assign default units for the Direction Type and Direction Units, use the Editor Toolbar: Editor -> Options...
Direction Type: North Azimuth, South Azimuth, Polar, or Quadrant Bearing

## Traverse Tool (ArcEditor and ArcInfo only)

ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - An overview of COGO
"One common coordinate geometry editing task is to create a line or polygon edge using a set of survey measurements collected in the field. The data may be in the form
of directions and distances, angles and distances, curves, or tangent curves measured from a known point. These are collectively known as a traverse." (see Creating edit
sketch geometry with the Traverse tool)
To Save a traverse to a text file
Start an ArcMap edit session
set units (Editor -> Options... -> Units:
Direction Units: Degrees Minutes Seconds
click the Traverse icon from the Advanced Editing Toolbar (from Editor -> More Editing Tools)
enter traverse
right mouse click on Traverse window, select "Save Traverse..."
output is a traverse text file (.txt) which consists of several header lines describing the direction type and units, the start and end coordinates, and then subsequent
lines describe each course of the traverse
To Load a traverse from a text file
Start an ArcMap edit session
ensure the COGO toolbar is displayed (from Editor -> More Editing Tools -> COGO)
click the Traverse icon on the COGO toolbar

## right mouse click on Traverse window, select "Load Traverse..."

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

152 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## To view the traverse coordinates of a sketch

Start an ArcMap edit session
ensure the Advanced Editing toolbar is displayed (from Editor -> More Editing Tools)
click the Traverse icon
select a sketch by using the Edit Tool (black arrow head on the Editor Toolbar) and double click the sketch (vertices must be shown)
right mouse click on Traverse window (should be white, not gray), select "Load Traverse from Sketch"
Can create a traverse using a text editor, see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Traverse file format(ArcInfo and ArcEditor only) Example traverse text file (.txt) (note - must not
be spaces in the direction)
DT
DU
SP
DD
DD
DD
DD
DD
DD
DD

QB
DMS
840919.158 26696264.918
N0-8-36.0039E 659.02
N0-7-42.1997E 660.791
N0-8-3.7346E 659.319
N0-8-14.3889E 660.49
S89-48-13.0445W 2640.51
S0-7-33.0111E 2638.029
N89-50-17.0840E 2640.03

Notes: DT = Direction Type, QB = Quadrant Bearing, DU = Direction Units, DMS = Degrees Minutes Seconds, SP = Starting Point, DD = Direction-Distance

## Traverse - Closure Report

"Closure report lists the number of courses, total length of the traverse, the specified and calculated endpoints, the difference of misclosure in both x,y and directiondistance values, and relative error that is a ratio of the misclosure distance over the total length." (see ESRI ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Creating lines with the Traverse
window (ArcInfo and ArcEditor only) - section heading Obtaining a closure report
Check the Close Loop check box to set the ending point the same as the beginning point
Click the Closure button to open the Closure Report

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

153 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Adding and Populating COGO Fields in a Feature Class

Background
Used to add and maintain COGO descriptions in a feature class
COGO attributes only stored for a single straight line or a single curve known as a COGO line. If you enter a traverse which is more than one segment, then the
COGO attributes will not be stored in the line feature class. Solution is to use the Split Into COGO Lines button on the COGO toolbar.
COGO Fields can only be added in ArcCatalog
Step 0: Add Create COGO Fields button to ArcCatalog
Open ArcCatalog
Right click on Standard Toolbar and click Customize
Click the Commands tab
Search for Create COGO fields button which is under the Geodatabase tools Categories
Alternative is to type "Cogo Fields" in the Show box. Drag and drop the Create COGO Fields button onto any of the ArcCatalog toolbars
Step 1: select a Geodatabase (e.g. GIS Easements) and select line feature class (e.g. LinPOC2POB) then click the Create COGO Fields button [Before doing this close
ArcMap]. The default fields are
Direction
Distance
Delta
Tangent
ArcLength
Side
Step 2: assign units using Editor Toolbar, Options
Select Direction Type as Quadrant Bearing and Direction Units as Degrees Minutes Seconds.
The current direction type and angular units are used when populating the attributes. The current coordinate system linear units are used when populating distance
attributes.
Step 3: copy polygon features into line features
As COGO fields can only be created in a line feature class, will need to copy the polygon features created using the COGO tools into a Line feature class. To do
this, in the Editor section, set the target as to the polygon feature class (e.g. PolyEasements), right click this layer and click copy. Then deselect it, and set the target
to the Line feature class (e.g. LinPOC2POB) and select LinPOC2POB layer and paste it.
Step 4: click Update COGO Attributes on the COGO toolbar
ArcCatalog -> Create COGO Fields tool is used to add COGO fields to a feature class
Step 5: Split into COGO Lines
In the ArcMap edit session, set the target as the line feature class, then select the polyline to be split
Select the Split into COGO Lines tool from the COGO toolbar
Open the Attributes of line feature class (e.g. LinPOC2POB)
Can see each segment of the traverse has been split and can be selected separately.
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - How to add COGO Fields to a feature class
How to split features into COGO Lines
Background: if you Load Traverse from the Traverse window in COGO from a .txt file, it will load as one polyline. To explode the feature into smaller polylines, the
Split into COGO Lines command is handy to use

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

154 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Step 1: start an edit session

Step 2: set the target to a line layer
Step 3: select the polyline to be split and then select the Split into COGO Lines Tool from the COGO Toolbar

Note: the feature being split could be in a non-editable feature class such as a CAD dataset
References: ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help Splitting Features into COGO Lines
How to Label COGO Line Features
Background
Used to identify the separated COGO lines by labeling with their geometric properties such as direction, distance, radius, angle and arclength
Only works for Line Features which have 1) the COGO Fields added from ArcCatalog and 2) the COGO Fields populated using the Split into COGO Lines from
the COGO toolbar
Step 0: Setup Label Classes
Within ArcMap, right click on the COGO line feature class (e.g. linPOC2POB feature class) in the Table of Contents and select Properties -> Labels tab

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

155 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Create a line and curve class

Step 1: Setup SQL query for Label Classes
SQL Query for the line Label Class is "Radius" Is Null
SQL Query for the curve Label Class is "Radius" Is Not Null
Step 2: set line expression
select the Line class, Expression and write the following expression:
Step 3: set curve expression
select the curve class, Expression, Check Advance and write the following expression:

## Label Expression window should look like this

Using the VB Script labels, should be able to see the COGO line with bearing, radius and arc length
Find easements based on the parcel number
Carmax Auto Superstores West Coast, APN 163-11-101-011
Clark County Recorder - Search Page

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

156 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Carmax15ftDrainageEasement.pdf
Carmax50ftPedestrianEasement.pdf
Clark County Water Reclamation District - Easement19950802-00982.pdf
Clark County Recorder - Search Page with UserID= web and Password= qwerty
Document Type = E, Easement
Instrument# (15 digits, first 8 is the date and last 7 is an autonumber0 199508020000982 (is the same as 950802.00982)
http://recorder.co.clark.nv.us/oncoresecure/ShowDetails.aspx?id=2724093&direct=1
Search Assessor Records and Maps
Find the Assessor Plat as reference - Alexander Villas Estates, Tract 2, Plat Book 45, Page 35.
AlexanderVillasEstatesPlatBook45Page35.pdf
Creating an easement using ArcMap COGO Toolbar
1. Add the following GIS layers in ArcMap
Assessor Parcels
IndexGrids
Street Centerline (looking for Heller Drive)
2. recreate the Clark County Water Reclamation District - Easement19950802-00982.pdf - Easement #2
3. create a personal geodatabase, for example CCWRDeasements in ArcCatalog
4. create a polygon feature class with the name of polySEWER. Add a field called INSTRUMENT with a data type of long integer
5. create a line feature class with the name of linSewer. Also add a field called INSTRUMENT with a data type of long integer
6. In ArcCatalog, add COGO fields
see lecture notes on Adding and Populating COGO Fields in a Feature Class
ArcGIS Desktop Help 10 - Add COGO fields to the feature class
7. Start an edit session in ArcMap
8. turn on the COGO toolbar (right click on a blank area of the ArcMap toolbars and check COGO)
9. click the Traverse button on the COGO toolbar
10. click on the point of commencing (Southerly corner of Lot 13 in Block 5)
11. enter a bearing and distance, South 3553'37" East a distance of 13 feet
12. enter a bearing and distance, South 3553'37" East a distance of 12.5 feet
13. enter a bearing and distance, South 5406'23" West a distance of 15.97 feet
14. enter a bearing and distance, South 3553'37" East a distance of 2.5 feet
15. enter a bearing and distance, South 5406'23" West a distance of 20 feet
16. enter a bearing and distance, North 3553'37" West a distance of 15 feet
17. enter a bearing and distance, North 5406'23" East a distance of 35.97 feet

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

157 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Attribute Domains
Attribute domains are used to constrain the values allowed in any particular attribute for a table, feature class, or subtype. Each feature class or table has a set of attribute
domains that apply to different attributes and/or subtypes. These attribute domains can be shared across geodatabase feature classes and tables." (see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3
Help - Attribute domains)
"Attribute domains are a rule that describes the legal values of a field type." [MacDonald 01, p. 130]
Only apply to Geodatabases, not Shapefiles or Coverages
When you export a Geodatabase feature class to shapefile, the attribute domain is removed from the new shapefile. In other words, say you have a coded value attribute
domain with code=POB and description=Point of Beginning. Within ArcMap Editing you will have the option to choose Point of Beginning but when you export the
feature class, the field will only have the code value POB
HowTo: Export a feature class to a shapefile that contains domain descriptions instead of domain codes - ESRI Article ID 30530
"My name is Joe and I have taken ownership of incident #705866. It is not possible to export a feature class to a shapefile and the shapefile retain the coded domain
that you created in the geodatabase. Domains are not supported in shapefiles and have to be created in a geodatabase and not the specific dataset itself.
There is a way to get around this by exporting the domains to a table using the Domain To Table tool, then joining the domain table back to the source feature class.
Export the joined feature class and table to a shapefile.
The explaination and steps for the workaround are reported in a technical article for which I have provided the link below. Review this article and use this to export
your domains in a shapefile. If you need anything else you can reply to this email or you can give me a call with the number below and use the incident number to
get through to me.
http://support.esri.com/index.cfm?fa=knowledgebase.techArticles.articleShow&d=30530
Regards,
Joseph B."
Exporting feature datasets, classes and tables with the Export XML Workspace Document wizard will preserve the attribute domain. See ArcGIS Desktop Help 9.3
Exporting feature datasets, classes and tables to an export file (ArcInfo or ArcEditor only)
Domains are defined in the Geodatabase, then assigned to a field in the feature class
GDB_Domains is the name of the table in the geodatabase. Table contains ID number for each domain in the geodatabase, its name, the type of domain it is (range or
coded), description, field type it applies to, and if split and merge rules have been defined.
Define Domain: ArcCatalog -> right mouse click on geodatabase -> Properties: Domains tab
Add attribute values to the fields in ArcMap.
Attribute domains can be associated with multiple fields of the same table, feature class, or subtype, and can be associated with multiple fields in multiple tables and
feature classes.
Each domain has a name, description and specific attribute type which it can apply to.
Edit attributes from the Layer Attribute Table or from the Editor Toolbar -> Attributes button
Cannot change the domain assigned to the feature class field
Don't recommend doing a domain on street names, to big
You can modify the values for a coded value domain and the valid range for a range domain while that domain is referenced by a table or feature class in the geodatabase.
ESRI Article ID 18459
Cannot rename a domain once assigned to a feature class, see ESRI Article ID 18459
Two types of Attribute Domains

Range Domains
Specifies valid range of values for a numeric attribute
Coded Value Domains
Specifies a coded value that can be applied to any type of attribute-text, numeric, date, and so on.
Includes both the actual value that is stored in the database (for example, 1 for pavement) and a more user- friendly description of what that value actually
means. See ArcGIS Desktop Help -> Geodatabases -> Subtypes and attribute domains -> Attribute domains
Provide quick attribute editing
ArcMap gives a dropdown list of permissible values to choose from
Editor -> Validate Features... to ensure attributes are correctly added in field. Validating features also validates any geometric network connectivity rules or
relationship rules that may be defined for the feature class. See [ESRI Edit ArcMap 02, p. 294]
use ArcToolbox to Create Domains, Add Coded Values to Domains and Assign a Domain to a Field

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

158 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## See [ESRI Edit ArcMap 02, p. 293]

Procedure to import domain values from a stand alone Microsoft Access table into a geodatabase. See ESRI Article ID 21215
Need To Research
Unknown how to copy an attribute domain from one geodatabase to another
How do you import a list into the attribute domain
Creating Attribute Domains in ArcCatalog
Step 0: using ArcCatalog either create or open a geodatabase and feature class
Step 1: Domains are defined at the geodatabase level, so right the geodatabase in ArcCatalog and select Properties
Step 2: under the Domains tab, enter the Domain name, description, type (coded values or range values) and values

Step 3: Assign the domain to one of the fields in the feature class by right clicking on the feature class name and selecting Properties...
Step 4: under the Fields tab, select the field name you want to assign an attribute domain. Then with the Field selected, under Field Properties click to the right of
Domain. Should have the ability to assign the attribute domain.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

159 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step 5: check if it works. Start an edit session, add a new feature, then when editing the attributes, you should have a drop down box of the description values instead of
the coded values from the attribute domain
see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Creating new attribute domains
Subtypes
Applied to the feature class, not the geodatabase
Create subtypes in ArcCatalog, geodatabase properties, subtypes tab
Subtype field must be a long or short integer
Balance between creating another feature class or use subtypes
Use Subtypes when you want features to have different domains, default values, connectivity rules and relationship rules
Create another feature class when you want to distingush the features by different behaviors, attributes, fields, access privileges, or whether the features are
multiversioned
See ArcGIS Desktop Help -> Geodatabases -> Subtypes and attribute domains -> Creating subtypes

Creating Points
Import the points
Creating Point Layer from x,y values in a table using ArcCatalog
Add x,y coordinate data to ArcMap
Create x,y,z features in ArcCatalog
Creating Point Features from Polygon Centroid Features
Create points interactively by typing in the xy coordinates
Point Feature
Multipoint Feature
See ArcGIS Desktop Help -> ArcMap -> Editing in ArcMap -> Creating new features -> Creating point features and vertices -> Creating a multipoint feature or
Creating point features and vertices
Create a Point at the Intersection of two Features
Convert XY events to point shapefile/geodatabase
Right click on the layer produced by XY Event table, Click Data -> Export Data
3D points
In ArcCatalog, create a new personal geodatabase
Create a new data feature and ensure to toggle on the coordinates include Z values.
Add the data feature in ArcMap
Edit 3D points in edit session
See ArcGIS Desktop Help -> Extensions -> 3D Analysis -> Creating 3D feature data
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help Editing features that have z-values
Create a Point at the Intersection of two Features
Step 0: start an edit session
Step 1: set the Target to a point layer
Step 2: select the Intersection Tool from the Editor Toolbar

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

160 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step 3: select one line, then select the second line. A point should have been created at the intersection of these two lines
Reference: ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Creating point features and vertices and The sketch construction tools
also see How to Snap to the Intersection of two Features
ArcMap Editing using Field Calculator
Allows editing of a feature class (annotation, point, polygon or line) outside an edit session in ArcMap and in the table window (i.e. attribute table)
Edits apply to the selected records
Open the feature class attribute table, then right click the field you want to edit and choose Field Calculator

## Reasons the Field Calculator might be disabled

ESRI Article ID 31807 How to use VBA functions in the field calculator
The Field Calculator Unleashed by Tom Neer, EDAW, Inc. ArcUser April-June 2005.
VBA functions in Field Calculator
How to replace one value for another within a field (see ESRI Article ID 20119)
replace([FieldName],"Old value", "New value")

## Always need End If when using If Then statements

Use double quotes when calculating strings (see How to make field calculation)
Example VBA script
Dim x as string
x = "PL"
x = "SV"
x = "MI"

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

161 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

x = "MM"
ELSE
END IF

## VBScript String Constants: vbNewLine, vbNullChar and vbNullString

Dim s as String
If [ADTYPEWEB] = " " Then
s = vbNullString
Else
End If

## Example of how to test for a Null value in a field

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

162 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Dim x as string
If IsNull([PARCEL]) Then
x = [APN]
Else
x = Left( [APN] , 8) & "000"
End If
How to add a double to a string value
Use the VBScript Chr() Function
Chr(34) is the double quote symbol "
Using Field Calculator in ArcMap

## Calculating Attribute Values

Used to assign attribute values to a field in the feature class/shapefile/coverage or stand alone table
Once calculated, cannot undo changes outside a ArcMap edit session
ArcMap TOC -> right mouse click on layer and select Open Attribute Table -> right mouse click on a field and select Calculate Values...
Will get the following warning message: "You are about to do a calculate outside of an edit session. This method is faster than calculating in an edit session, but there is
no way to undo your results once the calucation begins. Do you wish to continue? click yes
VBA Code
if [score] > 90 then
var = "A"
else
var = "F"
end if
Then enter var into the bottom box. This is the value that will be assigned to field, which may vary from record to record.

## Preparing data for analysis

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

163 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Creating Graphs
Used to complement a map by presenting information about the feature's attributes
can be 2D or 3D
Graph Types [ArcMap Desktop Help- Types of graphs]
Line - show trends in value along a continuous scale. Line graphs display data as lines or as a series of points connected by lines. [ESRI Virtual Campus, Learning
ArcGIS, Part II, Module 5, Lesson 1 Working with graphs and images]
Polar - basically a line graph drawn on a circular grid. Used in mathematical and statistical applications
Area - like line graph but areas between X-axis and plot lines is shaded. The shading gives greater emphasis to differences in quantities. Shows the difference in
quantities.
Bar and Column - use to compare amounts or show trends, e.g. monthly sales figures. "Real strength is displaying discrete numeric data" [ESRI Virtual Campus,
Learning ArcGIS, Part II, Module 5, Lesson 1 Working with graphs and images]
Scatter - used to identify patterns between values
Bubble - similar to scattered, by addition attribute can be display via the size of the bubble
High-Low-Close - range of values plotted as a vertical bar, e.g. air quality readings over a period of time.
Pie - used to show proportions, ratios, and percentages. Can only show one attribute at a time for several records or several attributes for a single record. To show
time or a series, will need to use multiple pie charts. Can highlight a pie slice by "exploding" it-moving it slightly away from the center.
to create: Tools -> Graphs -> Create
to add an graph to the layout, right-click the title bar of the graph window and click Show on Layout. This will create a dynamic graph that is automatically updated as the
features are changed. Make sure Reload Automatically is checked.
Use copy and paste to create a static graph on the layout
Can insert an excel chart in ArcMap, see Article Number 20330
Images such as logos, inset maps or background images can be added to graphs. "Inserting background images requires that you know the final production dimensions so
you can place the images in the exact location on the graph or report. The background image format must be a Windows bitmap (.bmp extension) with color depth set to
256 colors. Images added to graphs are referenced and are not stored permanently with the graph. (See ESRI virtual Campus Learn ArcGIS 8, Part II, Module 5)
Exporting Data
Create a new layer based on a selection set
Option 1: right mouse click on the layer name in the TOC, select Data -> Export Data... In the export dropdown, click Selected Features. Output data type option:
Shapefile, coverage (with ArcEditor or ArcInfo), or geodatabase.
Option 2: to create a new layer from the selected features, right-click the layer, point to Selection, and click "Create Layer From Selected Features". Note this just a
virtual layer (not a permanent dataset) but can still symbolize, query and perform analysis on it.
Similar to Google Earth Save Places As which exports to .kmz
Reference: ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Exporting Features
Also will be covered in Chapter 11 [Ormsby 01]

## Exporting Data - Layer/Map to KML

Background
Used to convert point, polygon, or line features to KML. Then can easily be displayed in Google Earth
Note: Google Earth Pro 5.0 will only recognize elevations in units of meters.
Note: ArcToolbox - Layer To KML will NOT do a data conversion on the elevation. So, if your 3D point layer has an elevation with units of feet, ArcToolbox will
just pass those values to the KML file without declaring what the units are (remember Earth only recognizes elevations of meters so it wouldn't know what to do
with the units anyway), then when the KML is opened in Google Earth, the points will appear to float in the air because Google Earth thinks the points are in units
of meters (not feet). Solution is to do the vertical adjustment in the spreadsheet prior to importing into ArcCatalog and converting to KML
Command Line:
LayerToKML_conversion sclcity_p D:\test.kmz 1

## ArcToolBox: Conversion Tools -> To KML -> Layer To KML

LayerToKML can only convert one GIS layer to a KML. If you want to convert several layers to KML, which is how Google Earth works, you need to use the Map to
Transparency of the GIS layer is preserved in the output KML file
Features Labels are not preserved in the output KML file
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Layer to KML (Conversion)
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Map to KML (Conversion)

ModelBuilder
Within ArcToolbox, just right-click on a blank area and select Add Toolbox...
How to Running a Model
Running only the ready-to-run processes - click the Model menu and click Run
Running all processes - click the Model menu and click Run Entire Model
Running a single process - right click the tool and choose Run
Process

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

164 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Process is a combination of elements

Element States
Not ready to run - Elements are colored white
Ready to run - Elements are symbolized in color
Input/Project Data (e.g. shapefile, geodatabase feature class, ...) - blue
Tool Elements - yellow
Output Data - green
Has been run - Elements look the same as "Ready to run" except they are displayed with a drop shadow, indicating the process has run
.tbx is the Geoprocessing script
How to share .tbx
How do you embed a .tbx in a geodatabase (.mbd)? See Sharing your geoprocessing work
Using ArcToolbox: right click the geodatabase (.mdb) -> New -> Toolbox (this is just a container, not the tools themselves). Then add the tools, models, etc
to the embedded toolbox. The toolbox will be included in the geodatabase so distribution is easy.
How do you use a .tbx in a geodatabase?
Using ArcMap: open ArcToolbox, right click within ArcToolbox and select Add Toolbox. Navigate to within the personal geodatabase, select the toolbox and
click open. This will add the toolbox which is stored in within the .mdb to be available for use in ArcMap.
Using ArcCatalog: navigate to the workspace which contains the .mdb and expand the geodatabase. At this point, the toolbox will display and is available for
use.
Where are my toolboxes and models created and stored (see ESRI Article ID 27406). Default location can be changed using Tools -> Options. The default is
C:\Documents and Settings\\Application Data\ESRI\ArcToolbox\My Toolboxes
Virtual Campus Course - Geoprocessing with ArcGIS Desktop
Instructor Led Training - Advanced Analysis with ArcGIS
Training Seminars and Workshops (Recorded Seminars) Geoprocessing Using ModelBuilder
Writing Geoprocessing Scripts with Python by Jeff Bigos
Python Tips for Writing Geoprocessing Scripts
Learning Python by Mark Lutz
Core Python by Wesley J. Chun
Dive Into Python by Mark Pilgrim
ArcGIS Geoprocessing: Python Scripting - Advanced Techniques by Nathan Warmerdam, Presentation given at the ESRI 2009 Developer Summit
Google Code University - Understanding Python video by Thomas Wouters
Reference Materials
ArcGIS 9 Documentation - Geoprocessing in ArcGIS, ISBN 1-58948-092-9
ArcGIS 9 - Writing Geoprocessiong Scripts with ArcGIS (download pdf from ESRI or UNLV)
Geoprocessing Data Types of Parameters and Environments
ArcGIS 9 Geoprocessing in ArcGIS Tutorial
PDF Poster of the ArcGIS 9 Geoprocessing Overlay and Extract Tools (Intersect, SymDiff, Union, Clip, Erase, Identity, and Update).
Reference guide is designed to provide an easy and quick reference for those wanting to use the ESRI command language at the ArcGIS command line and for those
writing scripts, see ArcGIS 9: Geoprocessing Commands Quick Reference Guide
Geoprocessor Programming Model for ArcGIS 9.2 pdf
ESRI Instruction Series Podcasts - Using Geoprocessing Tools for Cartographic Representation - MP3

Geoprocessing in ArcGIS
Introduction to Geoprocessing
Used to automate GIS tasks and analysis
geoprocessing is the linking/chaining of individual tools together to create a custom process
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help Geoprocessing and Analysis
Geoprocessing Quick Guide
Geoprocessing Wizard
ESRI Article ID 29723 - HowTo: Access geoprocessing tools easily since the Geoprocessing Wizard has been removed in ArcGIS 9.x
Dissolve features based on an attribute (see notes from last week)
ArcToolbox -> Coverage Tools -> Data Management -> Generalization -> Dissolve
Merge layers together
Clipping features in a layer (see notes from last week)
ArcToolbox -> Analysis Tools -> Extract -> Clip
Intersect two layers (type of Overlay)
ArcToolbox -> Analysis Tools -> Overlay -> Intersect (for Geodatabase)
ArcToolbox -> Coverage Tools -> Analysis -> Overlay -> Intersect (for Coverages)
Union two layers (type of Overlay)
ArcToolbox -> Analysis Tools -> Overlay -> Union Tool

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

165 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

see ESRI Support Article ID 29723 HowTo: Access geoprocessing tools in ArcGIS 9.x in lieu of the Geoprocessing Wizard

## Geoprocessing Menu Analyzing Spatial Data

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

166 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Buffer
Used to draw boundaries at a specific distance around other features
Can buffer points, lines, polygons, or graphics (see Discussion on Chapter 18 [Ormsby 01, p. 482] for more information on graphics)
Buffer Types
Constant Distance
Variable Distance
Multiple Rings
Dissolve Barriers
Need to specify distance units used by the buffer command
Buffer Tools
Buffer Wizard
ArcMap 10: Customize menu Customize Mode Commands tab Tools category Buffer Wizard drag on a toolbar
ArcMap 9: Tools -> Customize: Commands tab, Tools Category, drag and drop Buffer Wizard onto desired toolbar
Pros: very easy to use
Cons: all buffers must have the same distance

Multiple Ring Buffer Tool (ArcToolbox -> Analysis Tools -> Proximity -> Multiple Ring Buffer)
Pros: allows buffer ring size to vary
Cons: must supply a distance for each buffer, tool appears to have bugs
Buffer (ArcToolbox -> Analysis Tools -> Proximity -> Buffer)
Buffer Applications
Zone changes ( Conforming Zone Boundary Amendment): 750 ft radius notice.
Maps showing walking distance to bus stops
Identify parcels adjacent to your planned project. Clark County will use Special Improvement Districts (SID) to generate revenue to pay for roadway improvements (e.g.
sidewalks, storm drains, additional driving lanes, and so on). A lien is placed on the property until the improvement is paid off. The Regional Transportation Commission
(RTC) usually picks up 90% of the bill.
Vignettes
Vignette

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

167 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

a picture that shades off gradually into the surrounding paper (see Webster Dictionary) pronounce as (Vin'yet)
Used to accentuate a feature, for example a coastline or island. A vignette consists of a series of bands, each brighter than the next, emanating from a feature. (See ESRI
Article Number: 17492)
Vector and Raster methods to create vignette, see ESRI Whitepaper
To make a gradient from light blue to dark blue, select the layer properties -> Symbology tab -> Color Ramp. If gradient is going in the wrong direction, just select all the
symbols, right mouse click and select Flip Symbols.
To preserve work on vignette, right mouse click on layer name in TOC of ArcMap, select option Save As Layer File... this will create a .lyr file which stores the ArcMap
settings, not the actual data itself.
Of course the best solution is to have water depth measurements (also known as bathymetry) and shade the water based on this attribute. See Dr. Mark Rudin's work on
Geoprocessing Wizard
Dissolve features based on an attribute (see notes from last week)
ArcToolbox -> Coverage Tools -> Data Management -> Generalization -> Dissolve
Merge layers together
Clipping features in a layer (see notes from last week)
ArcToolbox -> Analysis Tools -> Extract -> Clip
Intersect two layers (type of Overlay)
ArcToolbox -> Analysis Tools -> Overlay -> Intersect (for Geodatabase)
ArcToolbox -> Coverage Tools -> Analysis -> Overlay -> Intersect (for Coverages)
Union two layers (type of Overlay)
ArcToolbox -> Analysis Tools -> Overlay -> Union Tool
Used to combine two or more adjacent layers into one larger layer that contains all their features
Layers must be the same type: polygon to polygon, points to points, lines to lines. Cannot merge a polygon layer with a point layer.
Can merge layers that overlap, however features are just appended into the output layer. For example, when selecting a polygon that overlaps another and they have been
merged, will select both polygons. Reason is both polygons exists separately in the layer.
Merge is order dependent: feature on top in TOC will be drawn on bottom when merging
"Use fields"- click the layer containing the fields you want to maintain. "If the layers merged to this layer have the same fields, the attributes will be copied to the new
layer. If a merged layer contains an extra field, it will be dropped. Also, if a merged layer is missing a field, the field value for features in that layer will be null." [ArcGIS
Desktop Help -> ArcMap -> Querying maps -> Merging layers -> How to merge layers]
Example: Merge Clark County Public Works Easement shapefile ( metadata) with the Clark County Assessor Parcel shapefile (pl16222.shp, pl16222.dbf, pl16222.shx,
pe162.shp, pe162.shx, pe162.dbf, show overlapping features (should have 2 features identified, click in left pane window to flash the feature)
With version 8.3, have the ability to select which feature will have its attributes tranferred into the newly created merge polygon. The list will show the primary display
field, to help identify the desired polygon.
Clipping Layers
Trim features in one layer at the boundaries of features in another layer
Input feature/layer can be Polygons, Lines, or Points
Clip feature/layer can only be Polygons
"The attributes of the features in the output feature class are the same as those of the features in the feature class being clipped. Unlike the Intersect and Union
geoprocessing operations, the attributes of the two inputs are not combined." (ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - How Clip (Analysis) works)
Attributes of the two features are not combined. The output feature will have the same fields as in the clipped (not cookie cutter) feature.
Use a polygon feature as a 'cookie cutter' to create a smaller subset of another feature (e.g. points, polygons, or lines). The cookie cutter can be a selection set ('Use
selected features only') or a separate layer.
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Clip (Analysis)
Overlays
Superimpose one map feature over another to create a new map feature that has the attributes of both input layers, see [Ormsby 01, p. 306]
Intersect
Only Common Areas are included in output
The resulting output layer has the combined attribute data of the features in the two input layers, only contains features that fall within the spatial extent of
the overlay polygons.
Think of the overlay polygon as a stamp. It stamps its attributes on the underlying line/polygon features.
Use Join command in ArcMap to stamp polygon attributes onto a point feature
Polygon layer can overlay another polygon layer or a line layer.
Can use a selected set in either or both layers to perform overlay analysis on
Output projection of the intersected feature will be the same as the data frame's projection. In efforts to reduce errors, recommend both features have the same
projection.
Output is a geodatabase, then area and length items will automatically be updated.
If output is a shapefile, will need to update area and length fields (see ArcGIS Desktop Help -> ArcMap -> Working with tables -> Making field calculations).
Basically you open the attribute table of the layer, right mouse click on field to update, click Calculate Values, check Advanced and add the following VBA
statements:
Dim dblArea as double
Dim pArea as IArea
Set pArea = [shape]
dblArea = pArea.area
then type variable dblArea in the text box directly under the area field name.
See ArcGIS Desktop Help -> ArcMap -> Querying maps -> Intersecting features from two layers
From the ArcMap Menu bar: Tools -> GeoProcessing Wizard: Intersect two layers

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

168 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Union
Both input layers must be polygons
Total Area of both input features are included in output
Extend of both map features are included/combined in output feature.
Resulting output layer from a union of two polygon features has the combined attribute data of the polygons in the two inputs and contains all the polygons from
the inputs, whether or not they overlap (see ArcGIS Desktop Help -> ArcMap -> Querying maps -> Unioning features from two layers)
Can use a selected set in either or both layers to perform overlay analysis on
From the ArcMap Menu bar: Tools -> GeoProcessing Wizard: Union two layers.
Dissolving Features
Process of summarizing/creating a new polygon feature based on the joining of different polygon features, that share a boundary and have the same attribute value,
together.
Typically dissolve features based on a field value (e.g. zipcode, dissolve all parcel polygons based on zipcode)
Can dissolve based on a features selection set. Helpful if you don't want to dissolve the entire feature class.
Within ArcMap: ArcToolbox -> Data Management Tools -> Generalization -> Dissolve
Output shapefile or feature class will only have the dissolve field, necessary internal fields, and any summarize attributes.
Using the Township, Range, Section (clarktrs_p in the IndexGrids.mdb)data, can create a map display that only shows the Assessor Books (i.e. full Township and Range,
no section boundaries). Note the sections have a layout of alternative lines in opposite directions (as from left to right and from right to left) which is known as
boustrophedon (bou'stro'phe'don)
Dissolve can create multipart features, e.g. several polygon features but only one record in the database. Try doing a dissolve on the Township, Range, Section layer
based on Section field.
Known issues when trying to buffer a multipart feature, see ESRI Article ID 22007

Spatial Analyst
How do I create elevation contours to display in Google Earth?
2. Unzip/Extract DEMs
3. View DEMs in ESRI ArcMap
4. Mosaic DEMs
5. Clip DEMs
6. Smooth DEMs
7. Create Contours
8. Symbolize Major and Minor Contours
9. Label Contours
10. Export Contours to KML
11. View Contours in Google Earth
visit www.usgs.gov
Area of Interest - Nevada - Clark County

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

169 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## file size is about 350MB each

Unzip/extract the files, will create a folder like n37w116 and an ArcGrid name like grdn37w116_13
2. View DEMs in ESRI ArcMap

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

170 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## NED FAQ - National Elevation Dataset - USGS

Recommend NOT building pyramids as it takes about 30 minutes to build a mosaic raster of Clark County with pyramid DEMs

3. Mosaic multiple DEMs into a single DEM using ESRI Spatial Analyst
ArcMap 10
Mosaic only takes a minute to complete if the DEMs don't have pyramids

## 4. Clip DEMs to project boundary

zoom to the limits of the project in ArcMap. This extent will be used to clip the raster.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

171 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

export to TIFF
5. Smooth the Raster Image
"The easiest smoothing approach would be to preprocess the input raster with the Focal Statistics tool, using the Mean statistic." (ArcGIS Resource Center Desktop 10 - How Contouring Works
6. Create contours at 25 ft intervals
7. Create Major (100ft-black) and Minor (25ft-gray) contour symbol
8. Label contours - doesn't show up Google Earth, in the exported KML
ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 - Labeling using the Contour Placement Style
9. Export to KML
Select State = Nevada and County = Clark
Download these 4 files, ESRI ArcGRID format, Geographic Coordinates, Decimal Degrees, NAD83, NAVD88 with elevation unit of Meters
n36w115arcgrid.zip
n36w116arcgrid.zip
n37w115arcgrid.zip
n37w116arcgrid.zip
NED available in ArcGIS and GridFloat formats only

A. USGS NED 10 meter DEMs for Clark County NV, downloaded from the USDS NRCS data gateway
B. click the Order by County/Counties link

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

172 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## E. ftp delivery format

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

173 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

F. wait for email and download zip file of the DEMs via ftp

## Geospatial Data Gateway - FTP timeout issues

G. Projection Info
Projection is UTM Zone 11
Horizontal and Vertical Units: meters
Image format: ArcInfo ESRI GRID, data type: floating point
Step 2. ArcToolbox - Mosaic to New Raster (Data Management)
ArcMap 10
Mosaic only takes a minute to complete if the DEMs don't have pyramids

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

174 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

ArcMap 9
Takes about 10 minutes of processing time to mosaic the DEMs the makeup Clark County

## Step 3. Project Raster to Stateplane Coordinates

Takes about 15 minutes of processing time to reproject the DEMs from LatLong to StatePlane

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

175 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Step 4. Convert Z units from Meters to Feet

Takes about 2-3 minutes of processing time
(Optional) unit conversion from meters to feet
ArcToolbox Spatial Analyst Tools Map Algebra Raster Calculator
Map Algebra
1 meter = 3.2808 feet

## ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 Contour (3D Analyst)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

176 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Using Spatial Analyst in ArcMap to create an elevation relief

1. Spatial Analyst setup
Can use either Spatial Analyst or 3D Analyst, which are separate extensions to ArcMap, to create a shaded relief
Need 3 things to run the extension: 1) install the software, 2) turn on the extension: Tools -> Extensions -> check Spatial Analyst, and 3) turn on the toolbar:
View -> Toolbars -> Spatial Analyst
See [Ormsby 01, p. 115-125] for discuss on symbolizing raster images. Recommend using the ArcMap Color Ramp Elevation #1 for Shaded Reliefs (to see
the name of the color ramp, right mouse click on the shading and toggle off Graphic View). Sample grids: c:\GTKArcGIS\Chapter05\Data\afhorndem and
c:\GTLArcGIS\Chapter05\Data\afhornshd
2. Custom ArcMap Color Ramp for Shaded Reliefs - jjensen.style. Can install from any location, I keep mine with the other styles that ship with ArcMap (c:\arcgis
\arcexe83\bin\Styles\). To install in ArcMap: Tools -> Styles -> Style Manager... then click the Styles drop down menu. On the very bottom is Add... When you
reopen ArcMap this custom style will be missing so to make it permanent, copy the style into your custom styles (c:\documents and settings\jjensen\Application
Data\ESRI\ArcMap\jjensen.style)
3. Add DEM (e.g. use Clark Clark DEM projected in stateplane coordinates, ccdemspcszft.tif) to ArcMap. Use above Color Ramp to symbolize.

From the Spatial Analyst Toolbar: Surface Analyst -> Hillshade... (recommend using ccdemspcszft.tif)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

177 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Can use Solar Position and Intensity (SOLPOS) website to determine the Azimuth Angle (i.e. angular direction of the Sun) and Altitude angle of the sun in
Las Vegas NV is: (lat=36 degrees north, long=115 degrees west). US Pacific Time Zone is -8:00 (U (GMT - 8:00). Elevation is around 600meters or 2000ft.
Azimuth angle is given from south, so -45 degrees is the same as 180 + 45 = 225 degrees from the North, this is the value the Hillshade command wants. The
Sun angle (altitude) is 45 degrees (this should be entered in the Hillshade command). Note SOLPOS will return 135 degrees, which is just 180 - 45 = 135.
For figures of Azimuth Angle and Altitude angle see ArcGIS Desktop Help - Producing a Hillshade

Instructor Jeff Jensen - recommends having the Hillshade as the top layer with 70% transparent and the elevation color ramp layer below with 0%
transparent.
[Ormsby 01, p. 122-123] recommends Elevation layer should be above the hillshade layer in the TOC. Elevation Top Layer, Hillshade Bottom Layer. Make
the elevation layer 70% transparent.
double click the Elevation layer to open the Select Color Ramp window. Right mouse click the color ramp symbols and turn off graphic view. Select
Elevation #1 color ramp.
see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Producing a Hillshade

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

178 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

6.
Note: if image file is in a different projection, remember that ArcMap can project raster images on the fly. So, ensure the Data Frame project is the one you desire, then
add the raster data, ArcMap will reproject it automatically.
See How to make a layer draw partially transparent, ESRI Article ID 18073
Raster/Surface Properties
Right click on the Raster/Surface and open properties from the Table of Contents in ArcMap to display and max and min cell value

"While raster maps are rectangular, wouldn't it be good if you could display them just for the city and its irregular boundary? There's a way to accomplish this, by creating
and using a mask for the Pittsburgh polygon. The mask is a raster map layer, and thus rectangular in shape, but it has the value 'No Data' for cells outside of Pittsburgh,
which ArcGIS displays using no color or clear. Thus a mask uses a neat 'trick' to enhance processing and display of raster maps to irregular boundaries." (GIS Tutorial
Workbook for ArcView 9, Third Edition by Gorr and Kurland, p. 382)
How to Create a Raster Mask
Step 0: need a polygon shapefile/feature class which will act as the mask/cookie cutter/template/boundary used to assign NODATA values to the source raster.
Step 1: ArcToolbox -> Conversion Tools -> To Raster toolset -> Feature to Raster

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

179 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 - Feature to Raster (Conversion)

Transparency
How to change a the transparency of a layer (ESRI Tutorial Video)
Can use the Effects Toolbar to modify Transparency
Improving the display of raster data
Background on Elevation Contours
2D lines of equal elevation drawn on a map
Best example of a physical contour line would be the shore of a lake. The water level represents one contour line because the level of the lake is the same in all places.
(see Civil Drafting Technology, 4th Edition, by David A. Madsen and Terence M. Shumaker, p. 170)
An example a messy bachelor might experience is the ring around their bathtub.
Contours are used to represent a surface on a map
Space between a contour is known as the contour interval.
Contours should never touch. Only exception would be mountain cliff or other type of overhang.
Contours that form a "V" are most likely a stream. The bottom of the "V" points upstream.
Closer the contours are to one another, the steep the surface. Tends to be mountainous areas
Further the spacing between the contours, implies a flat surface. Tends to be plains/fields
Contours are usually created from a surface, such as the USGS Digital Elevation Models (DEM)
Creating Contours
Requires 3D Analyst Extension
Contours can be created from from two types of surfaces: GRID or TIN
GRID Surfaces: Contouring function interpolates lines between the cell centers. The contours seldom pass through the cell centers and do not follow the cell boundaries.
TIN Surfaces: Contouring function interpolates straight lines across each triangle that spans the contour value, using linear interpolation between the edge endpoints to
determine where the countour crosses the face.
Step 1: Obtain or download a surface. Use AREA31.zip USGS 24,000 scale DEM
Step 2 ArcGIS 9.3.1 and earlier:
Tools -> Extension -> check the 3D Analyst box
View -> Toolbars -> 3D Analyst
3D Analyst Menu Bar: 3D Analyst -> Surface Analysis -> Contour... (not available in ArcGIS 10)
Step 2 ArcGIS 10 using 3D Analyst:
Geoprocessing ArcToolbox 3D Analyst Tools Raster Surface Contour

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

180 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Step 2 ArcGIS 10 using Spatial Analyst

Geoprocessing ArcToolbox Spatial Analyst Tools Surface Contour
Contour Output Format: shapefile only (not available in ArcGIS 10)
Use standard Auto-Label features in ArcMap to display the elevation for each contour.
See [ESRI 3D Analyst, p. 119]
Create a single contour: click the Create Contours button on the 3D Analyst menubar, then click on the surface where you want the contour created. Output is a 3D
polyline graphic. Height of the contour is written to the status bar. (ArcGIS Desktop Help -> 3D Analyst -> Analyzing surfaces -> Deriving contour lines from a surface).
See ESRI Article ID 18417 about single contour created by the Contours button being graphics and cannot be saved to a geodatabase dataset.
Symbolize Contours
Using the ArcMap Open Attribute Table Field Calculator to assign a value of 1 to the minor contours and a value of 0 to the major contour intervals. Then just
symbolize the features based on these values. Recommend adding a field called MinorCont (short integer). Reference ArcGIS Desktop Discussion Forums - Using JScript
or VBScript to Label Select Contour Lines

See ESRI Article ID 20973 to learn how to create contours and symbolize the result using index contours
For example, display 100 foot interval contours with a light gray, then display all 500 foot interval contours with solid black
See ESRI Article ID 15470 to learn how to create labels on contour lines using Mask and Halo
AutoCAD Land Development Desktop (LDD) refers to Major and Minor contours, minor will be light gray, major will be solid black.
Creating Cool Contours - Modeling Glacial Terrain with ArcGIS by Mike Price, ArcUSER April-June 2006, p. 48-51
Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN) Surface
TINs are made from mass points, breaklines, and polygons
Mass Points: Elevation Points that become the nodes in the TIN network. Most important input, determines the overall shape of the surface. Increase the number of
mass points increases the accuracy of your surface. Recommend more mass points around areas that have highly variable elevations, less mass points around areas

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

181 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## that are relatively flat.

Breaklines: used to represent areas of abrupt elevation change. For example, Retaining wall, street curb, and so on. Objective of breakline is to keep the TIN
crossing the line, just want the TIN to share line. Not the same as drafting breaklines which indicate a break in the drawing of an entire object by means of
shortening the drawing or by cutting off a part of the drawing." (Survey Drafting by Gurdon H. Wattles, p. 4.15, ISBN 0-9606962-0-2). See ESRI Article ID 15375
for a discussion on the difference between hard and soft breaklines.
No triangle in a TIN may cross a breakline, in other words breaklines are enforced as triangle edges
Soft Breaklines
Hard Breaklines
Polygons: also known as hulls, represent surface features with area, such as lakes or project limit boundaries.
"Including breaklines and polygons in a TIN gives you more control over the shape of the TIN surface." (see [ESRI 3D Analyst, p. 72]
Also known as a Digital Terrain Model (DTM)
Companies like Kenney Aerial Mapping use aerial photos and a sterographic plotter to create surfaces.
To create a TIN Using 3D Analyst toolbar
Add a point layer that has an elevation field
3D Analyst toolbar -> Create/Modify TIN -> Create TIN From Features
Check the features that will be used in creating the TIN, namely the masspoints
Choose the Height Source field or choose shape geometry if the features have 3D geometry.
Enter a name for the TIN, then click OK
To create a TIN Using ArcToolbox
ArcToolbox -> 3D Analyst Tools -> TIN Creation -> Create TIN
ArcToolbox -> 3D Analyst Tools -> TIN Creation -> Edit TIN
TIN Attributes
Planimetric Area: two-dimensional only, no elevation/relief. Land is sold and surveyed by planimetric area.
Surface Area
Volume
Slope: given as a percentage, ratio of (rise/run) x 100. Output field name is Slope_Pct.
Aspect: defines the direction of the TIN face/3D polygon. Always reported in degrees. Zero is north, and values increase clockwise like a compass. Flat triangles will be
assigned an aspect value of -1. Output field name is Aspect. (see ArcGIS online help, How TIN Triangle (3D Analyst) works)
Notes:
Cannot view the TIN attributes like one can with point, polygon, line attributes by opening the table.
Query the TIN using MapTips/Tooltips or Identify Tool.
Create a TIN from sample point feature/mass points/survey shots
Step 1: create a geodatabase, then add a new table with the following fields: x, y, and z. Data type will be short integer
Step 2: add the table structure to ArcMap, start an edit session, populate 9 records with some values. Recommend adding points around the a rectangular boundary.
Step 3: convert the table to XY Events using the Tools -> Add XY Data...
Step 4: recommend converting the XY Events to either a point feature class in a geodatabase or a point shapefile. Do this by right mouse clicking on the Table of
Contents XY Event layer and select the Data -> Export Data option. Save with the filename masspts
Step 5: From the 3D Analyst Toolbar: Select 3D Analyst -> Create/Modify TIN -> Create TIN From Features...
Step 6: check the masspts feature class/shapefile under the Layers box. Ensure the height source is using the Z field. Output TIN name should be in a directory that has no
spaces in the path or filename.
Creating TIN surfaces from vector data
Begin with the same steps used as creating a TIN from points
Step 6: select a breakline and/or polygon layer to modify the TIN.
TINs are created from mass points, breaklines, and polygons
Mass Points: spot elevation shots having x,y,Z coordinates. Become nodes in the TIN. The primary input to create a TIN. Lines and polygons can be added as mass
points, where the vertices of the lines and polygons are treated as mass points (no line or boundary enforcement).
Soft Breaklines: create TIN edges along the boundary of the line. Soft implies no adjustment to the elevation, z value. In other words, no height measurements
Hard Breaklines: Create TIN edges along the boundary of the line. Hard implies adjustment to the elevation, z values. In other words, lines with height. Hard
breaklines capture abrupt changes in a surface and improve the display and analysis of the TIN. Physical features such as street curb face, streams and road cuts
could be included in a TIN as hard breaklines. [Using ArcGIS 3D Analyst, p. 71]
Clip Polygons
Erase Polygons
Replace Polygons
set the polygon boundary and interior heights to the same value.
Example, house/building footprint. Elevation would be the pad height.
Example, lake or body of water. Elevation would be the same along the shoreline.
Tag Value Fill Polygons
Can symbolize the 3D triangles based on the tag values
Identify tool will report the tag values.
Edit a TIN
See ESRI Article ID 22452 about editing a TIN in ArcMap
Must use 3D Analyst Extension
3D Analyst -> Create/Modify TIN -> Add Features to TIN...
Cut/Fill Analysis using a TIN
3D Analyst Menu -> Surface Analysis -> Cut/Fill...

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

182 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Very difficult to create a TIN based on the developed condition, that is finish grade. This is needed to compare difference between the existing/undeveloped/before
condition and the proposed/developed/after condition.
Input: two TIN surfaces. Can GRID surfaces or a combination of TIN GRID surfaces be inputed? Unknown, ArcGIS 9.1 gives and error message when processing.
Output: single GRID/Raster surface. Also have the option to output as a TIFF image or ERDAS IMAGINE file format.
Compare TIN surface to GRID surface
Create TINs from points. GRIDs can be created from points but the problem is the point is converted into a cell value and all surrounding cells are are left blank/null.
TINs use only linear interpolation to predict values between points. GRIDs have several interpolation methods to choose from (e.g. Spline, Kriging, Inverse Distance
Weighted, and so on). Note Spline interpolation is most similar to the TIN linear interpolation.
TINs and GRIDs do not have an attribute table to view. Need to query using MapTips or Identify.
Cut-and-Fill Analysis
Cut is a positive value, that is removing material from the site. Also known as Net Loss, Loss, and Excavation
Fill is a negative value, that is bringing/adding material to the site. Also known as Net Gain, Gain, and Embankment.
Example: if Existing Grid - Developed Grid < 0 then net gain (that is need to add fill to the site)
Example: if Existing Grid - Developed Grid > 0 then net loss (that is need to cut or remove material from site)
Example: if Existing Grid - Developed Grid = 0 then the site is balanced
Must account for losses (i.e. Shrinkage, swell, loss during transport, and subsidence). Typically the soils report will provide these values. Rule of thumb is 15%
loss. Lindeburg recommends 5-15% (Civil Engineering Reference Manual for the PE Exam, 8th Edition).
Cut + (1.15 x Fill) = 0 then the site is balanced between existing/natural grade and the final/proposed/developed grade
Economic Fudge Factor, better to have extra cut material
Long Haul Calculations, typically required for distances greater than 2000 feet.
Procedure
Create Existing/Natural topo/TIN layer
Create Final/Proposed/Improved/Developed topo/TIN layer
ArcGIS doesn't have the necessary tools to create this layer
AutoCAD Land Development Desktop uses grading objects and alignments to assist in creating this layer
As a rule of thumb, use ArcToolbox geoprocessing environment rather than the 3D analyst toolbar in ArcMap. ArcToolbox is constantly being developed whereas
the 3D analyst toolbar is just in maintenance mode (i.e. just fix bugs).
ArcGIS 9.1 Cut/Fill will convert TINs into grids then perform the analysis
ArcGIS 9.2 new command TIN difference is used compare two TINs, will not convert the TINs to GRIDs in the background.
Reference: Survey Drafting by Wattles, Chapter 10
Raster Calculator and Map Algebra
References
ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 How Raster Calculator Works
How to convert the DEM elevations from meters to feet?

1.
Hydrology and Spatial Analyst
ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10: Understanding drainage systems
"A pour point is the point at which water flows out of an area. This is usually the lowest point along the boundary of the drainage basin."
"The boundary between two basins is referred to as a drainage divide or watershed boundary." This is also known as the ridge lines.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

183 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Step 1: create the Flow Direction raster

Step 2: create Basin
Reference
Geoprocessing Service Step by Step: Watershed
Hydrologic Group - Dominant Conditions (A, B, C, D)
Rational Method

## Spatial Analyst and Interpolation

Inverse Distance Weighted (IDW) Technique
Using the conceptual model to create a suitability map

3D Analyst Extension
ArcScene and 3D Analyst Extension
Used to view 3D data, cannot provide an output plot
How to open ArcScene
Windows: Start -> All Programs -> ArcGIS -> ArcScene
ArcMap: check Tools -> Extensions -> 3D Analyst box is checked. Then View -> Toolbars -> 3D Analyst
How to render features in 3D
TIN Surfaces and 3D features are automatically rendered in 3D
Raster Surfaces (grids and images) and 2D features are drawn as though they were resting on a flat surface. Need to define their z-values to render in 3D. (Using
ArcGIS 3D Analyst,see p. 156)
DEMs - to render in 3D just set the raster layer's base height to itself (Layer Properties -> Base Heights tab, Obtain heights for layer from surface)
How to Change Vertical Exaggeration to all layers
ArcScene: right mouse click the scene layer data frame in the table of contents and select Scene Properties (alternative is View -> Scene Properties...)
General tab: enter a value of 10 under vertical exaggeration
A fractional vertical exaggeration can be used to flatten surfaces or 3D features that have extreme vertical variation.
How to Change Vertical Exaggeration to a single layer
Vertical exaggeration on a single layer can be achieved by changing its z-unit conversion factor (Using ArcGIS 3D Analyst, p. 177)
Base Heights tab: change Z Unit Conversion to 10
Raster Resolution is used to improve performance, the smaller the number of rows and columns improves the display performance but reduces the resemblance of the
base surface to the original (Using ArcGIS 3D Analyst,see p. 164)
Sample data: c5data.mdb, c5data.tif, c5data.tfw
How to create a TIN surface from contour data
1. Example datasets from the GIS Tutorial Workbook - 1 Basics
Pittsburgh.zip
3DAnalyst.gdb.zip
2. Open ArcScene
Option 1: Open ArcMap. Customize Extensions check 3D Analyst. Right click on a blank area of the toolbars and select 3D Analyst Toolbar. Click the
ArcScene button on the right of the toolbar.
Option 2: Start All Programs ArcGIS ArcScene 10
3. ArcScene Add Data Topo contours from the 3DAnalyst.gdb geodatabase
4. ArcToolboar search for "Create TIN" and select Create TIN 3D Analyst
Output TIN save as Pitt-TIN
Spatial Reference: NAD 1983 StatePlane Pennsylvania South FIPS 3702 (US Feet).prj

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

184 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

SF_type = softline
5. It appears you have to re-create the TIN if you want to switch between Edge type of hardline or softline
6. Drape buildings onto of the TIN surface
Base Heights tab check Floating on a custom surface

## Create 3D Buildings using ArcGIS 3D Analyst

Step 0: obtain a building footprint layer
See City of Las Vegas Building Footprints
Step 1: Within ArcMap, enable the the 3D Analyst extension. Open the 3D Analyst toolbar, then click the ArcScene button
Step 2: Within ArcScene, Add the shapefile of the building footprints
Step 3: Within ArcScene, right click the building footprints layer and select Properties. Click the Extrusion tab. If you have a field which contains the building heights,
add this. Otherwise, enter a general number, say 50 feet.
USGS Digital Elevation Model (DEM)
USGS no longer offers Digital Elevation Models (DEMs), see National Elevation Dataset
USGS National Elevation Dataset
How to Mosaic multiband images using ArcGIS and Spatial Analyst
ESRI ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Mosaic
ESRI Article Number 22005
What GRID functions can be used in the Raster Calculator, see ESRI Article Number 21488
Using command line GRID requests in ArcGIS Spatial Analyst, see ESRI Article Number 19415
Create a single image from an HSV gridcomposite, see ESRI Article Number 14675
What is a DEM? see ESRI Article Number 18950
In the past, could download individual DEMs from ftp://edcftp.cr.usgs.gov/pub/data/DEM-SDTS/ but for some reason this directory is empty
Issues when Projecting DEMs - use bilinear resampling method instead of nearest neighbor, see ESRI Tech Support Article ID 29127

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

185 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## USGS National Elevation Dataset

USGS Cumulus Portal for Geospatial Data - ArcGIS Toolbar or download directly (Arcmap_Toolbars.zip)
"The USGS National Elevation Dataset (NED) has been developed by merging the highest-resolution, best-quality elevation data available across the United States into a
seamless raster format." ( NED homepage)
Obtain NED for the State of Nevada from Rita Carmen, Department of Conservation and Natural Resources, Division of State Lands. 333 W Nye Lane, Room 118.
Carson City NV 89706. Voice: 775-687-4365x227. Fax: 775-687-3783. Email: rcarman@govmail.state.nv.us
Clark County Nevada: 36115=Area31. 36114=Area30. 35115=Area35. 35114=Area34. 36115 (Lat=36, Long=-115, Area31=name of directory the ArcGIS DEMGRID
file is stored in on the CDROM obtain from Rita)
USGS NED Shaded Relief Imagery Data available from ESRI ArcData Just zoom into desired area, then web page program will create either a TIFF image or ArcInfo
GRID of the area. File will be zipped (.zip) and downloaded automatically.
Options To Clip Raster Images
ArcToolbox (ArcGIS 10): Data Management Tools Raster Raster Processing Clip
ArcToolBox: Data Management Tools -> Raster -> Clip
Clip a raster dataset using the display extent in ArcMap ESRI Article Number 30330
How to clip a raster dataset Article Number 20887
Raster Projection - NAD83 datum to WGS84
To get the reprojected TIFF image to display in Map3D or Google Earth Pro
Step 1: Define the projection of the TIFF image
ArcToolbox: Data Management Tools -> Projections and Transformations -> Raster -> Define Projection
Select the TIFF image you want to define a projection for
Change the coordinate system from Unknown to Stateplane
click ok
Will create and update the following files
.aux
.tif.xml

## Step 2: reproject .tif image from Stateplane to WGS84

Select the output coordinate system to Geographic, World, WGS_1984
Set Geographic Transformation to NAD_1983_To_WGS_1984_5. How to Determine which NAD_1983_To_WGS_1984 transformation to use (ESRI
Article ID 24159). NAD_1983_To_WGS_1984_5 applies to 48 contiguous states and I had success using it.
Have success using BILINEAR resampling techinque
Project Raster (Data Management) - ArcToolbox -> Geoprocessing tool reference -> Data Management toolbox -> Projections and Transformations toolset
-> Raster tools.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

186 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

ArcMap will automatically add the newly reprojected TIFF image to the Active Data Frame. If a projection was not already defined for the data frame,
should get a complete window which looks like this.

Will get the WARNING 000632: Datum conflict between map and output. if the data frame already has a projection define with a different datum.
Will create and update the following files. Notice it does NOT create a .tfw world file
.aux
.tif.xml
.tif
.rrd
Step 2: create .tfw world file
ArcToolbox: Data Management Tools -> Raster -> Raster -> Raster Properties -> Export Raster World File
creates .tfw file
Map3D and Google Earth will only need the .tif and .tfw image files

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

187 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## see Export Raster World File (Data Management)

see World files for raster datasets
Optional Step 3: open in Google Earth Pro, see Google Earth Import GeoTIFF Images
Raster Image Processor (RIP)
Fancy plotter driver that improves the speed and quality of a final plot
ESRI's ArcPress
EasyCopy Gold from autoGraph international

## ArcGIS Overlay Analysis

How to create a composite Curve Number (CN) using ArcMap
Step 0: Obtain the GIS layers
Basin-ID
Basin-Area
Hydrologic Groups, a Soil Characterists from NRCS SSURGO dataset
hydgrpPerA = Percent Hydrologic Group A
hydgrpPerB = Percent Hydrologic Group B
hydgrpPerC = Percent Hydrologic Group C
hydgrpPerD = Percent Hydrologic Group D
SSURGO-Area (may need to add this field, define as a Double Type with Precision 14 and Scale 6, then calculate SSURGO-Area = ShapeArea)
Land Use from Assessor, Planning, or RFCD
Step 1: Overlay Watershed Basins onto NRCS SSURGO
Use Intersect tool from the ArcToolbox Overlay Toolset
Note, the Intersect tool will use the current selection set, so if you want to analysis the entire layer, must Clear any Select Features.
Note, the default ShapeArea field will automatically be updated from the Intersect, so to preserve the area, add a new field Area field prior to the Intersect.
Step 2: Dissolve Watershed Basins based on the BasinID and then use the Statistics option to determine the Mean percentage of each hydrologic group. So in a nutshell,
Dissolve will remove the NRCS SSURGO polygons and determine the average (i.e. Mean) percentage of each hydrologic group (total percentages should sum to 100%).
Thus we a Watershed Basin Polygon with the exact percentages of soil's hydrologic group (e.g. 20% A, 20% B, 20% C, and 40% D)
Use the Dissolve tool from the ArcToolbox Overlay Toolset

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

188 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Note, recommend ModelBuilder to streamline this analysis.

Projections
Projections used in State Plane Coordinate Systems
"To convert geodetic positions of a portion of the Earth's surface to plane rectangular coordinates, points are projected mathematically from the ellipsoid to some
imaginary developable surface -a surface that can conceptually be developed or 'unrolled and laid out flat' without distortion of shape or size. A rectangular grid can be
superimposed on the developed plane surface and the positions of points in the plane specified with respect to X and Y grid axes. A plane grid developed using this
mathematical process is called a map projection.... Today, two of the most commonly used mapping projections are the Lambert conformal conic and the Transverse
Mercator projections." (Elementary Surveying, 12th Edition by Ghilani and Wolf, p. 580)
Types of Projections
Map Projects by USGS
State Plane Coordinate System (SPCS)
"...points couldn't be projected from the ellipsoid to developable surfaces without introducing distortions in the lengths of lines or the shapes of areas. However, these
distortions are held to a minimum by selected placement of the cone or cylinder secant to the ellipsoid, by choosing a conformal projection (one that preserves true
angular relationships around points in a small region), and also by limiting the zone size or extent of coverage on the Earth's surface for any particular map projection. If
the width of zones is held to a maximum of 158 mi (254 km), and if two-thirds of this zone width is between the secant lines, distortions (differences in line lengths on the
two surfaces) are kept to 1 part in 10,000 or less. The NGS intended this accuracy in its development of the state plane coordinate systems." (Elementary Surveying, 12th
Edition by Ghilani and Wolf, p. 581-2)
Clark County uses StatePlane Coordinate- Nevada East Zone (NV-E) along with other local agencies (e.g. City of Las Vegas, Henderson, North Las Vegas, and so on)
Map of all Stateplane coordinate zones is included with ArcMap, depending upon where you installed the program, e.g. C:\Program Files\ArcGIS\Reference
Systems\usstpln83.shp (download zip of shapefiles from UNLV, usstpln83.zip - Geographic Coordinate System - GCS_WGS_1984)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

189 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

State Plane Coordinate System of 1983 NOAA Manual NOS NGS 5 by James E. Stem
"A new figure of the Earth, the Geodetic Reference System of 1980 (GRS 80), which approximates the Earth's true size and shape, supplied a better fit than the
Clarke 1866 spheroid, the reference surface used with NAD 27." (ibid p. 2)
"The ellipsoid that forms the basis of NAD 83, and consequently the SPCS 83, is identified as the Geodetic Reference System of 1980 (GRS 80). GRS 80 provides
an excellent global approximation of the Earth's surface. The Clarke spheroid of 1866, as used for NAD 27 approximated only the conterminous United States.
Because the geoid separation at point MEADES RANCH was assumed equal to zero, a translation exists between ellipsoids. The ellipsoid change is the major
contributor of the coordinate shift from NAD 27 to NAD 83." (ibid p. 12)
NAD 27 - U.S. coast and Geodetic Survey (USC&GS) Special Publication 235 - The State Coordinate Systems
The State Coordinate Systems (A Manual for Surveyors) older version but better quality (The State Coordinate Systems)
http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/PUBS_LIB/publication235.pdf
Grid: Transverse Mercator
Central meridian = 11535' (-115.583333)
Scale Ratio = 1:10,000
Origin: Lat=3445' (34.75) Long=11535'
False Easting x(ft)=500,000
False Northing y(ft)=0
x' of lines of exact scale (ft) = 295,700
Fundamentals of the State Plane Coordinate Systems
U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. Manual of Traverse Computation on the Transverse Mercator Grid by Oscar S. Adams, Senior Mathematician and Charles N.
Claire, Associate Mathematician. GPO, Washington, DC, 1935. 199 pages. Special Publication No. 195.
Publication of North American Datum of 1983 State Plane Coordinates in Feet in Nevada
State Plane Coordinates Presentation by Dr. Ghilani
National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency Geodesy and Geophysics
Geodesy for the Layman ( TM8358_1.pdf or download a copy from UNLV Geo4lay.pdf)
TM8358.1: Datums, Ellipsoids, and Grid Reference Systems ( TM8358_1.pdf or download a copy from UNLV TM8358_1.pdf)
Fundamentals of the State Plane Coordinate Systems by Joseph F. Dracup, Sept 1974. National Geodetic Survey
Map Projections: A Working Manual by John P. Snyder. USGS Professional Paper 1395. Washington, D.C.: USGS, 1993.
GRS 80
Equatorial Radius/Semiaxis, a = 6,378,137 meters
Polar Radius/Semiaxis, b = 6,356,752.3 meters
Flattening, f = 1/298.257
"in computations if the ellipsoid is assumed a sphere, its radius is usually taken such that its volume is the same as the reference ellipsoid. It is computed from
(a2b)1/3. For the GRS80 ellipsoid, its rounded value is 6,371,000 meters." (Elementary Surveying, 12th Ed, Ghilani and Wolf, p. 523)
WGS 84
Equatorial Radius, a = 6,378,135 meters
Polar Radius, b = 6,356,750.5 meters
Flattening, f = 1/298.26
Nevada East Zone Map Projectsion: A Working Manual, p. 53 and 374
Transverse Mercator Projection
Central meridian = 11535' West
ESRI uses -115.583333333333300000 decimal degrees = -11535'
Scale reduction = 1:10,000
ESRI uses a scale factor of 0.999900000000000010
"Lines of contact. Any single meridian for the tangent project. For the secant projection, two almost parallel lines equidistant from the central
meridian...Accurate scale along the central meridian if the scale factor is 1.0. If it is less than 1.0, there are two straight lines with accurate scale equidistant
from and on each side of the central meridian." (ESRI ArcGIS Transerve Mercator)
Origin (latitude) = 3445' North
ESRI uses 34.7500 decimal degrees = 3445'
Coordinates of Origin (meters): False Easting x=200,000 and False Northing y=8,000,000
"State plane coordinate systems are generally designed to have a scale error maximum of about 1 unit in 10,000. Suppose you calculated the Cartesian distance
(using the Pythagorean theorem) between two points represented in a state plane coordinate system to be exactly 10,000 meters. Then, with a perfect tape measure,
pulled tightly across an idealized planet, you would be assured that the measured result would differ by no more than 1 meter from the calculated one. The possible
error with the UTM coordinate system may be larger: 1 in 2500." (Introducing Geographic Information Systems with ArcGIS, 2nd Edition by Michael Kennedy, p.
18)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

190 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Datum: NAD 1983 (Conus) (Mol) is used on the Trimble TSC2

GPS Course Lesson 6: Two-Coordinate Systems and Heights by Jan Van Sickle, Senior Lecturer
"...the projection of points from the Earth's surface onto a reference ellipsoid and finally onto flat maps..." (ibid)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

191 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Stateplane Coordinates in USA use Secant Projections to minimize distortion by providing 2 lines of intersection instead of one line with the Tangent case. Secant
Projection intersect the ellipsoid at two areas and these two lines are of exact scale (also known as standard lines) to the ellipsoid.

## Ellipsoidal lengths = geodetic distances

Lengths on the map projection surface = grid distances
Grid North is parallel to the Central Meridian. Convergence is the angle between Grid North and Geodetic North

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

192 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## False Easting and Northing

False easting is a linear value applied to the origin of the x coordinates.
False northing is a linear value applied to the origin of the y coordinates.
False easting and northing values are usually applied to ensure that all x and y values are positive.
False easting and false northing adjustments by Margaret M. Maher
"False easting and false northing values are sometimes inserted into a projection file in order to make all the x- and y-coordinate values across the area
of the data positive numbers. False easting and false northing values can also be used to adjust the position of the data in either the east-west or
north-south direction in order to align the data.
Making the false easting value in the projection file larger will adjust the position of the data to the west, moving the data to the left in the ArcMap
display. Making the false easting value in the project file smaller will adjust the position of the data east, to the right in the ArcMap display.
Adjustments to the false northing value in the projection file will move the data display north or south, though they are not as intuitive as the false
easting adjustments. Making the false northing value in the projection file larger will move the data display south in the ArcMap window. Making the
false northing value smaller will move the data display north in the ArcMap window.
Keep these adjustments in mind while creating the custom projection file to align your data in ArcMap." (Lining Up Data in ArcGIS by Margaret M.
Maher, p. 55, ISBN 978-1-58948-249-4)
"A constant E0 is adopted to offset the N grid axis from the central meridian and make E coordinates of all points positive. Similarly, a constant Nb can be
adopted to offset the E grid axis from the southern edge of the projection." (Elementary Surveying, 12th Edition by Ghilani and Wolf, p. 587)
You can also use the false easting and northing parameters to reduce the range of the x or y coordinate values. For example, if you know all y values are greater
than 5,000,000 meters, you could apply a false northing of -5,000,000.
ESRI ArcGIS Desktop 10 - Projection parameters

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

193 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

According to David Doyle with NGS, metadata is hard to obtain on current surveying work but was extremely difficult in the 1980s. So, the State of Nevada
wanted to ensure when surveyors where working with the two different Datums (NAD27 and NAD83) that a surveyor could easily tell from the coordinate values,
which Datum is being used. So the NAD83 coordinates have a 8,000,000 meters added to the Northing (Y) coordinate values.
NAD27 - Nevada East Zone uses a False Northing of 0 ft
NAD83 - Nevada East Zone uses a False Northing of 8,000,000 meters (26,246,666.66666666 feet)
Notice how the same data (city boundaries in Clark County NV) do not overlay, that is the NAD83 is shifted 8,000,000 meters north of the NAD27 layer

## Conversion from NAD83/27 to Geodetic/Geographic

NGS SPC to Geodetic

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

194 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Central Meridian (Longitude)

Notes from Earl F. Burkholder, PS, PE with Global COGO, Inc., Las Cruces NM 88003
Central Meridian (Longitude) is a north/south line and secant lines in a transverse Mercator projection are parallel to the central meridian. Problem is
Longitude lines are not parallel because the all converge at the poles.
The easting of a secant line will vary slightly from the south end of the state to the north end.
secant line in state plane coordinates is always a constant distance from the central meridian.
UTM
Map UTM Zones for lower-48 states

## How to draw the SPCS origin

Step 1: Identify the SPCS Defining Parameters
If you have ArcGIS installed on your computer, view the projection file (.prg)
Elementary Surveying, 12th Edition by Ghilani and Wolf, Appendix F (and definitions on p. 586) U.S. State Plane Coordinate System Defining Parameters
Geodetic Latitude, P (Greek small letter phi)
Geodetic Longitude, P (Greek small letter lambda)
False Easting, E0
False Northing, Nb
Scale Factor at the Central Meridian, k0
Step 2: Create a shapefile using WGS84 geographic coordinates (e.g. GCS_WGS_1984)
Use ArcCatalog to create a new shapefile. Assign it the GCS_WGS_1984 projection
Step 3: create gratitcules
Using an ArcMap edit session, add the line features using Absolute X,Y to enter the latitude and longitude values
Scale Factors
scale factors move distances from the stateplane grid to the ellipsoid
"After a distance has been reduced to its ellipsoidal equivalent, it must then be scaled to its grid equivalent. This is accomplished by multiplying the ellipsoidal length of
the line by an appropriate scale factor." (Elementary Surveying, 12th Ed, Ghilani and Wolf, p. 599)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

195 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Scale, Elevation, Grid, and Combined Factors Used in Instrumentation. Professional Surveyor Magazine - Feb 2006

## Coordinate Systems (Geographic and Projected) in ArcMap

When adding data to ArcMap, will sometimes get a warning message "One or more layers is missing spatial reference information, Data from those layers cannot be
projected"
"If you add a layer that is in a projected coordinate system to ArcMap, and the coordinate system information is missing" will get that message. Much of the time this is
not a problem. You can still display and work with this data as long as ArcMap does not need to project it on the fly. ArcMap will not be able, however, to align this data
with data in a different coordinate system." [Ormsby 01, p. 340]
Map Projections
Mathematical transformation of a model of the earth's shape (i.e. Oblate Spheroid) to a flat surface (grid). [Ormsby 01, p. 324]
Can distort shape, area, distance, and direction
Geographic Coordinates System (GCS)
based on a curved surface
Sphere - less accurate approximation of the shape of the earth
Spheroid - more accurate approximation of the shape of the earth (most widely used)
Geoid - most accurate model of the shape of the earth
a measurement of a location on the earth's surface expressed in degrees of latitude and longitude. Tend to have a "taffy-pull appearance" when displaying [Ormsby
01, p. 331]
GCS includes: angular unit of measure (e.g. degrees), prime meridian (i.e. line of zero longitude which passes through Greenwich England), and a datum (e.g.
position of spheroid relative to the center of earth, typically use North American Datum of 1983 a.k.a. NAD83)
Latitude: horizontal lines (e.g. equator) and also known as parallels. Measurement values range from -90 to 90 degrees
Longitude: vertical lines, also known as merdians. Measurement values range from -180 to 180 degrees.
Degrees - 1/360th of a cirle
Minutes - 1/60th of a degree, or 60 minutes = 1 degree
Seconds - 1/60th of a minute, or 60 seconds = 1 minute

See ESRI Virutal Campus - Learning ArcGIS 9, Module 3 for more details
Projected Coordinates
based on a flat surface
does NOT use spheriods, spheres, or geoids since these are approximations of the shape of the earth
also known as planar coordinates
a measurement of a location on the earth's surface expressed in a two-dimensional system that locates features based on their distance from an origin (0,0) along
two axes.
Map projections transform latitude and longitude to x,y coordinates in a projected coordinate system.
Latitude and Longitude can located exact locations on the earth, but no uniform units of measurement (see figure on [Ormsby 01, p. 326])
If all your GIS data is using the same coordinate system, don't have to worry about projections
Empty data frames inherit the projection of the first layer added to it. [Ormsby 01, p. 333]
On-the-fly Projections, [Ormsby 01, p. 328, 336]

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

196 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

ArcMap determines if the coordinate system is geographic or projected by comparing the coordinates. Lat/Long values will be in the tens (Lat=36 degrees) and hundreds
(Long=-115 degrees), where as Stateplane coordinates hundred thousand (e.g. x=800,000) and tens of million (y=26,750,000)[Ormsby 01, p. 340]
On-the-fly projections are less mathematically rigorous than permanent projections done using the ArcToolbox Projection Wizard. [Ormsby 01, p. 330]
On-the-fly projections are defined by the Layer Properties. Note this doesn't change the actual file. Projection only applied to data frame. [Ormsby 01, p. 330]
"... a coordinate system is a framework for locating features on the earth's surface using either latitude-longitude or x,y values."
Works well when the data has the same geographic coordinate system (GCS). [Ormsby 01, p. 329]
To transform the coordinate location of a CAD file using coordinate values in ArcMap, see ESRI Article Number 20860
Projection info is assigned to the feature dataset, not the geodatabase. Note all feature classes in a feature dataset must have the same projection. Doesn't appear that all
feature datasets need to have the same projection in a geodatabase. Remember a feature class can be contained in a feature dataset, which will ensure it has the same
projection info, or can be a standalone feature class.
ESRI software does not support vertical datums. Only reads the z-value as is, you must perform any pre-processing/corrections to the vertical data before entering into
ArcGIS. Appears the projection metadata doesn't allow you to enter any additional z-value related data (for example NAVD88 datum, elevation units of feet, and so on).fs
How to Project Geodatabases and Shapefiles
Projections in ArcMap
Can project the data frame, not the actual feature class, shapefile, or coverage.
Can export the layer with the same projection as the data frame, so in a sense your actually reprojecting the layer.
ArcMap will not project data on the fly if the coordinate system for the data set has not been defined.
Additional info, see ESRI Article ID 24893, How to identify an unknown coordinate system using ArcMap.
ESRI Article ID 20837, how to align vector data in ArcMap
Projections in ArcCatalog
Can only define a projection for a layer, not reproject it.
Data frame will inherit the projection of the first layer added to it.
ArcCatalog: select a geodatabase feature, right mouse click to bring up the context menu, Properties -> Fields tab, select Shape, then at the bottom of that window,
click the ellispe (...) and either Select or Import.
Projections in ArcToolbox
Will reproject the layer permentently
ArcToolbox: Data Management -> Projections -> Project Wizard (shapefiles, geodatabase)
Reference: see ESRI Article ID 21447 how to project shapefiles or geodatabase feature classes with the ArcToolbox Project wizard
Define a Shapefile's Projection
Using ArcCatalog
Problem: metadata, spatial reference property says "unknown" or "assumed geographic" projection.
File -> Properties -> Fields tab: click Shape column. In Properties list below, select ellipses button to open the Spatial Reference Properties window. Click Select...
button. Browse through Projected Coordinate Systems folder -> State Plane folder -> NAD 1983 (Feet) folder -> NAD 1983 StatePlane Nevada East FIPS 2701
(Feet).prj
Metadata should now say the projected coordinate system name.
Shapefile's coordinate system parameters are stored in the same location and name as the shapefile but with a .prj extension
see ArcGIS Desktop Help -> ArcCatalog -> Working with shapefiles -> Defining a shapefile's coordinate system

Using ArcToolbox
ArcToolbox -> Data Management Tools -> Projections -> Define Projection Wizard (shapefiles, geodatabase). Then give same inputs as the "Using ArcCatalog"
solution above.
see [Ormsby 01, p. 341-346]
Define a ArcInfo Coverage's Projection
Define a GeoDatabase feature class Projection

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

197 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Common Coordinate Systems used in Clark County NV

StatePlane Coordinate System (SPCS)
Projection used by local agencies (e.g. Clark County, City of Las Vegas, Henderson, North Las Vegas, and so on)
Map of all Stateplane coordinate zones is included with ArcMap, depending upon where you installed the program, c:\arcgis\arcexe83\Reference
Systems\usstpln83.shp or C:\Program Files\ArcGIS\Reference Systems\usstpln83.shp (download shapefiles from UNLV, usstpln83.zip - Geographic Coordinate
System - GCS_WGS_1984)
Clark County uses StatePlane Coordinate- Nevada East Zone (NV-E)

## ArcGIS Resource Center - view of USSTPLN83.shp

Universal Transverse Mercator, UTM
Earth is divided into 60 zones (each zone 6 degrees of longitude)
Origin for each zone is the Equator and its central meridian (3 degrees west and 3 degrees east). To eliminate negative coordinates, a false easting of 500,000 is
applied
Typically used for statewide datasets
Map of all UTM zones is included with ArcMap, depending upon where you installed the program, c:\arcgis\arcexe83\Reference Systems\utm.shp or c:\Program
Files\ArcGIS\Reference Systems\utm.shp (download shapefiles from UNLV, utm.zip - Geographic Coordinate System - GCS_WGS_1984) and overlay with the
USA Counties Layer countyp020.zip from the National Atlas
Best way to show two datasets that are in different UTM zones, is to project one into the other zone.
State of Nevada uses UTM Zone 11

Margaret Maher (mmaher@esri.com) with ESRI Tech Support - specialize in Map Projections and Symbology
Local/Surface Coordinates
Used extensively for small development projects by surveyors
referred to as ground distances by surveyors
different origin for each design project
To project into another coordinate system, need 2 points and have coordinate values in both systems.
Define Local/Surface Coordinate Projection in ArcMap
Objective is to create a projection file so ArcMap can project on the fly from local/surface coordinates to stateplance coordinates. The projection file (.prj) will be similar
to a shapefile file .prj file but for the AutoCAD .dwg, example anyfilename.dwg and anyfilename.prj (note cannot have any spaces in the filename for the .dwg and .prj
files). Then ArcMap will automatically project the dwg.
Most difficult step is determining the local/surface coordinate parameters
ArcMap Data Frame Properties -> New -> Projected Coordinate System
Projection name cannot contain spaces
Custom Projection File options for 7 local/surface projections
Local
Parameters
False_Easting
False_Northing
Scale_Factor
Azimuth
Longitude_Of_Center
Latitude_Of_Center
Linear Unit = Foot_US

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

198 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Datum is defined by Select... button under Geographic Coordinate System, select North America folder
North American Datum 1983.prj
North American 1983 HARN.prj (use if survey done to HARN accuracy)
North American 1983 (CSRS98).prj is for Canada
Hotine_Oblique_Mercator_Azimuth_Center
Hotine_Oblique_Mercator_Azimuth_Natural
Hotine_Oblique_Mercator_Two_Point_Center
Hotine_Oblique_Mercator_Two_Point_Natural
Rectified_Skew_Orthomorphic_Center
Rectified_Skew_Orthomorphic_Natural_O (has a rotation parameter)
Alternative method is to Define a Projection using ArcToolbox
Indepth Discussion on Projections
Map Projection Overview
State Plane Coordinates vs. Surface Coordinates, Part 1
Understanding Map Projects by Melita Kennedy and Steve Kopp with ESRI.
Online conversion between geographic coordinates to stateplane coordinates, NGS Geodetic to SPC. Input Lat/Long in Degrees Minutes Seconds (DMS). Use Zone 2701
for Clark County Nevada, also known as the Nevada East Zone. The output distance is in meters, to convert to U.S. Survey Foot use the ratio 1200m/3937ft.
USGS Monument Data sheets use to find the lat/long, utm, and stateplane coordinate for monuments show on the USGS Quad maps. Obtain the quad names from
c:\arcgis\arcexe82\Reference Systems\usgs24q.shp

Geocoding Concept
Process of assigning coordinates to a point the represents a mailing address
Geocoding (also known as address matching) is the process of creating geometric representations for descriptions of locations. A geocoding service defines a process for
converting nonspatial descriptions of places into spatial descriptions. See ArcGIS Desktop Help -> Geocoding addresses -> About geocoding services
Requires Primary Table such as SCL. For Geodatabase use US Streets with Zone (GDB). For Shapefile or Coverage format use US Streets with Zone (File-based)
Can use TIGER/Line as the reference theme, but in Las Vegas typically, use the Street Centerline (scl_l.shp, scl_l.shx, scl_l.dbf)
Matchable theme can be any table that has addresses. This is the table that coordinates will be created for.
Before Yahoo Maps, this was a very important feature
Standardization rules breaks an address into seven components. Note all seven components don't have to exist for an address and the seven components doesn't consider
apartment/unit numbers.
1. Address (house of building) number (123 N MAIN ST)
2. Prefix direction (123 N MAIN ST)
3. Prefix type - a street type that preceds the street name (700 Avenue A in Boulder City)
4. Street name (123 N MAIN ST)
5. Street type (123 N MAIN ST)(a.k.a. street segment's address start and end points.
6. Next, ArcGIS determines whether the address is an even or odd number
7. Even/Odd Address range is determined
8. Location of the address within the address range is calculated be linear interpolation between the address range
9. Offset is applied if specified
10. Coordinates of the address are calculated using the coordinate system of the reference data source
11. New point feature is created at the derived coordinates
Name of geocoding service is prefixed by your computer's current user login
Official USPS Abbreviations
Use the crscl.mdb geodatabase to create a geocoding service
Error message when creating a new geocoding service, "Unable to store the geocoding service. Cannot access index file" Get this error when trying to use Coverages. Not
a problem when I convert the SCL coverage into a Geodatabase.

See How to create an address locator
Step 0: To create an address locator within a geodatabase, need to ensure your geodatabase is version 9.2 or later. To upgrade a 9.1 geodatabase to 9.2, use ArcCatalog,
then bring up the properties for the 9.1 geodatabase and choose upgrade.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

199 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step 1: within ArcCatalog, right click in the workspace and choose New -> Address Locator... (Note: unable to create an Address Locator within a feature class dataset).
Also, Cannot store Address Locators in a geodatabase which was created with ArcGIS 9.1 or earlier.

## Step 2: choose an Address Locator Style, recommend US Streets with Zone

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

200 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step 3: match fields from the streetcenterline.mdb geodatabase, SCLFULL line feature class to the US Streets with Zone.

Optional Step 3a: Specifying output fields recommend adding the x y coordinates and standardized address. Need to check if a zip+4 field is created.
To modify the properties of an Address Locator in ArcCatalog, just right click the locator and choose properties.

## Using an Address Locator in ArcMap - Find

See The geocoding process for additional help
Step 1: select the Find tool from the Tools Toolbar

## Step 2: specify an address locator

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

201 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step 3: type in a street address or intersection then click Find. At the bottom of the window should be a list of candidate matches, ranked in order of highest score.
Typically the candidate address with the highest score is the perfect match.

Optional Step 3a: Can alter the minimum score by selecting the Options... button. For options which are grayed out, need to change this properties in ArcCatalog for the

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

202 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Interactive Geocoding in ArcGIS 10

Background
New ArcGIS Online geocode services available 17 Feb 2011
Rematching with the Interactive Rematch dialog box
Geocoding Toolbar, to turn on, right click on a blank area in the toolbar and select Geocoding
type in an address without any comma delimitators/seperators, for example:
4505 S Maryland Pkwy Las Vegas NV 89154
if entering an intersection, using the & symbol to seperate cross streets, for example:
Maryland Pkwy & Flamingo Rd Las Vegas NV

## Batch geocoding using ArcGIS Online geocode service

1. Open the Gecoding toolbar
2. click the Geocode Address button
3. select a Locator, e.g. 10.0 North America Geocode Service (ArcGIS Online)
4. fill out the Geocode Addresses dialog box

5. click Rematch button to interactively match any ties (Status = T for Tied). See Rematching with the Interactive Rematch dialog box

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

203 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

6.
7. ArcGIS Recsource Center Desktop 10 Rematching with the Interactive Rematch dialog box - A typical workflow

Interactive Geocoding
ArcMap: Edit -> Find: Addresses tab
Limitations
can only geocode one address at a time, no ability to address match a table or database.
Doesn't create a shapefile, feature, or coverage, only have the option to create a graphic.
Cannot offset an intersection address match
Limitations when using Tele Atlas Finder
Unable to select modify the output options
Unable to display point using a specified offset distance
Cannot perform reverse geocoding
View Match Results: right-click on a row in the Find window to see context menu
Flash Candidate Location(s)
Zoom to Candidate(s) and Flash
Set Bookmark
Default Intersection Separators: "&", "|", or "@" but can add several other characters in the Geocoding Service Properties, e.g. Flamingo & Maryland. Use Geocoding
Options to add more Intersection Connectors.
Output Options when using your own geocoder
Side Offset: Geocoding services based on the US Streets or StreetMap styles can determine on which side of a street an address is located. When you specify a side
offset, the geocoding service locates geocoded features at the specified distance from the street centerline on the correct side of the street.
End Offset: basically a squeeze factor that is used when geocoding services are based on US One Range, US Streets, or StreetMap geocoding service styles. In
order to prevent features that are located at the end of a reference feature from falling on top of other features such as a cross street, the end offset is used to move
the point in from the end of street. End Offset is expressed as a percentage of the length of the reference feature (that is street). End Offsets will have value between
0 and 50. An end offset setting of 0 percent will not offset features from the end. An End Offset of 50 percent will locate all features at the middle of the reference
feature.
Match if Candidates Tie: If you have 2 or more addresses that are awarded the same score, this setting will specify whether to arbitrarily match an address or leave
them unmatched.
See ArcGIS Desktop Help: Geocoding Addresses -> Geocoding Service Settings: Output Options
How to Find an address using the U.S. Address Finder Tele Atlas
Step 1: click the Find tool on the Tools Toolbar
Step 2: click the Addresses tab on the Find dialog box
Step 3: under the Choose an address location drop down box, select U.S. Address Finder Tele Atlas locator. Note ArcGIS 9.3 also provides Canadian and
European Address Locators. If you want to use your own Geocoding Service, just click the folder button at the right of the drop down box.
Step 4: enter an address and click the Find button
Step 5: right click one of the resultant records to bring up the context menu. Typically just zoom to the location. Should look something like this.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

204 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

References
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Finding an individual address

## Using an Address Locator in ArcMap - Geocode Table of Addresses

Step 1: Need a table with addresses.
Option C: Example, copy and paste the following into Microsoft Excel (within Excel, might need to use Data -> Text to Columns... to parse the string into fields)
then export to dBase IV format
1,"4505 S Maryland Pky",89119,"Site Zipcode is 89154"
2,"Tropicana & Maryland",89119,"Intersection example"
3,"Flamingo Dr & Maryland Pkwy",89119,"add street type"
4,"4632 S Maryland Pkwy",89119,""

Using ArcCatalog, within a geodatabase, Import -> Table (single)... (the import should automatically register the table with the geodatabase by adding the
OBJECTID field)
Step 2: need geocoding service
Option 1: Creating an Address Locator
Option 2: using free online address location, see ESRI Article ID 36444 - HowTo: Add an ArcGIS Online address locator to an ArcMap document
Step 3: open the Address Locator Manager
Option 2: from the Menu bar, select Tools -> Geocoding -> Address Locator Manager...
Option 3: open the Geocoding Toolbar and click the Address Locator Manager button

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

205 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Step 6: rematch results

might need to click the Review/Rematch Addresses button on the Geocoding Toolbar

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

206 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Step 7: attribute table showing xy coordinates - results of the match

should create a point feature class which contains 4 records

Geocoding Applications
911 Service: Clark County maintains the street centerline coverage for 911 service. Route emergency vehicles to the proper destination. Streets added to SCL at the
permitting stage, that is 911 service is available to the subdivision before any construction work as started.
Clark County School District: address match all students for attendence zone boundaries and bus routes. See Ted Carrasco, Geographic Information System Manager.
Facilities Division. Demographics, Zoning and Realty. 4212 Eucalytpus Annex. Las Vegas NV 89121. (702) 799-6410x217. Fax (702) 799-5436. Email:
carrata@interact.ccsd.net
Identify customers spatially
Membership mailings, determine a meeting place that is closest to a majority of members.
Geocoding Service
ArcGIS uses geocoding services to perform the task of finding the locations of addresses.
Create in ArcCatalog, use in ArcMap
Steps taken by the Geocoding Service to find a match for an address
Step 2: Searching the geocoding reference data to find suitable candidates
Step 3: Assigning scores to potential candidates
Step 4: Matching the address to the candidate with the best score
Creating a new geocoding service
ArcCatalog, click a Geocoding Services folder
Double-click the Create New Geocoding Service item
Click the US Streets with Zone (GDB) style, click OK
Click Primary Table tab and click Browse button
Navigate to the SCL feature class and click Add
Choose the column name from each dropdown list that contains the specified address information. The names of the required address attributes are shown in bold.
US Streets with Zone (GDB) using Clark County Street Centerline (SCL)
Prefix Direction: STRDIR
Prefix Type: None
Street Name: STRNAME
Street Type: STRTYPE
Suffix Direction: STRSUF
Left Zone: LZIP
Right Zone: RZIP
See ArcGIS Desktop Help: Geocoding addresses -> Preparing reference data for a geocoding service -> Geocoding service styles
Click OK to create the new geocoding service (default name is username.New Address Locator)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

207 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Using a geocoding service in ArcMap

Use the Interactive or Batch Geocoding as discussed below
Batch Geocoding - Shapefile (dbf)
Create a dBase file with 3 fields: oid (automatically created), address (data type TEXT and length 50), and zipcode (data type LONG INTEGER, will work fine on west
coast). Name it address.dbf Use ArcCatalog -> New -> dBASE Table then right mouse to select properties. Can now add fields.
Add the blank dBASE table to ArcMap, start an editing session.
1,"4505 S Maryland Pky",89119 (UNLV zipcode is really 89154)
2,"Flamingo & Maryland",89119 (having troubles matching if I include the street type, such as Rd, Pkwy, and so on)
3,"4632 S Maryland Pkwy",89119

## ArcMap: Tools -> Geocoding -> Geocoding Services Manager...

ArcMap: Tools -> Geocoding -> Geocode Addresses...
Batch Geocoding - Geodatabase (mdb)
Copy the following three records into a text editor (e.g. Notepad). Save with .txt or .csv extension.
1,"4505 S Maryland Pky",89119
2,"Flamingo & Maryland",89119
3,"4632 S Maryland Pkwy",89119

Using ArcCatalog, within a geodatabase, Import -> Table (single)... (the import should automatically register the table with the geodatabase by adding the OBJECTID
field)
ArcMap: Tools -> Geocoding -> Geocoding Services Manager...
ArcMap: Tools -> Geocoding -> Geocode Addresses...
should create a point feature class which contains 3 records (might need to interactively match an address)
ZIP codes
ZIP = zone improvement plan
5-digit code that identifies a specific geographic delivery area
Define as a string, instead of a number. NorthEast part of USA begins with a zero (e.g. 01234)
Delivery point barcode - 11-digit zipcode, ZIP+4 with the addition of the last 2 digits of your street number.
ZIP Code FAQ
Online Geocoding
Finder, and the European Address Finder. These address locators, available at no charge from within ArcMap, use Web services for geocoding and data from Tele Atlas."
See ArcWatch article - Free Online Geocoding

## Requires an internet connection

Batch Geocoding using an ArcGIS Online Address Locator
ArcGIS Online locators server URL http://tasks.arcgisonline.com/arcgis/services
Background
Use the free Tele Atlas (TA) address locators provided by ESRI
Match Type
M = Matched
PP = ?
A=
T = Tied

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

208 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

U = Unmatched
ESRI Article ID 36444 - HowTo: Add an ArcGIS Online address locator to an ArcMap document
Reverse Geocoding
ESRI ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Getting an address of a location
How do we use the Free Online Geocoding web services to do reverse geocoding?
Geocoding the Clark County Elections Data
Background
Clients
US Congress District 1 Candidate: Charmaine Guss, charmaineguss@gmail.com, www.guss4congress1.com and Alan Ruegy, 439-1916, email:
ruegy1@gmail.com
How do I rank voters in a precinct by established history of voting/turnout, proximity to a polling place and greatest cluster of voters?
Objective is to minimize travel time
Not waste time on people who will not vote
What is the best location to place a candidate's sign
In front of the polling place
What Precinct has the highest number of active voters by party? If I was trying to meet all the people in my boundary, I would start with these precincts first
How do I target swing voters?
How to run for local office
Sharon Rice (455-2412, shr@co.clark.nv.us) with Clark County GISMO does the GIS work for the Elections Dept. Kelly Fisher (knf@clarkcountynv.gov) with Clark
County Elections is the analyst you are transferred to when you ask a GIS question, unforunately she is not a GIS person and all GIS work is given to Sharon.
Richard Wade (455-0067, riw@clarkcountynv.gov) is helpful in getting the polling place list in Microsoft Excel, see PollingPlaceListFromRichard.pdf
How do I find out the polling place (pollpnts_x) for a given precinct (precinct_p)?
relate fields polling.precinct_p = poll_code.pollpnts_x
Precinct_p polygon feature class
Polling field = 34
pollpnts_x point feature class
POLL_CODE = 34
What is the precentage of voters by precinct, that vote on election day vs the other types of voting (i.e. mail ballot, early vote, write-in, provisional)
Need total number of voters by precinct
Polling_Code 345 has 9258 voters in Henderson
Polling_Code 57 has only 189 voters (Alta and Decatur elderly home)
How do I determine if a registered voter actively participates in elections?
Metadata - Registered Voter List Data File Code References
VOTE_TYPE
P = Election Day Voted
M = Mail Ballot Voted
E = Early Voted
F = Fed Write-In Voted
Z = Provisionally Voted
ELECTION
09G = 2009 Municipal General
09P = 2009 Municipal Primary
08G = 2008 General Election
08P = 2008 Primary Election
07G = 2007 Municipal General
07P = 2007 Municipal Primary
06G = 2006 General Election
06P = 2006 Primary Election
05G = 2005 Municipal General
05P = 2005 Municipal Primaries
05S = 2005 Las Vegas Ward 1 Special
04G = 2004 General Election
04P = 2004 Primary Election
LVSP = 2004 Las Vegas Special
04S = 2004 Boulder City Special
03G = 2003 General Election
03P = 2003 Primary Election
02G = 2002 General Election
02P = 2002 Primary Election
01G = 2001 General Election
ELECTION4 = 11G
VOTE_TYPE4 = M, E,
ELECTION5 = 11P
VOTE_TYPE5 = P, M, E
ELECTION6 = 10G
VOTE_TYPE6 = Z, P, M, E
ELECTION7 =
VOTE_TYPE7 =
ELECTION8 =
VOTE_TYPE8 =
ELECTION9 =
VOTE_TYPE9 =

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

209 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

ELECTION10 =
VOTE_TYPE10 =
ELECTION11 =
VOTE_TYPE11 =
ELECTION12 =
VOTE_TYPE12 =
ELECTION13 =
VOTE_TYPE13 =
ELECTION14 =
VOTE_TYPE14 =
ELECTION15 =
VOTE_TYPE15 =
ELECTION16 =
VOTE_TYPE16 =
ELECTION17 =
VOTE_TYPE17 =
ELECTION18 =
VOTE_TYPE18 =
ELECTION19 =
VOTE_TYPE19 =
ELECTION20 =
VOTE_TYPE20 =
1. Download Clark County Elections Data from http://www.clarkcountynv.gov/Depts/election/Pages/VoterDataFiles.aspx. Need to run the .exe which will unzip the file
2. Download the Elections geodatabase from ftp://mapsrv.co.clark.nv.us/pub/ crel-shp.zip shapefile or Election.zip geodatabase
Note there are 93 unique zipcodes in sclzip file
4. Import the county_all.txt the elections geodatabase (Election.mdb) and rename the table to tblVotersAll
5. create new field called RES_ADDRESS with length 100 characters
Field Calculator
x = [RES_STREET_NUM] & " " & [RES_DIRECTION] & " " & [RES_STREET_NAME] & " "
y = replace(x, " ", " ")
then at the bottom, RES_ADDRESS = y
geocoding
7. join parcel points (parcel_x) with pntVotersAddmatch
8.
Polling Places - Find nearest voters to place campain sign
pollpnts_x point feature class has a status field which tells us if the polling place is active (status=1) or inactive (status=0)
Geodatabase Election2012CongressDist1.mdb
Datasets
Polling places in Congress District 1
Active Voters in Congress District 1
Spatial Join
join pntVotersActiveCongressDist1 to pntPollingPlaces2012CongressDist1
should have all the necessary fields: Polling Place, Distance, Address, Name, Party
Report
select all points within 500 ft of polling place, near distance < 500 ft
use pntVotersActiveNearPollPlace500ft
Poll Name Poll Location
Distance
Primary Sort
Secondary Sort
NAME

Record of Survey
Record of survey done in accordance with NRS 625.350
Perpetuation of Corners done in accordance with NRS 329
Assessor Searches
Recorded Maps Book/File/Page Number File 88, Page 53

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

210 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

AssessorMapSearchSV.jp

## Nevada Coordinate System defined in NRS 327

Monuments (horizontal control)
All monuments shall be set in such a manner that the accuracy of their relative positions is not less than the requirements of the Standards of Practice for Professional
Land Surveyors as enumerated by Nevada Administrative Code (NAC) 625.650 through 625.900 inclusive.
Type of Monuments
Type I. This monument shall be installed as a section corner of 1/4 section corner surface monument in a public right of way street or easement which is paved with
Portland Cement Concrete or Asphaltic Concrete. For construction, see Standard Drawing No. 239
Type II. This monument shall be installed as a surface monument at 1/16 section corner points within a street or road section which is paved with Portland Cement
Concrete or Asphaltic Concrete. Type II monuments may also be used as subsurface section corner and 1/4 section corner monuments in an unpaved street or road
section where maintenance would preclude the use of surface monuments. For construction, see Standard Drawing No. 240
Type III. This monument shall be installed at all other survey control points located in paved or unpaved streets, roads or other public rights of way shown on the
plans. Such locations may include secondary street intersections, center or hammerhead turnarounds or circular cul-de-sacs, points of curvature and/or tangency,
points of intersection and points of reverse and/or compound curvature. For construction, see Standard Drawing No. 241
Type IV. This monument is a reference monument to be placed in accordance with Standard Drawing No. 243 and with a tie to tie angle as near to 90 degrees as
possible. For construction, see Standard Drawing No. 242. If monuments are to be set in a concrete curb, they must be placed in a tangent section of curb,
approximately two feet from the end of the return.
See Clark County Supplement to Uniform Standard Drawings and Specifications - Chapter 4 - Survey Monumentation Standards p.20
Elevation Benchmarks (vertical control)
Positional certainty of vertical components of land surveys ( NAC 625.666 and USGS National Map Accuracy Standards
"In addition, the Clark County Department of Public Works, Surveyor's Office, has based the official Clark County Vertical Control on NAVD 88 and requires that all
new maps, plans, reports, and other documents submitted for review reflect elevations referenced to NAVD 88. Copies of the Clark County benchmark information may
be obtained from the County Surveyor's Office." ( Clark County Regional Flood Control District - Hydrologic Criteria and Drainage Design Manual - Section 300 Drainage Policy - page 312)
Drainage Plan required to include the Elevation datum and benchmark on it. See ( Clark County Regional Flood Control District - Hydrologic Criteria and Drainage
Design Manual - Standard Form 2 - page 2)
Clark County Grading Plan Review Checklist requires this - Elevation Datum (NAVD88 Required) and Benchmarks
Note, Clark County Title 30 does Not require plans to include the Benchmark
Clark County Supplement to Uniform Standard Drawings and Specifications - Chapter 4 - Survey Monumentation Standards p.18-21 does Not discuss elevation
benchmarks.
Mining Claims - Map Specifications NRS 517.040 requires the site is tied to a bench mark.
Clark County Public Works
City of Las Vegas
City of North Las Vegas
City of Henderson
City of Mesquite
City of Boulder City
BLM
NGS NOAA
Nellis Air Force Base

Network Analyst
Build Network Dataset from Shapefile
Build Network Dataset in a Geodatabase Feature Dataset
Using Network Dataset in ArcMap to find Shortest Path
Find Optimal Order of Stops in a Route
Routing using ArcGIS Online
References
ESRI ArcGIS 9.3 Network Analyst Tutorial
Exercise 4: Finding the best route using a network dataset. Shows how to find the best route between and origin, 0 or more stops, and a destination
Robert Nicholas Summary of all Network Analyst Tech Support Questions: ESRI Article ID: 32890 HowTo: ArcGIS Network Analyst Data Prep Tutorial
ESRI ArcGIS 9.3 An Overview of Network Analyst
Hierarchical Routes in ArcGIS Network Analyst (download pdf from ESRI or UNLV)
Preparing Street Data for Use with the Network Dataset
HowTo: Prepare data for use with the Network Analyst extension Article ID 32890 by Robert Nicholas with ESRI
Service Area Analysis
Background

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

211 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Create a network dataset

geodatabase.
Open ArcCatalog and upgrade the geodatabase by right clicking Properties and check upgrade geodatabase button to upgrade from version 9.3 to version 10.1.
Turn on the Network Analyst Extension (Customize Extensions)
Create a Network Dataset in ArcCatalog
right click on the StreetCenterline feature class dataset and select New Network Dataset
select sclrouting_l, then use the remaining defaults
Unknown how to use the online routing services to create a network dataset? It seems like the network dataset is only used for shortest path routing, not
service area.
Perform the Service Area Analysis
open the Network Analyst toolbar by right clicking on a blank area of the ArcMap toolbars and check Network Analyst
Open the Network Analyst Window by clicking the button just to the right of the Network Analyst drop down menu.

select new Service Area from the Network Analyst drop down menu

## right click on Facilities Load Locations

Open the Network Analyst Properties, select the Analysis Settings tab Change impedance to Length and Default Breaks 400 ft

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

212 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

References
ArcGIS Desktop 10 - Service Area Analysis
To Do Items
Notes on using the Find tool to determine the shortest path/route
How to model a one-way street, that is create a Network Dataset using this info
How to adjust global turn settings
How to create a network dataset based on speed limits
How to set the start and end of a route to be the same point
Hierarchical Routes
According to Robert Nicholas with ESRI Tech Support, hierarchy routes are very difficult to model. Will need excellent data, the slighest inconsistencies will ruin the
analysis. Typically only large companies like NAVTEQ or TeleAtlas do this. Also there is limited documentation on the steps to get it to work. Only benefit is with routes
which are a minimum of 300 miles long, say a route from Las Vegas NV to Boise ID. Do not use hierarchical routes within a city.
Assumption: hierarchy routes presume that primary roads such as highways are faster to travel on than local roads such as residential streets
shortest-path routes will use local roads and ends up not being practical, that is the route doesn't take into account there are more delays (traffic signals, stop signs,
children playing in the neighborhood, lower speed limits, etc.) Also shortest path routes tend to have more complicated driving directions
Hierarchical levels for a given network are created during the network dataset build process
hierarchy name attribute field is added to the network dataset. This is the rank or order of importance in the road classification, the lower the integer value the more
preferred the network element is.
hierarchy ranges
References
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Network Analysis with Hierarchy
Network Analyst Background
A Quick Tour of Network Analyst - ArcGIS Resource Center, Desktop 10
Network Analyst Window

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

213 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Example Routing problems

Suppose you want to find the shortest distance or time between your house and UNLV, but you do not have access to mapquest/google maps/etc, only ArcMap and
some Las Vegas street data. How would you find the shortest path? Answer: first step is to create a Network Dataset.
ESRI Evacuation Routes Demo
Build Network Dataset from Shapefile
Step 0: within ArcCatalog, check the Network Analyst Extension is enabled (Tools -> Extensions -> click Network Analyst)
Step 1: Navigate to the streets shapefile within ArcCatalog, right-click on it and choose New Network Dataset. Name the network dataset (Streets_ND)
Step 2: setup Network Connectivity. Define how features that participate in a network connect to each other. Default connectivity for a network dataset places all source
in one connectivity group and assigns all edge sources endpoint connectivity. Use the defaults, unless otherwise specified.
Step 3: Modify Connectivity with Elevation Data. Used to model bridges or tunnels. Use the defaults, unless otherwise specified.
Step 4: Model Turns in a Network. Global Turns are rules that can be set, such as all left turns have a delay of 15 seconds. Such a rule gives preference to right turning
movements. The advantage of Global Turns is that you do not need to create individual turn features for rules that apply to every turn in the network. Use the defaults,
unless otherwise specified.
Step 5: setup Network attributes. Used to control navigation. Impedances (Cost) over the network such as Distance, Time, Direction (one-way). You will need to add at
least one "Cost" (recommended is Length).
Step 6: Decide if you want to use driving directions.
Step 7: Wait as the Network Dataset is built. Can take up to 2 minutes for even datasets the size of a large city. Will have two new features the Network Dataset
(FILENAME_ND) and the Network Dataset Junctions (FILENAME_ND_Junctions)
Build Network Dataset in a Geodatabase Feature Dataset
Background
1. Can only create a Network Dataset (ND) within a Geodatabase Feature Dataset. Reason being, multiple feature types of points (ND Junctions) and lines (ND
Edges) must be stored within the Network Dataset. A standalone feature class in a geodatabase can only store one feature type (e.g. points or lines, not both).
2. Always upgrade the geodatabase in ArcCatalog. I had a problem with Network Analyst honoring the oneway streets. When the students upgraded the street
centerline geodatabase, this problem went away.
check the Geodatabase is updated by right clicking on the Geodatabase and selecting Properties... If the Upgrade Geodatabase button is available (not grayed out)
then click this button under the General tab to upgrade the geodatabase. Otherwise the Upgrade Status will say "This database matches the ArcGIS release you are
currently using"

## If the Geodatabase is NOT updated, then click Upgrade Geodatabase button

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

214 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## A quick tour of geodatabase upgrades - ArcGIS Resource Center, Desktop 10

Step 1: enable Network Analyst Extension
Within ArcCatalog, enable the Network Analyst Extension (Tools -> Extensions -> click Network Analyst) and ensure your using an updated geodatabase.
check the Network Analyst Extension is enabled (Tools -> Extensions -> click Network Analyst)

## Step 2: create a Network Dataset within a Geodatabase Feature Dataset

Within ArcCatalog, navigate within the geodatabase and right click in a blank area and select New -> Network Dataset... If your geodatabase contains multiple line
feature classes, will be prompted to select one for the network dataset.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

215 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Recommend using the Street Centerline Route layer (sclrouting_l feature class)
Step 3: setup Network Connectivity.
Defines how features that participate in a network connect to each other. Default connectivity for a network dataset places all source in one connectivity group and
assigns all edge sources endpoint connectivity. Use the defaults, unless otherwise specified.

Step 4: Modify Connectivity with Elevation/Level Data. Used to model bridges/overpasses or tunnels/underpasses. Information must be stored in "...a pair of integer
fields - one field for each end of the edge. If the fields are named either F_ELEV and T_ELEV or F_ZLEV and T_ZLEV, the new network dataset wizard will
automatically detect these fields." (Creating a Network Dataset - ArcGIS Resource Center, Desktop 10)
sclrouting_l has fields TELEV and FELEV which have values between 0 and 3

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

216 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step 5: Model Turns in a Network. Global Turns are rules that can be set, such as all left turns have a delay of 15 seconds. Such a rule gives preference to right turning
movements. The advantage of Global Turns is that you do not need to create individual turn features for rules that apply to every turn in the network. Use the defaults,
unless otherwise specified.
Can only enable turns at the time the network dataset is created

## About Global Turns - ArcGIS Resource Center, Desktop 10.

Establishing Global Turns - ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help
Step 6: setup Network Attributes. Used to control navigation. Impedances (Cost) over the network such as Distance, Time, Direction (one-way). Need to add at least one
Cost, recommend using Length.
"Restrictions can be identified for particular elements so that during an analysis, restricted elements cannot be traversed. For example, one-way streets can be
modeled with a restriction attribute, so they can only be traversed from one end to another and not in the reverse direction. In all cases, a restriction attribute is
defined using a Boolean data type." (ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Understanding the network attribute)
"Restriction attributes have a Boolean data type. Since a source element can be either restricted or traversable, it can be assigned a constant (restricted or
traversable)." (ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Types of Evaluators used by a Network)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

217 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Step 6: Network Attributes - oneway streets

"When a network dataset is created, Network Analyst searches through all sources for commonly used fields, such as Oneway. If it finds a Oneway field in any
source, it creates a Oneway network attribute, and assigns values for the relevant source based on field expressions."

"These expressions determine the permitted direction(s) of travel based on the text value in the Oneway field:
FT or F = Travel is only permitted in the digitized direction of the line feature (the from-to direction).
TF or T = Travel is only permitted against the digitized direction of the line feature (the to-from direction).
N = Travel is not permitted in either direction
Any other value = Travel is permitted in both directions."
see ArcGIS 10 - Types of Evaluators Used by a Network
Step 7: decide if you want to use driving directions
Step 8: wait as the Network Dataset is built. Will take around 2 minutes for even datasets the size of a large city. Will have two new features the Network Dataset
(sclrouting_ND) and the Network Dataset Junctions (sclrouting_ND_Junctions)

## Using Network Dataset in ArcMap to find Shortest Path

Step 0: basic setup

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

218 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

check the Network Analyst Extension is enabled (Tools -> Extensions -> click Network Analyst)

## ensure you already have a Network Dataset and add it to ArcMap

ensure you have the Network Analyst Toolbar on by just right clicking on a blank area of an existing toolbar and checking Network Analyst

Turn on the Network Analyst Window by clicking on the Network Analyst Window button on the Network Analyst toolbar.
Used to identify the which features to create or select (i.e. Stops, Routes or Barriers) using the Create Network Location Tool button

Step 1: create a new route. On the Network Analyst drop-down menu, click New Route. This should add a Route layer in the Table of Contents window and empty list of
Stops, Routes and Barriers categories in the Network Analyst Window.

Step 2: turn on Location Snapping. Different from snapping when in a edit session, Location Snapping is found on the Network Analyst toolbar, drop down menu
Options..., then click on the Location Snap Options tab to turn snapping on. This is helpful when attempting to place a barrier on an existing route.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

219 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step 3: using the Create Network Location Tool, select Stops from the Network Analyst Window button, then click two points in the Map Display that you want to
calculate the shortest path between.
Step 4: Add a barrier, just click Barriers(0) on the Network Analyst Window. Use the Create Network Location Tool to create barriers.

Step 5: find the path. Click the Solve button on the Network Analyst toolbar.
Network Analyst and Closest Facility
Using Network Analyst in ArcMap to find the Closest Facility:
Background
Consider that an accident occured at an intersection. Emergency response vehicles would have to arrive as soon as possible. There are many emergency response
facilities in Las Vegas, but which ones are the closest? Using Network Analyst, you can find the closest facilities.
Step 0: Basic Setup
check the Network Analyst Extension is enabled (Tools -> Extensions -> click Network Analyst)
ensure you already have a Network Dataset
ensure you have the Network Analyst Toolbar on. To add the network analyst toolbar, right click in the toolbar area.
Add the network dataset in ArcMap
Turn on the Network Analyst Window by clicking on the Network Analyst Window button on the Network Analyst toolbar
Used to identify the which features to create or select (i.e. Stops, Routes or Barriers) using the Create Network Location Tool button
Step 1: Create New Closest Facility.
On the Network Analyst toolbar, click the Network Analyst drop-down menu and click New Closest Facility. The Network Analyst Window now contains an
empty list of Facilities, Incidents, Routes and Barriers categories. The Table of Contents window should have a new Closest Facility analysis layer.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

220 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Step 2: Add the locations of the facilites to ArcMap (Add data).

Step 3: Right-click on "facilities" in the Network Analyst Window -> Load Locations. Select the facility data you added in Step 2.
Step 4: Using the Create Network Location Tool, select Incidents from the Network Analyst Window button, then click a point in the Map Display that you want to find
out where the closest facility is.
Step 5: You can add a barrier. Click Barriers(0) on the Network Analyst Window. Then use the Create Network Location Tool.
Step 6: If you want to find more than one location (or edit other options), Click the Layer Properties button in the Network Analyst Window, and under the analysis
settings tab, change the "facilities to find" to however many you would like.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

221 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step 7: Find the closest Facility. Click the Solve button on the Network Analyst toolbar.

## Find Optimal Order of Stops in a Route

Background: I'm able to enter several stops in Network Analyst and find the optimal route between them. I can even manually change the order of the stops by using the
Network Analyst Window. Problem is how do I make Network Analyst determine the Optimal Stop order?
Step 1: Open the Route Properties by either right clicking on the Route name in the ArcMap Table of Contents and selecting Properties or clicking the Route Properties
button on the Network Analyst Window
Step 2: click the Analysis Settings tab and check the Reorder Stops to Find Optimal Route checkbox

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

222 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step 3: solve the route again by clicking the Solve button. Now both the stop order and route between each stop is optimized
References
Make Route Layer (Network Analyst)

## Find Route - Routing Services with ArcGIS 10

"Even without an extension, ArcGIS Desktop provides route analysis capability through the Find Route dialog box. You can click the Find Route button on the ArcMap
Tools toolbar to open the dialog box. Yet the Find Route dialog box doesn't give you the full range of analysis options that the Network Analyst route analysis layer
provides." (ArcGIS Resource Center - Licensing and the Network Analyst extension)
Step 1: click the Find Route button on the Tools Toolbar

Step 2: click Options tab and select a routing service. This can be a file-based network dataset (SDC from StreetMap, shapefile, personal geodatabase, file geodatabase, or
SDE), an ArcGIS Online routing service, or an ArcGIS Server routing service. Recommend selecting North American Routing Service (ArcGIS Online)

## Step 3: click the Stops tab and select 2 points

click the white arrow button to the right of the Add Stop... button to manually add stops in the ArcMap display area. Then click the Find Route button.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

223 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Note, can limited to only 20 points when calculating the optimal service

## Step 3 optionally: type in an Address

on the Locations tab, type the address in the Single Line Input: 4505 s maryland pkwy then click Find button
list of possible matches is displayed, right click on the correct one and select Add as Stop to Find Route

## Step 4: click the Find Route button

Routing using ArcGIS Online
Background
What's new for route finding in ArcGIS 10
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - An overview of GIS Web map layers
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - About ArcGIS Online

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

224 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - What you can do with ArcGIS Online
"As an ArcGIS user, you can set up an account at ArcGIS Online. This allows you to publish geodatabases, maps, layers, and ArcGIS services at the ArcGIS
Online website. Each user is provided with a 1 GB workspace for storing and managing their information sets at this web site."
ArcGIS Online Quick Tour Video Series
Questions
How do you view the streets from the Network Analysis Route? It appears to line up with the ESRI_StreetMap_World_2D layer from ArcGIS Online.
Step 1: Add the street basemap layer
Note, ArcGIS Online will automatically reproject the online data into the assigned data frame coordinate system.
ArcMap Add Data and under the Look in drop down box, select GIS Servers

## select Use GIS Services then click the Next button

provide the ArcGIS Desktop URL: http://services.arcgisonline.com/arcgis/services and a password/login is NOT required. Click Ok.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

225 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

At the Add Data dialog box, double click the arcgis on services.arcgisonline.com. Then click ESRI_StreetMap_World_2D and finally click the Add button

Might get the Geographic Coordinate Systems Warning dialog box if your data frame already has coordinate system defined that is not GCS_WGS_1984. This
states the ESRI_StreetMap_World_2D data is in the world geographic coordinate system (Lat/Long - GCS_WGS_1984). Just click close to accept this warning
message.

Should get a map similar to this, just zoom into the UNLV campus

## Step 2: Add ArcGIS Routing Locator

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

226 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## same steps as Step 1

double click the arcgis on tasks.arcgisonline.com
double click the NetworkAnalysis folder

## double click ESRI_Route_NA

Step 3: create start/origin and end/destination of the proposed route
create two point graphics to show the origin and destination using the drawing toolbar

## Step 4: open StreetMap toolbar

right click on an existing toolbar and select StreetMap to open the toolbar
click the Find Route using online route services button on the StreetMap toolbar

select the graphics in the map display then click the Graphic(s) button on the Find Route dialog box

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

227 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Step 6: route options

click the Options tab and select Quickest Route vs. Shortest Route

## Step 7: solve the route

click the Find Route button to solve the shortest/quickest route between the locations

## Network Analyst and NAVTEQ Datasets

Issues
How do we use NAVTEQ NAVSTREETS to determine the quickest path? What fields have speed limit and/or travel time, traffic or some type of impedence.
Does NAVSTREETS have any attributes on intersections, such as restricted turning movements, signalized intersection, number of lanes, left turns, and so on.
How do we implement real time traffic information from traffic.com into ArcGIS?
Does traffic.com have info on lane closures due to construction, vehicle crashes, vehicles per hour, etc.?
How to build a Network Dataset from NAVTEQ data?
Does MapTP use the same NAVTEQ datasets such as NAVSTREETS?
How do you use NAVTEQ data in Synchro (www.trafficware.com) for network analysis?
Routing Services Vehicles to Smith's Stores
Background
We have the locations where to deliver products, the question is what is the optimal order to make these deliveries?
"A time window is the period between a start and end time in which a stop should be visted by a route. Time windows can be used to simulate a delivery scenario,
where each stop has a time range within which the delivery needs to take place, and there is a certain amount of time that needs to be spent at each stop. If arrival
does not take place at the stop within the allotted time window, a time window violation is reported in the driving directions. Time windows are defined for
individual stops on the Stop Properties dialog box." ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10: Time Windows
ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10: What are time windows?
Step 1: obtain a list of the Smith's Food and Drug Locations
Smith's Food and Drug Store Locations
Smith's Food and Drug Store Locations (shapefiles SmithsLocSPCS.zip
Step 2: geocode the Smith locations
right click on the worksheet and select Geocode Addresses from the content menu. Save as a shapefile or Geodatabase
Step 3: ArcCatalog Create a Network Dataset

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

228 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Need to enable the Network Analyst extension in ArcCatalog

see steps in Build Network Dataset in a Geodatabase Feature Dataset
see ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 - Building a network dataset in ArcMap
Step 4: enable the Network Analyst extension in ArcMap and open the Network Analyst toolbar
ArcMap: Customize Extensions check Network Analyst
right on a blank area of the toolbar and select Network Analyst to open the Network Analyst toolbar
click the Show the Network Analyst Window button on the Network Analyst toolbar
Network Analyst Toolbar: Network Analyst New Route
right click on Stops in the Network Analyst window and select Load Locations
select the SmithsLocSPCS point layer
Step 6: setup starting and ending stop and remove stops outside the Las Vegas Valley.
The first and last stop should be the Smith's at 2540 S Maryland Pkwy, intersection of Maryland Pkwy and Sahara. Just use the mouse to move the stop to the top,
then do a copy and paste and move to the bottom of the list. Now the first and last stop is 2540 S Maryland Pkwy.
remove routes in Pahrump NV (601 S Hwy 160) and Mesquite NV (350 N Sandhill Blvd) by right clicking on the stop in the Network Analyst window and
selecting delete.
Step 7: Route properties Reorder Stops
The Route Properties button is found on the top right corner of the Network Analyst Window.
Click the Analysis Settings tab
Check on the Reorder Stops to Find Optimal Route
Check on the Preserve First Stop
Check on the Preserve Last Stop
see ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10: Opening the network analysis Layer Properties dialog box
Step 8: Solve for Optimal Route
click on the Solve button on the Network Analyst toolbar
Should get results which look similar to this

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

229 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Step 9: export to KML

appears this cannot be done, see forum posting
posted an Enhancement Request at ArcGIS Ideas - Export Network Analyst routes, stops and symbology to KML
Using Network Analyst in ArcMap to solve a Vehicle Routing Problem
Background: You have decided to use your engineering experience to help the mailman plan the most efficient route. Using the Network Analyst in ArcMap, you can
solve a Vehicle Routing Problem. Copy the usual intro from 3 &4.
Step 1: With the current
Tips: C:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\Source\StreetCenterline was the personal geodatabase where most of the data was obtained. For the Closest facility, C:\gisdata\CrGeoDb
\Source\EmergencyResponse was the personal geodatabase used to obtain the locations of the fire stations.

How to Trace Vehicle Route Using GPS Data Based on Shortest Path
Global Positioning System (GPS) is a constellation of U.S. Government satellites providing the most advanced and accurate positioning and navigation service. GPS
applications include navigation, surveying, mapping, tracking/routing, monitoring, and precise time. It is widely used in Transportation, Industry, Science, and Recreation
& Sports.
GPS is also widely used in traffic study, such as vehicle tracking, vehicle navigation, data collection, travel time/speed study, and Vehicle Miles of Travel (VMT) study.
Example 1: Plot vehicle realtime GPS data on GIS map; Create street network feature, Trace the vehicle route by GPS data using ArcGIS Network Analysis Tool, and
Show the detailed vehicle route. After deriving the route, you could perform vehicle mileage study based on the route distance; and you could also perform travel
time/speed study based on the distance and time.
Step 1: Plot vehicle realtime GPS data. (Demo AVI)
Plot GPS data on the map. Please refer to Add x,y coordinate data to ArcMap.
Step 2: Create Las Vegas Street Network based on major streets. (Demo AVI)
Launch ArcCatalog.
Enable Network Analyst Extension. Tools->Extensions..., Open Extensions select box and select Network Analyst. (Demo AVI)
Select a folder and create a new Personal Geodatabase.
Double click to open the Geodatabase, Create a new Feature Class.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

230 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Import "sclmajor_l" into the Feature Class.

Double click to open the Feature Class, Create a new Network Dataset based on the "sclmajor_l" feature. Follow the New Network Dataset wizard steps to
create the Network.
Step 3: Add the created street network into ArcMap. (Demo AVI)
Step 4: Load Network Analyst Tool into ArcMap.
Enable Network Analyst Extension. Tools->Extensions..., Open Extensions select box and select Network Analyst.
Right click on any blank space of the toolbar, select Network Analyst Tool from the Context Menu.
Step 5: Create a new route.
Network Analyst -> New Route. A new route should be added in the TOC.
Click on the "Show/Hide Network Analyst Window" button on the Network Analyst Toolbar to show the Network Analyst Window
Right click on the Stops, select "Load Locations ...". In the dialog, select "VehicleGPSDataDemo Events", and sort field by STime field.
Step 7: Trace the vehicle route by GPS data using ArcGIS Network Analysis Tool.
Click "Solve" button on the Network Analyst Toolbar. A route should be traced out according to the vehicle GPS data based on the shortest path algorithm.
Step 8: Showing the detailed vehicle route
Click on the "Directions Window" button on the Network Analyst Toolbar, the Directions window should popup. It may take a while because the big amount
of GPS data points.
Example 2: General and public purpose: Find the shortest path for assigned origination and destination, and provide the drivers navigation guide, which is similar with
MapQuest. (Demo AVI)
Step 1: Create a new route.
Network Analyst -> New Route. A new route should be added in the TOC.
Step 2: Assign origination, destination and intermediate stops.
Click "Create Network Location Tool" button on the Network Analyst Toolbar.
Click on the street network map to select origination, destination and intermediate stops.
Click "Select/Move Network Location Tool" button on the Network Analyst Toolbar to adjust the locations on the map.
Step 3: Find the shortest path between the origination and destination.
Click "Solve" button on the Network Analyst Toolbar. A route should be traced out according to the assigned locations based on the shortest path algorithm.
Step 4: Create the navigation guide.
Click on the "Directions Window" button on the Network Analyst Toolbar, the Directions window should popup showing the navigation guide.
Data: Las Vegas Major Street Network.
Provides the ability of trip chaining, that is adding multiple destinations. Currently this cannot be done using Google Earth Finding Places and Directions.
click Get Directions button
A) enter 4505 S Maryland Pkwy, Las Vegas NV 89154
B) enter address of Kimley-Horn 2080 E Flamingo Rd #210, Las Vegas NV 89119
click Add Destination link, then fill in the address for India Palace, C) India Palace, Las Vegas, NV
click Get Directions
take a screen shot and upload to webcampus. Should look similar to this:

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

231 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

References
Google Maps - Driving Directions: Customize every step of your next trip

ESRI ArcGlobe
Questions
How do you display the lat/long graticule lines on the earth?
How do you replace the existing surface in ArcGlobe with a new TIN surface? For example, I'm designing a road through a mountain and want to show the amount of
material being cut.
Cannot be done. The ArcGlobe surface is read-only and cannot be clipped or merged with another surface. Even if you could locally edit the ArcGlobe surface, the
Note, Google Earth has the same problem and cannot display data below the Earth surface.
Spin Toolbar: What is the spin/rotate speed units?
Spin Toolbar: What do the stars rotate with the earth, shouldn't they stay fixed?
Spin Toolbar: Why does the spin direction change when I look at the south pole?
ArcGlobe Layer Types
Floating Type
Display independently of the globe surface and can be draped on discrete surfaces or derive their elevation from attributes or a constant value
Draped Type
draped layers use the globe surface as the source of their base heights
Elevation Type
show relief to the earth surface
Can move a layer from Floating Type to Draped Type by just dragging and dropping in the Table of Contents. Alternatively, right click on feature layer in the Table of
Contents and select from the Redefine Layer options

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

232 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Pan
Pan = hold mouse wheel down and move the mouse
Google Earth Pan = hold left mouse button down and move the mouse
Zoom In/Out
Zoom In = right click with the mouse and move the mouse up/away from you. Alternative, roll the mouse wheel forward/away from you
Google Earth Zoom In = roll the mouse wheel forward
Zoom Out = right click with the mouse and move the mouse down/towards you. Alternative, roll the mouse wheel backward/towards you
Google Earth Zoom Out = roll the mouse wheel backward
Note, using Tools -> Options, General Tab, have the option to change the default zoom to one that follows Google Earth by clicking Zooms In radio button

## View -> Toolbars -> Spin

ArcGlobe Labels
3D Vector Text/Billboarded Text
It appears only annotation layers can be displayed as 3D Vector Text
getting an error when attempting to display a geodatabase annotation layer. "Error opening feature class. The operation is not supported by this implementation."
Solution: ensure your geodatabase is updated to 9.3.1
As of 12 Aug 2011, I'm unable to label sclmajor line features in ArcGlobe even though the help says this is possible below.
"You can display labels in ArcGlobe by right-clicking a layer in the table of contents, clicking Properties, and checking Label features in this layer on the Labels

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

233 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

tab. Adjust the label properties to show the appropriate information and symbology." ESRI ArcGIS Help - Displaying Annotation Features in ArcGlobe
Steps to display billboard text
need geodatabase annotation layer, recommend using the ArcMap conversion of labels to annotation, see ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10:
add the annotation layer in ArcGlobe

open the Layer Properties, then click the Globe Display tab. Uncheck the Rasterize feature layer option.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

234 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Draped Text images

ArcGlobe and 3D symbols
"You can import Collaborative Design Activity (COLLADA) (.dae), OpenFlight 15.8 (.flt), SketchUp 6.0 (.skp), 3ds max (.3ds), or VRML 2.0 models (.wrl), or
Billboards (PNG, JPEG, BMP, TIFF, GIF, and so forth) as 3D symbols." (ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 Symbolizing points with 3D symbols)
ArcGlobe and Sun Position
"For 3D faces, such as multipatches or extruded polygons, sun lighting will apply shading to the surfaces of the 3D shape. Sun lighting will not dynamically add shading
to the 3D terrain." (ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 About 3D illumination in ArcGlobe)
Appears this doesn't cast a shadow like the hillshade command does on a DEM. Not sure what the purpose is.
ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 Setting the light source location in ArcGlobe
ArcGlobe Background Display Options - Fog
ArcGlobe table of contents, right click Globe layers and click Globe Properties. Click the Background tab, check Fog under the Environmental Settings and then click
Advanced to make the fog thicker or thinner.
ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10: Setting the background display options in ArcGlobe

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

235 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Google Web Elements - Maps Element
Using Google Maps API with JavaScript
Using Google Maps API with CSS and XHTML
Google Maps with a logo using Screen Overlay
Zoom to Extent of KML overlay
Geo Site Map - see Publishing on the GeoWeb by Keith Golden. Also see Submit Your Geo Content to Google

## Google Maps - My Maps

Background
Can import a KML, KMZ or GeoRSS data into your My Map account
Google Maps User Guide - Getting started with My Maps
10MB for MyMaps, 3MB for KMLs displayed on maps (see Pamela's guidelines on KML file size limitation)
My Maps Help Forum
Contact the Google Maps Support Team Suggest a feature for Maps
My Maps help
My Maps Known Issues Page
Video - Creating a Custom Map using My Maps
Google Lat Long Blog - news and notes by the Google Earth and Maps team
Issues
How do you use the Google Earth Style Templates in My Maps?
1. Cannot label features (placemark points, lines, polygons)
Google Earth can label points but the same KML file will not show any labels in Google Maps
Problem: a KML file which renders correctly in Google Earth may not render/display in Google Maps. Known issues
Unable to label a placemark, see issue 1612: Marker's label (tooltip)
Google Maps JavaScript API v3 - Label overlays?
Google APIs Documentation for KML - KML Elements Supported in Google Maps
2. Can only use 8 different point marker symbols in Google Maps
"The KML renderer only fetches approximately 8 icons per KML file, to avoid overloading servers we don't control. If you embed the icons inside your KMZ you
can render many more." Ben Appleton, Google Groups - Point issue in KmlLayer
Google Earth Icons by Mike Williams
How to display My Maps in Google Sites
Step 0: obtain a Google account and create a kml file
If using ArcGIS to create the KML file, Google Map will honor layer transparency and settings in the HTML Popup tab of the layer's properties. Following
figure shows the HTML popup window and a polygon with 50% transparency applied to it.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

236 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Note, each feature will have a record entry in the maps panel to the right of the map display. So if you have more than 10 features, it will start to get
cumbersome.
How do I display several kml files in a single Map?

## Step 3: click on the Create new map link

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

237 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step 4: click on the Import link to open the Import KML window. Click the Browse... button to upload a kml file stored locally or enter the URL of a kml file which is
available on the internet or a web server. The benefit of uploading the kml file is it is now on the Google Servers and thus should result in better performance.

## Step 6 open Google Sites and start editing a page

Step 7 Option A: Copy Map into Google Sites
click Link to obtain the URL and iframe HTML code for your My Map

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

238 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

click the Customize and preview embedded map link to open the Google maps customize window

copy the code in the Paste HTML to embed in website box to the Windows clipboard. This will then be pasted into the Google Sites webpage.

## click on My Map gadget and then select a map

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

239 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Step 8: upload any custom icons

When creating a KMZ file using the ArcGIS ArcToolbox Layer To KML tool, any custom point markers/symbols/icons are zipped in the KMZ file. Then you can
open this KMZ in Google Earth and all the symbology will be visible. Problem is Google My Maps doesn't preserve these symbols and you have to manually

Step 9: save the site and share with the world, see http://sites.google.com/site/cee668/
Editing My Maps
Title and Description for each element can be edited
Polygons - can edit border/line color, width and opacity as well as the fill color/shading and opacity

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

240 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

References
How can I get driving directions using Google Maps?

Google Web Elements - Maps Element
Benefits of Maps Element
Can add an initial placemark and set the initial view
Web Elements can only be created by Google
as of April 2010 Google Sites will give the following message

Upon testing in Firefox and IE, the Map Element is supported in Google Sites, that is the iframe HTML tag is NOT removed.
very limited customization, will have to use the Google Maps API for almost all customization and abandon the use of the Maps Element
Maps Element work with facebook or myspace? in the Google Web Elements Discussions Group
Example of Maps Element for UNLV

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

241 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Map data 2013 Google -

Both Google Earth and Maps AJAX API users are required to sign up for an API Key
"For most applications we recommend that you simply register your domain name. Your key will be valid for that domain, its subdomains, all URLs on hosts in those
domains, and all ports on those hosts." see How does the Google Maps APIs key system work
You cannot lookup your API key. If you forget it, then just create it again. "Keys are just tokens based on your Google Account and Domain, so recreating a key for the
same domain will be the same token." (Google Maps API group, post by Barry Hunter API map not showing under my maps
How to get a Google API Key
Step 3: enter the domain name where your going to be hosting the .html file which uses the Google Earth or Maps API. Agree to the Terms of Service.
Step 4: Results, will be given the API Key, should look similar to this

## Example API Key for http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen

ABQIAAAA1uq4vqBxopl1SMNB-F8rLBSHh3RDflKHKYaNCmjQpiQp30pHJRRzCw5UzGzLquOITWnpr8jEBN7woQ
Will I get an error message if I use a Maps API key from one domain (i.e. a different web site) and attempt to use it on a different domain (i.e. on my own webpage)? Yes,
this is what the error message will look like

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

242 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## How to publish GIS features on Google Maps and Google Earth

KML 2.2 is an official OGC Standard, see KML, the HTML of geographic content and KML: A new standard for sharing maps
Using KML files - KML ( Keyhole Markup Language ) is a file format used to display geographic data in an Earth browser, such as Google Earth, Google Maps, and
Google Maps for mobile. KML uses a tag-based structure with nested elements and attributes and is based on the XML standard (http://code.google.com/apis/kml
/documentation/). Below is a sample KML file showing UNLV location like this:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<Placemark>
<name>Simple placemark</name>
<Point>
<coordinates>-115.141783,36.107101,0</coordinates>
</Point>
</Placemark>
</kml>

## Generate KML files

Text editor : Create a KML file following the KML specification and format (KML documentation). The key element for creating KML files is obtaining the
control point coordinates which is easy for points, not to bad for lines, and a little more of a challenge for polygons.
XTools Pro : Extended tools for ArcGIS, which provide tool (30 days evaluation) to convert GIS features to KML directly ( XTools Pro -> Export Data to
KML). Below is the screenshot using this tool.

FME : FME is a very powerful tool for data transformation and conversion. It also can convert GIS features to KML files. There are two ways to do the
conversion.
(1) FME Universal Viewer. In FME Universal Viewer. open GIS shape file, Save Data as Google Earth KML file. The screenshot is below:

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

243 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

(2) FME Workbench. This software provides batch conversion which can easily convert a set of files using the same setup. In
FME Workbench, Add Source Dataset, Add Destination Dataset, Connect them, and do the conversion. Below is the screenshot of
using this tool.

"Export_to_KML" extension
Usage:
(2) Install: Double-click the batch file ExporttoKML_INSTALL.bat?to register exporttokml.dll and to add the appropriate registry keys. Open ArcMap,
then browse to Tools - Extensions and click on the checkbox next to the Export to KML?extension. Then browse to View - Toolbars and click the
Export to KML?toolbar to make it visible.
(3) Click on the Export to KML?on the Export to KML?toolbar, in the "Export to Google Earth KML" dialog, select the layers you want to export and
other export options.
(4) Google Earth will be opened to show the exported features.
Other third party tools.
Publish KML files : Let Google Maps know where your KML file is.
Create your own website using UNLV Computer Lab resourses: Create a directory public_html on the H: then create a file called index.html under this
Viewing KML files in Google Earth . (1) Double click your KML file; or (2) In Google Earth, File->Open, open your KML file.
Step 1: Obtain the Google Maps API Key for your domain if you don't have one.
the source file string. This webpage using Javascript and Google Map API to load your features data in KML file.
to a enhanced map webpage and Beginning Google Maps Applications with PHP and Ajax (From Novice to Professional) .
Step 1: Create a Google Mapplet file (.xml) follow the format specification (sample file);
Step 3: On that page, click on the "Add by URL", then inut your Mapplet file URL;
Step 4: Then go to maps.google.com, click on "My Maps" tab, you will see your Mapplet. Click on that, you will see the map showing on the right pane.
GeoSearch: How to Submit KML files to Google
Potter. Google indexing of XML post
Drive More Search Traffic to Your Maps API Site by Including KML Files in a Sitemap
Georgia Tech Stinger and Stop Locations by Russ.Clark@gatech.edu
OneMillionRevolutions.org - website showing triathlon races, course layout, animation of the route, profile view the course.
Hard copy maps - Musselman Triathlon
Browse kml icons: Google Earth icons

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

244 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Google Map KML Code Examples

KML Elements Supported in Google Maps it appears this feedvalidator.org is not up to date, getting error saying style tag is undefined kml element. The KML Reference.
How do I display a kml which has a custom icon?
Good example - see Sending KML files to Google Maps

## Bad example - uses styleUrl which is NOT supported in Google Maps

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

245 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>

<Placemark>
<name>Simple placemark</name>
<Point>
<coordinates>-115.141783,36.107101,0</coordinates>
</Point>
</Placemark>
</kml>

up in the Balloon help, not in the Search Results/Places Panel on the left side of the map. Also, Google Map and Earth have a built in feature which will convert a URL
into a hyperlink. This is ok if you want the end user to see the link but need to use the <A ...> anchor tag if you want to use a friendly name. Also, appears Google Map
will not convert a URL to a hyperlink if its contained in a HTML table.
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<Placemark>
<name>GIS Applications in Civil Engineering</name>
<description>
<![CDATA[
<A HREF="http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/" target=new">CEE 468/668 Homepage<A>
]]>
</description>
<Point>
<coordinates>-115.141306,36.110272,0</coordinates>
</Point>
</Placemark>
</kml>

How to change the Placemark symbol (download ExampleChangePlacemarks.kml or view in ExampleChangePlacemarks.kml in Google Map). Note, need to use a
Document tag, Style tag, and StyleUrl tag.
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<Document id="doc1">
<IconStyle>
<scale>1.1</scale>
<Icon>
</Icon>
</IconStyle>
</Style>
<Placemark>
<name>GIS Applications in Civil Engineering</name>
<description><![CDATA[
<A HREF="http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/" target=new>CEE 468/668 Homepage</A>
]]>
</description>
<Point>
<coordinates>-115.141306,36.110272,0</coordinates>
</Point>
</Placemark>
</Document>
</kml>

Use Google Earth to browse for icons which can be displayed in Google Maps. Step 1: click the Add Placemark button, Step 2: click the push-pin icon to bring up
the icon window, and Step 3: select an icon and will see the URL for the png image. This URL is what you add in the <styleUrl> tag

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

246 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

"If you make a change to your KML file, the old copy will be cached on the Google server for a while. Refreshing your browser's cache won't force Google to refresh
their cache. What you can do is to temporarily add an arbitrary parameter to the end of the url, like "?123", to make the Google cache think that it's different." (Google
Maps API Tutorial by Mike Williams)

width of static maps is 640
URL Parameters
format can be gif, jpg or png32

## Google Maps API version 3

The Google Maps Javascript API V3 - Basics
Google Maps Javascript API V3 Reference
KML Elements Supported in Google Maps
KMZ Files

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

247 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Google Groups - KML Developer Support - Getting Started with KML

Discussion Groups
How to set a Google Maps Property
Step 1. use the MVCObject class set Method
Step 2. select a property to assign/set a value to, for example the KmlLayerOptions object and preserveViewport property

Full example

## How to set a collection of values in a Google Maps Property

Step 1. use the MVCObject class setValues Method
Step 2. select a property to assign/set a value to, for example the KmlLayerOptions object and preserveViewport property
use a colon : as the delimiter between a key and value
use a comma , as the delimiter between multiple key-value pairs
enclose the entire key-value pairs in curly brackets {}

Full example

Using Google Maps API with JavaScript
Variable Scope
Global variables: defined outside of a function
Local variables: defined within a function.
recommend declaring all variables with var
"Within the body of a function, a local variable takes precedence over a global variable with the same name. If you declare a local variable or function parameter
with the same name as a global variable, you effectively "hide" the global variable." (JavaScript The Definitive Guide, 3rd Edition, by David Flanagan, p. 54)
Example
Working - Toggle KML map variable is defined as a global variable
Not Working - Toggle KML because the map var is being declared again within the function, so it is a local variable. The Toggle KML button doesn't work
because the map variable is out of scope.
Using Google Maps API with CSS and XHTML
How do I embed Google Maps API in my web page that will resize when my web browser viewport resizes? That is, I don't want a fixed size Google Map window that is
say 300px by 300px but instead I want it liquid, that is it flows to the size of the web browser.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

248 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

"As frequently happens in web design, Internet Explorer presents certain challenges for laying out pages with Google Maps. In particular, IE requires additional
'help' for determining the height of page elements; it doesn't automatically pick up on the size of Google Maps' dynamic XHTML. This is why the html and body
tags in Listing 2-2 need height:100% in their CSS; without those rules IE wouldn't know how tall to render elements. In general, your map container always needs
to have an explicit height supplied to it. If you have a map that works fine in other browsers but doesn't display at all in IE, this is the first thing to look for."
(Beginning Google Maps Mapshups with Mapplets, KML, and GeoRSS by Sterling Udell, p. 13)
I'm having luck using position fixed or absolute with the Google Map API and the XHTML Division tags <div>. When I use static or relative positioning, then the
/* tag selector ID for Google Map API */ #contentMap {
position: absolute;
/* these offset properties can left: 1px;
top: 1px;
right: 1px;
bottom: 1px;
}
Solution
uses CSS position:absolute
see comment by russell.paul in the Google Maps API Discussion Group - Percentage Size of Maps? and Google Maps CSS
Updated Local Search Control used in brand new GoogleBar
Introducing... the GoogleBar! by Mike Perrow with Maps API Team
It appears Google Earth doesn't support the Google Search Bar as of June 2009 and it is an enhancement requestion Google Search Bar for Earth API
Example
Example showing the older Google Search Bar with the scale bar relocated, a custom logo using the screen overlay and a resizable <div> element. Tested with
FireFox 3, IE 6, IE 8. divGoogleBarScreenOverlayLogoFullPageMaps.html
Problem, when I resize the web browser window, the scale bar is written on top of the Google Search Bar.
To add a scale bar, see Pamela Fox's Tutorial: Creating Your First Map
see Google Maps API Group - How to position the GScaleControl() control
GControlAnchor
G_ANCHOR_TOP_RIGHT
G_ANCHOR_TOP_LEFT
G_ANCHOR_BOTTOM_RIGHT
G_ANCHOR_BOTTOM_LEFT
GSize
GSize(width:Number, height:Number)
Google Map and logos using Screen Overlay
GScreenOverlay displays a rectangular image overlay on the map whose position remains fixed as the viewport changes
Beginning Google Maps Mashups with Mapplets, KML, and GeoRSS p. 166 // create a screen overlay var imgLogo = new GScreenOverlay( 'http://faculty.unlv.edu
/jensen/html/GoogleEarth/img/GISEngineeringLogo.png', // image URL new GScreenPoint(0.5, 0.5, 'fraction', 'fraction'), // screen offset new GScreenPoint(11, 12,
'pixel', 'pixel'), // overlay offset new GScreenSize(24, 24, 'pixel', 'pixel') // overlay size ); map.addOverlay(imgLogo);
Problems
How do I add a KML file to Google Maps? I have a list of HOAs in Southern Nevada. I would like to have a button, hyperlink or checkbox next to the name of the
HOA in the list of HOAs. Once the button is clicked, then a KML of that HOA boundary is added to Google Maps and the map is zoomed to the extent of the HOA
boundary. I still want to be able to see other KML files as well. I would like the ability to toggle on/off the HOA boundaries.
Zoom and Center the map to fit the KML bounds
It appears GGeoXml will not automatically zoom to the extent of the KML. Will need to use 3rd party parsers or pre-compute the location and zoom level manually
and then hard code it on your map. (see Google Groups Maps API - Viewport Center)
map.setCenter(bounds.getCenter(),map.getBoundsZoomLevel(bounds));
Google Maps API Tutorial by Mike Williams - Fitting the map to the data
Google Maps API Group - How to set map zoom level based on GGeoXml or GPolygon
References
Google Maps API Examples - Accessing and Displaying KML Data
Santa Barbara Fires
Mike William's Tutorial on GgeoXml - Map of USA with clickable polygons
Zoom to Extent of KML overlay
gotoDefaultViewport(map:GMap2) - sets the map's viewport to the default viewport of the XML file.
Example - http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/kml/examples/geoxml-kml-gotodefaultviewport.htm
Google Maps API Issue - setcenter based on kml loaded with GGeoXml
var kml = 'http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/websites/hoamaps.com/kml/test01.kmz'; var geokml = new GGeoXml(kml); map.addOverlay(geokml);

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

249 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## geokml.gotoDefaultViewport(map); // will zoom to the default viewport of the kml file

Newton Chan with Foothill College. Email: channewton@fhda.edu, Newton's Faculty Page. Developed kisdata.org and openspace.org
Sterling Udell, email sterling.udell@gmail.com, www.sterlingudell.com
Lance Alan Dyas, email: lancelot@inetnebr.com. GeoXml hosted at http://code.google.com/p/geoxml/
Launch of Google Maps API version 3
Google Maps API Tutorial by Mike Williams
Using Debugging Tools with the Google Maps API by Pamela Fox with Google Geo APIs Team
Google Geo Developers Blog. The Maps API Blog is retired
Mickey Kataria, Product Manager for Google Maps APIs
Roman Nurik - api.roman.public@gmail.com
Knees Deep in the Earth API
Discussion Group: Google Earth Browser Plugin, Roman Nurik is the monitor, he is familar with JavaScript and the Google Earth API
Google Geo Developer Services, March 12, 2008: Dynamic KML Creation

Quick & Dirty KML Creation by Mano Marks and Pamela Fox

Google Developer Days in Japan - Mano shows web browser running 4 instances of Google Earth Plugin, Tokyo Population Animation as polygon heights

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

250 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Lior Ron, Geo Search. Wants to expand Geo Search to read header tags in GeoTIFF images. Info on Geosite maps see Google Webmaster Central to help increase traffic
David Day from Sydney Austraila
Bent Hagemark
Google Developers Day US - KML on Earth

## Michael Weiss-Malik, KML Product Manager

Ben Appleton with the KML team, email: appleton@google.com
kml TimePrimitives (TimeStamp and TimeSpan) not available in Google Earth Plugin. TimeBar is also not available. See Discussion Group: TimeSpamp
KML Developer Support Group
Web logs (blogs)
Google I/O Fireside Chat Photo: left to right: Ben Appleton (KML), Pamela (Maps API), (My Maps), ?, ?, ?
Google Lat Long Blog - weblog giving news and notes by the Google Earth and Maps team

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

251 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Google Earth Plugin - Interactive Samples
Google I/O Session Videos and Slides, 2008
Basic UNLV example
Creating Custom Maps by John Coryat. YouTube!
Quick & Dirty KML Creation by Mano Marks and Pamela Fox. YouTube!
Mano Marks KML Code Labs
Exercises
1. Following exercises require
Internet Connection
Google Earth Plugin installed (recommend using FireFox web browser)
text editor (e.g. UltraEdit)
2. Create a webpage which zooms to the UNLV campus. Ensure the navigation controls, Overview Map, Status Bar, and Country Boarders are displayed. (Solution)
see <LOOKAT> KML tag
function initCB(object) {
// this function sets the initial view of Google Earth Plugin
ge = object;
ge.getWindow().setVisibility(true);
//
// display navigation control tool in the upper right corner of Earth Plugin
// how to use, see http://earth.google.com/userguide/v4/#navcontrols
// ge.getNavigationControl().setVisibility(true); // doesn't work in MSIE
// workaround by Mickey Mellen, see
navControl.setVisibility(ge.VISIBILITY_SHOW);
//
// display overview map in upper left corner of Earth Plugin
// how to use, see http://earth.google.com/userguide/v4/ug_3dviewer.html#overviewwindow
ge.getOptions().setOverviewMapVisibility(true);
//
// display status bar (lat/long and elev) bottom of Earth Plugin
// altitude and elevation relative to Mean Sea Level
ge.getOptions().setStatusBarVisibility(true);
// Moving the Camera, see
var la = ge.getView().copyAsLookAt(ge.ALTITUDE_RELATIVE_TO_GROUND);
// getView.setAbstractView(lat, long, ?, altitude relative to ground, ?, tilt, altitude)
var lat = 36.110272;
var long = -115.141306;
var tilt = 0 // tilt=0 birds eye view, tilt=90 horizon view as person on the ground
var altitude = 2000 // appears to default to units of feet
la.set(lat, long, 0, ge.ALTITUDE_RELATIVE_TO_GROUND, 0, tilt, altitude);
ge.getView().setAbstractView(la);
//
// Managing Buildings Terrain, Roads, and Boundaries
ge.getLayerRoot().enableLayerById(ge.LAYER_BORDERS, true);
ge.getLayerRoot().enableLayerById(ge.LAYER_BUILDINGS, true);
}

3. Create a webpage which loads/fetches and zooms to the extent of a KML file. (Solution)
function initCB(object) {
// this function sets the initial view of Google Earth Plugin
ge = object;
ge.getWindow().setVisibility(true);
//
// display navigation control tool in the upper right corner of Earth Plugin
// how to use, see http://earth.google.com/userguide/v4/#navcontrols
// ge.getNavigationControl().setVisibility(true); // doesn't work in MSIE
// workaround by Mickey Mellen, see
navControl.setVisibility(ge.VISIBILITY_SHOW);
//
// copied from Barry Hunter, see
//
// zoom to the extents of the KML file
//
// to remove a networkLink, see post by sylehc
}

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

252 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## NAVTEQ Contacts and Support

MapTP Topics
MapTP Background
MapTP AJAX API
MapTP Java Applet
MapTP AJAX API Examples
Setting the Inital Zoom Extent of MapTP
MapTP and Adding a Company Logo as a Screen Overlay
MapTP and Setting Map Types - Tiles
MapTP Layers
MapTP and Searching for a Point of Interest (POI)
MapTP and Geocoding
MapTP and Routing
MapTP and Apache
MapTP WMS
MapTP WMS in ESRI ArcMap
MapTP WMS in Civil3D 2009
MapTP and PHP
MapTP and PostgreSQL
Learning Modules
Module02 - Hello Earth in MapTP

NAVTEQ Contacts

NAVTEQ
NAVTEQ Developers Web Log - http://nn4d.blogspot.com
As of March 2009, Google Earth/Map no longer uses the NAVTEQ data but exclusively uses TeleAtlas data. According to Adam Grabowski, the TeleAtlas data isn't as
accurate as the NAVTEQ data.
NavTeq Network for Developers - username: jjensen password: normal tech support contact developersupport@navteq.com
ESRI ELA Program with NAVTEQ
NAVTEQ Las Vegas Employees
Benee Robinson, benee.robinson@navteq.com
Joey Hanson, joey.hanson@navteq.com
david.scibor@navteq.com
chris.ferrara@navteq.com
david.stearns@navteq.com
Jeff Wagner, email: jeff.wagner@navteq.com - incharge of the NAVTEQ Webinar Topics
GIS People at NAVTEQ
Greg Rose, GIS Technical Consultant for NAVTEQ (email: gregory.rose@navteq.com). Knows web mapping "mash-ups" and creating 3D buildings for Google
Earth. Teaches the Google Earth Workshop at City College of San Francisco.
Dong Sun, dong.sun@navteq.com
Steve Si, steven.si@navteq.com. Works with developers to build LBS applications for mobile devices. Blog by Steven Si. Voice: 312-330-1476
Ejaz Iqbal, NAVTEQ Technical Consultant. Voice: 312-894-3902 Blog by Ejaz Iqbal NAVSTREETS developer, ejaz.iqbal@navteq.com,
Working_with_NAVSTREETS.wmv
Michael Moore, NAVTEQ Technical Consultant. Specializes in the mobile development
Skip Parker, skip.parker@navteq.com, 3508 Dartmouth, Plano TX 75075, office: (972) 964-9454. NATEQ Sales Contacts
Andrew Calkins, Senior Software Engineer with NAVTEQ. Email: andrew.calkins@navteq.com, voice: 312-894-7541, fax: 312-894-8667.
NAVTEQ North America, LLC
425 W Randolph Str
Chicago, Illinois 60606 USA
works in Customer Program Management (CPM) and provides tech support with MapTP Zone
Marc Naddell, Vice President - Partner and Developer Programs. Email: focusgroup@navteq.com
Catherine Ford, Program Manager - Partner and Developer Program. Email: catherind.ford@navteq.com, Work: 408-617-5023, Mobile: 312-206-7139, organized the
NAVTEQ Traffic Focus Group meeting
Adam Grabowski, Manager - Resources and Community Services, Email: adam.grabowski@navteq.com, voice: 312-894-7417, mobile: 847-208-3843, NAVTEQ
Corporation, 425 W Randolph, Chicago Illinois 60606 Working on developing a University Program for the NAVTEQ data
Discuss developing some curriculum based on NavTeq Data. Request a copy the Premium NAVTEQ Data (has Points of Interest - POI), will develop the product
over the summer. Any potential funding available? NAVTEQ Product catalog request for what would be interesting for new curriculum
Discuss having Adam as a guest speaker at UNLV. Yes, would also like to bring a technical lead.
Demo of field collection
opportunities for students
Request the NAVTEQ Premium Data. Desire to have the data in a File Geodatabase with the Network Dataset already created.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

253 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Dong Sun is looking into this, lives in San Francisco, formerly lived in Las Vegas, GIS expert.
Desire to have all the ArcMap map document symbols and styles
Discuss the option for a University competition, similar to the Global LBS Challenge available on the commercial end.
Evaluating the idea for University track
Getting NavTEQ certification
Employment opportunities
Discuss adding KML files to MapTP
Greg Rose is looking into this, lives in San Francisco
Discuss adding 3D Buildings to NAVTEQ data
3D City Models and Landmarks
available for NN4D.com website
How to access data from Traffic.com
Sean and Andrew from the demo
Assistance on developing NAVTEQ Map Data API mobile application on Android
Proposal to create NAVTEQ Map Data with Android API, proposal by end of the week, Independent Study project, create demo application, pedistratian
routing, demo application for all the NAVTEQ data, then developers can see the demo working
Support NAVTEQ for Developers
NAVTEQ Forums
Email: developersupport@navteq.com
MapTP Background
MapTP uses the word logo to represent a point symbol (GIS) and placemarker (Google Earth). It does not mean a branding image for your company.
Stephanie.bhesania@navteq.com is part of the German MapTP team.
MapTP Web Services
NAVTEQ purchased Mapsolute, a company based in Germany
MapTP Web Map Server 1.0 is Mapsolute's implementation of the WMS standard.
Uses WGS84 coordinate system (EPSG:4326) or GCS_WGS_1984 in ESRI ArcMap.

## MapTP AJAX API

Register for MapTP AJAX API Key. API Key is 35 characters long.
My Applications - associate a Web URL to the API Key (default alias is localhost)
Also used to switch version of AJAX API is associated with the API key, for example from version 2.1 to version 2.3. See Switch to MapTP AJAX API
Version 2.3
API KEY: FJXfac010143c0f7a768f0b08681d379X17
MapTP AJAX API
Reference
API Reference Version 2.3
How to Debug the MapTP AJAX API
MapTP AJAX API Examples
MapTP AJAX API 2.3 - Hello World - MapTP at UNLV HelloWorld.html example
MapTP AJAX API 2.3 - Map Controls - MapTP at UNLV MapControls.html example MapTP coordinates
MapTP AJAX API 2.3 - Location - MapTP at UNLV location.html example
Setting Initial Zoom Extent of MapTP
To set the center of the map for MapTP, that is the initial zoom extents
Note, the JavaScript function goMap24() is called by the Body element fires its onLoad event. The goMap24() function then calls the map24ApiLoaded function.
This is where we need to add our JavaScript. In other words, the best place for this call is in the callback function map24ApiLoaded() after the loading of the API
(goMap24()) is completed
// UNLV Campus Map24.MapApplication.center( {Longitude:-6908.5, Latitude:2166.6, MinimumWidth: 4500} );
MapTP AJAX API Example - divLogoHeaderLeftNavFullPageMapTPcenterUNLV.html
MapTP and Adding a Company Logo as a Screen Overlay
The AJAX API 2.3 shows the NAVTEQ logo on the bottom right corner of the Java Applet. It behaves like a screen overlay, that is it is fixed in a given location no
matter what the scale of the map is. According to Stephanie it is not possible to use CSS with a z-index to overlay a logo on top of the MapTP Java Applet. So, one
must use static MapTP or the MapTP developers have to give us the ability to replace the NAVTEQ logo with a company logo (this is not likely to happen).
Steven Si is checking into how to do this. Sent email to Steven and Stephanie on 1 Sept 2009 to find the status.
Note, the Java Applet will over-write the CSS layout
Example using MapTP AJAX API MapTP AJAX API - Java Applet. Applet will overlay on top of the CSS z-index logo divLogoFullPageMapTP.html
MapTP AJAX API - Static View. Supports the CSS z-index logo divLogoFullPageMapTPstatic.html

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

254 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

MapTP AJAX API 2.3 contains support for KML. This is part of the GeoFormatsService which makes use of a correspondent Webservice which transfers the KML
syntax into MRC commands.
Map24.GeoFormatsService Demo
Web Service interface description (WSDL) for the MapTP GeoFormats Service that is used for reading KML content and displaying it on MapTP http://maptp26.map24.com/map24/webservices1.5?wsdl=GeoformatsService
Checking with Stephanie to determine (22 June 2009) if MapTP supports GeoXML and KML
4 Sept 2009 - Stephanie is working on creating a simple example with JavaScript to read KML files and display the content on MapTP
MapTP and Setting Map Types - Tiles
"The tiles component is a map component for enabling the satelitte view of the map. If the satellite view is enabled, instead of a map an aerial or satellite image of
the geographic area is shown. The tiles component also offers a hybrid view that shows the streets and cities of the normal map view on top of the aerial or satellite
image. Note: If you want to use the tiles component in your mapping application you need a license for using the Map24 Tiles Service." MapTP - The Tiles
Component
"If you have a license for using the Map24 Tiles Service, you can enable the satellite view with a ControlComponent command. The Control field must be set to
SHOW and the Component field must be set to TILES.
Additional Map Types/Modes - Map, Hybrid and Satellite (either aerial photo or satellite image)
Requires
MapTP - The Tiles Component
Examples
MapTP AJAX API 2.3 - Set Different Tile Modes for the Static Map
Tutorials - Location shows 3 map types (Map, Hybrid, and Satellite)
Map TP Demo Page
MapTP Layers
MapTP AJAX API 2.3 - Control Map Layer
Example of Map Layer
It appears these layers (Car Service, Parking, Smaller Roads, Transportations, and Restaurants) are not available for Las Vegas NV
MapTP and Searching for a Point of Interest (POI)
How do you search for a point of interest (POI)?
Stephanie is checking with the developers on a built-in search bar (3 Sept 2009)
MapTP and Geocoding
Questions
MapTP AJAX API 2.3 - Geocoding Basics
Geocoding Example
MapTP and Routing
Routing - Auto vs. Pedistrian
MapTP AJAX API 2.3 - Routing Basics
Example - calculate route between two points
Draggable Routing
Examples
Routing Basics on UNLV web server. Copied code from NN4D MapTP AJAX API 2.3 - Routing Basics
Wishlist
Emailed Stephanie on 1 Sept 2009, requested example using the Map24.Coordinate by selecting two points on the map and have MapTP return the route
between them.
Fleet Management
Use MapTP to track the GPS enabled phone. This is a much better system than @Road where a GPS device had to be installed in the vehicle.
Would like to push work orders to the phone
Would like the phone to be able to send pictures showing the results of the work order
Mobile Phone
don't recommend the MapTP Mobile Client API, since this is highly complex and developing with this API requires a lot of support from MapTP
Almost all customers use the MapTP Component Interface (CI)

## MapTP and Apache

References
Getting a Map on a Web Page in Five Minutes: Easy Steps to Using MapTP AJAX API by Steven.Si@navteq.com gives instructions on installing Apache
Web Server. Alternative download of Getting a Map on a Web Page in Five Minutes
NAVTEQ Webinar: Setting up a Test Environment for Applications Using MapTP AJAX API without a webpage or website by Steven.Si@navteq.com
"When a student registers for the FREE MapTP AJAX API Key, the registration page will ask for the IP address that the HTML page will reside at. If
the student has a website or web page, he/she can type in the IP address or the site address. For students who dont have a web page or website, they
can simply type in a arbitrary web address. Besides the IP address or web address, the localhost (127.0.0.1) is also setup with the FREE Key by default
during the registration. The localhost is a convenient way for testing, especially for students who dont have a web page or web address. Students who
have webpage can use the localhost as an alternative, rather than upload the HTML file to the web server during debug. For using the localhost, a Web
Server needs to be installed on desktop or laptop. Thats why we use the Apache as an example" (Steven.Si@navteq.com)

MapTP WMS

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

255 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

requests to MapTP WMS 1.0 must be authenticated using the Map24 ID. The Map24 ID is a customer identification and provided to you by Mapsolute when registering
as a customer
To get a new 30-day registration, visit admin.map24.com
Application Key: WSE000222200 WSE000221793
Directory URL: http://maptp.gisengineering.com
Server URL: http://maptp27.map24.com/map24/webservices1.5?mid=WSE000222200&SERVICE=WMS&REQUEST=GetCapabilities&VERSION=1.1.1
Server URL: http://maptp27.map24.com/map24/webservices1.5?mid=WSE000221793&SERVICE=WMS&REQUEST=GetCapabilities&VERSION=1.1.1
http://maptp12.map24.com/map24/webservices1.5?mid=WSE000221793&SERVICE=WMS&REQUEST=GetCapabilities&VERSION=1.1.1
MapTP Web Map Server 1.0 User's Guide
NAVTEQ MapTP WMS in ESRI ArcMap
As of 23 April 2009, when Add WMS Server using the Default version, I get a Connection Error - Unspecified error message. If I change the Version to 1.1.1 (only
works for this version) and click the Get Layers button, it appears to work. Note, I don't see any features from the WMS Server in the ArcMap Display window.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

256 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## ArcGIS Server 9.3 Radically simplifies Users Experience by Jeff Wagner

NAVTEQ MapTP WMS in Google Earth
Step 1: open the Google Earth Desktop Application and zoom to an area of interest. Recommend zooming into a neighborhood instead of at the city level.
Step 3: click the Refresh tab, then click the WMS Parameters button
Step 4: select any WMS Server from the drop down list, then click the Edit... button.
Step 5: paste in the MapTP URL, http://maptp27.map24.com/map24/webservices1.5?mid=WSE000222200&SERVICE=WMS&REQUEST=GetCapabilities&
VERSION=1.1.1
Step 6: select the [T] ALL from the transparent layers list on the left, then Add, click OK, click OK
Step 7: wait for about 5 seconds, then the ALL layer from the MapTP WMS server should show up on Google Earth. Note, as of 5 June 2009, the graphic has
several diagonal white lines running across it. So it appears to be a bug with MapTP.
NAVTEQ MapTP WMS in Civil3D 2009
Civil3D will display MapTP WMS layers like Google Earth, that is have the bug of the white diagonal lines and secondly, need to wait about 5 seconds after each
zoom/pan for the image to update
see notes on Civil3D and WMS Servers
NAVTEQ MapTP AJAX API
Map24 AJAX API Application key
Directory URL: http://maptp.gisengineering.com
Application Key: FJX6265ef6c1094c09097ee76f740100X17
Directory URL: http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/html/CSS/maptp/
Application Key: FJXfac010143c0f7a768f0b08681d379X17
MapTP or Map24, what is the correct name? MapTP is the correct name and NAVTEQ is in the process of removing all references to Map24 from the
documentation and API.
MapTP AJAX API uses either Static View or Java Applet View
Java Applet View requires the client to have the Java Runtime Environment installed.
MapTP and PHP
Getting Started with MapTP Web Service PHP5 by Dong Sun
Getting_started_MapTP_Web_Service_PHP5_0309ds.wmv
MapTP and PostgreSQL
Using NAVTEQ RDF core POI with MapTP and PostgreSQL by Dong Sun Thursday, May 28, 2009 at 11am CST. Meeting URL https://www.livemeeting.com
/cc/navteq/join meeting ID: F57WJH meeting Key: Fr6\$:-h
MapTP Java Applet
NAVTEQ MapTP Maplet User's Guide
Need to Install Java if you don't see the map
NAVTEQ Video
MapTP
MapTP Interactive Map (vector streaming) vs MapTP Static Map
MapTP Interactive Map (vector streaming) requires a Java client install. Can do a 3D view like Google Earth.
MapTP Static Map serves up static GIF images, good for mobile users
MapTP supports geocoding using fuzzy search. Also supports reverse geocoding.
MapTP allows you to change color of symbology
MapTP supports routing (1. basic routing, 2. routing with 'via points', 3. routing options, and 4. select start and destination)
MapTP supports layer control to turn on/off layers
MapTP supports HTML Objects, similar to Balloon Descriptors in Google Earth
MapTP Video Tutorials
Converting Shapefiles to KML
Mobile
Mobile Development Basics - Hello World by Mike Moore
MapTP and NN4D Challenge
I Took this on my phone
MapTP Curriculum
Audience
Transportation Engineers - vehicle routing, ITS, mobile application, Fleet Tracking (whitepaper)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

257 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

"NAVTEQ provides a fleet mapping demo application that simulates the vehicle tracking features described under Detailed Location Information and
Traffic Message Channel (TMC) is a digital service for sending traffic information to MapTP
Mobile Client is based on the MapTP Component Interface (MapTP CI) for Symbian S60 or a .NET component
Web Designers and Programmers - MapTP
GIS - NAVSTREETS, Showcase Cities
Computer Science - mobile applications,
Semester Courses
Fleet Management
Augment Existing Courses

How to get Google Earth Pro
3D Viewer Window
Status Bar
Side Bar Panels
Search Panel
Fly To Tab
Directions Tab
Places Panel
Layers Panel
Toolbar Buttons
Display Side Bar Button
How to Create a Point (Placemark)
How to Edit a Point (Placemark)
How to Create a 3D Point (Placemark)
How to change the Point Symbol
How to Create a Point from a Coordinate
How to Create a Polygon
How to Edit a Polygon
How to Create a Line
WMS Image Overlays
Record a Tour Button
Show Historical Imagery Button
Display Sunlight Button
View Heavenly Objects Button (Sky, Moon, Mars)
Measure Button (Measure Tool - Ruler)
Email Button
Print Button
Import Data into Google Earth Pro
Import .csv files
Import ESRI shapefiles, .shp
Import GeoTIFF images, .tif/.tfw
Export Data out of Google Earth Export/Save As
KML
How to use KML/KMZ files
How to create a simple web page under your UNLV account
Tables Window

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

258 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Suggest a feature for Google Earth
Make buildings and see them in Google Earth
Self-paced Tutorials - Introduction to SketchUp
How to obtain Google Earth Pro
Google Earth Pro Grants for Educators
Maps and Earth Grants for Non-profits
User: jeffery.jensen@unlv.edu
Created in 2001 by a company called Keyhole. At first their Earth browser was known as Earth Viewer. Keyhole also created a new data format called KML
(Keyhole Markup Language) to display data on top of the Earth browser.
3D data is displayed as longitude (x), latitude (y), and altitude (z)

## Benefits of Google Earth KML files

Google Earth is free for non-commercial uses. Easily add a .kml file as a layer over the rich photos of the virtual earth model
Can easily turn on/off layers in Google Earth. Must write HTML and JavaScript code to turn on/off layers in Google Earth Plugin.
Disadvantages - when distributing the .kml file, the end user gets all the data, not the same when using Internet Mapping products like MapGuide where the end
user only gets a flat image of the data. Google Earth will stream the tiled aerial imagery, but doesn't do that with .kml.

Google Earth 5.2 Released on 14 June 2010 (see Google Earth Blog)

## Google Earth 3D Viewer Window

How to Navigate in Google Earth and Earth Plugin

Rotate
Button is made up of 2 tools - rotate and tilt (look joystick)
Click the North-up button (N) reset the 3D view so that north is at the top of the screen
Click and drag on the rotate ring to rotate your 3D view.
Hold the wheel mouse down and move it left or right to rotate
Shift + left arrow will rotate the 3D view clockwise
Shift + right arrow will rotate the 3D view counter-clockwise
shift-arrow keys to rotate
n rotates view so that north is up
r restore tilt and compass view to default
Tilt (Look joystick)
click the upper (north) arrow to tilt up to the sky

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

259 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

click the lower (south) arrow to tilt down towards the ground
will tilt 180 degrees from straight up into the sky to looking straight down at the ground
Click and Hold the wheel mouse down, then move the mouse backward/towards you or forward/away from from you to tilt
u reset tilt to top-down (a.k.a. up) mode
r restore tilt and compass view to default
Pan
Click the direction arrows to pan the 3D view in that direction
Hold the left mouse button down and drag to pan
arrow keys on the keyboard to pan (see Google Earth Keyboard Controls)
Zoom
Double click a location on the Earth with the mouse to zoom into it
Micro-Zoom: to zoom in smaller increments, hold the Alt key down while rotating the wheel mouse
Drift Continuously across the Earth
Hold the left mouse button down, move the mouse then release
To stop the drifting, just click once on the 3D view with the mouse
Zoom to Feature - double click the placemark found under the Places panel to zoom to that feature/placemark.
Ctrl+Left Mouse Click - will bring up the Balloon Descriptor for a polygon feature in Google Earth and Google Earth Plugin. Otherwise you need a
<MultiGeometry> element which has both a polygon and the information point icon.

## Google Earth Status Bar and Viewing Preferences

Status bar shows the coorinate (Lat/Long or UTM), elevation, imagery date and streaming status
To turn on/off the status bar (View -> Status Bar)
To change Lat/Long display format or see UTM coordinates in the status bar, use Tools -> Options... -> 3D View Tab

## Reference, see Google Earth User Guide - Viewing Preferences

Earth API
ge.getOptions().setStatusBarVisibility(1)
getOptions().setStatusBarVisibility(true) makes the status bar visible in the plug-in, which displays the current coordinates in deg min sec.ss
Cannot display UTM format or display elevation
see Google Earth Browser Plugin - Coordinates in UTM format on status bar
GEOptions Interface Reference - getStatusBarVisibility()

Google Earth Users Guide - Using the Overview Map
Shows the position (red box or tic mark) of the current 3D view relative to the entire earth
To display the overview map use View -> Overview Map from the Menu
Double click an area in the Overview Map and the main 3D view window will pan and zoom to that area
To adjust the size of the Overview Map and Zoom Ratio, use Tools -> Options -> 3D View tab
Similar ESRI's ArcGIS - ArcMap Overview Window

## Google Earth Side Bar Panels

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

260 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Fly To Tab
Search Format
City, State such as Las Vegas, NV
Number Street City State such as 4505 Maryland Las Vegas NV
Location such as North Las Vegas Airport
Latitude and Longitude
Latitude, Longitude in Decimal Degrees: 36.11, -115.14
Latitude, Longitude in Degrees Minutes Seconds: 36 6 36, -115 08 30
Similar to ESRI's ArcGIS - ArcMap Go To XY
Reference, see Google Earth User Guide Finding Places and Directions
To clear search history: Edit -> Clear Search History
To remove search results, click the X button to clear searches
zoom into an area of interest
type in what your looking for, such as indian food
type in where (mostly just use current view)
click the magnifying glass button to start the search
Directions Tab
Fill out from and to then click search, should see a route between the two points
Tip: to quickly fill out the from or to, right click on a placemark and choose Directions from here or Directions to here
To do a fly through of the route, just click play
Unable to generate a route with more than one destination. Google Maps provides the ability to add more than one destination and determine the best
route to those stops/destinations
Appears you cannot alter a route like you can in Google Maps.
Can do a fly through of the route, which cannot be done in Google Maps.
How to find a path/route between two locations
Step 1: In the Search Panel, click the directions tab and enter the from and to addresses. Then the Begin Search button. Should have a purple route
between the two locations, looks similar to this

Alternative to entering in the address, could enter the business name on the Fly To tab, then once you see the symbol in the Earth Display
window, click the marker symbol to open the Info Window (Balloon Descriptor). At the bottom of this window is the Directions: To here From here. By click one of these links, the address values will be copied into the Directions tab of the Search Panel.

Reference, see Google Earth User Guide Using Places
If you have a red dot (instead of a green dot) in the Places frame, just right click the folder and choose Refresh

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

261 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## 3D Warehouse in Google Earth

Modeling for Google Earth Guide (PDF)

## Typically use Terrain, Roads and 3D Buildings

"Layers content is created by Google or its content partners. Google publishes the content you see in the Layers panel." (see Google Earth User Guide
Layers Versus Places
3D Buildings
To hide a 3D building, just right click the building and choose hide building

## US Traffic Counts Layer

Market Planning Solutions Inc.
Most of the Nevada traffic counts outside of Las Vegas are from NDOT. Las Vegas traffic count data comes from NDOT and the City of Las
Vegas. (Steve Olsen, email: SOlsen@mpsisolutions.com voice: 918-877-6833 4343 S 118th E Ave, Suite C Tulsa OK 74146)
MPSI-CorporateProfileDiversification.pdf
MPSI-TrafficMetrix.pdf
NDOT Annual Traffic Reports

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

262 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Toolbar Buttons

## Display Side Bar Button

Used to toogle on/off the side bar (search panel, places panel and layers panel)

clicking this button will 1) add a point to the 3D viewer, 2) a new window opens which allows you to enter the placemark properties (name, description,
style view and location), and 3) places an entry in the selected folder (My Places or Temporary Places folder) in the Places Panel (need to click OK on the
placemark properties window first)
How to Create a Point (Placemark)
1. Decide where to save the point (either the Places or Search Panel)
Your placemark appears in the 3D viewer and as an entry in the selected folder (Places Panel or Search Panel)
Places Panel - My Places
Places Panel - Temporary Places
Note - when you close the Google Earth Session, this point will be removed. Only points saved in the My Places will be saved.
Search Panel
Need to perform a search or have the search results window open
Right click on the folder in the search results window and select Add -> Placemark
Note - when you close the Google Earth Session, this point will be removed. Only points saved in the My Places will be saved.
2. click a location in the 3D View
3. enter various attributes about the point (placemark)
4. process should look like this

## How to Edit a Point (Placemark)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

263 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

To manually move a point, right click on the point and select Properties. Once the Edit Placemark window is open, place your mouse over the point
again, now have the ability to move it.
Appears you can only edit the location and symbol of the feature. You CANNOT edit the attribute data (what is displayed in the Info
Window/Balloon Descriptor). Appears you can edit the name, description, style view and location only of the point.
To edit the Latitude and Longitude position of the point, right click on the point and select Properties from the context menu. The Edit Placemark
window gives you the ability to edit the Lat/Long values.

## How to Create a 3D Point (Placemark)

From the Edit Placemark window, click the Altitude tab
Extruding or adding a 3D effect to point is only available with Relative to ground, Relative to sea floor or Absolute.
Altitude cannot be edit if using Clamped to ground or Clamped to sea floor

Reference: see Google Earth User Guide - Drawing Paths and Polygons
How to change the Point (Placemark) Symbol
Bring up the properties window of the point (placemark). Click the icon button just to the right of the name of the point. This will bring another
window up where you can change the symbol.
How to create a point from a coordinate?
In the Search Panel, click the Fly to tab then enter a coordinate value
A placemark will be created in the 3D view for that location, just right click on it and select Save to My Places
You the same procedure to edit the placemark
References
Google Earth User Guide - Marking Places

clicking this button will 1) allow you to create a polygon in the 3D viewer, 2) a new window opens which allows you to enter the placemark properties
(name, description, style, view and altitude location), and 3) places an entry in the selected folder (My Places or Temporary Places folder) in the Places
Panel (need to click OK on the placemark properties window first)
How to Create a Polygon

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

264 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

1. Decide where to save the polygon (either the Places or Search Panel)
Your polygon appears in the 3D viewer and has an entry in the selected folder (Places Panel or Search Panel)
Places Panel - My Places
Places Panel - Temporary Places
Note - when you close the Google Earth Session, this polygon will be removed. Only polygons saved in the My Places will be saved.
Search Panel
Need to perform a search or have the search results window open
Right click on the folder in the search results window and select Add -> Polygon
Note - when you close the Google Earth Session, this polygon will be removed. Only polygons saved in the My Places will be saved.
2. click a location in the 3D View to start the polygon. To trace a feature, just hold down the left mouse button.
3. enter various attributes about the polygon
How to Edit a Polygon
Appears you can only edit the vertices of the polygon, cannot move the entire polygon. To manually edit a vertice, right click on the polygon and
select Properties. Once the Edit Placemark window is open, you should see the vertices of the polygon. To add a vertice, just left click on the edge
of the polygon where you want it. To delete a vertice, just right click on it. To move a vertice, just place you mouse of it until the vertice becomes
green, then can move it.
Appears you can only edit the location and symbol of the feature. You CANNOT edit the attribute data (what is displayed in the Info
Window/Balloon Descriptor). Appears you can edit the name, description, style view and location only of the point.
How to Create a 3D Polygon
Not a true 3D polygon, more of a flat plane that you can raise (extrude) and extend to the ground. When drawing the polygon, no option to add
elevation of the vertice or have the vertice inherit the elevation from the Terrain layer.
From the Edit Placemark window, click the Altitude tab
Extruding or adding a 3D effect to polygon is only available with Relative to ground, Relative to sea floor or Absolute.
Altitude cannot be edit if using Clamped to ground or Clamped to sea floor

Reference: see Google Earth User Guide - Drawing Paths and Polygons
References
Google Earth User Guide - Drawing Paths and Polygons

clicking this button will 1) allow you to create a line (path) in the 3D viewer, 2) a new window opens which allows you to enter the placemark properties
(name, description, style, view and altitude location), and 3) places an entry in the selected folder (My Places or Temporary Places folder) in the Places
Panel (need to click OK on the placemark properties window first)
Paths are used to guide the camera when recording a tour
How to Create a Line (Path)
1. Decide where to save the line (either the Places or Search Panel)
Your line appears in the 3D viewer and has an entry in the selected folder (Places Panel or Search Panel)
Places Panel - My Places
Places Panel - Temporary Places
Note - when you close the Google Earth Session, this line will be removed. Only lines saved in the My Places will be saved.
Search Panel
Need to perform a search or have the search results window open
Right click on the folder in the search results window and select Add -> Path
Note - when you close the Google Earth Session, this line will be removed. Only lines saved in the My Places will be saved.
2. click a location in the 3D View to start the polygon. To trace a feature, just hold down the left mouse button.
3. enter various attributes about the polygon
How to Edit a Line
Appears you can only edit the vertices of the line (path), cannot move the entire line. To manually edit a vertice, right click on the line and select
Properties. Once the Edit Placemark window is open, you should see the vertices of the line. To add a vertice, just left click on the edge of the line
where you want it. To delete a vertice, just right click on it. To move a vertice, just place you mouse of it until the vertice becomes green, then can
move it.
Appears you can only edit the location and symbol of the feature. You CANNOT edit the attribute data (what is displayed in the Info
Window/Balloon Descriptor). Appears you can edit the name, description, style view and altitude vertice.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

265 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Google Earth WMS Image Overlays

Background
Step 1: position 3D viewer where you want to place the overlay image
Step 2: Add -> Image Overlay
Step 3: in the New dialog box, click the Refresh tab
Step 4: click WMS Parameters. Either Add a URL to a WMS server or select one of the given examples.
http://imselev.cr.usgs.gov/wmsconnector/com.esri.wms.Esrimap/USGS_EDC_Elev_NED_3
http://gisdata.usgs.gov/wmsconnector/com.esri.wms.Esrimap/USGS_EDC_Elev_NED_3
is the NED 1/3 arc sec layer.
questions email webmapping@usgs.gov
Reference: Google Earth User Guide - Placing WMS Image Overlays
Terrain Overlay
Appears you need to have Google Earth Enterprise to overlay Terrain data
When adding USGS DEMs in GeoTIFF format, the image is just white, no color ramp applied to it.
Seamless DEM of the site, visit USGS National Map Seamless Server
USDA Geospatial Data Gateway - which requires Java to be installed
WMS Servers
http://terraserver-usa.com/ogccapabilities.ashx?
Microsoft Research (MSR) Maps which is Microsoft's free, public access data store of maps and aerial photographs of the United States
and is formerly known as TerraServer USA
USGS Digital Raster Graphics (DRG)
USGS Urban Areas Ortho-Imagery
The National Map Services
Google Earth - Data and Imagery - Does Google Accept Terrain and Aerial Imagery?
Side note, unable to create a surface in Civil 3D using these GeoTIFF DEMs, see Autodesk Civil 3D Discussion Group - Making Surface from
DEM in 2010. It appears the binary ArcGRID format from the seamless DEM website can be imported into Civil 3D. Need to investigate which file
to import since Civil 3D doesn't recognize the complete GRID folder but only the individual sub-files.
Background
Can easily add a model to Google Earth from SketchUp, but how do you add a model manually?
can move the model when the properties window is open

## Google Developers - Keyhole Markup Language - Models

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

266 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Create a Tour manually using the Record a Tour button. Behaves like a video recorder on the 3D View, so any movements will be recorded.
Alternative, can play a tour along a Path
Tours are KML-based
Set tour options using Tools -> Options
Alternative to a Tour is Movie Maker. See Making Movies with Google Earth
Reference
Google Earth User Guide - Using Tours
Google Earth API Samples - Playing a Tour

## Show Historical Imagery Button

To view historical imagery do one of the following
click View -> Historical Imagery
click the Clock icon in the toolbar above the 3D viewer
Timeline shows small vertical lines indicating the dates of different imagery available at that location. The slider in the Timeline will snap to the closest to
the closet vertical line (available historic imagery)
Google Earth User Guide - Viewing Historical Imagery
Contact Cynthia Yeung, Strategic Partner Development with Google, Voice: 650-214-2648, email: cyeung@google.com if you have rights to aerial
images that you want to share with the Google Earth community.

## Show Sunlight Button

View the sunlight for Barrow, AK
December 21 (no sunlight) winter solstice
June 21 (no darkness) summer solstice
It appears you cannot enter a End date/time less than 2009. See Google Earth API Time
Reference
Displaying the Sun
Earth API Samples - Real Time Sun Shadow Position

Explore Button (View Heavenly Objects) - Show Earth, Sky, Mars, Moon
Menubar: View -> Explore then check either Earth, Sky, Mars or Moon
default is Earth view

## Google Earth Measure Tool - Ruler

Use to measure length, area and circumference of a circle
To open the Ruler window, either click on the Show Ruler button or from the Menu: Tools -> Ruler

"Position the imagery you want to measure within the 3D viewer and make sure you are viewing the earth from top-down (type U) and with terrain turned
off for best accuracy. Measuring is calculated using the lat/lon coordinates from point to point and does not consider elevation." see Google Earth User
Guide - Measuring Distances and Areas
Red dot indicates the beginning point, yellow line connects the points.
To delete a point, move mouse over the a red dot, cursor will change from a drawing box to a finger-pointing hand, just right click with the mouse or click
delete on the keyboard.
To insert a point. Cannot do this. Must restart the ruler graphic. Can only add a point from the last point enter
To delete all measuring shapes, click the Clear button on the Ruler Window
Reference: Google Earth User Guide - Measuring Distances and Areas

## Desired Google Earth Features (Wishlist)

Posted at Suggest a feature for Google Earth
Edit KML features
Currently can move the lat/long location of a point, but cannot move an entire polygon or path, can only move the individual vertices.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

267 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Using Google Earth to import a Shapefile, cannot edit any of the shapefile attributes in the KML. Appears can only edit the name, description, style and
altitude
Need ability to edit the Terrain, would like to add a 3D site layout which includes the 3D buildings along with the roads, parking lot, etc. Google Help -> Google
Earth -> Discussions -> Imagery/Data/Layers -> Import high resolution terrain model or DEM or TIN
Google Earth could label features such as lines and polygons
Currently can only label points
Need Google Earth would support Raster Image Catalogs. If I have more updated aerial photos, I have to manually add each one instead of adding a single raster
image catalog to view all of them.
Need ability to turn on/off point labels
using Tools -> Options... I have the option to change the Icon Size to Small, Medium or Large and under Fonts, I have the option to change the Primary 3D
font point size, font name (Arial, Times Roman, ...) and font style (Normal, Italic, Bold)
Unable to Google Earth to accept a font point size of 0
To turn off point labels, just set the label opacity to 0%, tip by Earth Ranger Adam
Step 1: Places Panel, right click the layer and select Properties
Step 2: click the Style, Color tab and change the Label opacity to 0% to make it invisible

Ability to use Google Earth/Map as an Internet Map Server which has the following abilities
Ability to turn on/off layers/groups
Ability to display GIS tabular attribute data (fields) in Google Earth/Map
Ability to display multiple features in a Google Map kml file (e.g. drainage study points, traffic study points, drainage easement polygons and so on)
Will need to use the NetworkLinks. Network link simply points to another KML file.
Network Link tutorial on Frank Taylor's gearthblog
Ability to display large amounts of data
Often get the error message: could not be displayed because it is too large
Need to use a combination of NetworkLinks and Regions
Ability to symbolize the features
Lastly automate this for easy updates
The KML reader and writer are designed to simultaneously handle multiple KML files in the same translation. By default, the KML writer assumes that each
feature sent to the writer should be written to the root file/document. To write a feature to an alternate document, the feature must have a kml_document attribute
that contains the filename of the destination file/document.
KML Document Specification, p. 20
The kml_document and kml_parent format attributes are designed to be used in conjunction with each other. That is, to add a Placemark feature to the folder "A" in
document "other.kml", the feature needs to have the following attribute values: kml_document="other.kml" and kml_parent="A"
KML Document Specification, p. 21
How to workaround this error message: could not be displayed because it is too large
Google Earth Places and Style Templates
Google Earth User Guide - Using Style Templates
To modify an existing style template
Step 1: select the layer in the Places Panel
Step 2: from the GE Menu: Edit -> Apply Style Template...
Step 3: click Use existing template then check edit selected template

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

268 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step 4: make any changes to the Name, Color, Icon, or Height in the Style Template Settings

## Step 5: save changes to the Google Earth style templates (*.kst)

Google Earth should automatically reflect the style changes
Procedure
1. Obtain a shapefile which has a numerical attribute field, for example population by state, area of a county
Shapefile of NAD27 Zones (usstpln27.zip) assign height field to SQMI and assign feature name as ZoneName.
2. Import into Google Earth Pro and apply a style template

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

269 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

3.
Google Earth Import .csv files with Lat/Long
Problem: unable to assign any projection information about the coordinates stored in the .csv file, that is, a .csv file doesn't have the concept of a shapefile .prj which tells
Google Earth the projection of the file. So, can only import .csv files which use LAT/LONG or addresses.
Problem: it appears Google Earth Pro cannot recognize Lat/Long values in Degrees, Minutes and Seconds so the data must be converted to Decimal Degrees.
Issue: unclear how to assign which fields in the .csv contain Lat/Long values. It appears Google Earth Pro automatically does this on import.
It appears you cannot import 3D values, see Google Earth Discussion Group - Import 3D (x,y,z) point data using Google Earth Pro
Sample text file of PLSS Initial Points (PLSSInitialPoints.csv)
Google Earth with create a placemark on the earth for each address it is able to successfully geocode.
Cannot place any addresses that contain PO Boxes
Failed Matches
Google Earth doesn't have the ability to interactively score or match address canidates
unable to edit the failed matches, but have to open the source .csv address file and edit that
Google Earth will display a window of address it could NOT match. Unknown how to save this information.
"A dialog box appears indicating that Google Earth could not geocode one of your addresses. This is the last address in the sample file and it is
intentionally formatted incorrectly. This dialog box allows you to view exactly which addresses did not import correctly so that you can edit the data or
refine how you import your data in Google Earth." (Importing Address Data from the Sample File into Google Earth Plus, Pro and EC)

Only available for United States, United Kingdom, Canada, France, Italy, Germany, and Spain
Unclear how to extract the Lat/Long coordinates back into the .csv address file
From the Google Earth Help Forum - How do I export data to Excel or Comma Delimited CSV file? the answer appears to be you cannot. Can only export
data to KML/KMZ file format.
Workaround: save the excel spreadsheet as .csv file
Google Earth Help Forum - Can you import excel files containing lat/long data into Google Earth Pro?
If the shapefile has the projection file (.prj) then Google Earth will automatically re-project the GIS layer to Lat/Long on import.
Appears Google Earth Pro does NOT recognize a 3D shapefile when importing.
Reference - see Google Earth User Guide Importing Vector Data
Example Shapefiles of Polygons and Lines - Meridians and Base Lines ( MeridiansBaseLines.zip is a zip of shapefile files .shp) from www.geocommunicator.gov
ArcIMS server

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

270 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Google Earth Import GeoTIFF Images

"You can open GIS imagery files in Google Earth Pro or EC and have the files correctly projected over the proper map coordinates in the 3D viewer. Google Earth Pro
and EC support the following types of GIS imagery: TIFF (.tif), including GeoTiff and compressed TIFF files. National Imagery Transmission Format (.ntf). Erdas
Imagine Images (.img). Note - All imagery files must contain the correct projection information in order to be accurately re-projected by the Google Earth software." (see
Google Earth User Guide - Importing Imagery)
"Note - Currently, files using NAD83 projection are not supported by Google Earth." (see Google Earth User Guide - Importing Imagery)
File -> Import
Change Files of type: to GeoTIFF (*.tif)
Google Earth should overlay the raster image in the correct geographic location
Do NOT use Add Image Overlay button. This method doesn't georeference the image, just places it in the current view.

Steps to reproject image file from Stateplane to Geographic Coordinates, see Raster Projection - NAD83 datum to WGS84

## Google Earth Export/Save As to KML

"You can save placemarks, shapes, and entire folders (and their contents) to your computer's hard drive. The placemark file or folder is saved as a single file in KMZ
format, which you can open at any time in Google Earth."
When importing shapefiles, Google Earth Pro will add the layer to the Places Panel. To export this layer to a .kmz file, just right click and choose Save Places As
Save Places As will also merge files
Reference: Google Earth User Guide - Saving Places Data
How to use KML files
References
Barry Hunter post under KML Developer Support

Activate from Tools -> Table menu
Similar to the ArcMap Attribute Table window or the Map3D Data View window
Should be able to double-click an item in the table to fly to it in the 3D viewer
right-click on any table row to access the pop-up menu which you can use to sort or modify the field display
Appears to only show records which are in the current view. If true, then this would be a spatial definition query to limit the amount of data being displayed.
see Google Earth User Guide - Viewing Vector Data Fields

Activate from View -> Grid

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

271 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Bing Maps - My Places

click My Places
Can import the following data: GeoRS, GPX, KML, and KMZ
supported KML elements - VEDataType Enumeration

## Recommend installing Microsoft Silverlight

Bing Maps with Silverlight Help
Link to Bing Maps - My places works. Need to make the data public.
Having troubles getting "My places" to display in an embedded Bing Map, see below

2013
2013 Nokia
Nokia

2013
2013 Microsoft
Microsoft Corporation
Corporation

## View Larger Map Driving Directions

Problem, cannot view any of the "My Places" data when embedding in a website
Export GeoTIFF image of Bing Maps from ESRI ArcMap
Background
as of July 2010, cannot use Google Earth or Google Maps as a base layer in ESRI ArcMap
as of July 2010, Autodesk Civil 3D can import the surface and aerial photo from Google Earth. Limitation is the image is in Black&White. Other limitation is this
is not available in ArcMap.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

272 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Cannot export a georeferenced image from Google Earth, that is have the image and the world file.
1. Install the Bing Maps/Virtual Earth Extension in ESRI ArcMap. This only applies to ArcGIS Desktop 9.3.1. The Bing Maps license isn't required for ArcGIS Desktop 10
since Bing Maps access is built into the software.
3. Open Bing_Maps.mxd in ESRI ArcMap. It takes a moment to load and you must have an internet connection. It should look similar to this:

4. Assign a coordinate system to the data frame, for example State Plane Coordinate System (SPCS) Nevada East, Zone Feet, NAD83.
5. Enable the check box for the clip to shape function in the Data Frame Properties
Click the Data Frame tab
check the Enable checkbox under Clip to Shape

6. Click the Other: radio button under "Extend Used By Full Extend Command" then click the Specify Extent... button
Click the Current Visible Extent radio button

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

273 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

7. Zoom to your area of interest in ArcMap, that is find the Bing Map location you want to export to GeoTIFF
8. Zoom to Nearest Cache Resolution
This will ensure the best quality image available, that is the image hasn't been resampled.

## 9. Export Map to GeoTIFF

Change the resolution to 300dpi or higher if you plan to print/plot the GeoTIFF image. This is done on the General tab and check the

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

274 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## 10. Bing Maps GeoTIFF image

Both Write World File and Write GeoTIFF Tags:
BingMapsUNLVspcsWrdGeoTIFF.tif
BingMapsUNLVspcsWrdGeoTIFF.tfw
BingMapsUNLVspcsWrdGeoTIFF.aux
Just the Write GeoTIFF Tags:
BingMapsUNLVspcsGeoTIFFonly.tif
BingMapsUNLVspcsGeoTIFFonly.aux
3 Files will be created, *.tif *.tfw *.aux
*.tif is the GeoTIFF image
Autodesk Map3D 2010 can read the GeoTIFF header information in the *.tif image (assuming ArcMap Write GeoTIFF Tags checkbox was checked)
so the *.tfw world file is NOT required
*.tfw is the World File which is created when you check the Write World File on the General tab of the Export dialog box
*.aux is the ESRI auxiliary file (.aux or .aux.xml)
ESRI FAQ: When is an .AUX file created for raster datasets?
ESRI FAQ: Why does my raster dataset no longer have an AUX file in ArcGIS 9.2?
11. Display GeoTIFF image in Autodesk Map3D 2010
1. Open Map3D
2. MAPIMPORT is used to import a Shapefile such as the sclmajor_l.shp, this will be used as a reference layer to ensure the GeoTIFF image world file is properly
3. MAPIINSERT use the Map3D command Map Image Insert.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

275 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## 12. Display GeoTIFF image in Autodesk Civil 3D 2010

Same procedure as with Map3D 2010 but select units of feet instead of inches

## 13. Reference: Sadiq S. with ESRI Tech Support

Premium Map Service: Bing Maps for Enterprise (formerly Virtual Earth)
Using premium Microsoft Virtual Earth Maps with ArcGIS 9.3.1
How To Register Microsoft Virtual Earth for ArcGIS Desktop, ESRI Article ID 36697
Geography Network is being retired Dec 2009
cost is \$200 for an individual annual license
as of Feb 2009, there is not an educational license, but Angela is checking with the content provider.
Program Contact: Angela Lee, email: alee@esri.com
ArcGIS Online - Task Services: World Routing
Using free routing tools on the task server

Bing Community
Bing Maps Extension registration code is UNK238146969
Bing To Do and Questions

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

276 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Do I need to know C# or XAML to develop Bing Maps and Silverlight applications?

Yes, you should be familiar with the basics of Silverlight development (XAML)
Will Visual Studio 2008 Express work with Bing Maps?
Microsoft Visual Web Developer 2008 Express Edition Step by Step
How do I overlay a shapefile or KML onto Bing Maps?
Showing ESRI Shapefile Layers on a Virtual Earth Map
Bing Maps Support
bing api version 2 pdf
Bing Maps Developer blog
Bing Maps Forum
Getting a Bing Maps account
Chris Pendleton, Technical Evangelist, Bing Maps
Video - Getting Started with Bing Maps Silverlight Control
Video - Introducing the Microsoft Virtual Earth Silverlight Map Control use C# .net (for adding data) or XAML, don't use Flash and Flex but the Silverlight instead
AJAX client can only support ~ 500 points
Silverlight is .net and C# and its Microsoft's next generation web platform
Getting Started Using the Silverlight Map Control
Chris Pietschmann
Getting Started with Bing Maps Silverlight Control v1.0 by Chris Pietschmann
Bing Maps Silverlight Control Interactive SDK
Embedding a Map into Your Web Page
Bing Maps URL
To zoom and center Bing Maps onto the UNLV Campus, use the following URL http://www.bing.com/maps/default.aspx?v=2&cp=36.1078~-115.1425&lvl=15
To view Bing Maps with an overlay of a KML file http://www.bing.com/maps/default.aspx?v=2&mapurl=http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/html/Microsoft/BingMaps
/kml/cee110bndyspcsao.kmz

## ArcGIS Spatial Analyst Extension

Formerly known as GRID in ArcInfo Workstation
Used to edit Raster Data
"Raster is Faster but Vector is Corrector"
Can use the Geostatistical Analyst Extension for more tools when creating a Raster Surface.

ArcGIS Server
What is ArcGIS Server
ArcGIS Server offers three server software products: ArcGIS Server, ArcIMS, and ArcGIS Image Server
ArcGIS Server Editions: Basic, Standard (includes Visualization), and Advanced (includes Analysis)
ArcGIS Explorer - lightweight client to access GIS content and capabilities
ArcGIS Server Manager - publish GIS services, create web-mapping applications, and manage GIS services
Can ArcMap (Consume ArcGIS Server services) be used as a viewer of ArcGIS Server Service? Yes, use the Add Data icon and navigate to the ArcGIS Server node.
Can ArcGIS Server publish onto Google Earth? Can I embed Google Earth data in ArcGIS Server?

## Max URL length for Web Browsers

Internet Explorer - max 2083 characters
Firefox - max 65,536 characters
Safari - max 80,000 characters
Opera - max 190,000 characters
reference: 2007 JavaOne Conference, Sesstion TS-64745, from http://developer.navteq.com, slide# 70.

Internet Mapping
Autodesk MapGuide
It appears in Site Admin, you can modify the configuration MapGuide to run as Web Map Service (WMS) or Web Feature Service (WFS). Both of these can be consumed
by AutoCAD Map 3D data source connection.
A diection connection between AutoCAD Map3D 2009 and MapGuide Enterprise 2009 is NOT possible at this point according to Peter Rieks with Autodesk. ESRI's
ArcMap and ArcIMS Server already have the the ability to connect. So all the styles and symbology setup in ArcIMS Server can be viewed in ArcMap.
Map3D can consume a WMS or WFS service. MapGuide Enterprise can be configured to produce both WMS and WFS services. This is helpful but not as robust as the
ArcMap/ArcIMS connection which allows one to turn on and off layers. WMS you can only turn on/off the entire collection/view of layers.
Both MapGuide and Map3D can access the same GIS layers using FDO Data Access Technology. Problem is you need to configure the styles/symbology seperately.
MapGuide Enterprise 2009
Server: Linux Red Hat Enterprise Linux Version 4 or Windows: Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (SP4) or Windows Server 2003 (SP1 or SP2).
MapGuide Support
Autodesk MapGuide Discussion Group

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

277 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## MapGuide Open Source forum

Website Examples:
Las Vegas Valley Water District - Facility View
Will need Java Runtime 1.5 or later
UNLV TRC
Shell Bullet Honors Thesis (pdf)
Stuart.Jones@jacobs.com
Jackie Ng - Web log
City of Reno, MapGuide Site Doug Youngs (email: youngsd@ci.reno.nv.us) is the GIS Adminstrator As of June 2007 - not using MapGuide Open Source but has a
migration project to in the works to MapGuide Enterprise using Oracle.
Clark County Public Works - Lowell "Ray" Harper - 455-6036, email: lharper@co.clark.nv.us
Autodesk Contacts
Arnab Ganguly - arnab.ganguly@autodesk.com
Peter Rieks - Peter.Rieks@autodesk.com, Senior Product Manager, Geospatial Platform and Raster Design, voice: 415-306-1362
MapGuide Documentation
MapGuide Enterprise - Getting Started Guide, User's Guide and Developer Guide
MapGuide Open Source - Getting Started with MapGuide, Developers Guide ReadMe
MapGuide Open Source
MapGuide Maestro is a free application tha can ease the management of spatial data in MapGuide Open Source.
Setup
Key element for creating KML files is obtaining the control point coordinates which is easy for points, not to bad for lines, and a little more of a challenge for
polygons
must obtain an API key for each domain to display on Google Maps
API Keys for:
http://www.ce.unlv.edu/Courses/CEG_468
Projection - Google Map/Earth only supports WGS84 Lat/Long projections, see Entering Advanced Coordinates and Model tag, Location element
KML = Keyhole Markup Language. Just an XML file, very similar to a GML. Like HTML, KML has a tag-based structure with names and attributes used for specific
display purposes. Thus, Google Earth and Google Maps act as browsers of KML files. See About KML
KML Tutorial
KML 2.1 Reference
KMZ = Zipped version of a KML
Problems
Slow page refresh when attempting to display high quantity of points
KML Examples
Clark County School District (CCSD): Existing Public Schools (takes around 2 minutes to load)
Clark County School District (CCDS): Future Public Schools (takes around 1 minute to load)
Clark County School District (CCDS): First attempt Las Vegas Schools (takes around 2 minutes to load)
Points: TestPlacemark
Lines: TestPath
Polygons: TestPolygon
XTools Pro: Tool to generate KML files from GIS features
Autodesk University Online GS22-2 Just Google It! - Google Earth and Autodesk MapGuide Integration (pdf, ppt, screencast)
Maponics - commercial company selling GIS data, not interested in sharing data with UNLV per phone conversation on 3 July 2007.
LaudonTech will merge GIS data with Google Maps/Earth and Microsoft Live Maps and GIS web hosting of Internet Mapping applications.
Tools for Google Earth - Generalize, Buffering, Area, and Overlay, free utilities to generate KML files for Google Earth. Questions email Juan Martin with Ceros and
Unos, info@cerosyunosinformatica.com
Google My Maps User Guide and PC World new article on Google My Maps
libkml - Google's KML library for use with applications that want to parse, generate and operate on KML. libkml users guide. Use SWIG to bind/wrap with scripting
languages such as PHP, Perl, and Python.
ESRI Web Application Developer Framework (ADF)
ArcGIS Resource Center - Web ADF 10 for Microsoft .NET Framework - Licensing and deployment
What is the future of the Web ADF? Will be deprecated in the next release after ArcGIS Server 10 in favor of ArcGIS Web Mapping APIs.

## Online Geographic Information

ArcGIS Online
ArcIMS Servers
Web Mapping Service (WMS) Servers

ArcGIS.com

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

278 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Supported content - KML, ArcMap document (.mxd), layer file (.lyr), etc.
ArcGIS Online
http://www.esri.com/software/arcgis/arcgisonline/index.html
Internet services which provides base maps and reference layers to be viewed in ArcGIS Desktop- ArcMap and ArcCatalog
Supported Types of Content - ArcMap Document (.mxd) and ArcGIS Layer File (.lyr). Doesn't support Shapefiles (.shp) and Geodatabases (.mdb) because this files do
not contain any symbology, that is information on how to display the data
ArcGIS Online Services only supports WGS 1984 geographic coordinates
How to Connect to ArcGIS Online Services from ArcMap
Step 1: From the Add Data dialog, choose GIS Servers
Step 2: choose Add ArcGIS Server, then Next on Use GIS Services
Step 3: Internet Server URL is http://services.arcgisonline.com/arcgis/services (see ArcGIS - World Imagery for more information)
ArcGIS version 9.2 used the following:
Internet Server URL: http://services.arcgisonline.com/v92
User Name: arcgis_beta
Step 4: double-click the v92 on services.arcgisonline.com and choose a service, e.g. Specialty folder and click ESRI_StreetMap_NA_2D
Using ArcGIS Online services in ArcGIS Desktop
Recommend adding the USGS DRG layer, NGS_Topo_US_2D appears to be a complete mosaic of all the DRGs in USA.

## ArcGIS Online Services - Access Premium Imagery

Server URL: http://services.arcgisonline.com/v92
Access ArcGIS Online using ArcGIS Desktop to download layer files (.lyr) and ArcMap Documents (.mxd)
ArcGIS Online podcast
ArcGIS Online - Directory of Services
ArcGIS Online - really just an ArcGIS Server hosted by ESRI.
ArcGIS Online FAQ
Jensen and Wang notes on ArcGIS Online (ArcGIS_Online-ChingDec09.pdf)
ESRI Speaker Series: ArcGIS Online Services - Rob_Shanks_on_ArcGIS_Online.mp3 from the 2008 Users Conference in San Diego CA.
How do I view a Web Map using a web browser?
Video - Building Web maps
Questions
Will the ArcMap Identify Tool work on ArcGIS Online Layers?
Can a webpage display ArcGIS Online Layers? Yes, see Embedding ArcGIS Online maps in your own website
Can UNLV get the inline Data Appliance for a Data Center?
Explorer ArcGIS
Getting Started with ArcGIS Explorer Online
ArcGIS.com Map Viewer
http://explorer.arcgis.com
Can import a zip of your shapefile but it only if you have less than a 1000 features

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

279 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

ArcGIS Explorer Online Forum
Cannot disply KML file in ArcGIS Explorer Online, see post from Andy MacDonald with ESRI
"If you have saved a web map with a KML service in it from ArcGIS.com map viewer, you will receive a message indicating that the layer has been removed from
the map. ArcGIS Explorer Online does not yet support these types of layers." (ArcGIS Explorer Online Help - Troubleshooting)
Cannot label features in ArcGIS Explorer Online, see thread on Labeling a feature
Cannot import layer packages into ArcGIS Explorer Online. More info on Saving layers and layer packages, see ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10

## GIS Servers - ArcIMS Server

Types of ArcIMS Servers
ArcIMS Image Service - takes a snapshot of the data on a server and delivers it over the Internet as images to be displayed in ArcMap.
ArcIMS Feature Service - "sends or streams the actual feature data to you rather than creating and sending a map image of the data. Similar to audio and video
streaming. You can add an ArcIMS Feature service to ArcMap and use it like any feature class. You can symbolize it anyway you want in ArcMap, export the data
to your local disk, or use the data in geoprocessing tools and models."
ArcIMS Metadata Service - "lets you browse data by description rather than by service type (image or feature). You can think of a Metadata service as a searchable
online catalog that helps you find GIS services."

ArcIMS Servics
(see ESRI Virtual Campus - Learning ArcIMS)
ArcIMS consists of three applications: Author, Administrator and Designer
ArcIMS Author - final output is a map configuration file, ArcXML (AXL)
ArcIMS Administrator - creating and staring ArcIMS services, publishing content of the AXL file onto the Internet.
ArcIMS Designer - application you use to construct a Web site, create the look and feel of the site as well as determine functionality by adding tools for
zooming, panning, querying, and map layer treatment
HTML Client Viewer - only image files
Java-based Client Viewer - allows both image and feature data transfer
Steps to Add an ArcIMS Server Connection to ArcMap

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

280 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Background: having problems when adding an ArcIMS Server connection to an existing Data Frame which contains data. When I add a shapefile, they do not overlay
correctly. Workaround, add ArcIMS Server to a blank data frame then add the shapefile, it appears to then overlay correctly. Also having problems when overlay to
ArcIMS Server connections.
Step 1: click the Add Data button on ArcMap
Step 2 and 3: select GIS Servers from the Look in drop down box. Then click Add ArcIMS Server

## Example ArcIMS Websites

http://gisgate.co.clark.nv.us - includes a majority of layers from the Clark County NV central repository. Very handy.
Clark County Intranet: http://gijane.co.clark.nv.us - internal ArcIMS server
http://flowstone.ccrfcd.org - Clark County Regional Flood Control District, provides majority of the aerial photos for Clark County NV.
http://breccia.ccrfcd.org
http://major.lasvegasnevada.gov - Las Vegas NV ArcIMS website.
buildinspect
CensusAI9
clvcamps
devtrack
fdinspectors
findmyward
na
nsresponse
http://citymaps.cityofhenderson.com - Henderson NV ArcIMS server
BasicMapAxl
cityMapsElections
cityMapsElemSchool
cityMapsHighSchool
cityMapsInterests
cityMapsMiddleSchool
cityMapsParks
cityMapsWateringGroups
crimeDemo02
Henderson_comcate
HendersonOffender
zoning
zoningFutureLandUse
http://gdw.apfo.usda.gov - Aerial Photography Field Office (APFO) in Salt Lake City, UT. Datasets include: Digital Ortho Quadrangles (DOQQ B/W 1990s),

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

281 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

NAIP Imagery (color photos 2006 Nevada), Land Use and misc layers.
http://sdmws.nrcs.usda.gov - Information Technology Center (ITC) in Fort Collins, CO. Datasets includ soils, common resource areas and USDA Offices.
http://wms.ftw.nrcs.usda.gov - National Cartography and Geospatial Center (NCGC) in Fort Worth, TX. Datasets include contour lines, quad boundaries,
hillshades, 30 meter USGS NEDs, Census Bureau TIGER datasets, hydrography and water features, and USGS DRGs
ESRI Internet Solutions - http://www.esri.com/imssites
If the website is down, might get the following error message:

## ArcIMS service layers and coordinate systems

"The coordinate system of an ArcIMS service is determined by the author of the service"
"ArcIMS Feature services stream vector data to ArcMap, so ArcMap can correctly and accurately display ArcIMS Feature Classess in all ArcGIS-supported
coordinate systems. However, ArcIMS Image and ArcMap Server services do not stream vector data but rather use images."
"You can find the coordinate system of the service layer by looking at the Data Source text box on the Layer Properties' Source tab"

## Web Mapping Service (WMS) Server

GIS Servers - WMS Server
Web Map Service (WMS) produces maps in a pictorial format such as JPEG, in contract to a Web Feature Service (WFS) which returns actual vector data and a Web
Coverage Service (WCS) which returns the actual raster data.
MapServer by the University of Minnesota
Steps to Add a WMS Server connection
Step 1: click the Add Data button on ArcMap
Step 2 and 3: select GIS Servers from the Look in: drop down box. Then click Add WMS Server

## ArcGIS 9.2 Desktop Help - Adding a WMS Service layer to ArcMap

"Like with other layers, if a WMS service layer is the first layer added to a new, empty data frame, the data frame will take on the WMS service's default coordinate
system." ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - WMS service layers and coordinate systems
"A WMS service doesn't define which of its layers appear turned on when you initially access it. ArcGIS automatically turns on the first 20 layers in any WMS service
you add to a map or preview in ArcCatalog. In this way, you are likely to see something useful when you first add the service to a map." (see ArcGIS 9.2 Desktop Help Connecting to a WMS Server
WMS Layers Description

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

282 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Example WMS Servers

http://terraserver-usa.com/ogccapabilities.ashx? see Microsoft Research (MSR) Maps which is Microsoft's free, public access data store of maps and aerial
photographs of the United States and is formerly known as TerraServer USA

ArcMap will re-project the Terra Server images into the coordinate system assigned to the data frame.
http://mapserver.hondalab.star.ait.ac.th/cgi-bin/thaiwms?
http://gisdata.usgs.gov/wmsconnector/com.esri.Esrimap/USGS_EDC_Ortho_NYSDOP?
USGS Reference Maps
http://gisdata.usgs.net:80/servlet/com.esri.wms.Esrimap?servicename=USGS_WMS_REF& (see WMS layers: My Top Ten)
http://gisdata.usgs.gov/wmsconnector/com.esri.wms.Esrimap/USGS_EDC_Ortho_NYSDOP? (see Autodesk University 2007 - Taking Advantage of the
Explosion in Online Imagery with Autodesk Raster Design and Autodesk Map3D ( GS300-3) by Gary Stephenson with Autodesk Inc.
http://wms.jpl.nasa.gov/wms.cgi?
OnEarth Web Map Server by JPL. WMS NASA DTED and SRTM data. Digital elevation data, use Feature Class = OnEarth Web Map
Server.worldwind_dem
DigitalGlobe WMS - http://image.globexplorer.com/gexservlets/wms
WFS Virginia - http://regis.integraph.com/wfs/dcmetro/request.asp? (see Autodesk University 2006 - Map for Civil 3D user (GS22-3) by Mark Christian Autodesk, Inc., mark.christian@autodesk.com
Will get the following error if your data frame is set to a coordinate system which is not supported by the WMS Server

"WMS servers may only support a limited set of coordinate systems, depending on how the service has been configured by its author."
"Like with other layers, if a WMS service layer is the first layer added to a new, empty data frame, the date frame will take on the WMS service's default coordinate
sytem."

## Using AutoCAD data with ArcMap

ArcGIS for Civil Engineering
ArcGIS Help - What is a CAD drawing
FAQ: How to transform CAD data in ArcMap 9.2 as the Transformation tab is gone? ESRI Article ID 32706HowTo: Define the projection for CAD data for use in
ArcMap ESRI Article ID 29035
HowTo: Transform CAD data in ArcMap to line up with other data, ESRI Article ID 29039
ESRI Virtual Campus - Geoprocessing CAD Data with ArcGIS - 9.0 or 9.1

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

283 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Don Kuehne, ESRI CAD Specialist (email: dkuehne@esri.com)
Step 0: obtain a CAD .dwg version 2008 or earlier
Step 1: ArcMap add data. It appears ArcMap cannot read any projection info from the dwg so you will have to know this. Also, CAD data typically uses a local
coordinate system, that this the origin (0,0) can be anywhere in the world where as Lat/Long use an origin (0,0) at the equator and the prime meridian (Greenwich
Meridian).
By default, ArcGIS reads CAD entities as collections of homogeneous geometry types and creates feature classes on-the-fly as the following: Annotation, Point,
Polyline, Polygon, and MultiPatch (see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help CAD data organization
right click on one of these features and select Properties from the context menu

see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help Drawing layer and level management
Notes
that support the AutoCAD .NET 2.0 APIs, including AutoCAD 2007 through 2009, as well as Autodesk 3D Map and Civil versions 2007 through 2009. AutoCAD
versions prior to 2007 and AutoCAD LT do not support the necessary APIs required by ArcGIS for AutoCAD. Support for AutoCAD 2010-based products is not
currently available." ArcGIS for AutoCAD Common Questions
2 articles in the January-March 2002 edition of ArcUser. Modeling CAD Data in ArcGIS and Uncovering CAD Data Issues in ArcMap
Similar to Excel files, ArcMap can only view CAD data, not edit. To edit, need to do a data translation or conversion from dwg to geodatabase.
Method 2 - using ArcMap Edit Session, copy and paste
Method 3 - ArcToolbox - Copy Features tool
Method 4 - ArcToolbox - Import from CAD
ArcGIS 9.2 can NOT import Civil 3D object data. ArcMap can view the Civil 3D geometry but cannot view the attribute information.
ArcGIS does NOT support 3D features, so an AutoCAD 3D polyline is converted to a 2D line with the same Z coordinate value (see ESRI Article 24712)
ArcToolbox - Export to CAD (only available at the ArcInfo license level)

## CAD Transformations and Georeferencing Toolbar

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

284 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

2D transformation - move, rotate and scale CAD layers and Raster Images
Only needed if CAD drawing is in a local coordinate system. If it is in a projected coordinate system, then just need to identify that projection by using a projection file
(.prj)
The World file modifies, Project file identifies
Residual or Root Mean Square (RMS). "When the error is particularly large, you may want to remove and add control points to adjust the error. Although the RMS error
is a good assessment of the accuracy of the transformation, don't confuse a low RMS error with an accurate registration." (see ESRI ArcGIS 9.3 Desktop Help Georeferencing a Raster Dataset
Need only 2 control points (xy coordinates in both the CAD local coordinate system and the GIS projected coordinate system)
Procedure
Within ArcMap, add the GIS (Reference Layer) and the CAD layer or image.
Zoom to the GIS (Reference Layer)
Turn on the Georeferencing Toolbar. Then from the Georeferencing drop down menu, choose Fit to Display. This will align the CAD drawing or image into the
current view/map display extents. Basically puts both layers in the same ballpark.

"Add control points by clicking on the Control Points button on the Georeferencing Toolbar. Then click a point on CAD layer and its corresponding point on the
GIS (reference layer). Recommend looking for road intersections, land features, building corners, or other objects that you can identify and match in your raster
dataset and aligned datasets." ( Georeferencing a Raster Dataset)

## ESRI ArcMap Georeferencing

ESRI ArcMap Coordinate Transformations - Ground to Grid
"The universal world file is for defining a transformation for all CAD drawings in a workspace. The esri_cad.wld file will apply to all CAD drawings in that folder
that do not already have a world file designated. If one exists for a specific CAD drawing, it will override the esri_cad.wld file." (see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help World files)
Problems
Raster Images Not Supported. ESRI world files (.wld) and universal world files (esri_cad.wld) do NOT support Raster images. Must manually transform the
images. Since aerial imagery is usually flown at the beginning of a project and is rarely updated, this manual conversion will only have to be done once. Not like
GIS layers such as parcel owners which needs to be updated throughout the project design. It appears you have to make your own world file to transform raster
datasets from ground to grid. See ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - World files for raster datasets
Georeferencing video sample
Georeferencing a raster dataset
ArcMap - Georeference Raster Image using a World File
Step 0: Datasets
Grid Coordinate Files:
shapefile of streets surrounding Jean NV - sclsubset.zip.
Final output of the aerial photo transformed from ground to grid coordinates - TopoImageSPCS.zip
Color aerial photo for GIS central repository: S0721713.zip
Ground Coordinate Files:
Black and White aerial photo (tiff image .tif with world file .tfw) of Jean Nevada in ground coordinates TopoImage-014.zip
Step 1: Using ESRI's ArcMap application, add shapefile based on grid coordinates. Using Stateplane Coordinate System (SPCS). Notice the x,y coordinates in the status
bar, e.g. 694450.694, 26652372.143 feet, this gives a tip your using a Grid coordinate system instead of a local/ground coordinate system. Also, in the ArcMap table of
contents, right click the Layers Data Frame and select properties. Under the Coordinate System tab, will see we are indeed using a Grid Coordinate System, namely

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

285 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step 2: add a new dataframe. Using Add Data, open the raster image which is in ground coordinates. Notice the x,y coordinates in the status bar, e.g. 5000.000 5000.000

Step 3: within ArcMap table of contents, drag the local coordinate raster image into the first data frame which has the shapefile in stateplane coordinates
Step 4: turn on the Georeferencing Toolbar

Step 5: under the Georeferencing Menu, click Fit to Display. This is really just an optional step.
Step 6: click the View Link Button. New window opens, then click load. Navigate to the world file (.wld)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

286 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Step 7: if Auto Adjust is turned on, then the image will be rectified.

Step 8: to save the changes click Georeferencing -> Rectify.... If you choose the TIFF option, will create a GeoTIFF image that is in SPCS. Will also create an auxiliary
file (.aux or .aux.xml) and a pyramid file (.rrd).

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

287 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Info on auxiliary files (.aux) see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - About auxiliary files
Info on pyramid files (.rrd) see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - About reduced resolution dataset files
"Note: CAD transformations can never have more than two control points in the Link Table." (see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Transforming CAD datasets)
ArcMap Transformation with a World File (.wld)
Often used to convert Survey surface/local/project coordinates to Stateplane grid coordinates.
World file (.wld)
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - World Files
Format of World file, see ESRI Article ID 20837

## ArcMap will use this to project/transform local coordinates to Stateplane.

In order for ArcGIS to recognize and associate a world file with a CAD drawing, it must possess the same prefix name as the drawing file and reside in the same folder.
c:\temp\sample.dwg
c:\temp\sample.wld
Requires 2 points to transform. Points must represent the same location in both layers. Best to have points at opposite ends of the map extent.
Current experience: will use water valve Stateplane coordinates to transformation.
ESRI Article ID 20837, how to align vector data in ArcMap.
Importing AutoCAD Civil 3D Points File into ArcMap
ArcMap requires the first record in comma delimited text file (.csv) be the Field names. So if the first record is a point record, must insert a new record. Examples field
names could be P,N,E,Z,D where N is the Northing (Y value) and E is the Easting (X value).
AutoCAD Civil 3D only wants the point data, no record with the field names. So if the first record is the column/field names, this must be deleted prior to importing into
Civil3D.
If the surveyor's points file (e.g. filename.csv) includes an associated projection file (filename.prj), ArcMap will NOT recognize the .prj file. You will still have to
manually select or import the projection information when displaying the XY points. Note, cannot import the projection information from the projection file

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

288 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

(filename.prj)

Clark County FDO connection string
Ensure the following dynamic link libraries (.dll) files are copied into the Common Files\ESRI directory: pe91.dll, sde91.dll and sg91.dll
Server Name: ccgis2
Service: port:5151 or SDE 5151/tcp
database: gismo (also known as Data Store)
User Name: public1

## ArcMap Field Name

Staging
GDB Table

Field
Type

Field
Length

Applications(s)

Short Description

EntID

Attrib

Long

Both

## ArcGIS created unique entity

identifier and foreign key

Not Used

OwnerID

Attrib

Long

Both

key

Not Used

AttrFlag

Attrib

Long

Both

## Tag and Attribute visibility flag Not Used

SetName

Attrib

String

255

Both

Microstation Set Name

Not Used

AttrTag

Attrib

String

64

Both

## Not Used, but if a valid tag value is a

field name then that field's value will be
inserted into the block attribute of an
inserted block that has a matching tag
name

AttrHndl

Attrib

String

17

Both

Not Used

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

289 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

AttrType

Attrib

Long

Both

AttrStr

Attrib

String

255

Both

Not Used
to a string

AttrLong

Attrib

Long

Both

## An Attribute's value converted

Not Used
to a long integer

AttrDbl

Attrib

Double 8

Both

Not Used
to a real number

DocID

Long

Both

Not Used

LyrName

String

255

Both

## A valid value will control the CAD layer

of the output feature

LyrNum

Long

Both

The Microstation V7 or
previous level number

Not Used

LvlDesc

String

255

Both

The Microstation V7 or
previous level description

Not Used

## A valid value used in conjunction with

the 'LyrName' field will set the layer

LyrColor

Short

Both

Not Used

LyrLineWt

Short

Both

## A valid value used in conjunction with

the 'LyrName' field will set the layer line

LyrLnType

String

255

Both

## A valid value used in conjunction with

the 'LyrName' field will set the layer line

LyrFrzn

Short

for visibility

## A valid value used in conjunction with

the 'LyrName' field will set the layer line

LyrLock

Short

for visibility

## A valid value used in conjunction with

the 'LyrName' field will set the layer line

LyrOn

Short

Both

selectability

## A valid value used in conjunction with

the 'LyrName' field will set the layer line

LyrVPFrzn

Short

freeze/thaw parameter

Not Used

LvlPlot

Short

Both

## A valid value used in conjunction with

the 'LyrName'field will set the layer line

LyrHandle

String

16

Both

Not Used

EntID

Entity

Long

Both

## ArcGIS created unique entity

identifier and foreign key

Not Used

DocID

Entity

Long

Both

Not Used

OwnerID

Entity

Long

Both

key

Not Used

## CadType Calculate = "Text" for converting

annotation to output TEXT entities.
Calculate = "Polyline" to convert polylines. Entity
Calculate to "3D Polyline" to create
Z-aware output

String

32

Both

## A valid value overrides the default output

entity type with a valid alternative

NumLevel

Entity

Long

MicroStation
Only

Not Used

Entity

Short

Both

## A valid value will override the default

entity color of the output feature

Entity

Short

Both

## A valid value will control the line weight

of the output feature

## Layer Calculate records with suitable

values in this field for Layer Names in the

Entity

String

255

Both

## A valid value will override the default

entity layer name of the output feature

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

290 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Entity

String

16

Both

identifier

## RefName If Elevation attribute exists in the

data, assign RefName as the Alias for the
Entity
attribute. The Z-aware output polylines will
store the Z-values.

String

255

Both

A valid value will override the default
name/Cell Name/Tag name or
entity name of the output feature
Text Value

Class

Entity

String

255

MicroStation
Only

## A valid value will override the default

class designation of the output feature

Entity
output

String

255

Both

## A valid value will override the default

entity line type of the output feature

## LTScale calc to the line weight value

desired in the output DGN file

Entity

Double 8

Both

## A valid value will control the line type

scale of the output feature

Width

Entity

Double 8

Both

## A valid value will override the default

entity line width of the output feature

## Thickness Calculating this value passes the

Entity
line thickness to the output AutoCAD file

Double 8

Both

## A valid value overrides the default entity

thickness of the output feature

Rotation

Entity

Double 8

Both

## A valid value override the default entity

rotation of the outpu "point-type" features

Entity

String

MicroStation
Only

## A valid value override the default entity

model in which the output feature is
created

ExtX

Entity

Double 8

Not Used
component in the X coordinate

ExtY

Entity

Double 8

Not Used
component in the Y coordinate

ExtZ

Entity

Double 8

Not Used
component in the Z coordinate

ScaleX

Entity

Double 8

scale value

ScaleY

Entity

Double 8

scale value

ScaleZ

Entity

Double 8

scale value

## A valid value overrides the default entity

scale Z component of block inserts for an
output feature

QrotX

Entity

Double 8

MicroStation
Only

## CAD X component of the

quaterian rotation value

## A valid value overrides the default X

component of the quaterian rotation value
for an output feature

QrotY

Entity

Double 8

MicroStation
Only

## CAD Y component of the

quaterian rotation value

## A valid value overrides the default Y

component of the quaterian rotation value
for an output features

QrotZ

Entity

Double 8

MicroStation
Only

## CAD Z component of the

quaterian rotation value

## A valid value overrides the default Z

component of the quaterian rotation value
for an output feature

EntID

Long

MicroStation
Only

## ArcGIS created unique entity

identifier and foreign key

Not Used

Long

MicroStation
Only

Not Used

DBType

String

128

MicroStation
Only

Not Used

MSCatID

Long

MicroStation
Only

## Microstation Catalog table

record number that contains the
Not Used
name of the table that the

Long

MicroStation
Only

## Microstation record number of

attached data or other coded
Not Used
value
Microstation Catalog table
record number that contains the
Not Used
name of the table that the

Handle

255

Not Used

## A valid value overrides the default entity

scale X component of block inserts for an
output feature

Long

MicroStation
Only

MSValue

String

255

MicroStation
Only

## Microstation record number of

attached data or other coded
Not Used
value as a string

EntID

Long

Both

## ArcGIS created unique entity

identifier and foreign key

Not Used

TxtValue

String

255

Both

entity string

## A valid value overrides the default height

of an output text feature

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

291 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## TxtMemo Calculate = "TextString" value

in the geodatabase annotation feature class

String

TxtHt

Double 8

Both

## A valid value defines the value of an

output text feature

TxtRotate

Double 8

Both

## A valid value overrides the default

rotation of an output text feature

TxtWidth

Double 8

Both

Not Used

TxtOblique

Double 8

Both

## CAD text entity oblique angle

Not Used

TxtGenType

String

Both

Not Used
Not Used

2147483647 Both

32

TxtJust

String

32

Both

parameter

VertAlign

String

32

Both

alignment parameter

Not Used

TxtStyle

String

255

Both

## A valid value overrides the default text

style of an output text feature

TxtFont

String

255

Both

Not Used
Not Used

TxtBoxHt

Double 8

Both

height

TxtBoxWd

Double 8

Both

width

Not Used

TxtRefWd

Double 8

Both

Not Used
Not Used

TxtAttach

Long

Both

parameter

TxtDir

Long

Both

spacing type

Not Used

LnSpace

Long

Both

spacing type

Not Used

SpaceFact

Double 8

Both

Not Used
factor

EntID

XTRProps

Long

## ArcGIS created unique entity

identifier and foreign key

Not Used

XDList

XTRProps

String

## XML string of coded Xdata

values and their types

## A properly formated XML string will

create coded Xdata on output features
(see the create CAD Xdata tool)

DocName

String

255

path

Not Used

DocPath

String

2147483647 Both

## A valid value overrides the default output

CAD file of an output feature, unless the
IGNORE PATHS IN TABLE parameter is
set

DocType

String

255

Microstation, DXF)

## A valid value overrides the default CAD

file type of an output feature if the output
CAD file in the included 'DocPath' field
does not exist.

## A valid value overrides the default CAD

file version of an output feature if the
output CAD file in the included 'DocPath'
field does not exist.

DocVer

String

16

Both

Both

Both

Using the Set CAD Alias Tool: When converting annotation feature classes to CAD set the alias for TEXTSTRING to RefName. This converts the annotation to TEXT
entities in the output CAD file. Set the Alias for the field containing suitable layer names to "Layer"

Create 3D Contours
1. (Optional) unit conversion from meters to feet
Spatial Analyst - Raster Calculator
ArcToolbox Spatial Analyst Tools Map Algebra Raster Calculator
Map Algebra
1 meter = 3.2808 feet

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

292 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## 2. ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 Contour (3D Analyst)

3. Feature To 3D By Attribute (3D Analyst). ArcToolbox 3D Analyst Tools 3D Features Feature to 3D By Attribute

## 4. Simplify 3D contour lines

Problem getting Google Earth to view this much data, recommending using the Generalize command
ArcGIS Resource Center Desktop 10 - Generalize (Editing)
5. Layer to KML (Conversion)
Sample data
contours10ft3D.kmz
6. References
ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 Converting 2D features to 3D features
ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 Raster Calculator (Spatial Analyst)
ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 Preparing your map documents in ArcGIS for KML publishing

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

293 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## US Census and TIGER/Line

Overview and Concept
Census TIGER Overview
TIGER/Line is the spatial lines and polygons whereas the Census 2000 population data/attributes (Redistricting Summary Files) are contained in a separate ASCII file
Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS)FIPS=32 003 for Clark County Nevada
TIGER/Line naming convention: TGR + 32 + 003 + .ZIP = tgr32003.zip
List of complete datasets
Download ASCII datasets Need 3 files to obtain a complete dataset: nv00001.upl.zip, nv00002.upl.zip, and nvgeo.upl.zip
Contact Warren Nozick, wnozick@census.gov 301-457-1326 for questions on the Census population data sets
TIGER related questions ask the Census Geography Division at 301-457-1128
ASCII data File Structure
TIGER/Line Files Technical Documentation
Street Centerline based block groups (SBG). Metadata, sbg.e00
Hierarchical Geographic Entities
Census Block: block bounded by city streets
Block Group (or part): generally have 600-3,000 people, optimum size of 1,500 people
Census Tract (or part): generally have 1,500-8,000 people, optimum size of 4,000 people
Place (or part)
Census County Division (CCD): name of each CCD is based on a place, county, or well-known local name that identifies its location.
County: Incorporated places are known as 'independent cities' and are treated as equivalent to counties for statistical purposes. In Louisiana this division is known as
Parishes.
State
Region: Nevada is in the West Region (Northeast, Midwest, South, West)
United States
Note: doesn't apply to American Indian, Alaska Native, etc.
TIGER/Line Issues
Uses Lat/Long coordinates and NAD83 Datum. Need to project into Stateplane coordinates to use with other local GIS data
TIGER/Line data doesn't overlay nicely with the Assessor Parcels and Street Centerline file. This will cause problems if doing Census analysis with other datasets.
Census 2000 Redistricting Summary Issues
Maximum number of fields a single dbf can hold is 255. So one cannot just join the nvgeo.upl, nv00001.upl, and nv00002.upl into a single table
Single dataset for just Clark County will be ~ 150MB
Can convert the attributes into a point shapefile. In ArcView, using the nvgeo.upl file and the Internal Point-Latitude (INTPTLAT) and Internal Point-Longitude
(INTPTLON) fields can add event theme. This will help solve the problem of conflating a semi-accurate polygon shapefile (TIGER) to a more accurate polygon shapefile
(Assessor Parcels), in which case one can just perform a point-in-poly overlay.
INTPTLAT and INTPTLON fields do not store the decimal point, must be added. Also the + sign in INTPTLAT didn't cause any problems in the event theme
How to obtain TIGER/Line data
Locally stored version of 2000 TIGER/Line data for Clark County (cctigerline.mdb)
ESRI recommends www.gistools.com for software to convert from TIGER/Line datasets to shapefiles
Census Sense, part 1 What Geospatial Pros Need to Know by John Kavaliunas and Leo Dougherty
Census Sense, part 2 Geographic Products for One and All by Leo Dougherty
Census Sense, part 3 Enabling an Annual Census by Nancy Torrieri and Jennifer Holland
Shapefiles of US Census Blocks
on UNLV server to increase access time, but recommend using the ESRI GeographyNetwork site for the latest edition.
tgr = TIGER
003 = Clark County
blk00 = Census Blocks 2000
All the Census TIGER/Line shapefile on the ESRI website uses Geographic Coordinate system, North American Datum 1983. Will need to define this projection using
the ArcToolbox -> Data Management Tools -> Projections -> Define Projection Wizard (shapefiles, geodatabase) before you can properly use the data in ArcMap.
Will need to project to Stateplane coordinates using ArcToolbox -> Data Management Tools -> Projections -> Project Wizard (shapefiles, geodatabase) if you want to
overlay existing GIS datasets. Remember if you don't have an existing geodatabase (.mdb), will have to create a geodatabase first using ArcCatalog, then ArcToolbox will
project/write the new polygon feature class in the geodatabase.
Census 2000 Summary File 1 (SF 1)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

294 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Provides detailed counts and information of people by age, sex, households, families, race, etc. down to the block level. For more detail see the Census 2000 Summary
File 1 webpage.
ESRI has processed the raw SF 1 to one that can easily be joined in ArcMap to the Block shapefile. Select the Census Block Demographics (SF1) for Clark County. Once
you unzip the sf1blk32000.zip file, will get the dBase IV dataset, tgr32000sf1blk.dbf. This is the complete dataset for Nevada, so its rather large.
Use the fieldname STFID has the relate item (i.e. Primary Key) to join the SF 1 file (tgr32000sf1blk.dbf) to the block polygons (tgr32003blk00.shp)
SF1 Quick Reference Guide
Summary File 1 Technical Documentation
Hierarchical sequence from largest area to smallest area: State, County, County Subdivision, Place, Census Tract, Block Group, Block.
Summary File 2 only goes down to the census tract level.
Download "Census Blocks 2000 data layer" for "Clark County" from esri website.
Import Census 2000 Redistricting Files
Use the Logical Record Number (LOGRECNO) to relate 3 three tables together (i.e. nvgeo.upl, nv00001.upl, and nv00002.upl)
Unforunately the nvgeo.upl dataset is in columnar format, whereas the nv00001.upl and nv00002.upl are in comma delimited format. Must either write an awk script to
convert reformat nvgeo.upl into comma delimited or using Microsoft Excel/Access to import the file. Reason is ArcView 3.2a can only read ASCII comma/tab delimited,
INFO, or dbf tables.
Will need to create a new field, STFID in the nvgeo.upl table. Calculate STFID as the concatenation of the following fields: STATE, COUNTY, TRACT, and BLOCK. In
ArcView, open the nvgeo.upl table, start editing, add a new field (Edit -> Add Field...), name is stfid with size 16 and type string, with that field highlighted in the table
select Field->Calculate.... with the following [State] + [County] + [Tract] + [Block]. This newly populated field will then be used to relate/join the Census 2000
Redistricting Files to the ESRI TIGER/Line shapefiles. Reason we had to make a new field is ArcView 3.2a can't do a join on multiple common fields.
How to join TIGER/Line with Census 2000 Redistricting Files
Using ESRI convert TIGER/Line files, add the TGR32003BLK00.shp to ArcView. The relate field is STFID, which is just a concatenation the STATE, COUNTY,
TRACT, and BLOCK fields
With both tables open (attribute table of tgr32003blk00.shp and nvgeo.upl) highlight the STFID fields, have the attribute table of tgr32003blk00.shp active, then Table ->
Join
Population Density
Ratio of population to census block size. For example, if you want the number of people per acre (43,560 ft^2 = 1 acre)
to manually calculate the area using Field -> Calculate: [Shape].ReturnArea (see HowTo: Create an area field for a polygon shapefile Note when adding a field use
decimal places, e.g. Type=Number, Width=16, Decimal Places=5.
Normalize by using Classification Field: P0010001 (total population) and the Normalize Field is area
This is useful in determine bus route services and other social programs
Using SBC.e00, population density = HHTOTAL / AREA
Open the SBG attribute table in the TOC. Click the Options button, select Add Field...
Field name: SQMile
Use a field type Double, Precision 10 (number of digits that can be stored in the field) and Scale 4 (number of decimal places for float and double fields, more
commonly known has the mantissa). Scale of 0 is the same has an integer. Rule of thumb, precision greater than 6, use a Double type, otherwise use a Float type.
(See ArcGIS Desktop Help -> ArcGIS -> Geodatabase items: Field properties)bid=20880">ESRI Article Number 20880, How to set default layer symbology in
ArcMap.
1 Acre = 43560 square feet
640 acres = 1 square mile
1 square mile = 27878400 square feet
Add a new field to the SBG coverage.

Paper Size
Standard Paper Size Descriptions
ISO 216 (Metric) Engineering
Based on ratio 1:v 2 (1:1.4142)
Basic size of metric paper is one square meter, which is the area of an AO sheet of metric paper. See Stock Solution
AO size folded once is A1 size, folded twice is A2 size, folded thrice is A3 size, and so on until A8 size. International Standard Paper Sizes

## ANSI (English) Engineering

E Size (34"x44") folded once is D size (22"x34"), folded twice is C size (17"x22"), folded thrice is B size (11"x17") and lastly folded 4 times is A size (8.5"x11").
F size (28"x40") is an exception.
Tend to use A and B sizes in Engineering offices, sometimes D size.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

295 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

D size rolls have to special ordered. Standard plotter paper rolls come in 24", 30", and 36" widths
Cleanly reduce a D size to B size. Sometimes referred as half-size plots.
Architectural/ARCH
E size (36"x48") folded once is D size (24"x36"), folded twice is C size (18"x24"), folded thrice is B size (12"x18") and lastly folded 4 times is A size (9"x12")
Tend to use ARCH D size in engineering offices
Paper Size Requirements
"The Contractor shall furnish five (5) blueline and one (1) mylar reproducible set of cabinet schematic wiring diagrams 24 inches x 36 inches in size, multiple
sheets may be used." (RTC Section 623). Mylar is the DuPont Product name for polyester film white matte.
"All drainage plan submittals must be on sheet size 24"x36"." (Clark County Development Services)
Plan sheet size is 24"x36" with 0.5" margins except 1.5" on left edge. (see City of Las Vegas Standard Plan Guidelines and Design Layout for Land Development
Projects, Nov 1998 p. 7)
"A record of survey must be ... 24 by 32 inches. A marginal line must be drawn completely around each sheet, leaving an entirely blank margin of 1 inch at the top,
bottom and right edges, and 2 inches at the left edge along the 24-inch dimension." (NRS 625.350)
"The size of each sheet of the final map must be 24 by 32 inches." (NRS 278.372 Final map: Requirements and contracts)
"Each sheet of the originals shall be twenty-four (24) inches by thirty-two (32) inches..." (Title 30 Clark County Unified Development Code, p. 30.28-19)
"Each sheet of paper...used for the map shall be 18 by 26 inches in size..." (California Codes Streets and Highways Codes Section 3110 (b))

## Microsoft Access Database Review

Simple Access Database Queries Using Filters
Open a table in Microsoft Access Datasheet View. Right mouse click on a cell value to bring up the the contect menu, select Filter By Selection.
Apply Filter/Remove Filter button toogles the filter on/off
Select Filter by Form when you want to use more than one field to query. A blank table is shown, just select drop down item for the field value desired. Then finally, click
the Apply filter button.
See [CustomGuide 01, p. 108-111]
Access Tables and Fields
"A property is an attribute that defines an object's appearance, behavior, or characteristics." [CustomGuide 01, p. 128]
Field Properties
Indexed - will speed up searches and sorts performed on a field. Within Design View of Microsoft Access, click the field name and then in the field properties
select the index option- Yes (Duplicates OK).
Caption - an alternate heading name for a field, for example field name=SSN can have caption=Social Security Number
Field Size - for text its the maximum number of characters the field can accept. For numbers its defines the type of number (e.g. Integer, byte).
Lookup Fields - from table or query
LookUp Wizard field Data Type that creates a lookup list of values from a table or query
Key field is the actual value that will be stored in the field, not the field that is being displayed.
Lookup Fields - from values typed in a list
LookUp Wizard field Data Type that displays a list of values in a drop-down list you manually entered.
Useful if entering the same data in a field repeatly.
See [CustomGuide 01, p. 127-159]

Miscellaneous Topics
Creating Point Features from Polygon Centroid Features
ArcToolBox -> Data Management Tools -> Features -> Feature to Point
Creating Reports
ArcMap built-in reporting tool
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Running a map layout report
Recommend using the Report Properties window -> Show Settings to customize the report
Can create a report based on select records (select some features then Tools -> Reports -> Create Report... Fields tab, check Use Selected Set)
Can change the Field name displayed in the Report (Tools -> Reports -> Create Report... Display tab, Settings: Fields: select a field: enter name to display in Text
property)
Can change the width of a field in the Report (Tools -> Reports -> Create Report... Display tab, Settings: Fields: select a field: enter a numeric value in the Width
property)
Can change report in Landscape or Portrait mode (Tools -> Reports -> Create Report... Display tab, Settings: Report: Page Setup)
stored with map
Cannot be used to report any fields that have embedded photos/images. Will need to use the Microsoft Access reporting tool instead.
can be added to map layout only. Copy the report to the clipboard, then Edit -> Paste.
Reports are divided into a series of sections. Each section represents a particular area of the report.
Shade the records in the report by: Report Properties -> Display tab. Under the Settings section of the window, click the + box next to Report -> Records -> Shade
Records -> Every Other. For more details see (ArcGIS Desktop Help -> ArcMap -> Creating reports -> Controlling the presentation of a report -> How to control
the presentation of a report -> Shading records in the report)
Can add an image to the top of a report. Report Properties -> Display tab -> Elements -> Image, click Picture button. See ArcGIS Desktop Help -> ArcMap ->
Creating reports -> Adding report elements for more details.
Add title of report under the Elements section, Title -> Text
Saving a report creates a static copy that can be inserted into another map document.
Biggest Limitation - Cannot edit a report after you close it. Even saving the report doesn't allow you to edit.
Biggest Advantage - Quick, can add to a map layout, easy to create alternating record colors
"If you create a report that you will want to use more than once or include on multiple maps, save it to a file on disk. You can then load the report into another map

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

296 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

when you need to. When you save a report to a file, you're creating a static copy that isn't linked to the actual data from which the report was created. Therefore,
you won't be able to modify the report." (See ESRI Virtual Campus Learning ArcGIS 9, Module 6: Getting Started with GIS Analysis)
Seagate's Crystal Reports 8: creates report in a separate window that cannot be added to your map layout. Can also be used to create mailing labels, see Article Number
18911
Microsoft Access
Reports are broken into Sections. Also the report prints in this order.
Report Header - text appearing on the top of the 1st page
Page Header - text appearing on top of each page in a report, e.g. reports column heading
Group Header - text appearing at the beginning of each group in a report
Detail - actual text from the table/query in the database
Group Footer - place text or summaries at end of each group in a report
Page Footer - text appearing at the bottom of each page in a report, e.g. page number
Report Footer - text appearing on the last page of the report, e.g. grand total
Calculate Controls: within the footer sections, select the Text Box control properties. On the Data tab, Control Source box, type the following: =Count([Total]). You
can use Sum([fieldname]), Max([fieldname]), Min([fieldname]), Avg([fieldname]), and Count([fieldname]).
To add a meaningful label: copy a Text Box control, in the properties, type the following in the
The format of a field is inherited from the underlying table or query. To change the format of a field in a query, select the field in the Query Design Model, select
properties, General tab, Format.
In a query, can create a new field, use the following format- FieldLabel: [Fieldname] * 0.5 (best to do this in the expression builder)
Reports can display pictures (e.g. OLE Object fields) for each record. Need to ensure the field data type is OLE Object. I experienced trouble view TIFF and EMF
images, successful on BMP and JPEG images. Remember you cannot see actual OLE objects in Datasheet View of a table or query, need to use Forms or Reports
to view.
Reports with pictures/images stored in the records of the table. Have the option to Stretch or Clip the image when resizing the control in Report Design View (Size
Mode - Clip, Stretch, or Zoom). Zoom Size Mode will maintain the aspect ratio of the image.
References, see [CustomGuide 01, Level 2, Chapter 3, p. 83-110, p. 162 discusses OLE Object fields]. How to Display Images from a Folder in a Form, a Report,
or a Data Access Page (see Microsoft Knowledge Base Article - 285820). Explanation of Data Types and Field Properties in a Microsoft Access Database (see
Microsoft Knowledge Base Article 304269)
Review - Reports and Joins
Reports
Within Microsoft Access - open the pl16222.mdb geodatabase, then open the remap table. Add a new field with the name IMAGES and the data type OLE Object.
Save the table.
In datasheet view, right mouse click on the IMAGE field and select Insert Object..., Create from File, then Browse to the images directory where you downloaded
the pl16222.zip file. If you select link checkbox, then the path and filename of the image is stored in the table, not the actual image file.
The name of the program that has the file type associated with it will be displayed in the IMAGE field.
Create a report in Microsoft Access from the remap table, include the IMAGES field in the report
Joins
Add the pl16222 polygon feature class and remap table within the pl16222.mdb geodatabase to ArcMap.
Join them together. From the ArcMap TOC, select the pl16222 polygon feature, right mouse click to bring up the context menu, select Joins and Relates -> Join...
The relate fields, also known as Primary Key, is PARCEL
Open the attribute table to ensure the join was successful.
Save the map document (.mxd) with relative paths (File -> Map Properties -> Data Source Options...) Setup Field Based Hyperlinks (Layer Properties on the
pl16222 feature class -> Display tab -> check Support Hyperlinks using field, drop down list box select remap.PHOTO, document radio button.
Select parcels in ArcMap using the hyperlink tool, see if PHOTOED.EXE opens with correct photo.
Compare Aerial Photo Images
Using the ER Mapper compressed aerial photos taken in Fall 2000 (f0016222.ecw) and Fall 2001 (f0116222.ecw) compare the two. Might need to download the ecw
plugin under the software section. ArcGISwithCompressor_v1.1.3_20Nov02.exe
from ArcMap Menubar: View -> Toolbars -> Effects, use Transparency option (100% invisible, 0% full visibility)
also available from TOC Layer Properties - Display tab: Transparent box
Example applications: pavement management and Dr. K's students are using it for air quality, relate development activities to air quality monitor readings.
ER Mapper can change tranparency without a refresh, much better.
Transparency only works in true color mode, see Article Number 14606
Symbol sets, 'No Color' acts like 100% transparent, see Article Number 14807
ArcMap Images
Display Raster Images
Using the ArcMap Add Data command to add raster images to the map display. Same process as adding shapefiles or geodatabases.
Pyramids
Use to improve redisplay of image when zooming/panning around.
will create a Reduced Resolution Dataset (same filename as image but with .rrd extension) in the same directory as the image.
If directory is write-protected (e.g. CDROM) then its written to c:\temp\rasterproxies. (see ArcGIS Desktop Help -> Contents -> ArcCatalog -> Working with
.rrd file size approximately 8% of the original raster dataset
Auxillary File (.aux) created by ArcGIS, has information about the raster such as statistics, histograms, and pyramids. Sometimes this information is stored within
the raster image itself. ArcGIS Desktop Help -> Contents tab -> ArcCatalog -> Working with rasters -> Calculating statistics for your raster dataset
ArcObjects Online, Create Raster Catalog From A Directory
Personel Geodatabase doesn't support raster image catalogs, the IMAGE field is a reserved key word.
Can include universal naming convention (UNC) paths in the IMAGE field. For example, \\ccgis1\aerialphotos\someimage.tif
Can use ArcObjects to Project Raster images, see c:\arcgis\arcexe83\ArcObjects Developer Kit\Samples\Raster\ProjectRaster\ProjectRaster.exe This program will output
3 different file image formats (Image, Tif-think GeoTiff, Grid) and .rrd file. All necessary projection information is included in the image header file, no need for a
separate world file.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

297 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

ArcMap does on-the-fly project of images as long as the image projection is defined. This will also work with images stored in a raster catalog.
Raster Catalogs
also known as Raster Image Catalogs
ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 - Raster Catalogs
Table-based raster catalogs
Raster Image Catalog: a dbf table that must have the following fields: IMAGE, XMIN, YMIN, XMAX, YMAX.
ArcGIS Desktop 10 - Table-based raster catalogs
Adding a raster catalog to a map
Creating raster catalogs in a geodatabase. A raster catalog is a table that points to the stored raster datasets it contains.
Example Raster Catalogs
IMAGE using full path: s08-5fullpath.dbf
IMAGE using relative path: s08-5relpath.dbf
Supported Raster Dataset File Formats
ArcGIS Resource Center - Desktop 10 - Supported Raster Dataset File Formats
USGS DEMs
List of supported raster formats, see ArcGIS Desktop Help -> Contents tab -> ArcCatalog -> Working with rasters -> Supported raster formats. List includes the
following formats: Bitmap (.bmp), Graphics Interchange Format (.gif), JPEG and TIFF

References
[ArcGIS White Paper] - ArcGIS 8.1 An ESRI White Paper. January 2001.
[Bagui 02] - Learning SQL A Step-by-Step Guide Using Access by Sikha Bagui & Richard Earp. ISBN: 0-321-11904-5. Access the latest information about AddisonWesley titles
[Flynn 97] - INSIDE ArcInfo, 2nd Edition by Jay Flynn & Teresa Pitts. ISBN: 1-56690-194-4
[Madsen 95] - Civil Drafting Technology, 4th Edition by David A. Madsen and Terence M. Shumaker. ISBN: 0-13-087155-9
[MapGuide R5] - Autodesk MapGuide Release 5 User's Guide
[Ormsby 01] - Getting to Know ArcGIS desktop by Tim Ormsby, Eileen Napoleon, Robert Burke, Carolyn Groess, and Laura Feaster. ISBN 1-879102-89-7
[Shaner 00] - Editing in ArcMap by Jeff Shaner and Jennifer Wrightsell. ISBN 1-879102-97-8
[Vance 00] - INSIDE AutoCAD Map 2000, 3rd Edition by Dylan Vance, Ray Eisenberg and David Walsh. ISBN: 1-56690-193-6
[Frerichs 98] - Roadway Design: Using GIS to streamline and improve highway planning and design. Wade N. Frerichs and James R. West.
[Cuomo 99] - A Topography Review: Surveying Principles for Civil Engineers by Paul A. Cuomo, P.L.S. February 1999 issue of CE News
[Dewberry 98] - The practice of land development: Planning, engineering, surveying, and more by Sidney O. Dewberry, P.E., L.L.S., and John Hummel, P.E.
[TCRP Report #60] - Using Geographic Information Systems for Welfare to Work Transportation Planning and Service Delivery: A Handbook (TCRP Report #60)
(2000) Part A, Part B,Case Studies
[Quickzone] - Quick Zone - A New Work Zone Delay Estimation Tool. Contact Deborah Curtis, FHWA Office of Operations Research & Development, (202) 493-3267,
Deborah.Curtis@fhwa.dot.gov
[Crook 92] - How to Remember Names by Dr. Thomas Crook. ISBN 0-06-016628-2. First Edition, 1992.
[MUTCD] - Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD)
[ESRI GDB Lecture 01] - Creating and Managing Geodatabases (for ArcEditor 8 and ArcInfo 8), Course Lectures. GIS Education Solutions from ESRI. June 2001.
[ESRI GDB Exercises 01] - Creating and Managing Geodatabases (for ArcEditor 8 and ArcInfo 8), Course Exercises. GIS Education Solutions from ESRI. June 2001.
[ESRI Edit ArcMap 02] - Editing in ArcMap. ArcGIS 8.3 Version Documentation. Contributing Writers: Bob Booth, Jeff Shaner, Scott Crosier, Phil Sanchez, and Andy
MacDonald. ISBN 1-58948-062-7
[ESRI 3D Analyst] - Using ArcGIS 3D Analyst. Contributing Writers: Bob Booth. ISBN 1-58948-004-X
[Musciano 00] - HTML & XHTML The Definitive Guide, 4th Edition by Chuck Musciano & Bill Kennedy
[Hutchinson 04] - Inside ArcView GIS 8.3 by Scott Hutchinson. ISBN: 0-7668-3475-1
[CustomGuide 01] - Microsoft Access 2002: Level 1 and Level 2. CustomGuide.com, 2001. 1502 Nicollet Ave. Minneapolis MN 55403. 888-903-2432.
[CCPW Survey] - Clark County Surveyor's Benchmark Book. Provides Elevation Data in the Las Vegas Valley, units meters, North American Vertical Datum 1988
(NAVD88). Can download the complete Benchmark Book in PDF. Summary "Because of localized subsidence in the Las Vegas Valley, the benchmark elevations from the 1992
County Vertical Control Network, together with elevations published by the cities of Las Vegas, North Las Vegas, and Henderson are no longer completely reliable.
Accordingly, the County Surveyor sought to standarize and coordinate the upgrading of this critical design criteria. The County Surveyor's work involved re-running the
primary Clark County Vertical Control Circuits from the latest National Geodetic Survey (NGS) control, adjusting the remaining circuits and tying them to each of the cities'
data, which was also adjusted based on the North American Vertical Datum of 1998." (Clark County General Information Report, GIR No. 0380)

## Sources of GIS data

United States Federal Forests
Toiyabe National Forest Spring Mountain National Recreation Area
4701 N Torrey Pines Dr
Las Vegas NV 89130-2301
Contacts: Scott Ewers, Lands & Special Uses. Voice: (702)515-5440, Fax: (702)515-5499, Email: mewers@fs.fed.us
Lance Dutton, Engineer, Email: ldutton@fs.fed.us, Voice: (702)515-5419
GIS people in Ogden UT. Roberta Quigley (801)625-5188, GIS Coordinator
Humboldt-Toiyabe National Forest GIS Contacts: Dave McMorran 1200 Franklin Way
Sparks NV 89431

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

298 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Voice Direct: (775)355-5388, Voice main: 775-355-5301, Email: dmcmorran@fs.fed.us

Pacific West Region (Washington, Oregon, Idaho, California, and Nevada)
National Forest Boundaries, metadata, ArcInfo e00. Projection: Geographic, Units: Decimal Degrees, Datum: NAD27 (according to Dan Thompson 801-975-3441).
Red Rock Canyon National Conservation Area
Red Rock Canyon National Conservation Area
Boundary created by Clark County Comprehensive Planning staff:
Ron Gregory-Federal Lands Coordinator (702-455-3121, rgy@co.clark.nv.us) and
Ralph Spear-GIS Analyst (702-455-4181, res@co.clark.nv.us)
ESRI Shapefiles (redrockbnd.shp, redrockbnd.dbf, redrockbnd.shx, redrockbnd.prj). Stateplane Coordinates, Nevada East Zone, Units Feet, NAD83.

Local Government
Clark County GIS Management Office (GISMO)
Clark County Regional Flood Control District
Regional Transportation Center of Southern Nevada
Clark County Water Reclamation District
Aerial Photos
Nye County
Clark County Assessor
Clark County Development Services
Clark County Comprehensive Planning
City of North Las Vegas
Clark County Public Works
City of Las Vegas
Virgin Valley Water District
Moapa Valley Water District
Boulder City
City of Mesquite
City of Henderson
Clark County Recorders Office
Clark County School District
Las Vegas Valley Water District
Clark County Air Quality and Environmental Management
State Government
Nevada Division of Water Resources (NDWR)
Board of Engineers and Land Surveyors
State of Nevada Real Estate Division
Idaho Department of Lands - GIS Department
Idaho Transportation Department, Map Library
Federal Government
Army Corps
FEMA
US Census
USDA
Natural Resource Conservation Service
Bureau of Land Management (BLM)
NOAA
USGS
Digital Elevation Model, DEMs
USGS National Atlas
USPS
US Department of the Interior - Bureau of Reclamation
US Department of Transportation - Bureau of Transportation Statistics
Private
NV Energy
NavTeq
Clark County Title Servies
Foreclosures

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

299 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Greater Las Vegas Association of REALTORS, Inc.

Embarq
Southwest Gas
Traffic counts
Surveying
Aerotech Mapping
Review Journal
Community Management Companies

## Clark County GIS Management Office

Street Centerline Geodatabase: crscl.mdb or StreetCenterline.mdb
Street Centerline Annotation Coverage (e00 format and zipped): sclan.zip
Street Centerline Major Street, ArcInfo Coverage - Interchange file: sclmajor.e00
Street Centerline ArcView Shapefile: scl_l.shp, scl_l.shx, scl_l.dbf, & scl_l.prj
Street Centerline Major Streets, ArcView Shapefile: sclmajor_l.shp, sclmajor_l.shp.xml, sclmajor_l.shx, sclmajor_l.dbf, & sclmajor_l.prj
Street Centerline nodes (with XY coordinates) in shapefile format: sclnode.zip
Street Centerline Routes in shapefile format: sclrte_l.dbf sclrte_l.prj sclrte_l.shp sclrte_l.shx
Cities in Clark County:
kml: sclcity_p.kmz
Shapefile: sclcity_p.shp, sclcity_p.dbf, sclcity_p.prj, sclcity_p.shx,
CrGeoDb
Census.mdb
CommunitySites.mdb
Education.mdb
Election.mdb
EmergencyResponse.mdb
Geology.mdb
HealthCare.mdb
IndexGrids.mdb
Landuse.mdb
Parcel.mdb
PublicGovFac.mdb
Soils.mdb
StreetCenterline.mdb
Zoning.mdb
Street Centerline &
How to ftp files to Clark County
ftp mapsrv.co.clark.nv.us
Example URL: ftp://mapsrv.co.clark.nv.us/pub/crgeodb/streetcenterline.zip
ftp ftpget.co.clark.nv.us
ftp ftpput.co.clark.nv.us
https://secureftp.co.clark.nv.us (recommend using SSH ftp to connect)
Township, Range, Section
clarktrs shapefiles (clarktrs_p.shp, clarktrs_p.dbf, clarktrs_p.shx, clarktrs_p.prj), or the clarkbk
geodatabase - (IndexGrids.mdb use in replace of TownshipRangeSection.mdb), clarktrs_p layer. The Assessor page number is shown on index_p layer. Clarktrs Metadata
IndexGrids Geodatabase - Feature Classes
ao_gps_p = Assessor GPS Control Points
clarkbk_p
clarktrs_p
index_p
secindex_p
uac_p
Aerial Photos
Raster Image Catalogs .dbf files typically use an image path of //DEMNAS2/CRIMAGE/S08-5/D001/S0800103.TIF for the raster catalog S08-5.dbf
Example Raster Image Catalogs:
IMAGE using full path: s08-5fullpath.dbf
IMAGE using relative path: s08-5relpath.dbf

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

300 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

If the images are stored in C:\gisdata\crimage\s08-5\D001\... and C:\gisdata\crimage\s08-5\S08-5.dbf then to use relative paths in the IMAGE name, use Field
Calculator in ArcMap and
Dim s, s1 as string
s1 = "../" & right( (IMAGE], 23)
s = replace(s1, "/", "\")

## Relative Path IMAGE field should look like ../S08-5/D001/S0800103.TIF

"Any table format, including text files and geodatabase tables, can be used to define a raster catalog; the only requirement is that the table contain five columns:
IMAGE, XMIN, YMIN, XMAX, and YMAX. The IMAGE column must contain a full path, relative path, UNC path, or an environment variable indicating where
a raster dataset is located. When relative paths are used, it is relative to the table's location. The remaining columns describe the raster dataset's extent." (ArcGIS
Desktop Help 9.3 Table-Based Raster Catalogs)
Creating raster catalogs in a geodatabase

Septic Tanks - Line Shapefile ( septic_l.dbf, septic_l.prj, septic_l.shp, septic_l.shx) and Polygon Shapefile ( septic_p.dbf, septic_p.prj, septic_p.shp, septic_p.shx)
Fields
Status - ''=blank is unknown, A=Active, D=Deleted (capped or permanently sealed), I=Inactive
GISMO is unable to find any metadata on this layer as of Feb 2009, above definitions are from Sharon Rice.
Septic Tanks, also known as Individual Sewage Disposal Systems (ISDS)
Septic Tank Design
Daniel LaRubio, Jr, PE, REHS, Environmental Health Engineer/Supervisor for the Southern Nevada Health District - Environmental Health Division - Engineering and
Plan Review Section, 625 Shadow Lane, PO Box 3902, Las Vegas NV 89117, Voice: 702-759-0660, Fax: 702-383-1445, Email: larubio@snhdmail.org
Walter B. Ross, PE. SNHD Environmental Health Engineer
Dennis Campbell is the Supervisor for Daniel LaRubio.
Need to ask if can get all permit which are imaged, then have UNLV Dr. Yfantis compress the images for distribution, maybe even store the images at UNLV.
Require to connect to public sewer system if both conditions are satisfied
Public or community sewerage systems are available within 400 feet of the nearest property line Section IV Permission to Construct - Permit Applications
Can access the public sewerage system with a gravity flow line Section IV Permission to Construct - Permit Applications, page 5
"4. Permission to construct shall be denied if: a. The Health Authority determines that the proposed installation will not comply with these Regulations; or b. Public
or community sewerage systems are available within four hundred feet (400') of the nearest property line and can be accessed by a gravity flow line." Section IV
Permission to Construct - Permit Applications, page 5
Percolation Test Procedures
Southern Nevada Health District - Residential Septic Tank Permit Requirements
Clark County Water Reclaimation District, Engineering Department: voice 702-434-6601. Engineer - Cal Starman.
When connecting to an existing sewerage system is enforced
Septic Tank Fails
Building Permit - requires connection to sewerage system if within 400 ft and gravity flow line
Using a VA or FHA federal loan to purchase the home.
ASTM Standards
D5921-96(2003)e1 Standard Practice for Subsurface Site Characterization of Test Pits for On-Site Septic Systems
Practice D2488-06 Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure). construction engineering interpretations of soil
properites
Practice D5925-96e1 (withdrawn standard 2005) Standard Practice for Preliminary Sizing and Delineation of Soil Absorption Field Areas for On-Site Septic
Systems. Used to determine septic tank effluent application rates to the soil
Practice D5879-95(2003) Standard Practice for Surface Site Characterization for On-Site Septic Systems. Used to determine recommended field area for an on-site
septic system
Percolation Tests

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

301 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Adrian E. Brown, EIT, Environmental Health Engineer, Southern Nevada Health District - Environmental Health Division, 625 Shadow Lane, PO box 3902, Las Vegas
NV 89127, voice: 702-759-0657, fax: 702-383-1445, email: browna@snhdmail.org
Percolation Tests are performed by a Soils/Geotechnical Engineer and submitted to SNHD for review
SNHD Requirements (more conservative than the State)
detail_aeration_riser.pdf
sample_perc_test.pdf
sample_perc_test_1.pdf
PercTestRegulationsPage1.jpg
PercTestRegulationsPage2.jpg
State of Nevada Percolation Test Procedures
NAC 444.796

## Clark County Regional Flood Control District

CCRFCD Rainfall and Weather
Tim Sutko (tsutko@regionalflood.org) and Shawn Fisher (sfisher@regionalflood.org) oversee the rain gauge and weather station network in Clark County NV.
District GIS data: shapefiles, ARC/INFO coverages .e00
GIS Layers
Firm Panels (panel.shp, panel.dbf, panel.shx, panel.prj, panel.sbn, panel.sbx)
Updated Flood Zones by Letter of Map Revision (lomr.shp)
Current Flood Zones (fzcur.shp)
Base Flood Elevation ( bfe.shp, bfe.shx, bfe.dbf, and bfe.shp.xml)
Geodatabase: CCRFCD-LVMPU2002.mdb
Layer File: Typical Land Use (MPUTypicalLandUse.lyr)
Master Plan Update sheet index: panels.e00
Status of Design/Construction of RFCD Master Plan Facilities, see the Agenda section of the RFCD website, Meeting Type is Board. Typically Item#6 - Ten Year
Construction Program Amendments, Exhibit C provides a spreadsheet by City of the status of the 10-year construction program.
Master Plan Update 2007 Draft Data
2007 MPU Land Use Classification: mpulu2007.dbf, mpulu2007.prj, mpulu2007.sbn, mpulu2007.sbx, mpulu2007.shp, mpulu2007.shx
Comparsion of RFCD MPU Land Use with Clark County Comprehensive Planning - Planned/Future Land Use CCLandUseValueDefinitions2007.xls
H Maps for 2002 Las Vegas Valley Master Plan Update
H-17.pdf (Color from UNLV)
RFCD District Documents -> Master Plans -> Las Vegas Valley -> 2002 -> Las Vegas Valley 2002 Master Plan Update - VolumeII.pdf (Black and White from
RFCD)
RFCD logo (rfcdlogo.bmp)
ArcMap Template of Master Plan Update (rfcdmpu.mxd)
Background: The Clark County Regional Flood Control District (CCRFCD) maintains a GIS layer of all the current Flood Zones in Clark County Nevada. The flood zone
boundaries are often revised by Civil Engineers to increase the amount of usable land for development by the construction of detention basins and/or concrete channels to
contain the flooding. FEMA requires a Letter of Map Revision (LOMR) to be submitted by the Civil Engineer once the flood control structures are constructed. Then
FEMA will reduce the width of the flood zone and revise the FIRM panel.
All FEMA published FIRM panel maps and LOMRs can be downloaded in pdf format from CCRFCD, under District Documents then select 'Flood Insurance Rate Maps'
or 'Letter of Map Revision' folders.
FEMA FIRM panels: example map1754.pdf
All FEMA FIRM panels for Clark County can be downloaded from CCRFCD in shapefile or coverage format. For this problem download the following: panel.shp
panel.dbf panel.prj panel.sbn panel.sbx panel.shp.xml panel.shx
All the LOMR revised areas have been converted to shapefiles and can also be downloaded from CCRFCD. For this problem download the following: lomr.shp lomr.dbf
lomr.prj lomr.sbn lomr.sbx lomr.shp.xml lomr.shx
Hydrologic Drainage Design and Criteria Manual
How to determine a composite CN for a basin area
Rational Method - Runoff Coefficients
Uses Average Percent Impervious by Land Use or Surface Characteristics
SCS Method - Runoff Curve Numbers
Uses Hydrologic Soil Group, Average Percent Impervious and Cover description to determine the Runoff Curve Number.
2002 Las Vegas Valley Flood Control Master Plan Update Volume 1 - Chapter 4.3.8 Land Use assigns a percent impervious to the 12 Land Uses (e.g.
1=Undeveloped Land/Open Desert, 2=Parks/Golf Courses, 3=Rural 0.5-1 units per acre, ...)
Unclear why the land use is further subdivided into these groups
Directly Connected Impervious
Open Landscaped Good Condition
Open Desert Shrub Poor Condition
Tabular Hydrograph Method - Unit Discharges for SCS Type II Rainfall Distributions only
Drainage Design Manuals
City of Lincoln Nebraska - Drainage Criteria Manual
City of Columbus Ohio - Stormwater Drainage Manual and Digital Submission Standards

UNLV

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

302 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## UNLV Harry Reid Research Facility

Survey files by Southwest Engineering and Kenny Aerial Mapping (14 Jan 2008) UNLV-BNDY.dwg, UNLVRF-PTS.csv, UNLV-TOPO.dwg,

## Regional Transportation Center of Southern Nevada

Utility Coordination - PCA Web
Capital Improvement Project data layers
Bus Routes, Bus Stops, Bus Stops with Attributes, Posted Speed Limits, Monorail, & Monorail Stations
POI - point of interest
Bike Routes
Altmode_offstreet and Altmode_onstreet (shapefiles are zipped - Altmode_OnOffstreet.zip). Metadata Altmode_offstreet
STATUS field: EX = Existing, PR = Proposed
BIKE_TYPE field: all shared use trails which can be used for different purposes such as hike, bike, horse, etc. CONN = connected to the road, PATH =
dedicatate path
STATUS_ROA = NO PATH, 0, 1, CONST, D-UNDEV, DEV/DEV, etc. Created by the RTC consultant but not maintained by RTC
TIER = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. Not used by RTC
RTC Bike Map
Viva Bike Vegas Map (requested a shapefile of this route from Al and Jeff at RTC on 5 Aug 2009)
State of Nevada - Safe Routes to School appears to be a Federal Grant program and applications are due January 2009, NDOT Senior Staff Biographies
Geodatabase: rtc.mdb
Reginal Transportation Streets and Highways Capital Improvements - Project Status by City, look for header Funding, will have a link Capital Improvements Program
Fiscal Year 2007-2027.
Bus Routes: busroute_l.shp, busroute_l.dbf, busroute_l.prj, busroute_l.shx, metadata
Bus Stops: stops_x.shp, stops_x.dbf, stops_x.prj, stops_x.shx, metadata
Bus Stops with all Attributes: stops.shp, stops.dbf, stops.shx, stops.prj metadata
RTC Standard Specifications and Drawings
RTC Traffic Impact Analysis Guidelines (a.k.a. Traffic Studies)
Southern Nevada Regional Planning Committee (SNRPC)
Regional Open Space and Trails Committee (ROST)
Contacts
Jerry Duke - dukej@rtcsnv.com
Mohammad Farhan, MPO Division - farhanm@rtcsnv.com
Fidel Calixto, Director - calixtof@rtcsnv.com, voice: 702-676-1611
Al Granzow, GIS - email: granzowa@rtcsnv.com
Jeff Truby, Senior GIS Analyst - email: trubyj@rtcsnv.com, voice: 702-676-1586

## Clark County Water Reclamation District

Sewer Easements
Odor Easement Crestwood APN 161-10-701-002 & 006 OdorEasement20060814-0004550.pdf
File Geodatabase: Easement Polygons and Legal Description Points - Easements.zip Easements.zip
CCWRDLegalDescPts - fields in the Legal Description Points Feature Class
DOCNO - Clark County Recorder Document/Instrument Number. 15 digit number, 19910604-00620. The first 8 characters are the date (Year, Month, Day).
Will often see the first two digits (19) dropped. It appears this habit was dropped by the Recorder for all documents recorded in 2000 or later.
TYPE - can be POC (Point Of Commencing) or POB (which is true Point of Beginning)
PlatURL - hyperlink to the subdivision map/plat which is referenced by the legal description
File Geodatabase: Easement Polygons only Easements.gdb.zip
Example Legal Descriptions, .pdf
Easement19910604-00620.pdf
Solution Traverse File: EAS_1.txt
Easement19950802-00982.pdf
Solution Traverse File: EAS_2-1.txt
Easement19951208-00669.pdf
Solution Traverse File: EAS_3.txt
Easement19961203-00726.pdf
Solution Traverse File: EAS_4.txt
Easement20000914-00641.pdf
Solution Traverse File: EAS_5.txt note this legal description doesn't use bearing and distances but aliquot parts. This traverse file was created from loading a
sketch.
Easement20001218-01031.pdf
Solution Traverse File: EAS_6.txt
Zip file of CCWRD GIS data - crsand.zip
Coverage: Sewer Lines and manholes - swsys.e00
Coverage: Sewer Annotation - swanno.e00
Geodatabase: Sewer Annotation at 10,000 scale, swanno.mdb
GIS Contact - Brian Bolduc
Uniform Design and Construction Standards for Potable Water Systems UniformDesignConstructionStandards.pdf
Contacts

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

303 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

5857 E Flamingo Rd
Las Vegas NV 89122-5598
Anders Sorensen, retired employee of CCWRD, email: asorensen@anders-sorensen-photo.com said they did not collect the sewer lateral information because they
did not have enough staff.
Procedure to Create Sewer Easements from Legal Descriptions
Step 0: obtain necessary GIS layers
Easement Layer
Unzip Easements.zip (into D:\ccwrd directory) to create Easements.gdb File Geodatabase
add CCWRDEasements polygons feature class and CCWRDLegalDescPts point feature class of the Legal Description Points to ArcMap
download symbology in the ArcMap layer file (.lyr). Note, if the layer file was saved with relative paths to the data source, then you should be able to easily
open it with ArcMap without having issues with broken links. For more info on ArcMap Relative Paths
ptsLegalDesc
linPOC2POB (linTraverseEasement)
polySewerEasement
Notes: the layer files will contain the layer expressions need to label the bearing, distance and curves on the linPOC2POB line feature class.
Assessor Parcels
TBE-B367 Computer Lab: C:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\Source\Parcel.mdb geodatabase -> Parcel Dataset -> parcel_p polygon feature class
Parcel.mdb personal geodatabase
Assessor Subdivisions with PlatURL
For your information, notes on how to create this layer in case you obtain a newer copy of the Assessor Parcel Layer, see How to create a subdivision
map from Assessor Parcels
Street Centerline
TBE-B367 Computer Lab: C:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\Source\StreetCenterline.mdb geodatabase -> StreetCenterLine dataset -> streets_l line feature class
use streets_l to label street names, which helps when trying to find the commencing point from the plat
StreetCenterline.mdb personal geodatabase
USGS Township Range Section layer
TBE-B367 Computer Lab: C:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\Source\IndexGrids.mdb geodatabase -> IndexGrids dataset -> clarktrs_p
IndexGrids.mdb personal geodatabase
Assessor Township Range Section layer
AOINDEX is created by dissolving the parcel layer based on the Assessor's map boundary. It does NOT follow the USGS Public Land Survey System
(PLSS) section lines. See Assessor Map Page Boundaries - index
TBE-B367 Computer Lab: C:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\Source\IndexGrids.mdb geodatabase -> IndexGrids dataset -> aoindex_p
AOSECINDEX_P is created by dissolving the AOINDEX layer based on the Section number. Recommend joining this layer with clarktrs_p using the
Book_Sec numbers to obtain the Township and Range numbers. Also recommend using this layer if your features need to snap to the Assessor parcels.
TBE-B367 Computer Lab: C:\gisdata\CrGeoDb\Source\IndexGrids.mdb geodatabase -> IndexGrids dataset -> AOSECINDEX_P
IndexGrids.mdb personal geodatabase
Step 1: Create Commencing and POB Points in CCWRDLegalDescPts point feature class
1.1a - If given the Book and Page numbers in the Legal Description
using PCLSUBD layer, select by attributes [ADFILE] LIKE '0045' AND [ADPAGE] LIKE '0035'
[ADFILE] field is the Book Number
[ADPAGE] field is the Page Number
Remember to pad the [ADFILE] and [ADPAGE] fields with 0 if the value is 4 characters long
1.1b - If the Subdivision Plat Name is given in the Legal Description
using PCLSUBD layer, select by attributes [SUBNAME1] LIKE ''
use get unique values to easily find the correct subdivision name
1.1c - If given the Township, Range, Section and Quarter Section
using clarktrs_p layer, select by attributes [TOWNSHIP] LIKE '20' AND [RANGE] LIKE '62' AND [SECTNO] LIKE '4'
zoom to selected features.
Then visualize where the quarter section is and zoom to this area. Remember, typically will not have boundaries for the quarter sections and smaller.
Then visualize where the quarter-quater section is and zoom to this area. This should put you in the neighborhood of the legal description
1.2 - open plat pdf
using PCLSUBD layer, activate the Hyperlink field to open the plat pdf file
find the COMMENCING point on the plat
find the COMMENCING point on parcel_p layer
1.3 - create COMMENCING point in CCWRDLegalDescPts
Start an edit session in ArcMap for the Easements.gdb file geodatabase
Turn Snapping on for parcel_p
set Target = CCWRDLegalDescPts
If COMMENCING point is based on Section Corner
set Tool = Sketch Tool (button looks like a pencil)
click on the map the location of the POC (typically a section corner)
click the attribute button from the Editor Toolbar
Add Attribute Values TYPE = POC
POC = Point of Commencing
Add Attribute Values DOCNO = obtain this from the legal description file name
If COMMENCING point is based on a center section/quarter-section/ quarter-quarter-section/... which is not on clarktrs_p layer
set Tool = Midpoint tool
help on Midpoint tool, see ArcGIS Destop 9.3 Help - About creating point features and vertices - section heading Creating a point or vertex
using the Midpoint tool
How to Snap to the Midpoint of a Feature
to find the Center section, need the connect the midpoint of the Western section line with the midpoint of the Eastern section line and connecting these
two points. Then need a line between the midpoint of the Northern section line and the midpoint of the Southern section line. Where these two lines
intersect is the Center section.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

304 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## see notes on Create a Point at the Intersection of two Features

Editor -> Save Edits
Symbology Display, use Survey category, Control Point marker
1.4 - create POB point in CCWRDLegalDescPts
should already be in an edit session in ArcMap for the Easements.gdb file geodatabase
should already have Snapping on for parcel_p
set Snapping for CCWRDLegalDescPts, check vertex
Editior -> Options: Units tab
Set Direction Type = Quadrant Bearing
Set Direction Units = Degrees Minutes Seconds
for more info see ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help - Setting direction measuring systems and units
set Target = CCWRDLegalDescPts
Option 1: use the Direction-Distance Tool
Use this method if the Point of Beginning is only one or two bearing and distances away from the Commencing Point. If you need to enter a full
traverse of 3 or more points, it is easier to use the COGO Traverse Tool instead of the Direction-Distance Tool.
Using the Distance-Distance Tool
scroll down to the section Creating a point or vertex using the Direction-Distance tool
1. click Direction-Distance tool
2. select the COMMENCING point
3. move the mouse, should see the bearing displayed in the lower left corner of the status bar. Press D and type in the actual Bearing from the Legal
Description. Press Enter.
4. select the COMMENCING point again
5. move the mouse, should see the distance displaed in the lower left corner of the status bar. Press D and type in the actual Distance from the Legal
Description. Press Enter.
Option 2: use the COGO Traverse Tool
Add Attribute Values TYPE = POB
Add Attribute Values DOCNO = obtain this from the legal description file name
Editor -> Save Edits
Symbology Display, use ESRI category, X Point marker
Step 2: Create Easement in CCWRDEasement polygon feature class
Curves and Angles
ArcGIS Desktop 9.3 Help Traverse File Format Description

Aerial Photos
Clark County Aerial Photos
TIFF/TFW images, 5ft Pixel Fall 2003: f0316222.tif, f0316222.tfw
ECW images, Fall 2000: f0016222.ecw
ECW images, Fall 2001: f0016222.ecw
ECW images, Fall 2002: f0016222.ecw
TIFF/TFW images, 5ft Pixel Fall 2004: f0417932.TIF, f0417932.tfw, f0417932.aux,

Nye County
Nye County Public Works
David Fanning, Interim Director of Public Works, dfanning@co.nye.nv.us
Samson Yao, PE
Nye County Public Works
250 N Hwy 160 #2
Pahrump NV 89060
Email: syao@nyecounty.net
Staff Directory - Public Works/Road Department
Advertise projects in Pahrump, Tonopah and Las Vegas newspapers
Bid Packages, contact Judy Dyer 775-482-7256, email: jdyer@co.nye.nv.us
Nye County Human Resources
Danelle Shamrell, email: dshamrell@co.nye.nv.us
Amy 775-751-6300
Roadway and Airport Design done by PBS&J
Drainage and Traffic Study Reviews by Martin & Martin
GIS Competitive Bid Project was awarded to Somas and the project is almost complete as of Feb 2009.
Guidelines for Design and Review of Development Engineering Submissions
Nye County GIS Web Browser - http://12.70.88.84/nyegwb/viewer.htm
Parcel Data Searches - example search for Parcel# 039-211-03 http://asdb.co.nye.nv.us:1401/cgi-bin/asw102?Parcel=03921103 alternative URL http://12.70.88.84
/nyegwb/parcel_recdoc.asp?apn=039-211-03

## Clark County Assessor

Assessor Book 163 Section 19 geodatabase AssessorParcel16319.mdb
Assessor Book 179 Section 32 geodatabase AssessorParcel17932.mdb

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

305 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## UNLV Parcel: pl16222.shp, pl16222.dbf, pl16222.shx, metadata

Geodatabase of UNLV parcel: ccAssessor.mdb
Pictures of UNLV parcels and Geodatabase zip file: pl16222remap.zip
Clark County Assessor Parcel coverage for Book 163 Section 19
Geodatabase for Parcel, AOExtract, and AOSubd: AssessorParcel16319.mdb
Assessor Parcel Layer: Book 177 Section 25 (pl17725.e00)
Book 177 Section 35 (pl17735.e00)
Book 177 Section 36 (pl17736.e00)
Clark County Assessor's AOEXTRACT file for Book 163 Section 19
Geodatabase of Parcel, AOExtract, and AOSubd AssessorParcel16319.mdb
Secured Tax Roll Extract: AOEXTRACT metadata under Browse tab, Assessor's Secured Tax Roll Extract, View Details, View Attributes
Notes
To identify vacant land, LANDUSE = 0 (technically LUUSE=0). If using a Select by Attributes query in ArcMap, to help find the LANDUSE field in the many
fields included in the AOEXTRACT file, scroll toward the middle.
LANDUSE code is a 6 digit number.
Field 1: Source Code (1=Residential, 2=Industrial, 3=Commercial, and so on)
Fields 2 & 3: Use Code (10=Single Family Resident, 20=Duplex, 30=Triplex, 40=Fourplex, 50=Apartments, and so on for Residential Source code only).
Fieldname in database is LUUSE
Field 4: Auxiliary Code
Field 5: Secondary Auxiliary Code
Field 6: Pool Count
Relate Field (Primary Key) is the PARCEL number
Shapefiles: pl16222.shp, pl16222.shx, and pl16222.dbf.
Assessor's AOROW table for Book 162 Section 22 rw16222.dbf.
Use Parcel Subdivision Number (PCLSUBD) to dissolve lines within the right of way to create a road casing or right of way boundaries. For example 99=dedicated and
fee owned roads, 97=non-assessed common areas and planting strips, 96=dedicated and fee owned flood channels, and 95=private roads. Example SQL query, Note
PCLSUBD field is a string type instead of an integer type, so need to enclose query in quotes.
Non-assessed road parcels, that is right of way
97 = Common Area
96 = Flood Control
94 = Trails
90 = Other
[PCLSUBD] LIKE '9*' (matches an unlimited characters)
[PCLSUBD] LIKE '9?' (matches a single character)
[PCLSUBD] LIKE '9#' (matches a single digit)
See ArcGIS Desktop Online help (ArcMap -> Query Maps -> SQL Reference)
Assessor's AOEXTRACT table for book 162 section 22 ao16222.dbf
If PCLSUBD redefined item (only used in coverages) is missing, do the following: Add a new field and using the Field Calculator string function, Mid ( [PARCEL], 7, 2)
to extract the 7th and 8th fields from the parcel number string. For help on VBA functions see, Tools -> Macros -> Visual Basic Editor: Help -> Visual Basic Reference.
Road Casing Issues: if the parcel owner didn't dedicate portions of their land to the County, then you won't be able to create a road casing there. This dedication is
typically done when you proceed to develope the parcel.
Assessor GPS Control Points (aogps)
From the Clark County Metadata homepage: select the Browse tab, under categories select Assessors Office, scroll down to GPS Control Points, click View
POINT_TYPE = 1, Section Corner
POINT_TYPE = 2, Section Center
POINT_TYPE = 3, Quarter Section Corner
aogps geodatabase: aogps.mdb
Assessor Record Searches
Recorded Maps - Book/File/Page Number link
Example of Lance Burton Reversionary Map (PM 101-0100) query, LanceBurtonPM101-0100.pdf
Map Type = PM
Map File# = 101
Map Page# = 0100
Layer Files
\\ccgis1\gisdata-ftp\outgoing\assessor\assr-layer-files
GISMO.GISMO.ASSREASE_L.lyr
GISMO.GISMO.ASSREASE_L.lyr.xml
GISMO.GISMO.LLLOTBLK_A.lyr
GISMO.GISMO.LLSUBDNAME_A.lyr
GISMO.GISMO.LOTLINE_L.lyr (e.g LL16302 coverage, LOTLINE-TYPE field contains LD, LL, LM, LS, ML, MS, SB values. LL = Lot Line)
GISMO.GISMO.PARCEL_P.lyr
GISMO.GISMO.PLNOTES_A.lyr
GISMO.GISMO.PLSMALLPCL_A.lyr
GISMO.GISMO.PLSUBDSEQ_A.lyr
maplayers.mxd
\\ccgis1\gisdata-ftp\sngis\ I believe this is where UNLV will download the GIS data once they are an official member of the Interlocal Agreement
AOCCROLL (text file of fields - aoccroll.txt)
Strunit, Comment1, Comment2, Fixd, Subtag, Legal1, Legal2, Legal3, Legal4, Legal5, Legal6, Assdyr, Constyr, Docdate, Filler1, Docno, docmult, Docvest,
Saleprice, Saletype, Saledate, Portion, Bk1, Bk2, Sectno, Township, Range, Landuse, Capacity, LandCD1, Landacre1, Landval1, Landcd2, Landacre2, Landval2,

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

306 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Impval, Prcd1, Prval1, Prcd2, Prval2, Prcd3, Prval3, Exmpcd, Exmpval, Lyacres, Lylndval, Lyimpval, Lyppval, Lyexcd, Lyexval, Ly2acres, Ly2lndval, Ly2impval,
Ly2ppval, Ly2excd, Ly2exval, Ownernum, Ownerden, Etalflag, Upddate, Lastupdate, Lotsqft, Oldparcel, Inactpcl, Inactref, Filler2, Firemapno, Fdphantom,
Assembly, Senate, Congress, Commission, Centract, Ward, Precinct, Taz, Zip, Pclbook3, Pcl5, Pcl6, Pcl8, Oldbook, Oldpcl, Oldpage, Pclsec, Pclpage, Oldlot,
Contacts
500 S Grand Central Pkwy, 2nd Floor Las Vegas NV 89155
Ken Masden, Deputy Assessor - Senior GIS Analyst, Parcel Data Systems. Email: ksm@co.clark.nv.us, voice: 702-455-5586, fax: 455-5553
Bob Kelley, rdk@co.clark.nv.us, voice: 702-455-4990. Maintains the aoccroll database, which is a superset of the aoextract. Bob Agnew uses this at \\ccgis1
\gisdata-ftp\sngis\weekly\data\20070903\*.zip (includes crpcl-dat.zip, crpcl-db.zip, crpcl-dbf.zip, crpcl-shp.zip and crpcl-src.zip) (unknown which zip file contains
aoccroll)
How to relate ADTYPE field to Map Type on the web

## Clark County Assessor Map Types

AOEXTRACT table, ADTYPE field ADTYPE Description Webpage Map Type Webpage Map Type Description
PB

## Subdivision Plat Book PL

Plats - Subdivision

PM

Parcel Map

PM

Parcel Maps

SF

Survey Files

SV

Survey Files

LD

Land Division

LD

Land Division

LG

Local Government

MF

Miscellaneous File

MI

Misc Maps

MS

Mineral Survey

MM

Mining Map

## How to create a parcel hyperlink to the recorded Plat or Parcel Map

Step 1: Obtain the parcel geodatabase which contains the parcel_p polygon feature class and either the AOEXTRACT table or AOSUBD table
Step 2 with AOEXTRACT table: Add a new field call PlatURL (type text, length 200) to the AOEXTRACT table. Use the field calculator with the following string:

When finished, the PlatURL field should look something like this
http://gisgate.co.clark.nv.us/assessor/webimages/default.asp?appID=3&lstMapType=PL&txtMapFile=25&txtMapPage=0022

## Step 2 with AOSUBD table

"http://gisgate.co.clark.nv.us/assessor/webimages/default.asp?appID=3&lstMapType=PL" & "&txtMapFile=" & right([ADFILE], 3) &

Step 3: index the PARCEL field in both the AOEXTRACT table and the parcel_p polygon feature class. Then join together.
Step 4: in ArcMap table of contents, bring up the parcel_p properties. Under the Display tab, turn on hyperlinks using the PlatURL field
Step 5: Using the Hyperlink tool on the Tools Toolbar, click a parcel and it should open a web browser showing the Plat or Parcel Map in Adobe Acrobat (pdf)
Assessor Parcel Subdivision Personal Geodatabase: (L:\Jeffery Jensen\GISdata\CrGeoDb\Source\PclSubd.mdb)
Goal is to create a field which will have values similar to this link
http://redrock.co.clark.nv.us/assrrealprop/pcldetail.aspx?hdninstance=pcl7&hdnparcel=164-13-410-001

Step 1: using the OFFSITES point layer as an example from CCDS, add a field called

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

307 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

OwnCurURL
type Text, Length 500

## Step 2: using the field calculator, add the following calculation,

s = "http://redrock.co.clark.nv.us/assrrealprop/pcldetail.aspx?hdninstance=pcl7&hdnparcel=" & Left( [APPARCEL], 3) & "-" & Mid( [APPARCEL], 4,
2) & "-" & Mid( [APPARCEL], 6, 3) & "-" & Right( [APPARCEL], 3)

## Identify Parent/Child Relationship/Pedigree of Parcel Creation

When building other GIS layers off the Assessor's Parcel Layer, need to know when the Assessor Adds, Modifies or Deletes a Parcel. To this end, the aoparchild.txt was
created.
Microsoft Access Template for aoparchild.txt: aoparchildtemplate.mdb
Aoparchild.txt Fields
RecNo - Record Number, Integer, Length 7
APNParent - Parent Assessor Parcel Number, Text, Length 11
APNChild - Child Assessor Parcel Number, Text, Length 11
APNStatus - whither the parcel is A=Active or I=Inactive, Text, Length 1
Aoparchild.txt is a represented as a single level text file, but is actually multi-level. Need to do a self join to demonstrate this. See Allen Browne Microsoft Access Tips:
Self Joins
To import the aoparchild.txt into Microsoft Access aoparchildtemplate.mdb, recommend the following steps
Step 1) make a copy of aoparchildtemplate.mdb and give it the month and year (tblAoParChild062008)
Step 2) right click blank area in the aoparchildtemplate.mdb database (must select Tables under Objects) and choose import

## Step 3) select the Import Specs already setup in the aoparchildtemplate.mdb

Microsoft Access Import Specs
Step 4) follow the defaults in the import wizard, then choose the option to import the file (i.e. aoparchild.txt) into an existing table (e.g. tblAoParChild062008)

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

308 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

AOCHANGE
How to create a subdivision map from Assessor Parcels
Procedure on how to create Assessor Subdivision/Final Map Layer with the option to add Common Interest Community (CIC) and HOA map info
Solution: pclsubd.mdb personal geodatabase (current as of April 2009)
Step 0: obtain Assessor data - Parcel geodatabase
Step 1: add a new field (PCL8, Text, length 8) to parcel_p polygon feature class. Calculate PCL8 to equal the first 8 numbers of the full parcel number. Recommend using
VBA Statements Left([Parcel],8)
Step 2: Dissolve the parcel polygon layer by the PCL8 field. Name it pclsubdis.
ArcToolbox -> Data Management Tools -> Generalization -> Dissolve
Uncheck create multipart features, will cause ArcMap 9.3 to crash

## Will take about 30 minutes to run

Parcel Personal Geodatabase - ArcMap 9.3 will crash when I attempt to DISSOLVE based on a new text field, PCL8 with the option checked - create multipart
features. Note can only output to Geodatabase, not Shapefile or Coverage. Crash occurs if I attempt to save in the same geodatabase as I'm trying to dissolve. Also
crashes if saving to a new personel geodatabase or file geodatabase. If I uncheck create multipart features, it will run without crashing for the personel and file
geodatabases.
Step 3: Join with the aosubd table using the PCL8 field with the PCL8 field from pclsubdis feature class

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

309 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

If you want to remove non-taxed parcels such as the right of way, check Keep only matching records under the Join Options
Step 4: export joined feature class to pclsubd.
Using ArcMap -> Table of Contents: right click on the pclsubdis and choose Data -> Export Data. Name the new polygon feature class pclsubd within the
PclSubd.mdb personal geodatabase (this will have to be created using ArcCatalog). Alternative is to export the polygon feature class into the Parcel.mdb
geodatabase. This will make the join permanent.
Just remove the duplicate PCL8_1 and OBJECTID fields in the pclsubd attribute table
Step 5: Add new field - platurl
Create a new field called platurl, text, length 255. This will be populated with a hyperlink to the plat (ADFILE and ADPAGE fields) which created the parcels.
Field calculator: "http://gisgate.co.clark.nv.us/assessor/webimages/default.asp?appID=3&lstMapType=PL" & "&txtMapFile=" & right([ADFILE], 3) &
To reference a map, need the Map Type, File# and Page#. ADTYPE = Map Type, ADFILE = File# and ADPAGE = Page#. Note, to find the exact URL for the
Map, just do a parcel or owner name search.

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

310 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Ideally just open up this subdivision parcel layer, then using the hyperlink tool, do all your research on Final Maps. Example URLs
Document Number: http://gisgate.co.clark.nv.us/assessor/webimages/default.asp?appID=1&txtdocNum=20070110:01305
Map Type is Parcel Map: http://gisgate.co.clark.nv.us/assessor/webimages/default.asp?appID=3&lstMapType=PM&txtMapFile=071&txtMapPage=0042

## Map Type is Plat: http://gisgate.co.clark.nv.us/assessor/webimages/default.asp?appID=3&lstMapType=PL&txtMapFile=25&txtMapPage=0022

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

311 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Problem - the aosubd table from the Assessor's Office, doesn't contain the Map Type, only has the Map File and Map Page. Also the ADFILE field is 4
characters, but the web search only allows 3 characters, so this needs to be resized.
Solution: According to Zane Burgeson, the AOSUBD table will not contain the ADTYPE field due to the fact that all the AOSUBD records are
Subdivision Plats (also known as Plat Books - PB or just Plats - PL).
Field calculator: "http://gisgate.co.clark.nv.us/assessor/webimages/default.asp?appID=3&lstMapType=PL" & "&txtMapFile=" & right([ADFILE], 3)
Problem - only the coverage annotation layer (e.g. LL16302, annotation feature class) has the reference to the subdivision map (e.g. PM101-0100) and the
subdivision outline is a thick red line. The subdivision is NOT maintained as a polygon layer, but as annotation and lines. This makes it difficult to assign the
PM100-0100 attribute to a subdivision polygon (create using the dissolve on the parcel polygon layer using the first 8 digits of the parcel number).
Step 6 (optional) - Add book and sect fields
BOOK = Left( {PCL8], 2)
SECT = Mid( [PCL8], 4, 2)
if going to display in Google Earth and use Region Based Network Links, then create 2 additional fields, BOOK (length 3) and SECT (length 2). Using the field
calculator:
Step 7 (optional) - Add a new field cicyn
(name cicyn, type is text, length 1). CICYN = Common Interest Community Yes or No. Have about 46,000 subdivision in Clark County NV.

## Clark County Development Services

Encroachment Permits
Clark County Development Services: Enroachment Permits (encroach_shp.zip)
Drainage Studies, Traffic Studies, Offsites ArcInfo Coverage - drnstdy.e00, ArcView Shapefiles - drnstdy_x.dbf, drnstdy_x.prj, drnstdy_x.shp, and drnstdy_x.shx
Field Name: URL_DSNET example URL is http://dsnet.co.clark.nv.us/webimage/dsimageview.asp?gHTENum=06-26491&gHTEType=4
This would be similar to the direct URL to the Recorder's PDF from the County Assessor, http://gisgate.co.clark.nv.us/assessor/webimages/default.asp?appID=1&
txtdocNum=20040123:02257
Offsite Improvement Plans
Point Shapefile - OFFSITES.dbf, OFFSITES.prj, OFFSITES.sbn, OFFSITES.sbx, OFFSITES.shp, OFFSITES.shx and OFFSITES.xml
Fields
HTE = Permit Application Number. Example: 06-21293, First two number are the year and the last is an autonumber.
APPARCEL = Clark County Assessor Parcel Number
NAME = Title of Development
STUDY = Type of Offsite Plans
CMF = Commercial Full Offsites
CMP = Commercial Paving
PMF = Parcel Map Full Offsites
PMP = Parcel Map Paving
SDF = Subdivision Full Offsites
SDP = Subdivision Paving
Dim s As String
If [STUDY] = "*CMF" Then
s = "commercial full offsites"
ElseIf [STUDY] = "*CMP" Then
s = "commercial paving"
ElseIf [STUDY] = "*CMG" Then

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

312 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## ElseIf [STUDY] = "*PMF" Then

s = "parcel map full offsites"
ElseIf [STUDY] = "*PMG" Then
ElseIf [STUDY] = "*PMP" Then
s = "parcel map paving"
ElseIf [STUDY] = "*SDF" Then
s = "subdivision full offsites"
ElseIf [STUDY] = "*SDP" Then
s = "subdivision paving"
ElseIf [STUDY] = "*SDG" Then
Else
s = [STUDY]
End If

URL_DSNET = web link to the offsite plan images. Example: http://dsnet.co.clark.nv.us/webimage/dsimageview.asp?gHTENum=06-21293. Note, if
the offsite plans are still under review then the plans will not be imaged. Only become official records once the permit is issued and therefore are
imaged into the County KoVIS system.
Mapping Team/Survey
Contacts
Erik Denman, PLS, WRS, Deput County Surveyor, Clark County Development Services - Mapping Team Voice: 702-455-2103, Fax: 702-380-7296, Email:
edenman@co.clark.nv.us
Traffic Studies
Contacts: Denise Lemoine - Principal Civil Engineer, Voice: 702-455-6146, Email: denisel@co.clark.nv.us
Peter Sekioka - Senior Civil Engineer, Voice: 702-455-4791, Email: psekioka@co.clark.nv.us
Rose Berkihiser - Associate, Voice: 702-455-2024, Email: rmb@co.clark.nv.us
Geotech/Soils Reports
KoVIS Permit Type = SOIL
GeoTechnical Reports are stored with the building permit instead of seperately like drainage studies, traffic studies and offsite improvements.
Types of Reports
GDR - SUBDIVISION OFFSITE & GRADING, 2% of submittals
GR - Grading, 2% of submittals
GRCM - GRADING-COMMERCIAL, 36% of submittals
GRRE - GRADING-RESIDENTIAL, 59% of submittals
Click2Gov, Select Permit, Enter HTE#/PAC#, Plan Tracking Status, Civil Division, Approved, should see Offsite HTE#
Contacts
Werner Hellmer - Senior Civil Engineer, Voice: 702-455-8095, email: wkh@co.clark.nv.us
Ayalew Birhane - Associate Engineer, Voice:, 702-455-8830, email: ayalew@co.clark.nv.us
CCDS Universal Naming Convention (UNC) Path: \\ccgis1\gisdata\prds\crupdate\barricade
HTE Civil Application Type Codes
Clark County Civil Application Type Codes for HTE
Type Field Abbreviation

## Type Field Name

Number of Submittals

BDF

Bond - Default

47

BLM

295

CMF

## Commercial - Full Off Sites

3731

CMG

Commercial - Gravel

29

CMP

Commercial Paving

200

CON

Contract - Testing

15

DS

Drainage Study

7833

EP

Encroachment Permit

23699

GEO

Geotechnical Report

421

GP

## Grading Plan Only - No Off Sites

72

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

313 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

IMP

## Improvement Phasing Agreement - Commercial Property 44

IND

Indefinite Bond

INS

Inspections - No Permit

LDF

LDG

14

LDP

## Land Division - Paving

20

MA

Maintenance Agreement

19

MIT

966

MPC

189

MPD

816

MPG

MPM

MPS

738

MPT

182

MS

Miscellaneous

314

PMB

101

PMF

657

PMG

166

PMP

341

PMS

90

RB

Repair Bond

72

SDF

## Subdivision - Full Off Sites

3320

SDG

Subdivision - Gravel

SDP

Subdivision - Paving

65

TCP

14885

TS

Traffic Study

2031

UP

Utility Plans

355

UPC

786

UPG

960

UPN

4993

UPT

4083

UPV

366

## Research Plans (KoVIS system)

On-Line Services -> Document Image Search
Physically visit the Clark County Development Services (500 S Grand Central Pkwy, Las Vegas NV), first floor, Imaging.
Example - Southeast corner of Sahara and Buffalo, Drainage Study HTE# 04-55261, Traffic Study HTE# 04-47106, Offsite Improvement Plans HTE# 05-2578.
Traffic Study will require FAST/Interconnect Conduit on Right of Way 80 feet or less of 3 inches and greater than 80 feet conduit diameter of 4 inches. The
contractor must install No. 8 bare tracer wire which will be used by the line locater when marking utilities. Offsite Improvement Plans will show location of FAST
conduit.
Willdan
Chris O. Stone Method of Hydrology
TCMcC.xls or TCMcC.zip
WilldanStoneLookupTable.xls or WilldanStoneLookupTable.zip
Land Use Applications
Reference Map before 1995 for all land use applications that were accepted on the given parcel.
ArcInfo Coverage, Interchange Format: refpre95.e00
ArcView Shapefiles: refpre95_x.dbf, refpre95_x.prj, refpre95_x.shp, refpre95_x.shp.xml, and refpre95_x.shx
Reference Map between 1995 and 1998 for all land use applications that were accepted on the given parcel.
ArcInfo Coverage, Interchange Format: ref9598.e00
ArcView Shapefiles: ref9598_x.dbf, ref9598_x.prj, ref9598_x.shp, ref9598_x.shp.xml, and ref9598_x.shx
Reference Map of 1999 for all land use applications that were accepted on the given parcel.
ArcInfo Coverage, Interchange Format: ref9598.e00
ArcView Shapefiles: ref99_x.dbf, ref99_x.prj, ref99_x.shp, ref99_x.shp.xml, and ref99_x.shx
Layer is no longer being maintained/updated by Andrea Faustina, just for historical use.
Need to request CCDS to update this layer.
Zoning
Zoning.mdb geodatabase is maintained by Andrea Faustina, GIS Analyst II, Voice: 702-455-5087, Email: afaustin@co.clark.nv.us
ArcMap Layer ClarkCountyZoning.lyr
Zoning Legend PDF ( page 1, page 2)
Residential Districts - Rural Residential
R-U Rural Open Land ( Title 30.40.040 Purpose of R-U, 1 unit per 2 acres - livestock with conditions)
R-A Residential Agriculture ( Title 30.40.050 Purpose of R-A, Up to 1 unit per acre - livestock with conditions)
R-E Rural Estates ( Title 30.40.060 Purpose of R-E, Up to 2 units per acre - livestock with conditions)
R-D Suburban Estates Residential ( Title 30.40.070 Purpose of R-D, Up to 3 units per acre)
Residential Districts - Single Family Residential
R-1 Single Family Residential ( Title 30.40.090 Purpose of R-1, Up to 5 units per acre
R-1a Single Family Residential

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

314 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

R-T Manufactured Home Residential ( Title 30.40.100 Purpose of R-T, Both subdivided lots and parks, Up to 5 units per acre - subdivision, Up to 8 units per
acre - parks.
R-2 Medium Density Residential ( Title 30.40.110 Purpose of R-2, Up to 8 units per acre
RUD Residential Urban Density ( Title 30.40.120 Purpose of RUD, Up to 14 units per acre (single family only)
Multiple Family Residential
R-3 Multiple Density Residential ( Title 30.40.140 Purpose of R-3, Up to 18 units per acre
R-4 Multiple Density Residential ( Title 30.40.150 Purpose of R-4, Up to 25 units per acre
R-5 Apartment Residential ( Title 30.40.160 Purpose of R-5, Up to 50 units per acre
Residential Districts - Other
RE-UUF Rural Estates Undeveloped Undetermined Future, RE zoning - master planned for more intense use
ROI/ZC Resolution of Intent/Zone Change - identifies parcels which are in the process of getting a zone change
Non-Residential Districts
Commercial
CRT - Commercial Residential Transition ( Title 30.40.180 Purpose of CRT) - residential conversions, no retail (accessory OK)
C-P Office and Professional ( Title 30.40.190 Purpose of C-P) - very limited retail
C-1 Local Business - neighborhood convenience uses, auto maintenance OK ( Title 30.40.200 Purpose of CRT)
C-C Shopping Center (Title 29)
C-2 General Business ( Title 30.40.180 Purpose of C-2) - Regional Commercial allows taverns, auto maintenance OK, auto repair with special use
C-3 General Commercial (Title 29)
Manufacturing
M-D Designed Manufacturing - warehouse, wholesale, outside storage OK with principle indoor use and screening ( Title 30.40.230 Purpose of M-D)
M-1 Light Manufacturing - M-D plus adult use, stand alone outside storage facilities, auto paint and body ( Title 30.40.240 Purpose of M-1)
M-2 Industrial without Dwelling - most intense - hazmat ( Title 30.40.250 Purpose of M-2)
M-3 Heavy Industrial (Title 29)
Special
O-S Open Space ( Title 30.40.270 Purpose of O-S)
H-2 General Highway Frontage - antiquated district, trying to eliminate most uses require a use permit ( Title 30.40.280 Purpose of H-2)
P-F Public Facility - Airport, school, park, etc. ( Title 30.40.290 Purpose of P-F)
RVP Recreational Vehicle Park ( Title 30.40.300 Purpose of P-F)
U-V Urban Village - mixed use (residential, commercial, and recreation) ( Title 30.40.310 Purpose of U-V)
H-1 Limited Resort and Apt - resorts, live gaming, commercial with use permit ( Title 30.40.320 Purpose of H-1)
T-C Mobile Home Park (Title 29)
Overlay Zone
P-C Planned Community - usually major projects
Multi layer Zoning - different zoning on various floors of one building
RNP - Rural Neighborhood Preservation
RNP-I Masterplan - 2 units per acre
RNP-II State - 2 units per acre
RNP-III - 4 units per acre
Southern Nevada Amendments to the 2006 International Building Code Appendix J - Grading Plan Requirements
Southern Nevada Amendments to the 2000 International Building Code, Published Feb 11, 2003. Appendix K - Grading.
Planning Codes
Qrep2007CCPlanningPermits.xls
How to Fix HTE numbers
Problem, when using the HTE (Permit Application Number) as a relate/join item, could have HTE#= 06-123 or HTE#= 06-00123. To resolve this issue, following Field
Calculator will pad the HTE# sequence number with zeros.

Dim s As String
If Len( [HTE] ) = 7 Then
s = LEFT( [HTE],3) & "0" & RIGHT([HTE],4)
ElseIf Len( [HTE] ) = 6 Then
s = LEFT( [HTE],3) & "00" & RIGHT([HTE],3)
ElseIf Len( [HTE] ) = 5 Then

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

315 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## s = LEFT( [HTE],3) & "000" & RIGHT([HTE],2)

ElseIf Len( [HTE] ) = 4 Then
s = LEFT( [HTE],3) & "0000" & RIGHT([HTE],1)
Else
s = [HTE]
End If

## How to extract TIFF images from KoVIS CD/DVD

Problem: Purchased a CD from Clark County Development Services - Records Division which has the TIFF images of a drainage study I'm interest in. I would like to use
one of the sheets in the drainage study as a background image in AutoCAD. The CD comes with the KoVIS viewer but how do I extract given sheet/page number?
Solution
Step 1: find the TIFF image you want to extract using the KoVIS Viewer
Step 2: ensure the DOCUMENT-ID column/field is being displayed in the Hitlist. If its not, right click on any field, select Insert Column, select Document-ID
column, then the tricky step, you need to select an existing column to insert this Document-ID column to the right of it.
Step 3: read the DOCUMENT-ID value. The values must be read subfolder first, then parent folder. This gives the directory structure on the CD. Examples
DOCUMENT-ID = YYX where X is the parent directory name (values 0 thru 9) and YY is the subfolder name (values 00 thru 99)
DOCUMENT-ID = 215, then CD TIFF is located D:\DOC_CD\DATA\2\5\21\
Step 4: it appears these are single page TIFF images instead of Multipage TIFFs. So each TIFF image will be named its page number (e.g. 00000001.TIF for page
one, 00000010.TIF for page 10)
Step 5: use Windows Explorer to open the CD and navigate to the TIFF image and open in AutoCAD

## Clark County Comprehensive Planning

Clark County Future Land Use geodatabase and legend (Landuse.mdb and CCLanduseLegend.pdf)
Excel Spreadsheet of Planned Land Use definitions: CCLandUseValueDefinitions2007.xls
22 standard Planned Land Use Categories - adopted by 5 areas (Enterprise, Northeast county, Spring Valley, Sunrise Manor and Winchester/Paradise)
1. AG - Agriculture
2. OL - Open Land
3. RR - Residential Rural - Up to 0.5 du/ac
4. RA - Residential Agricultural - Up to 1 du/ac
5. RNP - Rural Neighborhood Preservation - Up to 2 du/ac
6. RL - Residential Low - Up to 3.5 du/ac
7. RS - Residential Suburban - Up to 8 du/ac
8. RM - Residential Medium - From 3 to 14 du/ac
9. RH - Residential High - From 8 to 18 du/ac
10. RUC - Residential Urban Center - From 18 to 32 du/ac
11. RHRC - Residential High Rise Center - Greater than 32 du/ac
12. OP - Office Professional
13. CN - Commercial Neighborhood
14. CG - Commercial General
15. CT - Commercial General
16. BDRP - Business Design and Research Park
17. IND - Industrial
18. HI - Heavy Industrial
19. PF - Public Facility
20. MDP - Major Development Project
21. ROW - Right of Way
Abbreviations: du = Dwelling Units, ac = acres
Non-standard PLU types
(Once these are adopted they are expected to have the 21 standard categories - this is about a five year process)
Laughlin (in progress - projected adoption June 2007)
Lone Mountain (process to began June 2007)
Northwest County (in progress - projected adoption January 2008)
South County (in progress - projected adoption January 2008)
Summerlin South (process date to began unknown)
Whitney (in progress - projected adoption May 2007)
Eleven Planning Areas
Enterprise Planned Land Use - shapefiles ( entplu_p.dbf, entplu_p.prj, entplu_p.shp, entplu_p.shp.xml, entplu_p.shx ) metadata, PDF Map - entplu.pdf, ArcMap
layer file - EnterprisePlannedLanduse.lyr
Laughlin Planned Land Use - shapefiles ( lghlnplu_p.dbf, lghlnplu_p.prj, lghlnplu_p.shp, lghlnplu_p.shp.xml, lghlnplu_p.shx ) metadata
Lone Mountain Planned Land Use - shapefiles ( lm_plu_p.dbf, lm_plu_p.prj, lm_plu_p.shp, lm_plu_p.shp.xml, lm_plu_p.shx ) metadata
Mountains Edge Planned Land Use - shapefiles ( mtnedgeplu_p.dbf, mtnedgeplu_p.prj, mtnedgeplu_p.shp, mtnedgeplu_p.shp.xml, mtnedgeplu_p.shx ) metadata
North East County Planned Land Use - shapefiles (.dbf) includes Bunkerville, Glendale, Moapa, Moapa Valley and Overton. ( neplu_p.dbf, neplu_p.prj,
Northwest Planned Land Use - shapefiles (nwplu_p.dbf) includes Cold Creek, Corn Creek, Indian Springs, Mt Charleston, Kyle Canyon, Lee Canyon and
Mountain Springs. ( nwplu_p.dbf, nwplu_p.prj, nwplu_p.shp, nwplu_p.shp.xml, nwplu_p.shx ) metadata
South County Planned Land Use - shapefiles (scplu_p.dbf) includes Cal-Nev-Ari, Goodsprings, Jean, Primm, Sandy Valley, Searchlight, Sloan and Nelson (
scplu_p.dbf, scplu_p.prj, scplu_p.shp, scplu_p.shp.xml, scplu_p.shx ) metadata
Spring Valley Planned Land Use - shapefiles ( spvplu_p.dbf, spvplu_p.prj, spvplu_p.shp, spvplu_p.shp.xml, spvplu_p.shx ) metadata, ArcMap layer file SpringValleyPlannedLanduse.lyr
Sunrise Manor Planned Land Use - shapefiles ( srmplu_p.dbf, srmplu_p.prj, srmplu_p.shp, srmplu_p.shp.xml, srmplu_p.shx ) metadata
Summerlin South Planned Land Use - shapefiles ( sum_plu_p.dbf, sum_plu_p.prj, sum_plu_p.shp, sum_plu_p.shp.xml, sum_plu_p.shx ) metadata
Whitney Planned Land Use - shapefiles ( wh_plu_p.dbf, wh_plu_p.prj, wh_plu_p.shp, wh_plu_p.shp.xml, wh_plu_p.shx ) metadata
Winchester/Paradise Planned Land Use - shapefiles ( wpplu_p.dbf, wpplu_p.prj, wpplu_p.shp, wpplu_p.shp.xml, wpplu_p.shx ) metadata

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

316 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

Misc Layers
Lone Mountain Overlay Planned Land Use - shapefiles ( lmpluoverlay_p.dbf, lmpluoverlay_p.prj, lmpluoverlay_p.shp, lmpluoverlay_p.shp.xml,
lmpluoverlay_p.shx )
Planned Land Use Details - shapefiles ( pludetails_p.dbf, pludetails_p.prj, pludetails_p.shp, pludetails_p.shp.xml, pludetails_p.shx )
Rural Planned Land Use - shapefiles ( rural_plu_p.dbf, rural_plu_p.prj, rural_plu_p.shp, rural_plu_p.shp.xml, rural_plu_p.shx )
Summerlin South Concept Planned Land Use - shapefiles ( sumconceptplu_p.dbf, sumconceptplu_p.prj, sumconceptplu_p.shp, sumconceptplu_p.shp.xml,
sumconceptplu_p.shx )
500 S Grand Central Pkwy
PO Box 551741
Las Vegas NV 89155-1741
Anthony "Tony" Azua, Senior GIS Analyst, Clark County Comprehensive Planning, Voice: 702-455-2027, Email: aaz@co.clark.nv.us - Maintains the County Future
Land Use GIS layer.
Cherie Garrity, Planner, email: czg@co.clark.nv.us, voice: 455-5766
Ron Gregory, Federal Lands Coordinator, email: rgy@co.clark.nv.us, voice: 455-3121, fax: 385-8940

## City of North Las Vegas

Utilities Department (Water and Sewer, not Storm Drains)
Call Before You Dig - Line Locator
Bryan Bailey, email: baileyb@cityofnorthlasvegas.com, voice: 702-633-1275
Only mark the main water and sewer lines. The laterals are not marked, but typically the lateral is perpendicular from the main line to the water meter box or
to the "S" mark on the top of curb for sewer.
Sewer Line Easements
APN 140-04-201-005: 13'x10' DCDA Easement - DOC022409.pdf
Shapefile of Storm Drains: CNLV_SD.shx CNLV_SD.dbf CNLV_SD.prj CNLV_SD.sbn CNLV_SD.sbx CNLV_SD.shp CNLV_SD.shp.xml according to Xiaohui Yu has
not been updated since early 2006.
Xiaohui Yu
City of North Las Vegas - Utilities Department, Engineering Services Division
Voice: 702-633-1347, Fax: 702-649-9784
Email: xiaohuiy@ci.north-las-vegas.nv.us
Wayne Lindsay, Utilities Support Supervisor
City of North Las Vegas - Utilities Department
2829 Fort Sumter Drive
North Las Vegas NV 89030
Email: lindsayw@ci.north-las-vegas.nv.us
Voice: 702-633-1893
Danielle Neath, email: neath@cityofnorthlasvegas.com - Working on converting the AutoCAD templates into Civil 3D styles
David Bereskin, PE - Utilities Director, Voice: 702-633-1275, Email: bereskind@cityofnorthlasvegas.com
Traffic Studies
Clete Kus, voice: 702-633-1235, fax: 702-633-1204, email: kusc@cityofnorthlasvegas.com
Dave Smith, Assistant Engineer, voice: 702-633-2770, fax: 702-649-4696, email: smithdr@cityofnorthlasvegas.com
2266 Civic Center Dr
North Las Vegas NV 89030
Departmart Main: 702-633-1204
Department of Public Works - Survey Division
North Las Vegas Benchmark Book ( NVBenchmarks.xls or NVBenchmarks.zip NVBenchmarks.xls or NVBenchmarks.zip) Note, NLV benchmarks are published
with xy coordinates (i.e. Nevada Stateplane, units meters). Northing Y, Easting X and Elevation Z are in units of meters. Conversion factor: 3937 ft = 1200 m
Discussion on how to import this benchmark spreadsheet, see Create x,y,z features in ArcCatalog
Contacts
Dwayne Price, voice: 702-633-1309, email: priced@cityofnorthlasvegas.com
Bart Dalton, PLS, WRS - North Las Vegas City Surveyor, voice: 702-633-1308, fax: 702-633-1909, email: daltonb@cityofnorthlasvegas.com
Gary Hancock, email: hancockg@cityofnorthlasvegas.com
50 E. Brooks Ave
North Las Vegas NV 89030
Drainage Study Point and Polygon Layer
Dark Blue Icon - Drainage Study
Red Icon - Drainage Study Update and Update number
Yellow Icon - Drainage Study Concurrence
Light Blue Icon - FEMA LOMR, CLOMR, or LOMA
Green Icon - Single Family Residences (studies and plans)
Color of polygon outline is same as metadata point layer
Map Tips
Permit# also known as Hansen#
Project Name
APN
Engineer
Drainage Study Status (e.g. Approved)
Drainage Study Approval date
Offsite Improvement Plans Permit/Hansen#
KMZ file Created by Josh Poulson, Engineering Technician III, Development and Flood Control, voice: 702-669-3350, email: poulsonj@cityofnorthlasvegas.com

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

317 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Building Safety - Records Division

Jeanette Andrews, Voice: 702-633-1576, Fax: 702-642-8064, email: andrewsj@cityofnorthlasvegas.com
GIS Staff
Real Property
Manager - Randy Cagle, retired, now works with Nevada Power
Soloman Pulapkura - pulapkuras@cityofnorthlasvegas.com, 702-633-1218
Maintains the easement GIS layer using the COGO toolbar in ArcMap
Karla Chavez - ChavezK@cityofnorthlasvegas.com, 702-633-2773
Jared Judd - JuddJ@cityofnorthlasvegas.com, work: 702-633-2040
City of North Las Vegas Records
City Clerk maintains the KoVIS records system. Jennifer Snyder (702-633-1036), snyderj@cityofnorthlasvegas.com, 2200 Civic Center Dr, Fax: 649-3846.
KoVIS Applications
PW Development & Flood - contains the Drainage Studies, Traffic Studies, and Utility Plans

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

318 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

PW Eng Serv Docs & Plans - contains the Capital Improvement Projects

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

319 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Clark County Public Works

Traffic Division - Paul Judd is acting Manager
Signalized Intersection in Clark County: SignalizedIntersections.mdb
Harry Hughes, Line Locator, email: hhughes@co.clark.nv.us, voice: 702-455-7544. Supervisor is Marvin Hoggard
Call Before You Dig - Harry only marks street lights, traffic signals and FAST Interconnect. No one marks storm drains, survey benchmarks, survey monuments,
and sewer septic tanks.
GIS Inventory - Real Property created a database of service pedistals for all county facilities. Idea is to use this layer to building the street light circuit capacity
layer. Asked Kety Allred with Rea Property on getting the database. According to Paul Judd, the GPS coordinates has some conversion issues and the Admin GIS
staff cannot import it into ArcMap.
Construction Management
Subset of sidewalk ramps in Clark County: swramps.dbf
Geodatabase of some sidewalk ramps: SidewalkRamps2003.mdb
Design
Clark County Public Works - Design Division: Wendy Fenner (Email: wfenner@co.clark.nv.us, voice: 702-455-6071) and Raymond Falcon (Email:
rfalcon@co.clark.nv.us, voice: 702-455-6086)
List of 5 year no-cut streets (pdf)
Maintains the 5 year no-cut streets GIS layer. Note Milan Rezabek (email: mrezabek@co.clark.nv.us) wrote the 5-year no-cut policy and has it part of Title 30.
Requirements include 180 days notification letters to utilities and owners have it recorded on their title. It appears the other entities and NDOT do not have a
written code, just an internal policy not allowing an open cut.
Geodatabase of Storm Drains: StormDrains.mdb
Contacts
Jim Houser (email: jah@co.clark.nv.us)
Mary Jo Crist (Email: c4110mjc@co.clark.nv.us, voice: 702-455-6027)
Hui Shen, Senior GIS Analyst (Email: shenh@co.clark.nv.us, voice: 702-455-2763)
County Surveyor
County Surveyor's Benchmark Book ( Benchmarks-2003.pdf)
ClarkCountyBenchmarks.xls
All plans require NAVD88 Datum, see letters from Brett Lane, CCPW County Surveyor, CCPWNAVD88letter1.jpg, CCPWNAVD88letter2.jpg, and
CCPWNAVD88letter3.jpg
Survey - Traverse Computation Sheet (pdf)
Record of Survey
Governed by NRS 625.340 thru 625.380
only required by CCDS on Las Vegas Blvd because street centerline is unknown.
According to Eric Denman, a spatial index of all records of survey does NOT exist. NRS 625.370 requires the county recorder to keep indexes based
on name of tract, subdivision or United States land subdivision
BLM Patent Easements Layer
BLM General Land Office Records
Search based on Township, Range and Section

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

320 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

## Assessor ADTYPE field from AOEXTRACT table

blank 28,901 records in the parcel database ~ 4%
LD = Land Division. 3,362 records in the parcel database ~ 0.5%
MF = Miscellaneous File. 70 records in the parcel database <0.1%
MS = Mineral Survey. 391 records in the parcel database <0.1%
PB = Plat Book (created using a Final Map or Subdivision map) 653,303 records in the parcel database ~ 92%
PM = Parcel Map (create 4 lots or less) 21,088 records in the parcel database ~ 3%
SF = Survey File (a.k.a. Record of Survey) 595 records in the parcel database <0.1%
total records in Assessor Parcel database = 707,710 (as of June 2007)
Records of Survey
Clark County Intranet: http://ccaodev1m/AODocViewer/default.htm
Map Search Types (also need the Map File and Map Page)
PL = Plats - Subdivision
PM = Parcel Maps
SV = Survey Files (a.k.a. Records of Survey)
LD = Land Division
LG = Local Government
MI = Misc Maps
MM = Mining Maps
Search Documents from 1970 to Current based on Deed (e.g. 20040102:00161 or 871:830007) or Assessor Base Map (e.g. 140-20-1 which is the Book
number-140, Section-20 and Map-2)
http://gisgate.co.clark.nv.us/assessor/webimages/default.asp?appID=1&txtdocNum=20040123:02257
Basis of Bearing
defined as the bearing in degrees, minutes and seconds, or equivalent, of a line between two (2) monuments or corners which serves as the reference
bearing for all other lines on the survey
County Engineers Association of California's Guide to the Preparation of Records of Survey The bearings shown on the map should be defined in
terms of one of the following:
A line appearing on an existing map of record
A solar or stellar observation
The California Coordinate System
Basis of Bearing is required on all subdivision maps (see Clark County Title 30.28.130.a.4.J.v)
Survey Contacts
Contact Jimmy Marlett, Voice: 455-0645, email: jmx@co.clark.nv.us
Antonio "Tony" Papazian, Plan Checker II, Clark County Department of Public Works County Surveyor's Division. Address: 500 S Grand Central
Pkwy, Las Vegas NV 89105. Voice: 702-455-6150, Email: papazian@co.clark.nv.us, Fax: 702-382-0849. Can assist in finding out if a BLM patent
easement exists on a parcel.
Tools of the Surveyor
Determine land ownership boundaries
Tool - Record of Survey (a.k.a. Survey File)
Divide land
Tool - Plat Book (a.k.a. Final Map, Subdivision Map)
Tool - Parcel Map (4 lots or less)
Tool - Land Division (no longer used, done in rural areas to divide land by aliquot parts)

## City of Las Vegas

Neighborhood Services
Contacts
Jason Lewis, GIS Analyst II, voice: 702-229-2128, email: jlewis@lasvegasnevada.gov
ArcIMS Neighborhood Initiatives Division Interactive Map
HOA shapefile: neighareas.zip
NTYPE field definitions
CA = Community Association
HOA = Home Owners Association
LMA = Landscape Maintenance Association
NA = Neighborhood Association
NCG = Neighborhood Coalition Group
NW = Neighborhood Watch
RC = Resident Council
Add a new field: NDESC with type Text, Length 50
Example Field Calculator - VBA Script code
Dim s as String
If [NTYPE] LIKE "BA" Then
s = "Board Association"
ElseIf [NTYPE] LIKE "CA" Then
s = "Community Association"
ElseIf [NTYPE] LIKE "HOA" Then
s = "Home Owners Association"
ElseIf [NTYPE] LIKE "LMA" Then
s = "Landscape Maintenance Association"
ElseIf [NTYPE] LIKE "NA" Then
s = "Neighborhood Association"
ElseIf [NTYPE] LIKE "NCG" Then
s = "Neighborhood Community Group"
ElseIf [NTYPE] LIKE "NW" Then

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

321 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

s = "Neighborhood Watch"
ElseIf [NTYPE] LIKE "RC" Then
s = "Resident Council"
Else
s = [NTYPE]
End If

Department of Public Works - Engineering and Planning Division, Right of Way Section
maintains the Easement GIS layer
easement layer only consists of public easements granted to the city, does NOT contain utility easements granted to other entities such as Nevada Power, Cox
Cable, Southwest Gas, Embarq, etc.
easement layer is missing most easements granted by plats, parcel maps and separate documents prior to 2003.
easements in CLV's GIS are predominantly from separate documents (Grant Deeds, etc.) and not from Parcel Maps or Plats
Type of Easement: Drainage, Pedestrian, Roadway, and Sewer
Department of Public Works - Flood Control
Oh Sang Kwon, PE, voice: 702-229-1815, Email: okwon@lasvegasnevada.gov does the drainage study reviews for the City
Traffic Studies
Rick Schroder, voice: 702-229-6371
Department of Public Works - Survey Division, voice: 229-6217
Alan Riekki, City Surveyor, email: ariekki@lasvegasnevada.gov
Survey Benchmarks
Took pictures of the benchmarks and have GPS coordinates based on the digital camera position, as of June 2007, working on a project to create a GIS layer of the
benchmarks.
Fire and Rescue Communications Division
500 N Casino Center
Las Vegas NV 89101
Ervin Kral, GIS Analyst, email: ekral@lasvegasnevada.gov, voice: 229-0062, fax: 383-6956
Troy Plocus, email: tplocus@lasvegasnevada.gov, voice: 229-0234. Maintains the building footprint layer for major structures outside the City of Las Vegas. Mark
House (229-4737, mhouse@lasvegasnevada.gov) with Las Vegas Current Planning maintains the building footprints for the City of Las Vegas. Also, Jorge works
with Mark House on maintaining the layer.
Building Footprints
CLVBuildingFootprints.zip
Obtained from Bob Agnew via ftp.lasvegasnevada.gov/Outbound/CLVBuildingFootprints/
According to Bob Agnew "CAPACITY is the number of living units in residential buildings, either single-family homes, apartment complexes or
condo/town home complexes."
Building Footprints contained in the LANDUSE shapefile for the entire City of Las Vegas.
C:\gisdata\crclv\shapefil\landuse.shp - footprint with the LUCODE
C:\gisdata\crclv\shapefil\plu.shp - is basically the parcel layer with the PLUCODE
Zip of landuse and plu shapefiles
Smaller Building Footprint shapefile of just the Strip
Troy Plocus Footprint data are based on the 'as submitted', which may have some discrepancy from what is actually build in the field.
example ArcInfo coverage which has some building footprints (C:\gisdata\crfire\source\fire-lib\landuse-178\lu3228)
the LandUse polygon layer which contains the Building Footprints does NOT contain elevation data
CC_BLDG_FOOTPRINTS.ZIP
Google Earth display of the Building Footprints with height of building representing the CAPACITY field

City of Las Vegas Captial Improvements - Project Listing Report for ACEC
ProjectListing-ACEC_April09.pdf
ProjectListing-ACEC_March09.pdf
ProjectListing-ACEC_Feb09.pdf
Utility Collection System - Sewer
John Day, Engineering Project Manager. Voice: 702-229-4864, Email: jday@lasvegasnevada.gov Purchased the 2006 5 foot topo layer created by Leo with
AeroTech. Layer name is CLV_CONTOURS - 2006. As of 29 Sept 2007 - Bob Agnew is still waiting on the approval from John Day to release the contours to the
County.
GIS
Easement Layer
EasementLV.mdb

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

322 of 378

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

CLV_Sewer_Easements_03052009.zip - includes sewer lines but there is a problem with the export of the easement layer, missing some time stamp .dll
Shapefile
rw_easements.zip
rw_rightofway.zip
rw_vacations.zip
Metadata for lookup tables/attribute domains RW_METADATAorg.xls, this revised spreadsheet has cleaned up the format to make it easier to import as a table in
#-Doc_type1
Code

Description

ABAND

ABANDONMENT

AGRE

AGREEMENT

ANNEX

ANNEXATION ORDINANCE

BILL

## BLMRPPL RECREATION OR PUBLIC PURPOSES LEASE (BLM)

BLMRWG RIGHT OF WAY GRANT(BLM)
BLMTUP TEMPORARY USE PERMIT(BLM)
CERT

CERTIFICATE OF AMENDENT

DEED

DEDICATION DEED

DU

EASE

EASEMENT

EXEC

EXECUTOR'S DEED

FOC

## FINAL ORDER OF CONDEMNATION

GBSD

GRANT,BARGAIN,SALE,DEED

GD

GRANT DEED

JUDG

LD

LAND DIVISION

LEASE

LEASE

LP

MISC

MISCELLANEOUS

ORD

ORDINANCE

PATN

LAND PATENT

PB

PM

PARCEL MAP

QC

REL

RES

RESOLUTION

REV

REVERSIONARY

RS

RWG

## RIGHT OF WAY GRANT (EASEMENT)

TTD

TRUSTEE'S DEED

VAC

ORDER OF VACATION

WD

WARRANTY DEED
#-DOC_TYPE

Code
10

Description
Annexation

349

311

352

83

68

Decision

63

Declaration

55

Deed

107

Dismissal

76

Easement

14

Interest

109

Judgment

123

Lease

144

Letter

132

Lien

142

Lis Pendens

150

## Local Government Plat

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

323 of 378

191

Miscellaneous

183

Miscellaneous Map

187

Order

189

Ordinance

149

Parcel Map

64

Patent Deed

190

Permit

151

Plat

205

Quiet Title

211

Resolution

148

## Reversionary Parcel Map

179

Reversionary Plat

152

Survey

57

Tax Deed

58

Trustee Deed

280

Vacation

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

#-EASETYPE
Code

Description:

Access

Drainage

Traffic Facility

Pedestrian access

Power line

Gas line

Other utility

10

Vacation

11

Sewer

12

Trail

13

Patent

14

15

Ingress / Egress

16

Multuple

99

Other
#-ENTITTY

Code: Description:
0

Public

Private

BLM

NDOT

BuRec

99

Other
#-PRI_USE
Code:

Description

DRAINAGE

Drainage

FLOOD

MISC

Misc. easement

ROW

## Dedicated and fee owned roads

SEWER

Sewer easement

TRAFFIC

Traffic easement

TRAIL

Trail easement

VACATION

Other areas

#1-PCLQA
Spatial Digit

Definition

5/30/2013 10:10 PM

## CEE 468/668 GIS Applications in Civil Engineering

324 of 378

Reserved

Control points

Plats

.875

1.708333333

3.375

6.708333333

1:24000

1:50000

>1:100000

http://faculty.unlv.edu/jensen/CEE_468/cee468latest.htm

#-PCLQA
PEQA Quality Assurance Quality Rating System
Spatial Digit

Definition

Source Digit

Definition

NA

Reserved

Control Point

Design Drawing 2

0.875

1.708333333

3.375

6.708333333

1:24000

1:50000

Reserved

.1:50000

## COGO'd from recorded deed/plat

CCAO easement layer

#-SEC_USE
Code:

Description:

99

98

97

96

## Dedicated and fee owned flood channels

95

90

Other areas
#-MAINT

Code: Description:
0

Public

Private
#-ACQTYPE

Code: Description:
0

Dedicated

Purchased

Granted

Reserved

99

Other

Zone

R,G,B

## U(ROW) U(DR) U(GC) U(L)

U(LI/R U(M) U(ML) U(O)
U(PCD) U(PF) U(PROS U(R)
0,255,0
U(RC) U(RE) U(RNP) U(ROW)
U(SC) U(TC) U(TND)
R-A

255,239,214

R-E

0,130,0

R-D

194,252,255

## R-PD1 R-PD2 R-PD3 R-PD4

R-PD5 R-PD6 R-PD7 R-PD8
R-PD9 R-PD10 R-PD11 R-PD12
R-PD13 R-PD14 R-PD15
2